JP7476473B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

In general, pachinko machines obtain a random number for a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and temporarily store this as an activation reserved ball up to a specified upper limit. Each time a predetermined starting condition is met, these activation reserved balls are consumed one by one in sequence, and a hit/miss determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been reached. If the hit/miss determination results in a jackpot, a series of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a predetermined winning pattern, thereby completing a special game in which the jackpot hole, which is normally closed, is opened.

This type of pachinko game machine is known to have a variation effect in which decorative symbols are displayed in a varying manner, and a preview effect that suggests a high probability of transitioning to a special game in conjunction with the varying display of the decorative symbols (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-138834 A

There are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, so to differentiate this machine from the conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of these problems, and aims to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a start hole provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, a win/loss determination means for executing a win / loss determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the start hole, a special symbol display device for displaying a special symbol showing the result of the win/loss determination in a variable and stationary manner, a big prize hole provided in the game area and opened in response to the result of the win/ loss determination to allow the game ball to enter, and a special game device for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big prize hole when the result of the win / loss determination is a big win. The game machine is provided with a technique execution means and a performance display device on which a performance display is displayed, and has an operation means operable by a player, the performance display device is capable of variably displaying and stopping displaying decorative patterns which show the result of the win/loss determination in a performance manner, the operation means is configured to be capable of executing an operation means operation in which the operation means operates, the operation means operation is configured to suggest or notify that the expectation of execution of the special game is relatively high by executing the operation means operation, and when the operation means operation is executed, a specific performance associated with the execution of the operation means operation is configured to be executed, and the special game machine is configured to execute a specific performance associated with the execution of the operation means operation .... In one variation display of the patterns, a tentative combination of the decorative patterns is displayed before the special patterns are fixed and stopped, and the tentative combinations of the decorative patterns have at least a first combination and a second combination. Whether the first combination or the second combination is displayed as a tentative combination of the decorative patterns in the variation display of the special patterns, a first specific performance accompanied by an operation of the operating means is executed at a timing before the first combination or the second combination is displayed as a tentative combination of the decorative patterns. On the other hand, in the variation display of the special patterns, when the first combination is displayed as a tentative combination of the decorative patterns, a second specific performance accompanied by an operation of the operating means is executed at a timing before the first combination is displayed as a tentative combination of the decorative patterns and at a timing after the execution timing of the first specific performance, and when the second combination is displayed as a tentative combination of the decorative patterns, a second specific performance accompanied by an operation of the operating means is executed at a timing before the second combination is displayed as a tentative combination of the decorative patterns . the second specific effect is not executed at a timing after the execution timing of the first specific effect, when the second combination is displayed as a provisional combination of the decorative patterns in the variable display of the special symbols, and even when the second specific effect is not executed, a third specific effect involving an operation of the operating means can be executed at a timing after the second combination is displayed as the provisional combination of the decorative patterns, the game has an operation effective period during which a player operation is effective, and has at least a first promotion effect and a second promotion effect as promotion effects for encouraging the player operation, the game has a first presentation pattern in which the first promotion effect is switched to a predetermined presentation if the player operates during the operation effective period when the first promotion effect is displayed, and has a second presentation pattern in which the second promotion effect is switched to the predetermined presentation if the player operates during the operation effective period when the second promotion effect is displayed, and when a transition is made to a development presentation after a reach is established, the game has a first presentation pattern in which the player operates during the operation effective period when the first promotion effect is displayed before the reach is established , and The display of the first prompting effect can be erased when an operator operates the display, and the second prompting effect can be displayed thereafter . The effective operation period can be started when the second prompting effect is displayed during the development effect. The expectation of transition to the special game is relatively higher when the period from the end of the display of the first prompting effect to the start of the effective operation period when the second prompting effect is displayed is longer than when the period is short. The operation means operation is easier to execute in a presentation pattern in which the first prompting effect is displayed and the second prompting effect is displayed, than in a presentation pattern in which the first prompting effect is displayed and the second prompting effect is not displayed. The display mode of the first prompting effect and the display mode of the second prompting effect are different. A special effect which is an effect leading to the display of the prompting effect can be executed at a timing prior to the timing at which the display of the prompting effect is executed. The specific special effect is easier to execute when the second prompting effect is displayed than when the first prompting effect is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present invention makes it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. A control block diagram of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. This is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the performance control board of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. A schematic diagram showing a special pattern winning/losing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special pattern jackpot pattern table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special pattern jackpot pattern table. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern variation pattern table 1. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern variation pattern table 2. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern variation pattern table 3. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern attributes of decorative patterns. FIG. This is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the type of jackpot, the jackpot pattern combination of decorative patterns, and the performance pattern during the jackpot. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Choju jackpot presentation. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Kotobuki jackpot A presentation. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Kotobuki jackpot B performance. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Kidai Hit A performance. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Happy Hit B performance. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen during a round of play. A conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effects. A schematic diagram showing an example of an over winning presentation. A schematic diagram showing an example of a large prize slot count-up presentation. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a bonus prize presentation. FIG. A schematic diagram showing an example of a general winning slot count-up presentation. This is a time chart explaining the priority of the large prize slot count-up performance. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram for explaining an emphasis effect. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating types of errors in a gaming machine. This is a time chart to explain whether or not the over prize effect will be executed at the end of a jackpot. This is a time chart to explain whether or not a bonus prize-winning effect will be executed at the end of a jackpot. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. 11 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect are executed. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen. This is a time chart explaining the overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production. This is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a specified period. This is a time chart of the winning ball signal when a game ball enters a general winning port. This is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the big prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control side. This is a flowchart showing the control processing following Figure 35 of the main processing on the main control side. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a start port monitoring control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start monitoring and control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change start monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose special symbol control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special pattern variation. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing performed while a special symbol stop symbol is being displayed. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric feature control process. This is a flowchart showing the control processing following Figure 47 of the special electric feature control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a reset start process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the performance control side. 13 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining the contents of a winning presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control command reception interrupt process. A flowchart showing the performance control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an image control command transmission interrupt process. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a special pattern winning/losing lottery table in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a special pattern jackpot pattern table in the second embodiment. A transition diagram of the game state and presentation mode in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a game status setting table of the second embodiment. 13 is a comparison table of the variable times of special symbols in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining the normal pattern lottery in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous fluctuation processing (fluctuation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the second embodiment. A front view of a pachinko game machine related to a modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view showing the main control display device of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an emphasis effect according to the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table according to the third embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the execution timing of emphasis effects, special effect displays, and specific sound effect outputs during a jackpot game in the third embodiment. A time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the jackpot end demo in the third embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the execution timing of highlighting effects, light emitting effects, and gimmick effects in the third embodiment. 13A is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role presentation during fluctuation in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role presentation during a jackpot in the third embodiment. 13A is a time chart when the execution of the emphasis effect of the third embodiment is restricted, and FIG. 13B is a time chart when the execution of the over winning effect of the third embodiment is restricted. This is a time chart showing when a power outage occurs while the jackpot type display is being executed in the third embodiment. 13 is a time chart when a power outage occurs during execution of the round display in the third embodiment. A control block diagram showing the control configuration of a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. A functional block diagram of the main control board and the performance control board of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram showing a power-on transition mode control unit and a performance information management unit according to a fourth embodiment. A front view showing the main control board unit of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a performance display monitor according to a fourth embodiment. A diagram showing basic game specifications of the fourth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a special pattern winning/losing lottery table in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a first special pattern jackpot pattern table of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a second special pattern jackpot pattern table of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a power-on operation and a transition mode according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display of setting values on a performance display monitor according to a fourth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the notification content in a setting change mode in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the notification content in a setting check mode in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the memory area of the RAM of the main control board of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the performance information memory area of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of displaying base values for each section in the fourth embodiment; 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display contents displayed in the discrimination segment and the ratio segment for each management section (measurement section) in the fourth embodiment. This is a time chart when the first hit occurs in the first section A when the power is turned on in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage in the fourth embodiment is a special game state, and (B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage in the fourth embodiment is a normal game state. This is a time chart when a winning ball error occurs during a jackpot game. A front view of the game board of the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a sub-control display device of the fifth embodiment. An oblique view showing the performance button and cross key of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of button presentation in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing types of button effects in the fifth embodiment. FIG. A schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration effect α in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration effect β in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a second button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the second button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment (continuation of Figure 99). A schematic diagram showing an example of a third button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the third button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment (continuation of Figure 101). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an execution pattern table of the button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of an initialization operation process of a movable body according to a fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the flow of display screens displayed on the performance display device after the power of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is turned on. 13 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibration effect in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button performance in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a special effect presentation (effect collection presentation) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a modified example of the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button performance in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the second button performance in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display of a left-handed hit notification image in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart explaining the execution timing of the left hit notification display in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart showing what happens when a power outage occurs during execution of the left-hit notification display in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart used to explain the look-ahead performance after transitioning from a high base state to a low base state. A schematic diagram for explaining the pending image display area and the changing image display area in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the pending image and the changing image of the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image of the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing examples of hold change suggestion effects and hold change effects in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart when variable displays A and B are executed as the variable display of the first special pattern in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a case where the display of a sound adjustment image and the initialization operation of a movable body are executed simultaneously after the power is restored from a power outage in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A time chart showing the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable parts after power is restored in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment and the display content of the performance display device. A time chart showing the relationship between the performance operation (play piece performance) of the first movable plaything in the fifth embodiment and the display content of the performance display device. This shows the first presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before a button operation and (b) is an image after the button operation. This shows the second presentation of the operation promotion presentation in a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image before freezing, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image after freezing. 13 shows a second operation prompting effect of a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the freeze is released, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the button is operated. This shows various periods and states during the second performance of the operation promotion performance of a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in comparison with the first performance, where (a) is a timing chart of the first performance and (b) is a timing chart of the second performance. This shows a second presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before a button operation at the time of a reach, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image after the button operation. This shows the second effect of the operation promotion effect of a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image after freezing when a reach is reached, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image of a provocative effect when the reach is developed. This shows the second presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the freeze is released, and (b) is the image after the button is operated. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an operation promotion effect pattern table of a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.

[First embodiment]
The front and rear views of the pachinko game machine PM according to this embodiment are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, and the overall configuration of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to these figures. The pachinko game machine PM according to this embodiment is a model that combines two functions equivalent to conventional type 1 pachinko game machines, and is capable of developing a first game (a first special symbol game) and a second game (a second special symbol game).

<Basic structure of a pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko machine PM will be described with reference to Fig. 1. As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine PM (also simply called "game machine PM") has an outer frame 1, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame, and a front frame 2, which is a mounting frame that is also configured with a square frame size to match the outer frame 1, attached to the front of the opening, so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged on the left edge of the front of each other, and is always held in a closed state by engaging and connecting with the outer frame 1 using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided on the right edge of the front.

A square glass frame 5 that fits the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached, and is always kept in a closed state covering the front of the front frame 2 using a locking device 4. A game board 20 is set and held in the front frame 2 so that it can be detached, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 can be seen through the double-glazed glass of the glass frame 5, which is always kept closed.

On the front side of the glass frame 5, there is a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development status of the game, and a speaker 11 that generates sound effects according to the development status of the game. At the bottom of the glass frame 5, there are upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 8 and lower ball tray 9) that store game balls. At the front center of the upper ball tray 8, there is a performance button (performance switch) 15 that is pressed by the player, and at the front right side of the lower ball tray 9, there is a launch handle 12 that launches the game balls. For convenience, the operation input means for the performance will be referred to as the "performance button 15" below, but the performance button 15 in this example is used as a concept that includes all operation input means, such as an on/off button-type switch, a cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) that outputs according to the direction of the operation input, a tilt-operated lever-type switch, a rotary-operated dial switch, a proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches it, a touch sensor, a touch panel, etc.

The game board 20 is constructed based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using synthetic resin materials such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, etc. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA in which game balls can roll. In addition, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding game balls to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a ball return prevention valve 43 is disposed near the exit opening of the game ball in the guide passage (at the tip of the inner rail 42) to prevent the game balls released from the exit opening into the game area PA from returning back to the guide passage. In this play area PA, in addition to the windmill and numerous play nails, various winning ports such as a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, an operating gate 53, a big winning port 54, and general winning ports 61, 62, 63, and 64 are provided, as well as various display devices such as a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reserve lamp 73, a second special symbol reserve lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a normal symbol reserve lamp 76. A center ornament 21 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA, and the screen of the performance display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of this center ornament 21.

The game area PA is divided into a left area PA1, which is the area to the left of the center ornament 21 (the board area corresponding to left-handed play), and a right area PA2, which is the area to the right of the center ornament 21 (the board area corresponding to right-handed play), based on the center ornament 21 located approximately in the center. A top plate portion 22 that faces the outer rail 41 in the vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper part of the center ornament 21, and a communication passage 44 through which game balls can pass to the right area PA2 is formed between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the above-mentioned guide passage. In this embodiment, game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can mainly enter either the first start gate 51 or the general winning gates 61 to 63 located below the center ornament 21. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter either the operation gate 53, the general winning gate 64, the second start gate 52, or the large winning gate 54 located to the right of the center ornament 21. At the bottom of the game area PA, there is an outlet 29 that discharges game balls that do not enter the winning holes and roll down to the back side of the game board 20. Below, each component of the game board 20 will be explained in order.

The first start hole 51 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is equipped with a first start hole switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This first start hole 51 is a winning hole that is always open and faces upward, and is mainly capable of receiving game balls that flow down the left side area PA1 (game balls hit to the left). The entry of a game ball into the first start hole 51 triggers the drawing of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the special symbol that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as the "first special symbol."

The second starting hole 52 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is equipped with a second starting hole switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This second starting hole 51 is arranged in the right area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to right hitting, and is mainly capable of receiving game balls (game balls hit to the right) flowing down the right area PA2. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 52 triggers the selection of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the special symbol displayed as a variable or stationary display on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as the "second special symbol". This second starting hole 52 is equipped with a normal electric device 522, generally called an electric chute, and a normal electric device solenoid 523 for driving the normal electric device 522 to open and close. The normal electric device 522 is variable between an open state where the game ball can or easily enters and a closed state where the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the second starting hole 52. In other words, the normal electric device 522 is structured so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second starting hole 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and when it is opened at a predetermined opportunity (opportunity to win the normal pattern lottery) described later, the game ball becomes easy to enter. This normal electric device 522 is equipped with a movable member 524 that slides back and forth to open and close the second starting hole 52. The movable member 524 is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the board surface) between a closed position (protruding position) that closes the second starting hole 52 to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and an open position (retracted position) that opens the second starting hole 52 to make it possible or easy for the game ball to enter. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of at least one game ball in the front-rear direction and is formed to slope downward from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is closed), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guide path, and flows down the guide path from the right side to the left and falls from the left end of the normal electric role object 522.

The activation gate 53 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to normal symbol play, and is equipped with an activation gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of a game ball through the activation gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not the second start hole 52 is opened.

The large prize opening 54 is formed as a horizontally rectangular prize opening that is opened when the result of the lottery for the first or second special symbol is a big win or a small win. The large prize opening 54 is equipped with a large prize opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric device 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize opening solenoid 543 for driving the special electric device 542 to open and close. The special electric device 542 can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the large prize opening 54. In this example, the large prize opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 of the game area PA. Therefore, in special games (big win games, small win games), when a game ball is launched, it is easy to enter the large prize opening 54 by aiming at the right area PA2, i.e., hitting to the right.

The general winning openings 61-63 are arranged in the left side area PA1, which is the area of the board corresponding to left-handed hits, and game balls that flow down the left side area PA1 can enter the general winning openings. The general winning openings 61-63 are equipped with a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of game balls. From the standpoint of cost reduction, etc., this left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61-63, and is able to detect the entry of game balls into any of the general winning openings 61-63.

The general winning opening 64 is located in the right area PA2, which is the area of the board that corresponds to right-handed hits, and game balls that flow down the right area PA2 can enter the general winning opening 64. The general winning opening 64 is equipped with a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning openings 61-64 does not trigger the drawing of a lottery for a special or normal pattern, but it does trigger the acquisition of a prize ball, just like the other winning openings (excluding the operating gate 53).

The first special pattern display device 71 performs a varying display and a final display of the first special pattern when the game ball enters the first starting hole 51. This first special pattern display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the varying display of the first special pattern is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamps, and the first special pattern is finalized and displayed when the lamps stop blinking and switch to a lit display.

The second special pattern display device 72 performs a variable display and a final display of the second special pattern when the game ball enters the second starting hole 52. This second special pattern display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special pattern is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamps, and the second special pattern is finalized and displayed when the lamps stop blinking and switch to a lit display.

The first special symbol reserved lamp 73 and the second special symbol reserved lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of activated reserved balls (maximum of four for each) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are expressed by the lighting and blinking of the lamps. The number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol is a number related to a random number value obtained based on a ball entering the first start hole 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of a jackpot game, and indicates the number of times that the acquired random number value is reserved, that is, the number of times that the hit/miss judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit/miss judgment permission condition (the fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. Similarly, the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol is a number related to a random number value obtained based on a ball entering the second start hole 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of a jackpot game, and indicates the number of times that the acquired random number value is reserved, that is, the number of times that the hit/miss judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit/miss judgment permission condition (the fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value.

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and displays the normal symbol variations and confirmation. The normal symbol pending lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of these lamps that are lit corresponds to the number of pending normal symbol variations (the number of normal symbol variations that have not yet been executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, there is a round indicator 77 that displays the number of rounds (unit games) in the jackpot game (number of rounds: the number of times the special electric device 542 operates in succession).

The performance display device 70 mainly displays performance images including a decorative pattern change display that changes and stops in conjunction with the first or second special pattern, and a preview display that preliminarily suggests or notifies the expectation of a jackpot, and displays reserved balls corresponding to the first and second special patterns. Specifically, on the screen of the performance display device 70, there are provided a decorative pattern display area 700 where the decorative pattern change display and preview display are performed, a reserved image display area 710 where reserved images of the first and second special patterns are displayed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved lamp 73 and the second special pattern reserved lamp 74, and a changing image display area 720 where a changing image corresponding to the changing display is displayed. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the performance display device 70. The decorative pattern display section 700 has three display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that are variable display areas of the decorative patterns on a predetermined effective line (not shown), and the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display area Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display area Z2, and the right pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display area Z3 are stopped and displayed. The reserved image display section 710 displays a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern and a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence of the activated reserved ball of the special pattern (ball entry order), and a maximum of four reserved images of the first special pattern and a maximum of four reserved images of the second special pattern can be displayed. In addition, the variable image display area 720 displays a variable image (variable icon) corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

The center ornament 21 is installed around the performance display device 70 and has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of the performance screen, and decoration. This center ornament 21 is provided with a movable part 24 that executes performance operations according to the development status of the game. The movable part 24 is configured with a motor M (e.g., a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following explanation, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as the "performance lamp LP".

Next, referring to Figure 2, the basic structure of the rear side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described. On the rear side of the front frame 2, a rear set board 30 is based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 and having a window in the center that connects the front and rear, and is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached. A rear set cover 30C in the shape of a rectangular box with an open front is attached to this rear set board 30 in a removable manner, and is always arranged to cover the rear side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2 (as a result, the main control board 100, performance control board 200, and image control board 300 described later are covered by the rear set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 is provided with a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 that extends from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, a ball supply passage section 33 that connects to the right end of the tank rail 32 and extends downward, a prize ball payout unit 34 that pays out the game balls guided by the ball supply passage section 33, and a prize ball passage section 35 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball tray 6.

On the back side of the game board 10, there are attached a main control board 100 that controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a performance control board 200 that controls the overall performance, an image control board 300 that controls image display and sound effects according to the game development, etc. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, there are attached a payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of game balls, a power supply board 500 that receives power from the game facility and supplies power to various control boards and electric and electronic components, an external information terminal board 600 (see Figure 3) that outputs external information signals (external signals) to the outside of the game machine PM, etc. In addition, these control boards are arranged in a predetermined position on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a crimping structure and a sealing seal structure to prevent unauthorized modification. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko machine PM are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), allowing the pachinko machine PM to be configured for operation.

<Control configuration of pachinko game machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110, which is configured with a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and an I/O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device, and is configured so that the main CPU 101 executes main control related to the progress of the game according to the control program stored in the ROM 102. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main control board 100 is equipped with a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, a WDT circuit that resets the main CPU 101 when it malfunctions or goes out of control and returns it to a normal state, a CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and a random number generation circuit that operates as a system separate from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number), and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads out various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performs calculations based on detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board 500. In the event of a power outage, the backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and each register that was held at the time of the power outage, and when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

The main control board 100 is also electrically connected to the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big prize port switch 541, the left general prize port switch 611, the right general prize port switch 641, etc., and inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104. The main control board 100 is also electrically connected to the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol reserve lamp 73, the second special symbol reserve lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75, and the normal symbol reserve lamp 76, and is also electrically connected to the normal electric role solenoid 523 and the special electric role solenoid 543, and transmits control signals from the main CPU 101 to various display means and various solenoids via the I/O port circuit 104. The main control board 100 is also electrically connected to an external information terminal board 600, and transmits game information signals from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I/O port 104. This external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to external devices (such as a data display device or hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the game information signals transmitted from the main control board 100. The game information signals transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and are connected to enable communication in only one direction, from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, and various performance control commands are sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. The performance control board 200 cannot send data to the main control board 100, and cannot request the main control board 100 to send data.

The presentation control board 200 is equipped with a presentation control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210, which is configured with a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game presentation based on presentation control commands from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores presentation control programs and various data, a RAM 203 that functions as a work area and buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and an I/O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device, and the sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to game presentation according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, the presentation control board 200 is equipped with a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, a WDT circuit that resets the sub-main CPU 201 when it malfunctions or goes out of control, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, a serial communication circuit for inputting and outputting serial data, and the like, which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The performance control board 200 generates image control commands that instruct the image control board 300 on images and sounds, lamp control signals (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91, and drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, through performance control processing based on performance control commands from the main control board 100. The performance control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so that two-way communication is possible. Image control commands related to images and sounds are sent from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300, and in response, a response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command was successfully received is sent from the image control board 300 to the performance control board 200.

In addition, the performance control board 200 is electrically connected to the lamp connection board 91 equipped with a plurality of LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. In this example, the performance control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 adopt clock-synchronized serial communication, and the lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with a clock signal transmitted via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line for transmitting lamp data. The lamp connection board 91 has an LED driver built in that functions upon receiving a lamp control signal for driving the LEDs transmitted from the performance control board 200, and controls the lighting or extinguishing of the performance lamp LP by switching on/off a switch in the circuit based on this lamp control signal to supply or cut off a driving current to the performance lamp LP.

The performance control board 200 is electrically connected to multiple motor drivers 92, and transmits drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor drivers 92 to the motor drivers 92 via an I/O port circuit 204. The motor drivers 92 supply or cut off drive current to the stepping motors of each movable prop 24 by switching on/off switches in the circuit based on the drive control signals for prop driving transmitted from the performance control board 200, thereby controlling the operation of each movable prop 24. Note that a parallel communication method is used to transmit data to the motor drivers 92.

The image control board 300 is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310, which is configured with a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing related to image performance based on image control commands from the performance control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, a RAM 303 that functions as a work area or buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and an I/O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device, and the sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control related to image performance according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the image control board 300 is equipped with a VDP that generates image data according to the performance content based on a control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301, and a sound source IC that generates sound data according to the performance content based on a control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, processes the image data, and transmits the generated video signal (image data) to the performance display device. This VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM that is used to expand and process image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads the audio data stored in the audio ROM in response to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, synthesizes this data, and outputs the generated audio data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 for two-way communication, and executes control to drive the prize ball payout unit 34 to pay out prize balls based on a payout control command from the main control board 100, and executes control to launch game balls by synchronously driving the ball feed mechanism 13 and the launch mechanism 14 based on the amount of operation of the launch handle 12.

The power supply board 500, which is not shown in detail, is configured to include a normal power supply circuit for generating normal power used by each control board based on the primary power supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island, a backup power supply circuit for generating backup power, and a power interruption monitoring circuit for monitoring power interruption due to voltage drop, and supplies the power required for each control board and electronic/electrical components of the game equipment. A power switch for starting the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 500, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, a predetermined power is supplied from the normal power supply circuit of the power supply board 500 to each control board, etc. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been interrupted, and when a power interruption is detected, a power interruption signal (NMI signal) notifying the fact is transmitted to the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PM from the power supply device of the game island. Also, a RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power supply board 500 to erase the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and set the initial value when the power supply of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on. Note that the RAM clear switch may be configured to be connected to the main control board 100, for example, instead of the power supply board 500.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signal output by the external information terminal board 600 to an external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a jackpot signal, a winning streak signal, a pattern confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also called a prize ball information signal), a door frame opening signal, a security signal (also called a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection (ball entry time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. In addition, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display and a hall computer. The data display is a device that is installed on the top of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on the external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The gaming information displayed on this data display is useful information for the player to use when selecting a gaming machine. The hall computer is a device that compiles the operating status of each gaming machine (including this gaming machine PM) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the gaming parlor, and manages the operating status of each gaming machine. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without a data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko machines>
The pachinko game machine PM, which is constructed as described above, is provided for play with the outer frame 1 fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc., closed and locked. A game is started by storing game balls in the upper ball tray 8 and rotating the launch handle 12. When the launch handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are sent one by one to the launch mechanism 14 by the ball sending mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5, and are shot out by the launch mechanism 14 into the game area PA. At this time, when the launch handle 12 is operated less than a predetermined amount, the game balls do not reach the right area PA2, but flow down the left area PA1. In this left area PA1, a left flow path is formed for causing the game balls to flow down toward the first starting hole 51 and the general winning holes 61 to 63. On the other hand, when the launch handle 12 is operated more than a predetermined amount, the game balls reach the right area PA2 and flow down the right area PA2. In this right area PA2, a right flow path is formed for causing the game ball to flow down toward the actuation gate 53, the general winning port 64, the second starting port 52, and the large winning port 54. In this way, the game ball flowing down the left area PA1 or the right area PA2 can enter any one of the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, the actuation gate 53, the large winning port 54, or the general winning ports 61 to 64 according to the route allocated in the left area PA1 or the right area PA1, while if the ball does not enter any of the winning ports, it flows down to the out port 29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first start opening 51, the second start opening 52, the big prize opening 54, and the general prize openings 61-63, the prize ball according to the type of the winning opening is paid out to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening (referred to as the "unit prize ball number") is set as "4 balls" for the first start opening 51, "1 ball" for the second start opening 52, "3 balls" for the general prize openings 61-64, and "15 balls" for the big prize opening 54. Note that the unit prize ball number for each winning opening is not limited to the number exemplified in this embodiment, and other unit prize ball numbers may be applied. For example, the unit prize ball number for the first start opening 51 may be "1 ball" instead of "4 balls". Also, the number of second starting holes 52 may be "3" instead of "1". The number of general winning holes 61-64 may be "5" instead of "3". The number of large winning holes may be "10" instead of "15".

When a game ball enters the first start hole 51 or the second start hole 52, a random number value of a special symbol is obtained, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an activation reserved ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a condition for starting the variation of a special symbol described later) is established, a hit/miss judgment of the special symbol, a pattern judgment, and a variation pattern judgment are performed for the random number value of the first activation reserved ball, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device 70 in a variable manner. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed synchronously after the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a fixed manner indicating a jackpot, the game proceeds to a special game (jackpot game) that is more advantageous to the player than normal game. In each round of the jackpot game (unit game), an opening and closing operation is performed to open the jackpot opening 54 once or multiple times. When a specified number of game balls enter the jackpot opening 54 or the opening time of the jackpot opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the ongoing round of the game ends. Here, the stopping mode of the decorative symbol indicating a jackpot is, for example, a mode in which the types of three symbols match. In this embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are displayed in a fixed manner indicating a jackpot, multiple rounds of the game (unit game) are executed as the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined final number. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery transitions from a normal low probability state to a high probability state, so that a new jackpot (jackpot game) will occur relatively quickly. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be set to continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, the predetermined final number may be set to "10,000 times," which essentially corresponds to the number of times the display changes until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game has ended, a special symbol fluctuation time reduction function may be activated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol probability fluctuation function. When the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, increasing the number of special symbol draws per unit time (increasing the ease of winning a jackpot per unit time).

Furthermore, after the big win game is over, the electric chute support function (also simply called "electric support") may be activated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function. The electric chute support function is a state in which the ease of scoring into the second starting hole 52 is increased (also called the "electric support state" or "easy scoring state") by activating the normal symbol probability fluctuation function, normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and normal electric role 522 opening extension function. When the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the normal symbol win probability is higher than in the normal state. When the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shortened. When the normal electric role 522 opening extension function is activated, the normal electric role 522 opening time is extended more than in the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of times the normal symbols change per certain time period is more likely to be higher than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting hole 52 also increases, so the possibility of an increase in the number of balls entering the second starting hole 52 also increases. Therefore, by activating the electric chute support function, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting hole 52 during that period increase, making it possible to continue playing without losing much of the balls you have. In other words, the "base," which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired, becomes higher. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chute support function is activated is also referred to as the "high base state," and the state in which the electric chute support function is not activated is also referred to as the "low base state."

<Major functional configuration of a pachinko machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200) according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a functional block diagram of the game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200).

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a pre-determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, a special game control means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric role control means 160, a game state control means 165, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission/reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 100 is a functional representation of the main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, electronic circuits, and other hardware provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102, etc.

The ball entry determination means 110 determines whether a game ball has entered each entry port based on detection signals from the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large prize entry port switch 541, the general prize entry port switches 611 and 641, etc. When the ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of a game ball at the first start port switch 511, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "first start port entry command"), when it detects the entry of a game ball at the second start port switch 521, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "second start port entry command"), when it detects the passage of a game ball at the operating gate switch 531, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "operating gate entry command"), and when it detects the passage of a game ball at the large prize entry port switch 541, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "operating gate entry command"), and when it detects the passage of a game ball at the operating gate switch 531, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "operating gate entry command"), and when it detects the passage of a game ball at the large prize entry port switch 541, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "operating gate entry command"). If the left general prize gate switch 611 detects a game ball entering the main information storage means 180, a presentation control command indicating this is generated (referred to as a "large prize gate entry command"), if the left general prize gate switch 611 detects a game ball entering the main information storage means 180, a presentation control command indicating this is generated (referred to as a "left general prize gate entry command"), if the right general prize gate switch 611 detects a game ball entering the main information storage means 180, a presentation control command indicating this is generated (referred to as a "right general prize gate entry command"), and these are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The gaming lottery random number generating means 120 uses software to take in the built-in random numbers generated by the random number generating circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and adds the special symbol software random numbers described below to these to generate special symbol random numbers used in the lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol will be selected. The gaming lottery random number generating means 120 also includes random number counters for generating various software random numbers through program processing by the main CPU 101. These random number counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers in a software manner. These software random numbers include soft random numbers per special pattern which are added to the aforementioned built-in random number to generate winning random numbers, soft initial value random numbers per special pattern for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating the soft random numbers per special pattern is completed, special pattern stopping pattern random numbers used to determine the winning pattern (the combination of patterns that will activate the condition device) as the stopping pattern for the special pattern, special pattern stopping pattern initial value random numbers for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating the special pattern stopping pattern random numbers is completed, special pattern changing pattern random numbers for use in selecting the changing pattern of the special pattern, random numbers per ordinary pattern for use in drawing out the winning or losing results of ordinary patterns, initial value random numbers per ordinary pattern for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating the random numbers per ordinary pattern is completed, and ordinary pattern changing pattern random numbers for use in selecting the changing pattern of the ordinary pattern. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, add prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are updated using the remaining time of the interrupt period even when the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing).

The reservation control means 130 includes a special symbol reservation control means 131 and a normal symbol reservation control means 132.

The special symbol reservation control means 131 acquires the random number values for the special symbol game, such as the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol variation pattern, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 51 or the second starting hole 52, and manages the random number values as the operation reserved ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reservation control means 131 temporarily stores the operation reserved ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) respectively in the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form combined with the entry order of the reserved balls.

In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, reserved 1 memory area (first reserved storage area), reserved 2 memory area (second reserved storage area), reserved 3 memory area (third reserved storage area), and reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided in the order of balls entering each starting port 51, 52. Each reserved storage area can store a set of random numbers per special symbol, random numbers of symbols per special symbol, and random numbers of special symbol variation patterns as operating reserved ball information. The operating reserved ball information is stored in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area, while it is consumed in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area (first in, first out principle). In addition, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 memory area is consumed, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area is shifted to the memory area with the lower number, and the contents of the reserved 4 memory area are cleared to zero.

The special symbol reserved control means 131 also has a first special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. As an update process for the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol, the special symbol reserved control means 131 increments the corresponding counter by 1 each time an activated reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, and decrements the corresponding counter by 1 each time an activated reserved ball of the special symbol is consumed.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it generates a performance control command (referred to as a "symbol memory number command") including the update information for the number of reserved balls, and temporarily stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of activated reserved balls for the second special symbol. In principle, the activated reserved balls for each special symbol are consumed in the order in which they are entered, but in this embodiment, a so-called priority consumption is adopted in which the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol, so that while an activated reserved ball for the second special symbol game exists, the activated reserved ball for the second special symbol game is preferentially consumed regardless of the presence of an activated reserved ball for the first special symbol game. In addition, under this priority consumption, if an activated ball with a second special symbol is present, the consumed ball with the first special symbol will be put on hold even if an activated ball with a first special symbol is also present.

The normal symbol reserved control means 132 acquires the random numbers for the normal symbol game, which are the random numbers for the normal symbol game, the random number for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol change pattern, when the game ball enters the activation gate 53, and manages the random numbers as the activation reserved ball information for the normal symbol. The normal symbol reserved control means 132 temporarily stores the activation reserved ball information for the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form combined with the entry order of the reserved balls. The normal symbol reserved control means 132 also has a normal symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activation reserved balls for the normal symbol. The normal symbol reserved control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time an activation reserved ball for the normal symbol is acquired, and subtracts 1 from the corresponding counter each time an activation reserved ball for the normal symbol is consumed, as an update process for the reserved ball number for the activation normal symbol.

When the pre-judgment means 135 acquires an activated reserved ball of a special pattern at a predetermined pre-judgment timing, it executes a pre-judgment for a pre-reading notice on the activated reserved ball. An example of the above pre-judgment timing is when any of the following conditions is satisfied: (1) when an activated reserved ball of a first special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is not in operation, (2) when an activated reserved ball of a second special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is in operation, and (3) when an activated reserved ball of a second special pattern is acquired during a big win or a small win. Note that the above pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing may be changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, in a machine that has a starting port for a second special pattern that does not have a normal electric role and can accumulate eight reserved balls during normal times, the above (1) may be applied to not only the first special pattern but also the second special pattern, etc.), or a specification that performs a pre-judgment at any time without setting a pre-judgment timing may be adopted. Also, only the reserved balls of the special symbols that are the main players in the game in each game state may be subject to the pre-determination, and it is preferable that only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are subject to the pre-determination in the normal game state, and only the reserved balls of the second special symbol are subject to the pre-determination in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the reserved balls obtained this time from the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means 180, and sequentially performs the pre-determination of whether or not the winning is won (pre-determination of whether or not the winning is won), the pre-determination of the symbol (pre-determination of the symbol), and the pre-determination of the variation pattern (pre-determination of the variation pattern). Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the table for pre-judgment of win/loss, the table for pre-judgment of pattern, and the table for pre-judgment of variation pattern are each divided into a plurality of regions, each of which corresponds to the total number of random numbers, and a lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also called "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these regions (judgment number). Therefore, the result of this pre-judgment is equivalent to the result of the main lottery by the special pattern lottery processing means 140 described later (the result of the win/loss judgment, the result of the pattern judgment, and the result of the variation pattern judgment). Note that the table for pre-judgment of win/loss and the table for pre-judgment of pattern may be the same as the win/loss lottery table and the pattern lottery table used for the lottery when the variation actually starts. Here, since the game situation at the start of the variation (whether there is a probability change, whether there is a time reduction, whether there is a limited frequency period in which the special table is referenced, the number of reserved balls, etc.) may change, it is preferable to judge which of the plurality of regions the table for pre-judgment of variation pattern is included in, as described above. As a modified example, the random number value of a register or the like on the main CPU 101, which is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area, may be pre-determined. Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates performance control commands (referred to as "pre-determination commands") including information on the results of the pre-determination (pre-determination numbers), and stores them in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol hit/miss judgment means 141, a special symbol stop symbol judgment means 412, and a special symbol change pattern judgment means 143. When the first special symbol or second special symbol change start condition is established, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 reads out the special symbol hit random number value, the special symbol hit pattern random number value, and the special symbol change pattern random number value stored in the most advanced memory area (reservation 1 memory area) of the special symbol reserved storage area in the main information storage means 180, and stores them in the special symbol hit/miss judgment area, the special symbol pattern judgment area, and the special symbol change pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "the first special symbol change start condition is established" means that all of the following conditions are satisfied: (A1) a jackpot is not being hit, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, and (A3) an operating reserved ball for the first special symbol exists. In addition, "the condition for starting the change of the second special symbol is met" means that all of the following conditions are met: (B1) the jackpot is not being won, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, and (B3) an activation reserved ball for the second special symbol is present. When the condition for starting the change of the first special symbol and the condition for starting the change of the second special symbol are met at the same time, the condition for starting the change of the second special symbol is processed first under the priority digestion mentioned above.

The special symbol hit/miss determination means 141 reads out the special symbol hit random number value from the special symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit/miss determination, and decides whether the determination result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. The result of this hit/miss determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing, and then cleared when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol hit/miss determination means 141 holds a special symbol hit/miss lottery table that is referenced when making this hit/miss determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the special symbol winning/losing lottery table. FIG. 5(A) is referred to in a game state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 5(B) is referred to in a game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. In the special symbol winning/losing lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol winning random number and the result of the special symbol winning/losing judgment (jackpot, miss) are associated. As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol winning/losing judgment, in a game state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, a jackpot is determined when the special symbol winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in a game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, a jackpot is determined when the special symbol winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 1506". In other words, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability of winning a jackpot varies from a low probability of "1/319.69" to a high probability of "1/43.49". In this way, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the game state, but the probability of winning a jackpot is set equal for the first special symbol hit/miss judgment and the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. In this embodiment, a "small hit" is not set as a result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment, but a "small hit" may be set as a result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment. The probability of winning a small hit is set to the same probability regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 has a first special symbol jackpot symbol table and a second special symbol jackpot symbol table that are referenced when determining the jackpot symbol (jackpot type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a "specific jackpot" refers to a jackpot (variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and a "normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot (non-variable jackpot) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the probability change game state are set as multiple types of game states. As the types of game states, (1) a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol, the time-saving function of the special symbol, and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", (2) a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol is not activated and the time-saving function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "time-saving state" or a "time-saving game state", and (3) a state in which all functions are not activated is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, the "probability change game state" and the "time-saving game state" can be said to be game states that are more advantageous for the player than the "normal game state". Therefore, in the following, the probability change game state and the time-saving game state are also called "advantageous game states" as game states that are more advantageous for the player than the normal game state.

In addition, each game state can be expressed as (1) a high probability high base state for a high probability game state, (2) a time-saving game state as a low probability high base state, and (3) a normal game state as a low probability low base state, depending on the combination of the operation state of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern (high probability state/low probability state) and the operation state of the electric chute support function (high base state/low base state). In addition, a game state in which the operation state of the probability fluctuation function is a high probability state while the operation state of the electric chute support function is a low base state (one of the game states that is more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state") may be provided, and such a game state may be called a potential probability game state, and this potential probability game state may be expressed as a "high probability low base state". This potential probability game state ("high probability low base state") is a game state that is suitable for playing games mainly based on small wins, and details will be described later. Unless otherwise specified, these states (combination states of low probability/high probability and low base/high base) refer to the game state (state in which hit/miss judgment and variable display are possible) in a state other than a big win or a small win, but during a big win, it is a low probability low base state, and during a small win, it is the same game state as the game state when a small win is won. At this time, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function means that the fluctuation time of at least the special symbol that is the main subject of the game in that game state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is shortened. That is, in this embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, in a game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal game state), at least the first special symbol fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) is shortened, and in a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game (probability game state, potential game state, time-saving game state), at least the second special symbol fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) is shortened.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is determined according to (1) the type of jackpot (type of symbol group) and (2) the game state at the time of the jackpot win. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes) is set according to the number of times the probability change function of the special symbol is activated (referred to as the "probability change number"), the number of times the change time reduction function of the special symbol is activated (referred to as the "change time reduction number"), and the number of times the electric chute support function is activated (referred to as the "electric support number"). In this embodiment, the change time reduction function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function start and end their operation at the same time, so the "change time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same number (for this reason, in FIG. 6, the "change time reduction number" and the "electric support operation number" are written in the same column).

Figure 6 (A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support), number of specified rounds of jackpot play, and opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 for each round are associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stopped symbols is omitted). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group A)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10,000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10,000 times", and the electric support count "10,000 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This probability variable game state is set to a huge number of times "10,000 times" as the continuation count (probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count, electric support count) and it is probabilistically impossible (about 1/44 chance of winning) not to win a jackpot until the continuation count is reached, so it will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big prize winning port 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group B)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the probability change count is set to "0 times", the change time shortening count is set to "100 times", and the electric support count is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and displays reaches 100 times, or until the next jackpot occurs within these 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends because the number of times the special symbol changes and displays reaches 100 times, the game transitions to the normal game state from the next special symbol change and display. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

Figure 6 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation number of times, fluctuation time shortening number of times (electric support number of times), the specified number of rounds of jackpot play, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize entrance 54 in each round are respectively associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stopped symbols is omitted). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: pattern group C)
If the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10,000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10,000 times", and the electric support count "10,000 times" are set, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a probability variable game state. As mentioned above, this probability variable game state is set to a huge number of times "10,000 times" as the continuation count, and will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port 54 in one round game is "29 seconds". In addition, this 16R special jackpot may also be designed to be won by the first special symbol, in which case it is preferable to make it harder to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all jackpot symbols, and for the first special symbol, 16R special jackpots are 5%, 4R special jackpots are 60%, and 4R regular jackpots are 35%).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group D)
If the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the probability fluctuation count is set to "10,000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count is set to "10,000 times", and the electric support count is set to "10,000 times", and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a probability variable game state. As mentioned above, this probability variable game state is set to a huge number of times of "10,000 times" as the continuation count, and will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group E)
When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening count is set to "100 times", and the electric support count is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 100 times, or until the next jackpot occurs within these 100 times. If the time-saving game state ends when the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches 100 times, the game transitions to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R
There are three types of special jackpots: special jackpots (symbol groups A and D) and 4R normal jackpots (symbol groups B and E). The expected value of winning prize balls in the special game (referred to as the "expected value of winning prize balls") is 16R special jackpot > 4R special jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds in the special game when the first special symbol wins a jackpot is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds in the special game when the second special symbol wins a jackpot is "16 rounds". Therefore, when the second special symbol wins a jackpot, the player is more likely to move to a special game with a larger number of rounds than when the first special symbol wins, which is advantageous for the player in that more balls can be won. The actual number of rounds in this special game corresponds to the number of times the "long open round game" set for that special game is performed. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are "long opening round games"), but a "short opening round game" may be provided in which the maximum opening time of the large prize winning hole 54 is shortened to 2 seconds in a predetermined round or all rounds during the same jackpot game, so that even if the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same, a configuration may be adopted in which there are jackpots with different numbers of rounds in which balls can be effectively won (jackpots with different actual numbers of rounds). The long opening round game is a round game in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning hole 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls can be entered into the large prize winning hole 54 or is set so that it is easy to enter the balls. The short opening round game is a round game in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning hole 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls cannot be entered into the large prize winning hole 54 or is set so that it is difficult to enter the balls.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 holds multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables that are referenced when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 selects one of the multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables based on the current fluctuation pattern selection state. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. Multiple types of fluctuation patterns are specified in each fluctuation pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, the "selection rate" is written, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random number value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random number value belongs to. For each type of fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time is associated with each fluctuation pattern as the end condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and it is assumed that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is also executed at that fluctuation time.

Here, the variation pattern selection state will be explained. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a "normal selection state", a "time-saving selection state", and a "probable variation selection state" are set as multiple types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to a game state (normal game state) in which the probability variation function of the special pattern, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chute support function are not operating. The time-saving selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to a game state (time-saving game state) in which the probability variation function of the special pattern is not operating, but the variation time shortening function of the special pattern and the electric chute support function are operating. The probable variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to a game state (probable variation game state) in which the probability variation function of the special pattern, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chute support function are all operating.

As shown in Figures 7 to 9, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that even if the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is obtained, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation reserved balls described in each figure ("0 reserved", "1 to 2 reserved", "3 reserved")
means the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern (the number of reserved balls after the reserved balls are consumed) in the case of the lottery for the variation pattern of the first special pattern, and means the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (the number of reserved balls after the reserved balls are consumed) in the case of the lottery for the variation pattern of the second special pattern. This number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls that exist at the time of the lottery for the variation pattern (at the start of the variation display/after the reserved balls are consumed) (it does not include the reserved balls consumed by the variation display). In addition, as a modified example, the total number of reserved balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be used.

The decorative pattern change presentation that is performed in conjunction with the special pattern change display is determined based on the type of special pattern change pattern (change time), etc. Figures 7 to 9 also show, for reference, the content of the change presentation that is set for each change pattern (change time). In the figures, "ultra-shortened change", "shortened change", and "normal change" are presentations in which three rows of decorative patterns change and the display stops without ever going through a reach state, resulting in a so-called "miss" with a spread. Below, ultra-shortened change, shortened change, and normal change are collectively referred to as "non-reach miss". These non-reach miss types differ from each other in the change manner in that the change display stops in a shorter time for shortened change than for normal change, and for ultra-shortened change than for shortened change.

"N Reach (Normal Reach)" is a state in which the same decorative pattern stops in two of the three rows (usually the left and right rows) (reach state), and if a different decorative pattern stops in the remaining row (usually the middle row), it is a "miss", and if the same decorative pattern stops in the remaining row (usually the middle row), it is a "jackpot".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach effect that has a relatively higher chance of winning than the above-mentioned N Reach, and is an effect that develops from N Reach after a reach is established, and displays still images or videos such as animation or live action. In this embodiment, multiple types of SP Reach are prepared as types of SP Reach: A to C. SP Reach A is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is a normal state. SP Reach B is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is a time-saving game state. SP Reach C is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is a probability variable game state. In this embodiment, the variation pattern types are set so that the chance of winning increases in the order of "non-reach" < "N reach" < "SP reach". As a modified example, the content of the SP reach presentation may be the same in the normal state and the time-saving play state (SP reach A), and a different SP reach (SP reach C) may be used in the high probability play state. As another modified example, a variation pattern including a pseudo-consecutive may be prepared. A pseudo-consecutive is a presentation (pseudo-consecutive presentation, pseudo-variation presentation, pseudo-continuous variation presentation, re-variation presentation) that makes it look as if multiple variations have been performed by temporarily stopping (pseudo-stop, temporary stop) and re-variation displaying the decorative pattern during one variation display of the decorative pattern. In other words, a pseudo-consecutive is a presentation in which all three rows of decorative patterns start to vary or vary again, and then a pseudo-variation is temporarily or definitively stopped multiple times. The more the number of pseudo-consecutives (number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high probability of winning.

(Fluctuation pattern table 1)
7 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 1. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the current fluctuation pattern selection state is the normal selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is designed so that the table contents are different depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (jackpot, miss).

In the variation pattern table 1 for misses, the variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol is "miss," one of the variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol is "miss," the contents of the reference table are set to be different depending on the number of balls reserved for operation of the first special symbol (0/1-2/3), so that different variation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same. Specifically, the more the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is, the more likely it is that a pattern in which the time for the first special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected, and the fewer the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is, the more likely it is that a pattern in which the time for the first special symbol is set to be relatively long is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", the pattern PH1-1 (shortened change) or PH1-2 (normal change) in which the time for the change is set to be relatively short is selected, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (0/1-2/3). As a modified example, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", only the main pattern PH1-2 of the shortened change is selected, or the pattern PH1-2 of the shortened change is most likely to be selected, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (preferably the same selection ratio is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol).

The fluctuation pattern table 1 for jackpots has fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the type of jackpot. Similarly, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the type of jackpot.

(Variation pattern table 2)
8 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the current fluctuation pattern selection state is the time-saving selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is designed so that the table contents are different depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (jackpot, miss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for misses, the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a miss, one of the fluctuation patterns PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected, regardless of the number of activated balls reserved for the first special pattern (0/1-2/3). In other words, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a miss, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is not selected, regardless of how many activated balls of the first special pattern are present. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss," one of the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (super shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss," the reference table contents are set to be different depending on the number of activation reserved balls of the second special symbol (0/1-2/3), so that even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is the same, a different fluctuation pattern can be selected. Specifically, if there is no activation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened fluctuation) is not selected, and if there is an activation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the more activation reserved balls of the second special symbol there are, the more likely the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened fluctuation) is to be selected.

In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set. Here, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach)
Or PA2-2 (SP Reach B) is selected. Similarly, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a big hit, regardless of the big hit type, the variable pattern PA2-1 (N Reach) or PA2-2 (SP Reach B) is selected.

(Variation Pattern Table 3)
9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the current variation pattern selection state is the probability variation selection state. The variation pattern table 3 is designed to have different table contents depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (jackpot, miss).

In the variation pattern table 3 for misses, the variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is "miss," the variation pattern PH3-2 (normal variation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern (0/1-2/3). In other words, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is miss, the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is not selected no matter how many activated reserved balls of the first special pattern are present. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is miss, one of the variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. At this time, if the result of the judgment of the second special pattern is a miss, the reference table contents are set to be different depending on the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of reserved balls for the second special pattern), so that even if the acquired random number value of the special pattern change pattern is the same, a different change pattern can be selected. Specifically, if there is no reserved ball for the second special pattern, the change pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened change) will not be selected, and the change pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened change) can be selected only if there is a reserved ball for the second special pattern, so that a change pattern with a relatively short change time tends to be selected more easily when there is a reserved ball for the second special pattern than when there is no reserved ball for the second special pattern.

The fluctuation pattern table 3 for jackpots has a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the jackpot type (4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot). Similarly, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the jackpot type (16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot).

As described above, the variation time of the special symbol is specified for each variation pattern in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, but no matter which variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is fixedly displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In this embodiment, the variable time and fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set in correspondence with the variable time and fixed stop time of the special symbol. In addition, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the performance content and the variable time can be the same as those in the case of a big win and a loss, but it is preferable to make the final performance content different between the case of a big win and a loss. In other words, even if it is the same N reach, the decorative pattern will be a repeat number (e.g., "7, 7, 7") when it is a jackpot, but the decorative pattern will be a reach-miss number (e.g., "7, 8, 7") when it is a miss, or even if it is the same SP reach A to C, the final performance content will be a performance content indicating success and the decorative pattern will be a repeat number (e.g., an ally character wins against an enemy character, and then "7, 7, 7" is displayed), while the final performance content will be a performance content indicating failure and the decorative pattern will be a reach-miss number (e.g., an ally character is defeated by an enemy character, and then "7, 8, 7" is displayed). Also, it is preferable that the change time (performance time) is longer when it is a jackpot compared to when it is a miss, even if the performance content is the same (when it develops into the same SP reach), and as an example, it is preferable that the change time (performance time) of SP reach A to C when it is a jackpot is 10 seconds longer than that of SP reach A to C when it is a miss.

After selecting the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 generates a performance control command (communication check command) for checking whether communication with the performance control board 200 is normal, a performance control command (fluctuation additional information designation command) including a special symbol fluctuation additional pattern (information for adding or subtracting fluctuation time), a performance control command (fluctuation pattern designation command) including special symbol fluctuation pattern information, and a performance control command (symbol designation command) including information on the character performance number (symbol group and game state) in order to instruct the performance control board 200 to start fluctuating the decorative symbols (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as "fluctuation start commands") and stores them in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal pattern lottery processing means 145 has a normal pattern hit/miss determination means 146, a normal pattern stop pattern determination means 147, and a normal pattern change pattern determination means 148. When the normal pattern change start condition is satisfied, the normal pattern lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal pattern hit random number value and the normal pattern change pattern random number value stored in the most recent memory area in the normal pattern reserved storage area, and stores them in the normal pattern hit/miss determination area and the normal pattern change pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "normal pattern change start condition" is (1) that the normal pattern is waiting to change, and (2) that a normal pattern operation reserved ball exists. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal pattern is in a state where it can start changing (a state in which the change start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 reads out the normal symbol hit random number value from the normal symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit/miss determination for the normal symbol, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss". The result of this hit/miss determination for the normal symbol is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, and is used in subsequent processing, and is cleared when the normal symbol stops changing. The normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 holds a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table (not shown) that is referenced when determining whether the normal symbol is hit or miss. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/3001" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability change function) is not activated, and is set to "2999/3001" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability change function) is activated.

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown) and selects a predetermined winning symbol (a stopping symbol that triggers the operation of the normal electric device 522) when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination is a hit, and selects a predetermined losing symbol (a stopping symbol that does not trigger the operation of the normal electric device 522) when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination is a miss. In this embodiment, the means 147 assigns symbols A and B as winning symbols for normal symbols, and assigns symbol C as a losing symbol for normal symbols.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads out the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) by referring to a normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown). The normal symbol variation time is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chute support function (function to shorten the normal symbol variation time) is not activated, and is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chute support function (function to shorten the normal symbol variation time) is activated. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is "0.1 seconds".
is set. The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely displayed as stopped (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In controlling the normal symbol, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, when the electric chute support function is not operating, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the probability of winning the normal symbol is set to "0" and the normal symbol fluctuation time is made constant.

In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric role 522 depending on the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment, etc. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a normal electric role opening pattern table that is referenced when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric role 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric role 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chute support function (opening extension function) is not activated, and is set to "5.8 seconds" when the electric chute support function (opening extension function) is activated. The opening pattern of the normal electric role 522 may be different depending on the type of winning normal symbol. For example, as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 522, when the electric chute support function (extended opening function) is activated, if the winning normal pattern is pattern A, it will be "3 second opening x 1 time → 2.8 second opening x 1 time (total opening time 5.8 seconds)" and if the winning normal pattern is pattern B, it will be "2.8 second opening x 1 time → 3 second opening x 1 time (total opening time 5.8 seconds)."

When the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the hit start demo and the hit end demo, and the execution time (round time) of the round game according to the hit type (symbol group) determined. Then, the special game control means 150 generates a performance control command (referred to as a "hit start demo command") that instructs the performance control board 200 to execute a hit start demo performance, and a performance control command (referred to as a "hit end demo command") that instructs the performance control board 200 to execute a hit end demo performance, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The hit start demo command also serves as an opportunity for the performance control board 200 to determine the contents of a series of hit mid-performances (hit start demo performance, round performance, hit end demo performance) that are developed during a hit game. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates a performance control command (referred to as a "round performance designation command") for instructing the start of a round performance corresponding to each round game during each round game during a jackpot game, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round performance designation command includes information on the current round number and information on the opening and closing of the big prize winning port 54. As will be described later in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to 5 seconds and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to 20 seconds, but the execution time (demo time) of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo may be different even for the same jackpot type (pattern group) depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, not only on the jackpot type (pattern group). For example, assuming that the first special symbol will also win a 16R specific jackpot, and for a 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot occurs in a low probability, low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo will be 5 seconds (executing the execution of ... On the other hand, if a jackpot occurs in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (executing the effect A-1 as the jackpot start demo effect), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 10 seconds (executing the effect B-1 as the jackpot end demo effect, and not executing the effect C). For the 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (executing the effect A-2, which displays "Start of special jackpot" as the jackpot start demo effect), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds.
On the other hand, if a jackpot occurs in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo may be 5 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, effect B-3 displaying "Entering special probability mode" is executed, and effect C is not executed) and the execution time of the jackpot end demo may be 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, effect B-3 displaying "Continuing special probability mode" is executed, and effect C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R special jackpot is won even with the first special symbol, if the jackpot is won with the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (5 seconds for all 16R special jackpot, 4R special jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot, and as the jackpot start demo performance, performance A-1 or performance A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 30 seconds (30 seconds for 16R special jackpot and 4R special jackpot, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-2 and performance C are executed, but for 4R normal jackpot, it is 15 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-1 and performance On the other hand, if the jackpot is a jackpot with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot start demo may be 5 seconds (5 seconds for any of the 16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot, and as the jackpot start demo performance, performance A-1 or A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo may be 20 seconds (20 seconds for the 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-3 is executed and performance C is not executed, but for the 4R normal jackpot, it may be 10 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-1 is executed and performance C is not executed). This relationship of time values is one example, and as long as the relationship of the magnitude of each demo time in each situation is the same as above, it is not limited to this time value. In addition, in any of the above specifications, if a jackpot occurs in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, effect C will not occur. However, if a power outage occurs during a fluctuation related to the jackpot or during jackpot play (during special play) and the power is restored during that fluctuation or jackpot play, effect C may be generated as an exception.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol to be displayed variably on the first special symbol display device 71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the variation display. The special symbol display control means 156 also causes the second special symbol to be displayed variably on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the variation display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating status of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 is monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 generates a performance control command (called a "change stop command") to request the performance control board 200 to display the decorative symbol when the special symbol stops changing (i.e., when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to change and display the normal symbol according to the normal symbol change pattern (change time), and causes the normal symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the change. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (change time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

In addition, when the game is suspended for a predetermined time or more, the special symbol display control means 156 generates an effect control command (called a "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of a standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), and stores this in a command storage area of the main information storage means 180. "The game is suspended for a predetermined time or more" means that there is no special symbol activation reserved ball, and the period during which the special symbol variable display is not performed continues for a predetermined time or more. Note that the game may be suspended for a predetermined time or more when the period during which the game ball is not shot continues for a predetermined time or more, or when the period during which the game ball has not entered all the winning slots continues for a predetermined time or more.

When the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric device solenoid 543 as a jackpot game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and controls the special electric device 542 to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In a jackpot game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric device 542 is one round game (unit game), and the round game is executed continuously for a specified number of rounds. The electric device control means 160 holds a jackpot opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric device 542 has been operated (i.e., the number of rounds being executed). Here, the operation end condition of the special electric device 542 in a jackpot game (end condition of a unit game) is that a specified count number of game balls ("10" in this embodiment) have entered the jackpot opening 54, or the opening time of the jackpot opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time ("29 seconds" in this embodiment).

In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment corresponds to a hit, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric device solenoid 523 to control the opening and closing of the normal electric device 522 (second start hole 52) for a predetermined opening time. Here, as described above, the electric device control means 160 opens the normal electric device 522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chute support function (open extension function) is not activated, whereas it opens the normal electric device 522 for 5.8 seconds in the high base state in which the electric chute support function (open extension function) is activated. Here, the operation end condition of the normal electric device 522 is that a predetermined number of game balls ("10" in this embodiment) have entered the second start hole 52, or the opening time of the second start hole 52 has reached the maximum opening time ("0.2 seconds" or "5.8 seconds" in this embodiment).

When the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, the game state control means 165 determines the game state after the end of the hit game based on the type of hit (type of symbol group) and the game state at the time of the hit, and switches the game state after the end of the hit game. In this embodiment, as described above, multiple types of game states are set, including a normal game state (low probability, low base state), a time-saving game state (low probability, low base state), and a special game state (high probability, high base state), and one of the multiple types of game states is set alternatively. Note that each game state has already been described in detail, so repeated explanations will be omitted here.

When a jackpot game is played, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the jackpot game ends based on the jackpot type (type of pattern group), and switches the variation pattern selection state after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, a normal selection state, a time-saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set as multiple variation pattern selection states, and one of the multiple variation pattern selection states is alternatively set depending on the determined game state, jackpot type, the number of times the special pattern is displayed, etc. Note that each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, so a duplicate explanation will be omitted here.

The game state control means 165 also generates a presentation control command (called a "game state designation command") that includes the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit 104, and checks the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, etc. to determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state occurs, it requests a performance control command ("error performance designation command") including the error information to instruct the performance control board 200 to perform an error state performance. Although not shown in FIG. 4, etc., the door opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the glass frame 5 is open, the frame opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the front frame 2 is open, and the back set opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the back set board 30 is open. The magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called illegal gaming.

The main information storage means 180 is configured to temporarily store random number information acquired in special and normal symbol games, information on the operation reserve balls of the special and normal symbols, information on the game status (probability change function, change time reduction function, electric chute support function) related to the special and normal symbol games, information on the change pattern selection status, information on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special and normal symbols (jackpot, miss), information on the stop symbols (including symbol groups) related to the special and normal symbols, information on the change patterns (including additional change patterns) of the special and normal symbols, information on the jackpot game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of times opened per round of play), etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 71, 72, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric device 542, information on the performance control command data, etc., and has a predetermined memory area for storing each information.

The command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is received. Each performance control command is a two-byte structure containing one byte of MODE data and one byte of EVENT data. To distinguish between MODE and EVENT, bit 7 of the MODE data is set to "1" and bit 7 of the EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output at the transmission timing of each of MODE and EVENT. In principle, the performance control commands generated in each process are transmitted one command per interrupt period according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the performance control board 200 includes a performance lottery random number generating means 210, a performance generalizing means 220, a lamp control means 230, a role control means 240, an error performance control means 250, a sub-main information storage means 260, and a command transmission/reception means 270. Each of the above-mentioned means in the performance control board 200 is a functional representation of the hardware such as the sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, and electronic circuits arranged on the performance control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in ROM 202.

The random number generating means 210 for effect selection has a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (random number for effect selection) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters serve as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in a software manner. These software random numbers include pre-reading random number used for selecting pre-reading effects, decorative pattern random number used for selecting stop patterns of decorative patterns, variable performance pattern random number used for selecting variable performance patterns of decorative patterns, advance lottery random number used for selecting advance performance, jackpot performance pattern random number used for selecting jackpot performance pattern, and stage lottery random number used for selecting transition of performance stage. These random numbers are updated by using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the main processing on the effect control side described later (when no effect control command is received from the main control board 100).

The performance control means 220 includes a performance mode control means 221, a pending information display control means 222, a look-ahead notice control means 223, a variable performance control means 224, a decorative pattern control means 225, a notice performance control means 226, and a special game performance control means 227.

The presentation mode control means 221 controls the presentation mode (also referred to as the "game presentation mode") in a manner consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100 based on a game state designation command from the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the "normal presentation mode", the "time-saving presentation mode", and the "probability variation presentation mode" are set as multiple types of presentation modes, and one of the multiple types of presentation modes is selectively set according to the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) managed by the main control board 100 and the number of times the special pattern is displayed, and the variation presentation according to the set presentation mode is executed. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal presentation mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving presentation mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability variation game state, the "probability variation presentation mode" is set. When one of the presentation modes is set, a background image dedicated to that presentation mode (a background image that displays behind the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variable presentation) indicating that the presentation mode is in question, and BGM dedicated to that presentation mode is output from the speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode they are currently in from the type of background image or BGM.

The reserved information display control means 222 has a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern. When the reserved information display control means 222 receives a pattern memory number command from the main control board 100, it updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of activated reserved balls contained in this command. On the other hand, when the reserved information display control means 222 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the activated reserved balls are consumed, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. In addition, the reserved information display control means 222 controls the display of reserved images in the number corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved images in the number corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern on the reserved image display unit 710 of the performance display device 70 based on the values of the first reserved ball number counter and the second reserved ball number counter. In addition, the pending information display control means 222 controls the display of a changing image in the changing image display area 720 of the performance display device 70, which switches to the pending image corresponding to the activated pending ball (the first activated pending ball) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern when the activated pending ball is consumed. In this embodiment, unless explicitly stated, the reserved image of the first special pattern and the reserved image of the second special pattern may be referred to simply as "reserved image" without distinction, and the changing image of the first special pattern and the changing image of the second special pattern may be referred to simply as "changing image" without distinction.

The pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading judgment (referred to as a "pre-reading lottery") for the operation reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance is generated as one aspect of the so-called continuous notice performance that predicts the possibility of a big win or a high expectation performance (for example, a reach performance) occurring over one or more variable displays before the operation reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading is consumed. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives a pre-judgment command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-judgment result of the first special pattern and the information of the pre-judgment result of the second special pattern, and temporarily stores up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) of each in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the ball entry order of the operation reserved ball. This pre-reading information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved memory area of the main control board 100, and reserved 1 memory area (first reserved memory area), reserved 2 memory area (second reserved memory area), reserved 3 memory area (third reserved memory area), and reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved memory area) are provided in the order of balls entering each starting port 51, 52. Each reserved memory area can store information on the result of the preliminary judgment of winning or losing, the result of the preliminary judgment of the pattern, and the result of the preliminary judgment of the variation pattern as a set. The information on the preliminary judgment result is stored in the order of the reserved 1 memory area, the reserved 2 memory area, the reserved 3 memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area, while it is consumed in the order of the reserved 1 memory area, the reserved 2 memory area, the reserved 3 memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area (first in, first out principle). In addition, when the information on the preliminary judgment result in the reserved 1 memory area is consumed, the information on the preliminary judgment result stored in the reserved 2 memory area, the reserved 3 memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area is shifted to the memory area with the lower number, and the contents of the reserved 4 memory area are cleared to zero.

The variable performance control means 224 determines by lottery a variable performance pattern that specifies the variable process (performance process) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variable display based on information (variation pattern information, variable additional information, etc.) included in the variable start command from the main control board 100. The variable performance control means 224 holds multiple types of variable performance pattern tables that are referenced when selecting the variable performance pattern of the decorative pattern, and a variable performance pattern table corresponding to the variable pattern (variation time) of the special pattern is selected from these multiple types of variable performance pattern tables. Here, the main control board 100 determines the main variable pattern of the special pattern (for example, "SP Reach A" or "SP Reach B"), while the performance control board 200 determines the sub-variation pattern of the decorative pattern (for example, "SP Reach A1, A2..." or "SP Reach A2, A3...") that specifies the scenario of the performance display process in detail based on the main variable pattern. The decorative pattern variation presentation pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, i.e., the scenario of a series of presentation display processes from the start to the end of the decorative pattern variation, and the timing of the occurrence of the preview presentation at each stage in the display process is also specified as a time schedule. Furthermore, for this decorative pattern variation presentation pattern, even if the special pattern variation pattern is the same (even if the same information of the variation start command is received), if the current presentation mode is different, a variation presentation pattern with different presentation contents can be selected. In other words, a variation presentation pattern table is prepared for each current presentation mode.

In addition, when the variable performance control means 224 receives a standby demo command from the main control board 100, it executes a standby demo performance (a customer waiting demo performance) in which, for example, a demonstration video is played during the customer waiting period from when the standby demo command is received until the variable display of the special pattern starts (until the next variable start command is received).

The decorative symbol control means 225 determines the final combination of decorative symbols (left, middle, and right symbols) by lottery based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variable start command from the main control board 100 and the variable performance pattern determined by the variable performance control means 224. In this example, three symbol rows including multiple types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements such as numbers. In addition, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds multiple types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referenced when determining the combination of decorative symbols (also called "stop symbol patterns") by lottery. The multiple types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for a big win, a stop symbol pattern table for a reach miss, and a stop symbol pattern table for a non-reach miss. The stop patterns of the decorative patterns are formed as a combination of three patterns, and include "stop patterns indicating a jackpot (jackpot pattern)" and "stop patterns indicating a miss (miss pattern)". The jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (variable jackpot) is a combination of stop patterns in which three of the same odd-numbered patterns are lined up (for example, "7, 7, 7"). The jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot) is a combination of stop patterns in which three of the same even-numbered patterns are lined up (for example, "2, 2, 2"). The miss pattern is a combination of stop patterns in which at least one of the three patterns is a number pattern different from the other numbers (for example, "1, 3, 8"). Here, the reach miss pattern among the miss patterns is a combination of stop patterns in which the left pattern and the right pattern are aligned and only the center pattern is shifted forward and backward by several frames (for example, "3, 1, 3"). In addition, in the case of a small winning symbol or a 2R winning symbol, the combination of a predetermined stop pattern such as "3, 5, 7" may be used. In addition, if the lottery result is a non-reach miss,
A specific result called a "chance number" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7" as a sequence number, and "2, 2, 3" or "5, 5, 6" as a deviation number) may be selected. Furthermore, in the pseudo-sequential performance described above, when a performance in which a provisional stop display and a re-variable display are performed before the final stop pattern is confirmed, a special pattern (pseudo-sequential pattern) is selected as a provisional stop pattern suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-sequential pattern. When a provisional stop pattern suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-sequential pattern is displayed, at least one of the stop patterns (typically the middle pattern) of the three rows of decorative patterns may be replaced with a special pattern (pseudo-sequential pattern) that displays a character such as "NEXT" (for example, "2, NEXT, 3"). The stop order for stopping the decorative patterns is predetermined for each of the variable performance patterns described below, and in this embodiment, the left pattern is stopped in the order of the right pattern, and the middle pattern is stopped in principle in this embodiment. However, in the case of a shortened variation pattern where the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left, middle, and right symbols are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a special variation pattern, the right symbol can be stopped in the order of middle symbol to left symbol, in which case the probability of winning tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stopping order, it is desirable for the left, right, and middle symbols to start varying simultaneously at the start of the variation. However, as a special variation pattern, the variation may also start in the order of left, right, and middle symbols.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern attributes of the decorative pattern in this embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element consisting of a number and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In this embodiment, a total of nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (i.e., there are a total of nine types of decorative patterns). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern row, and on the performance display device 70, it is displayed in a circular or scroll manner in the order of "1" to "9" (or in the order of "9" to "1") in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, and after "9" it returns to "1" again (or after "1" it returns to "9" again). This specification is similar in other embodiments. The pattern attribute of each decorative pattern is determined by the type of color attached to the identification element. In other words, even if multiple decorative patterns are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same pattern attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors of the decorative patterns are set: "blue", "red", and "gold". In the drawings, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns, "blue", "red", and "gold", are expressed by "white", "diagonal lines", and "filled in". Specifically, the decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified as blue pattern attributes (blue attribute), the decorative patterns "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified as red pattern attributes (red attribute), and the decorative pattern "7" is classified as gold pattern attributes (gold attribute). In this embodiment, the expected degree of winning balls and the expected degree of transition to a certain probability increase by one step in the order of the pattern attributes of the decorative patterns, "blue" < "red" < "gold". In the following, for convenience, the decorative pattern with the blue attribute is also called "blue pattern", the decorative pattern with the red attribute is also called "red pattern", and the decorative pattern with the gold attribute is also called "gold pattern".

The notice performance control means 226 determines, by lottery, a notice performance pattern that specifies the contents of the notice performance executed at each stage of the decorative pattern change process according to the scenario of the change performance pattern determined by the change performance control means 224. The notice performance pattern includes a performance pattern that temporarily or gradually displays an image of a specific character, an animation, etc., a performance pattern that outputs a specific sound, a performance pattern that operates a movable role, etc. The notice performance is executed in parallel with the change display of the decorative pattern, and indicates in a notice manner that the pattern change stops in a jackpot state and has a high probability of winning. The notice performance includes a notice performance that is executed before a reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the change display process of the decorative pattern, and a notice performance that is executed after the reach state occurs. The notice performances have different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice performance displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot expectation than the notice performance displayed before the reach occurs. The preview performance control means 226 holds a preview lottery table for each type of preview performance to be referred to when selecting a preview performance pattern, and selects a preview lottery table according to the type of preview performance that occurs according to the scenario of the variable performance pattern. Specific types of preview performance include, for example, a comment preview performance, a background preview performance, an SU (step-up) preview performance, a logo preview performance, a mini character preview performance, a group preview performance, and a role preview performance. This preview performance is basically performed by combining the display of one or more preview performances with the variable display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is variable displayed according to the same variable performance pattern, it is possible to generate a variety of performance modes by combining it with one or more preview performances.

The special game presentation control means 227 determines the content of the jackpot presentation (jackpot presentation pattern) that notifies the player that a jackpot game is being played. The jackpot presentation includes a jackpot start demo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot game is being played, a round presentation that notifies the player that a round game is being played, and a jackpot end demo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot game is being played. When the special game presentation control means 227 receives a jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the special game presentation control means 227 determines the jackpot presentation pattern (jackpot start demo presentation pattern, round presentation pattern, jackpot end demo presentation pattern) based on the information on the jackpot type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260. In this jackpot presentation pattern, a jackpot start demo presentation time, a round presentation time (presentation time according to the opening pattern of the large prize opening 54), and a jackpot end demo presentation time are set, and a series of presentation contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the special game presentation control means 227 executes the jackpot start demo presentation triggered by receiving a jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot presentation pattern, executes each round presentation triggered by receiving a round presentation designation command, and executes the jackpot end demo presentation triggered by receiving a jackpot end demo command. In the jackpot start demo presentation, for example, the words "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. In the round presentation, for example, the number of currently being executed rounds and the number of winning balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (such as animation images) that liven up the jackpot game are displayed. In the jackpot end demo presentation, for example, the words "jackpot end" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the jackpot game, and a presentation indicating the game state (mode) to be transitioned to is displayed.

The performance control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined performance content (pre-reading performance pattern, variable performance pattern, advance notice performance pattern, stopping pattern pattern, jackpot performance pattern, etc.) and stores them in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting and light color of the performance lamps according to the performance content set by the performance management means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds multiple types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the performance lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80), reads out the lamp data corresponding to the determined performance pattern, and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91.

The prop control means 240 controls the operation of each movable prop 24 according to the performance content set by the performance integration means 220. The prop control means 240 holds multiple types of drive data for controlling the operation of the movable props 24, and transmits drive control signals (drive data) corresponding to the determined performance pattern to the motor driver 92.

The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when it receives an error presentation designation command from the main control board 100, and to notify the user that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error presentation pattern.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative pattern information, variable performance pattern information, preview performance pattern information, control command information, etc., and is provided with a predetermined storage area for storing each piece of information. For example, the command storage area includes a performance control command buffer for storing performance control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, and an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from the image control board 300. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of performance control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is configured to receive performance control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 and store these performance control commands in a performance control command buffer in the sub-main information storage means 260. The command transmission/reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the aforementioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 to execute a performance control command reception interrupt process (described in detail below), and acquires various performance control commands in this interrupt process. Note that when the command transmission/reception means 270 receives a strobe signal, it prioritizes this performance control command reception interrupt process over other interrupt processes (interrupt processes with a priority level lower than 7, described below).

In addition, the command transmission/reception means 270 transmits the image control commands stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 to the image control board 300 by serial communication to instruct the execution of the performance contents (variable performance pattern information, advance notice performance pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the performance supervision means 220. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at a predetermined interval (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes the various image control commands transmitted from the performance control board 200, and displays the performance images including the decorative patterns on the performance display device 70 according to the scenario of the variable performance pattern, and displays the advance notice performance by superimposing it on the performance of the pattern change at each stage of the variable display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

[Various performances]
As described above, the pachinko game machine PA having such a configuration is configured so that various game presentations are controlled and executed by the presentation control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game, etc. In the following, the contents of the presentation during a big win among various game presentations will be explained. In addition, in the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" is used as a concept including, for example, not executing all, not executing part, relatively lowering the priority of display or output, etc. In addition, in the following, "overlapping execution (overlapping execution)" is used as a concept including the overlap of one execution period (or execution timing) and the other execution period (or execution timing), and includes the case where the entire execution period (or execution timing) of both overlap and the case where a part of the execution period (or execution timing) of both overlap.

[Performance during big win]
As described above, the performance during the jackpot includes a demo performance at the start of the jackpot, a round performance, and a demo performance at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the jackpot type (type of pattern group), the jackpot pattern combination (combination of decorative patterns at the time of the jackpot occurrence), and the performance pattern during the jackpot. (A) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a normal game state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a time-saving game state or a probability change game state. As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot pattern combination and the type of the performance pattern during the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type (pattern group) selected in the lottery process of the special pattern. In this embodiment, even if the jackpot type is the same, the type of the jackpot pattern combination and the type of the performance pattern during the jackpot are configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning.

A jackpot symbol combination is composed of a combination of three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) that stop in a line, called "* * *" (*: decorative symbol of any number). Jackpot symbol combinations are divided into odd-number symbol combinations (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations) that indicate a "specific jackpot" such as "1 1 1", "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7", and "9 9 9" (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations), and even-number symbol combinations (blue symbol combinations) that indicate a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" such as "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", and "8 8 8" (blue symbol combinations). In other words, odd number symbol combinations (gold symbol combinations, red symbol combinations) are jackpot symbol combinations that are guaranteed to result in a "specific jackpot", while even number symbol combinations (blue symbol combinations) are jackpot symbol combinations where it is uncertain whether they result in a "specific jackpot" or a "regular jackpot".

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won a "special jackpot" that triggers a transition to a high probability game state. In other words, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that definitely notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R special jackpot) among multiple types of jackpots, which is the most advantageous for the player. The red symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is uncertain, whether it is "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", but that the player has won a "special jackpot" that triggers a transition to a high probability game state. The blue symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is certain, but that it is uncertain, whether the player has won a "special jackpot" that triggers a transition to a high probability game state or a "normal jackpot" that triggers a transition to a "time-saving game state". Here, even if the combination is blue, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (i.e., even if the actual number of rounds is a "16 round" jackpot, the blue combination may be selected), but it is preferable that the red combination is more likely to result in "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "happy jackpot effects" described later, a "happy jackpot C effect" that promotes the jackpot and rounds may be provided.

In this embodiment, the multiple types of jackpot performance patterns are set as "Super Longevity jackpot performance", "Longevity jackpot A performance", "Longevity jackpot B performance", "Happy jackpot A performance", and "Happy jackpot B performance". The Super Longevity jackpot performance is a jackpot performance pattern type that is set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "gold symbol combination". The Longevity jackpot A performance and the Longevity jackpot B performance are jackpot performance pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "red symbol combination". The Happy jackpot A performance and the Happy jackpot B performance are jackpot performance pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "blue symbol combination". In other words, the jackpot performance pattern type is set according to the symbol attribute (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the jackpot symbol combination.

Here, referring to FIG. 11(A), the jackpot symbol combination and the performance pattern during the jackpot selected when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state will be described. First, when the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "red symbol combination" or the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, the red symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol combination with a probability of 80%, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, the "ju jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot, and when the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, the "joy jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. Also, when the "4R normal jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the "joy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. In addition, if the second special symbol is a "16R specific jackpot", a "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and a "Super Longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, if the second special symbol is a "4R specific jackpot", a "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and a "Longevity jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, if the second special symbol is a "4R normal jackpot", a "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and a "Joy jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 11(B), the jackpot symbol combination and the performance pattern during the jackpot selected when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state or the probability change game state will be described. When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "ju jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "joy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, the "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, the gold symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol combination with a probability of 80%, and the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "gold pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "choju jackpot performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern, and when the "red pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "ju jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. When the "4R specific jackpot" of the second special pattern is won, the "red pattern combination" or the "blue pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. For example, the red pattern combination is selected as the jackpot pattern combination with a probability of 80%, and the blue pattern combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "red pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "ju jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern, and when the "blue pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "joy jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, if the second special symbol is selected as a "4R normal jackpot", a "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the corresponding jackpot performance pattern is the "Joy jackpot A performance".

The Choju jackpot presentation is a jackpot presentation pattern that definitely notifies the player that they have won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) among multiple jackpot types.

The Kotobuki jackpot A and Kotobuki jackpot B effects are determined to have won the "specific jackpot" type, which is the trigger for transitioning to a certain probability game state, but until the specified number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached, it is unclear whether the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", and the effects progress in this jackpot performance pattern. Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A performance reaches the specified number of rounds (4 rounds), no promotion performance (round promotion performance) is performed, and it is determined that the specified number of rounds for this jackpot game is "4 rounds". On the other hand, when the Kotobuki jackpot B performance reaches the specified number of rounds (4 rounds), a promotion performance (round promotion performance) occurs, and it is determined that the specified number of rounds for this jackpot game is "16 rounds" (the specified number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds").

The joy big hit A and joy big hit B performances are performance patterns during a big hit in which the actual number of rounds is determined to be "4 rounds", but until the big hit end demo is reached, it is uncertain whether the "specific big hit" that triggers the transition to the probability game state or the "normal big hit" that triggers the transition to the time-saving game state is won, and the performance progresses. Here, even if the joy big hit A performance reaches the big hit end demo, the promotion performance (probability promotion performance) is not performed, and it is determined that the current big hit type is a "normal big hit" (the time-saving game state will be transitioned to after the current big hit game ends). On the other hand, when the joy big hit B performance reaches the big hit end demo, the promotion performance (probability promotion performance) occurs, and it is determined that the current big hit type is a "specific big hit" (the time-saving game state will be transitioned to after the current big hit game ends). In addition, in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot performance pattern is changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, but regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the correspondence as shown in FIG. 11(B) may be used. In addition, the first special symbol may also be provided with a 16R specific jackpot, and in that case, even when the first special symbol is a jackpot, the super longevity jackpot performance or the longevity jackpot B performance may be executed. The details of the promotion performance (round promotion performance, probability change promotion performance) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each big win performance pattern will be explained. Figures 12 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the big win performance patterns. In the figures, the correspondence between the type of individual performance that occurs during a big win game and the timing of occurrence is determined for each big win performance pattern. In addition, in the figures, the opening mode of the big win opening 54 is added to make the explanation easier to understand. However, in this embodiment, as the opening mode of the big win opening 54, only a "long opening" is prepared in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big win opening 54 is set to an opening time that allows or makes it easy to enter a specified count number (full count) of game balls, but this configuration is not limited to this, and a "short opening" may be prepared in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big win opening 54 is set to an opening time that does not allow or makes it difficult to enter a specified count number (full count) of game balls.

First, while the jackpot start demo is running, a screen is displayed indicating the type of jackpot effect (Super Longevity jackpot effect, Longevity jackpot effect, Happy jackpot effect) and the player is informed of which jackpot effect will start. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to "5 seconds" for all jackpots.

During each round of play, a round performance screen is displayed according to the type of performance during the jackpot (Choju jackpot performance, Kotobuki jackpot performance, Ki jackpot performance). That is, if the performance pattern during the jackpot is Choju jackpot performance, the Choju jackpot round screen is displayed; if it is Kotobuki jackpot A performance or Kotobuki jackpot B performance, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen is displayed; if it is Ki jackpot A performance or Ki jackpot B performance, the Ki jackpot round screen is displayed. However, if a round promotion performance, which will be described later, occurs during a specified round of play, the type of performance during the jackpot is promoted, and the round performance screen of a lower rank type is switched to a round performance screen of a higher rank type.

After each round play ends, an interval period is set, which is the pause time (the time when the large prize opening 54 is closed) from when the end of each round play is set until the setting of the next round play or the jackpot end demo begins. Therefore, the special game is played in the following order: "jackpot start demo" → "round play" → "interval period" → "round play" → "interval period" → ... → "round play" → "interval period" → "jackpot end demo". In this embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" for all jackpots. Details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demo, the contents of the performance mode (game state) to be transferred to after the end of the currently executed jackpot game are suggested, and the player is suggested which performance mode will be entered or continued. In addition, during this jackpot end demo period, the later-described probability change promotion performance or reserved consecutive suggestion performance may be performed. Note that the reserved consecutive suggestion performance performed during this jackpot end demo period does not include the reserved consecutive suggestion performance (the performance combined with the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance) that is performed in response to the occurrence of the over winning or the bonus winning in the modified example described later. In other words, the reserved consecutive suggestion performance related to the modified example described later is not a performance performed during the jackpot end demo period, but a performance performed during the interval period. Note that the details of the probability change promotion performance and reserved consecutive suggestion performance of this embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpots. As described above, the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo may be configured so that each demo time is different depending on whether it is a jackpot game at the time of the first hit (i.e., a jackpot from a low probability low base state) or a jackpot game during a consecutive win (i.e., a jackpot from a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of a jackpot game during a consecutive win, each demo time may be set to a relatively short time in order to quickly proceed with the processing of the game before and after the jackpot (to quickly proceed with the game during the consecutive win) compared to the case of a jackpot game at the time of the first hit. Also, as described above, when a performance is performed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card in a jackpot game at the time of the first hit, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demo period set to a relatively long time, and when a performance is performed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card in a jackpot game during a consecutive win, it is preferable to perform it during the execution period of the round game, not during the jackpot end demo period set to a relatively short time. In addition, for the reserved consecutive suggestion performance, in the case of a first jackpot game (i.e., a jackpot from a low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute or to lower the execution probability even if there is a reserved jackpot in the reserve, and in the case of a jackpot game during a consecutive jackpot game (i.e., a jackpot from a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state), it is preferable not to execute or to increase the execution probability even if there is a reserved jackpot in the reserve. Furthermore, it is preferable that the reserved consecutive suggestion performance is performed during the execution of a special game corresponding to a 16R specific jackpot, and it is preferable to execute it when the reserved jackpot is a jackpot reserve corresponding to a 16R specific jackpot (in other words, it is preferable that the jackpot for which the reserved consecutive suggestion performance is displayed and the reserved jackpot reserve in the reserve that triggers the execution of the reserved consecutive suggestion performance are only for the 16R specific jackpot, and not for the 4R specific/normal jackpot).

Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen (round presentation screen) during a round of play. Although not shown, in the central area of the screen, various images (animation images, etc.) are displayed according to the type of presentation pattern during the jackpot to liven up the jackpot game.

The round display area 730 on the screen displays the round number (the third round in the illustrated example) indicating which round game is currently being played. For example, if the currently playing round game is the first round game (first round), "ROUND 1" is displayed in the round display area, if the currently playing round game is the second round game (second round), "ROUND 2" is displayed in the round display area, and thereafter, "ROUND 3," "ROUND 4," etc. are displayed in the round display area each time a round game is played.

In the right-hit display area 731 of the screen, a right-hit image (also called a "hit instruction" effect) is displayed, which prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the right-side area PA2 (hit to the right). In addition, in the case where the game ball flows down the left-side area PA1 and enters the general winning holes 61-63, or enters the first starting hole 51, that is, when the game ball is shot toward the left-side area PA1, even though the situation is such that the game ball should be hit to the right (during a big win), an effect (attention notification effect) may be executed to alert the player not to hit to the left. In the attention notification effect, a message instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP is lit in a special light-emitting manner (for example, flashes quickly or momentarily with high brightness), thereby notifying the player that the game ball should be shot toward the right-side area PA2 (hit to the right). In addition, as the attention notification effect, for example, a sound (right-hit instruction sound) saying "Please hit to the right" may be output from the speaker 11. It is preferable that this warning effect be in a conspicuous position (for example, in the central display area) and of a size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that it can be clearly seen by the player, and it is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed even in a situation where the right-hit image, the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball count display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730 are displayed. However, since the right-hit image is also information that should be clearly conveyed to the player (information about an appropriate launch position), it is appropriate to display the right-hit image and the warning effect in different display areas so that they are not superimposed. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure it so that it has a higher display priority than the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball count display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730 (that is, while they can be superimposed, in that case the warning effect is displayed in front). The launch instruction effect is displayed as a display condition when the ball enters the general winning hole 61-63 during a jackpot or when the ball enters the first starting hole 51, and the display time is set to 10 seconds. However, if the display condition is met again before the 10-second display time has elapsed, 10 seconds will be set as the display time again from that point (i.e., the display time will be extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-hit image and the warning effect not only during a jackpot, but also in a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, and it is preferable to configure the right-hit image to be continuously displayed from the jackpot to the high base state, and the warning effect to be continuously displayed from the jackpot to the high base state when it is displayed less than 10 seconds until the end of the jackpot (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot end demo).

In the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined winning event (over winning or bonus winning event described later) occurs, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on the winning event is displayed to notify the occurrence of the winning event. This prize ball acquisition display area 732 includes a first prize ball acquisition display area 732A in which the number of prize balls acquired by the over winning event (unit prize ball number acquired when one game ball enters the large winning port 54) is displayed when an over winning event occurs, and a second prize ball acquisition display area 732B in which the number of prize balls acquired by the bonus winning event (unit prize ball number acquired when one game ball enters the general winning port 64) is displayed when a bonus winning event occurs. For example, when an over winning event occurs, "+15pt" corresponding to the unit prize ball number (15 balls) of the large winning port 54 is displayed, and when a bonus winning event occurs, "+3pt" corresponding to the unit prize ball number (3 balls) of the general winning port 64 is displayed. As a variant, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B may be positioned apart.

The cumulative number of prize balls display area 733 of the screen displays the cumulative number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on the balls entering the large prize opening 54 or the general prize opening 64 during the consecutive jackpot games (referred to as the "cumulative number of prize balls"). The "consecutive jackpots" refers to a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first jackpot, which is the trigger for transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the specific game state starting from the first jackpot). The "specific game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of transitioning to the special game is higher than that of the normal game state (low probability low base state), and refers to a state in which at least one of the following functions is activated (at least one of the high probability high base state, low probability high base state, and high probability low base state). In this embodiment, the game state (high base state) in which at least the electric chute support function is activated corresponds to the "specific game state". The cumulative number of prize balls includes the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of game balls into the large prize winning port 54 or the general prize winning port 64 in the special game when the first win occurs. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by the over prize winning described below, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by the over prize winning. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize winning described below, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize winning. The over prize winning performance described below is executed during a jackpot (it can be executed because the large prize winning port 54 is openable and balls can be entered), but the general prize winning port 64 can be entered regardless of whether or not a jackpot is being won. However, the bonus prize winning performance described below is also configured to be executed only during a jackpot. Regarding the bonus win, if there is a jackpot, a bonus win effect is executed, but if the state is in a low probability, low base state, a special effect different from the bonus win is executed (for example, a special effect in which the dialogue "Don't put it in here now!" and a sound are displayed, however, this may also be executed when three balls are entered within a specified time (for example, within five seconds) rather than just one ball), and if the state is in a high probability, high base state or a low probability, high base state, neither the bonus win effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, it is not necessary to execute anything, but as another effect, an effect such as a red flame appearing for a moment around the frame of the effect display device 70 may be executed).

In addition to or instead of this cumulative number of prize balls, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on game balls entering the large prize entry port 54 or the general prize entry port 64 during one currently active jackpot game may be displayed (referred to as the "number of prize balls during a jackpot"). The number of prize balls during a jackpot is the number of prize balls that the player was actually able to acquire during one jackpot game, so basically, it may be less than the number of prize balls that can be acquired (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot, but it will never exceed the number of prize balls that can be acquired. However, if an over-entry occurs as described below, the number of prize balls during a jackpot may exceed the number of prize balls that can be acquired (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot.

Also, although not shown, during a streak, the number of consecutive jackpots in a specific game state, or the number of consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot (plus one), may be displayed. For example, if there are three jackpots in a specific game state after the first jackpot, a display such as "3rd consecutive jackpot" or "4th consecutive jackpot" may be displayed during the jackpot. Also, during each round of a special game, a pseudo decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "pseudo decorative pattern") may be displayed in a variable and stationary manner (provisional stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo decorative pattern be a pattern (a pattern exclusively for a jackpot) that is different from the normal decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner during a non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative pattern displayed during non-special play is composed of a picture (character) and a number, during special play it becomes a decorative pattern of only numbers, and its size is also reduced, or if the decorative pattern displayed during non-special play is composed of only numbers, during special play it becomes a decorative pattern of only numbers, but its size is also reduced. Furthermore, when a repeat number such as "7-7-7" is lined up at the time of a jackpot, it is sufficient to recognize which decorative pattern caused the jackpot, so "7-7-7" is not displayed during special play, and only "7" (only one decorative pattern, not a decorative pattern combination of three decorative patterns) is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (round game), a "winning-related effect", which is a characteristic effect of this embodiment, is executed.

[Winners' related performances]
Next, the winning-related effects of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effects of this embodiment. The winning-related effects are effects that are executed based on the game ball entering a specific winning hole (the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64) during the execution of a big win game. This winning-related effect includes (A) the big winning hole winning effect and (B) the general winning hole winning effect.

<A. Grand prize winning performance>
The large prize opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of a special game. The large prize opening winning effect includes a large prize opening normal winning effect, a large prize opening over winning effect, and a large prize opening count up effect. In the following, except in special cases, (a) a game ball entering the large prize opening 54, (b) a game ball entering the large prize opening 54, (c) a game ball being detected by the large prize opening switch 541, and (d) receiving a large prize opening winning command from the main control board 100 are used synonymously.

≪A-1. Regular winning performance at the big prize entrance≫
The normal large prize winning presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that a game ball has won the large prize winning presentation 54, with the target being the winning of game balls within a specified count number into the large prize winning presentation 54. In other words, the normal large prize winning presentation is a presentation that is performed every time a game ball wins the large prize winning presentation 54 until the number of game balls winning the large prize winning presentation 54 in one round of play reaches the specified count number. In this embodiment, a specific example of the normal large prize winning presentation is not specifically shown, but the normal large prize winning presentation is performed using at least one of a plurality of presentation means such as the presentation display device 70, the speaker 11, the presentation lamp LP, and the movable role 24. Examples include (1) a presentation on the presentation display device 70 in which an object corresponding to a specified count number in one unit game is displayed (for example, a treasure chest display is displayed for a specified count number in one unit game), and the object is deleted each time a game ball enters the large prize opening 54, (2) a presentation on the speaker 11 in which a "clink" sound is output each time a game ball enters the large prize opening 54, and (3) a presentation on the presentation lamp LP in which a lamp flashes twice each time a game ball enters the large prize opening 54. Note that, as a variation of this embodiment, a configuration may be made in which, without providing a normal large prize opening presentation, only the large prize opening count-up presentation described below is performed for the entry of game balls into the large prize opening 54 up to the specified count number.

≪A-2. Winning over the big prize entrance≫
The large prize opening over-entry effect (also referred to as "over-entry effect") is an effect that suggests or notifies that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 54, targeting the entry of a game ball that exceeds a specified count number into the large prize opening 54 (over-entry). "Over-entry" refers to the detection by the large prize opening switch 541 of a game ball that exceeds the specified count number during the execution of one round of play (in this embodiment, the eleventh or subsequent game ball). In this embodiment, as will be described later in detail, the effective detection period of the special prize opening switch 541 is the detection grace period after each round of play ends (this period is the same as the interval period in this embodiment, but the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods. As an example, if the interval period, which is the waiting time set between each round of play or between the final round of play and the special prize opening end demo, during which the special prize opening 54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation, is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is set to 2 seconds. The detection grace period is a period set between each round of play or between the final round of play and the jackpot end demo, and is a period during which it is possible to detect the entry of game balls after the large prize opening 54 has started its closing operation (such as the entry of game balls that have exceeded a specified count number).The detection grace period overlaps at least partially with the interval period, and is set to extend from the start of the closing operation of the large prize opening 54 until 1 second, or 3 seconds, has elapsed, and an over-entry can occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of an over-entry, if the game ball on the 10th count enters the large prize opening 54 and is detected by the large prize opening switch 541, initiating the closing operation of the large prize opening 54, and a subsequent game ball (a game ball on the 11th count or later) enters the large prize opening 54 before the large prize opening 54 is closed, then an over-entry will occur when this subsequent game ball (a game ball on the 11th count or later) is detected by the large prize opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period).

Types of over winning effects include an over winning image display effect and an over winning sound output effect. Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an over winning effect in this embodiment. It is preferable that the presentation mode of the over winning effect is different from the presentation mode of the regular large winning port presentation described above. As a variation, the over winning effect may only include an over winning image (without an over winning sound), or only include an over winning sound (without an over winning image).

The over-winning image display effect is an effect that displays an image (called an "over-winning image") that suggests that an over-winning has occurred. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-winning image with the letters "+15pt" is displayed in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 on the screen as an over-winning image, suggesting that "15" prize balls have been acquired based on the occurrence of an over-winning. This allows the player to intuitively understand that an over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is an effect in which a sound ("over-winning sound") indicating that an over-winning has occurred is output from the speaker 11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the occurrence of an over-winning is indicated by outputting a sound effect (character's voice) saying "Good job!" from the speaker 11.

As a modified example of this embodiment, multiple patterns of over winning effects may be provided. In other words, multiple types of over winning images or multiple types of over winning sounds may be prepared, and one of the over winning images and over winning sounds may be selected by a lottery when an over winning occurs. In this case, depending on the type of over winning image or over winning sound, a pending consecutive suggestion, a probability variation suggestion, a round number suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, while there is only one type of over winning image, "+15pt", the over winning sound includes "Nice", "Keep it up", and "Congratulations" in addition to "Yay", and among them, when the over winning sound "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the effect may also serve as a pending consecutive suggestion, (2) the effect may also serve as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, or (3) the effect may also serve as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot rather than a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of over winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of an over winning, a configuration may be adopted in which a possibility of a consecutive winning in the reserved ball is suggested according to the type of over winning sound (i.e., the over winning effect and the reserved ball consecutive suggestion effect are used together). Here, "consecutive winning in the reserved ball" refers to a case in which, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol performed by the consumption of a certain preceding activated reserved ball is a jackpot, one or more subsequent activated reserved balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the time when the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol related to the preceding activated reserved ball is permitted to the time when the special game that is executed as a result of the jackpot is ended, which is a jackpot, include an activated reserved ball (also called "jackpot reserved"). In this modified example, as multiple types of over winning sounds, an over winning sound A (a sound saying "You did it") and an over winning sound B (a sound saying "Congratulations") are prepared. And, when there is no reserved jackpot when the over win occurs (when consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot are not established), the selection rate of the over win sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the over win sound B is "0%". On the other hand, when there is a reserved jackpot when the over win occurs (when consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot are established), the selection rate of the over win sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the over win sound B is "100%". In other words, the over win sound A is a normal sound that suggests that an over win has occurred and consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot have not been established. The over win sound B is a special sound that suggests that an over win has occurred and consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot have been established. The selection rates of the over win sounds A and B may be set appropriately. For example, when there is a reserved jackpot when the over win occurs (when consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot are established), the selection rate of the over win sound A may be "80%", and the selection rate of the over win sound B may be "20%". In the above modified example, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect was applied to the over winning sound output effect, but the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect may be applied to the over winning image display effect (for example, when "+15pt" is displayed in black letters as the over winning image display effect, the reserved consecutive win has not been achieved or is unlikely to be achieved, but when it is displayed in gold letters, the reserved consecutive win has been achieved or is likely to be achieved). In addition, in the above modified example, the over winning sound B was described as a reserved consecutive win suggestion, but the over winning sound B may be designed to have the role of a probability variable suggestion or a round number suggestion, and in that case, the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is set according to whether the currently executed jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), so that in the case of a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%, while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "10%". The selection rates of over winning sounds A and B may be set depending on whether the currently executing jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, so that in the case of a 4R jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a 16R jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "100%, " or the selection rate of over winning sound A is "80%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "20%.

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority consumption method" is adopted in which the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed preferentially over the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, and only the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern may be targeted as the activated reserved ball that is the target of consecutive wins in the reserved. In addition, if the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of a special game is a specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also a specific game state (high base state), the reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed in response to an over win that occurs during the execution of the special game. In addition, assuming that the preceding activated reserved ball is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), if a specific reserve that is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included in the subsequent activated reserved balls as the first specific reserve, the reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed in response to an over win that occurs during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a jackpot reservation in the subsequent active reservation, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot reservation (the earliest jackpot reservation in the case of multiple jackpot reservations) is a low-profit jackpot, the reserved lottery suggestion effect may not be executed. In other words, if a reserved lottery consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of a special game, it is certain that a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) will result in consecutive lots in the reservation.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the over winning effect may suggest the possibility of winning a special jackpot in addition to the occurrence of an over winning. In other words, the over winning effect and the special jackpot suggestion effect may be used together. The special jackpot suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently active special game is a specific jackpot (special jackpot), that is, that the game will transition to a special jackpot state after the special game ends. In this modified example, for example, multiple types of over winning sounds A to C are set, and if the type of jackpot won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "70%", the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "0%". In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a special jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "10%, the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "60%". In other words, the probability of winning (the probability of transitioning to the probability of winning game state) increases by one step in the order of "Over Winning Sound A" < "Over Winning Sound B" < "Over Winning Sound C". As a further modification, the over winning sound may be configured to indicate the number of electric supports that will be awarded after the special game ends, rather than the probability of winning.

≪A-3. Big prize slot count-up performance≫
The large prize opening count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of a special game during a consecutive winning streak, the value of the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area 733 is added to the value of the prize ball count (unit prize ball count) paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize opening. In this embodiment, since the specification is such that "15" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize opening 54 (the unit prize ball count of the large prize opening 54 is 15), when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54, the value of the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area 733 is updated in units of "15". The special game presentation control means 227 is also provided with an accumulated prize ball counter for counting the accumulated number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 (each time a large prize opening entry command is received from the main control board 100), "15", which is the unit prize ball number for the large prize opening 54, is added to the count value of the accumulated prize ball counter, and accordingly, a large prize opening count-up presentation is performed in which "15" is added to the value of the accumulated prize ball number displayed in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733. This large prize opening count-up presentation is performed regardless of whether the game balls entering the large prize opening 54 are within a specified count number or exceed the specified count number.

Figure 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the consecutive appearance of the large prize opening count-up effect. As shown in Figure 20, the large prize opening count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is added to the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 in a count-up manner by "1" in order when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54. In the illustrated example, the cumulative prize ball number is counted up one by one, such as "7000" → "7001" → ... → "7014" → "7015". Note that Figure 20 shows the flow of the large prize opening count-up effect when an over-entry occurs, and after the over-entry effect is performed at (A) in the figure, the large prize opening count-up effect is performed at (B) to (E) in the figure. 20 shows the large prize winning port count-up performance when the over winning performance is performed, but the large prize winning port count-up performance is performed not only when the over winning performance is performed but also when the game ball enters within the specified count number. Also, when the over winning performance occurs while the large prize winning port count-up performance corresponding to the game ball entering within the specified count number (especially the large prize winning port count-up performance corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure it so that the large prize winning port count-up performance corresponding to the over winning performance is started after the count-up of the large prize winning port count-up performance that has not yet been completed for 15 balls is completed (after the count-up of 15 balls is completed). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large winning slot 54 during the execution of the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning that is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the ball enters while the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the winning of the large winning slot 54 in the next round to start after the count-up of the large winning slot count-up performance that has not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls has been completed (after the count-up of 15 balls has been completed).

As a variation of this embodiment, when an over-winning occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-winning effect may be executed, but the number of prize balls awarded based on the over-winning may not be added to the cumulative number of prize balls. In other words, the cumulative number of prize balls may be configured to include the number of prize balls awarded based on game balls entering the large prize opening 54 within a specified count number, but not to include the number of prize balls awarded based on game balls entering the large prize opening 54 that exceed the specified count number.

Also, as a modified example of this embodiment, during the execution of a special game that is executed when the first hit occurs (the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit), even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, the over-winning performance may not be executed. Also, the types of special games include a high-profit special game (e.g., 16R special game) and a low-profit special game (e.g., 4R special game), and during the execution of a high-profit special game, the over-winning performance is executed when an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, and during the execution of a low-profit special game, the over-winning performance is not executed even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs. In addition, the types of round games include a long open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) at which a game ball of a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter, and a short open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 2 seconds) at which a game ball of a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter, and the over winning performance may be executed when an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs during the long open round game, and may not be executed even if an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs during the short open round game. Also, during the special game executed when a specific jackpot (variable jackpot) is won, an over winning performance may be executed when an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, and during the special game executed when a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot) is won, an over winning performance may not be executed even if an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs.

<B. General prize winning performance>
The general prize opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when a gaming ball wins in the general prize opening 64. The general prize opening winning effect includes a general prize opening normal winning effect and a general prize opening count-up effect.

≪B-1. General prize winning entrance normal prize winning performance≫
The normal general prize winning effect (also referred to as the "bonus prize winning effect") is an effect that suggests or notifies that a game ball has won the general prize winning effect 64. In the following, the entry of a game ball into the general prize winning effect 64 during the execution of a special game is also referred to as the "bonus prize winning," but the entry of a game ball into the general prize winning effect 64 other than during the execution of a special game (non-special game state) may also be referred to as the "bonus prize winning."

The types of bonus winning effects include a bonus winning image display effect and a bonus winning sound output effect. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the bonus winning effect of this embodiment. As a variation, the bonus winning effect may only include a bonus winning image (without a bonus winning sound), or only include a bonus winning sound (without a bonus winning image). This bonus winning effect is configured to be executed even during a round of play or while the big winning opening 54 is closed during a big win (during an interval period), and is configured to be executed simultaneously with the over winning effect if the big winning opening 54 is closed during a big win (during an interval period).

The bonus prize image display effect is an effect that displays an image (called a "bonus prize image") that suggests that a bonus prize has occurred. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a bonus prize image with the letters "+3pt" is displayed in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 on the screen as a bonus prize image, suggesting that "3" prize balls have been acquired based on the occurrence of a bonus prize. This allows the player to intuitively understand that a bonus prize has occurred.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect in which a sound ("bonus winning sound") indicating that a bonus winning has occurred is output from the speaker 11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a "beep" sound effect is output from the speaker 11 to indicate that a bonus winning has occurred.

As a modified example of this embodiment, multiple patterns of bonus winning effects may be provided. That is, multiple types of bonus winning images or multiple types of bonus winning sounds may be prepared, and one of the bonus winning images and bonus winning sounds may be selected by a lottery when a bonus win occurs. In that case, depending on the type of bonus winning image or bonus winning sound, a reserve consecutive suggestion, a probability variation suggestion, a round number suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, while there is only one type of bonus winning image, "+3pt," the bonus winning sounds include, in addition to "bipcon,""gachan,""ching," and "boom." Among these, when the bonus winning sound "boom" is heard, (1) the effect may also serve as an indication of a series of pending wins, (2) it may also serve as an indication that the currently executing jackpot is a sure-win jackpot, or (3) it may also serve as an indication that the currently executing jackpot is a 16R jackpot rather than a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of a bonus winning, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus winning consecutive win in the reserved ball is suggested according to the type of bonus winning sound (i.e., a bonus winning performance and a reserved consecutive win suggestion performance are used together). In this modified example, as multiple types of bonus winning sounds, bonus winning sound A (a "beep" sound effect) and bonus winning sound B (a "boom" sound effect) are prepared. Then, if there is no jackpot reserved when a bonus winning occurs (if a consecutive win in the reserved ball is not established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "0%". On the other hand, if there is a jackpot reserved when a bonus winning occurs (if a consecutive win in the reserved ball is established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%". That is, the bonus winning sound A is a sound of a normal mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that consecutive wins in the reserved state have not been established. The bonus winning sound B is a sound of a special mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that consecutive wins in the reserved state have been established. In addition, if a jackpot is reserved when a bonus winning occurs (if consecutive wins in the reserved state have been established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B may be "20%". In the modified example, the case where the consecutive wins suggestion performance is applied to the bonus winning sound output performance has been exemplified, but the consecutive wins suggestion performance may be applied to the bonus winning image display performance (for example, if "+3pt" is displayed in black letters as the bonus winning image display performance, the possibility that consecutive wins in the reserved state have not been established or are established is low, but if it is displayed in gold letters, the specification may be such that consecutive wins in the reserved state have been established or are established with a high possibility). In addition, in the above modified example, the bonus winning sound B was described as a reserve consecutive indication, but the bonus winning sound B may be specified to have the role of a probability variation indication or a round number indication. In that case, depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is set as follows: in the case of a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "10%". Depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, the selection rates of bonus winning sounds A and B may be set as follows: in the case of a 4R jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a 16R jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "80%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority consumption method" is adopted in which the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed preferentially over the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, and only the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern may be targeted as the activated reserved ball that is the target of the consecutive wins in the reserved ball. In addition, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of a special game is a specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also a specific game state (high base state), a reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed with a bonus winning that occurred during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In addition, assuming that the preceding activated reserved ball is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), when a specific reserve that is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included in the subsequent activated reserved ball as the first specific reserve, a reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed with a bonus winning that occurred during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot reservation in the subsequent operation reservation, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot reservation (the first jackpot reservation in the case of multiple jackpot reservations) is a low-profit jackpot, the reserved lottery suggestion performance may not be executed. In other words, if a reserved lottery consecutive suggestion performance occurs during the execution of a special game, it is certain that the reserved lottery will be consecutive with a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the bonus winning effect may suggest the possibility of winning a special jackpot in addition to the occurrence of a bonus winning. In other words, the bonus winning effect and the special jackpot suggestion effect may be used together. The special jackpot suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently active special game is a specific jackpot (special jackpot), that is, that the game will transition to a special jackpot state after the special game ends. In this modified example, for example, multiple types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set, and if the type of jackpot won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "70%", the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "0%". Also, if the type of jackpot won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "60%". In other words, the probability of a special winning sound (probability of transition to a special winning game state) increases by one step in the order of "bonus winning sound A" < "bonus winning sound B" < "bonus winning sound C". As a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be configured to indicate the number of electric supports to be granted after the special game ends, rather than the probability of a special winning sound.

<General prize entry count-up performance>
The general winning port count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the general winning port 64 during the execution of a special game during a consecutive winning streak, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is added with the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the game ball entering the general winning port 64. In this embodiment, since the specification is such that "three" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the general winning port 64 (the unit number of prize balls for the general winning port 64 is three), when a game ball enters the general winning port 64, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "three". In addition, as described above, the special game presentation control means 227 is equipped with a cumulative prize ball counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 (each time a general prize opening entry command is received from the main control board 100), "3", which corresponds to the unit prize ball number of the general prize opening 64, is added to the count value of the cumulative prize ball counter, and accordingly, a general prize opening count-up presentation is performed in which "3" is added to the value of the cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area 733.

Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a continuous general winning port count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 22, the general winning port count-up effect is an effect in which, when a gaming ball enters a general winning port 54, the value of the unit prize ball number awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into the general winning port 64 is added in a count-up format by "1" to the current value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 in a count-up manner. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative prize ball number is counted up one by one, such as "8000" → "8001" → "8002" → "8003".

In addition, the general winning port winning performance (bonus winning performance, general winning port count-up performance) is performed for the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 64 provided in the right area PA2 among the multiple general winning ports 61 to 64 during the execution of a special game. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 61 to 63 provided in the left area PA1 among the multiple general winning ports 61 to 64 during the execution of a special game, the general winning port winning performance is not performed. However, when a game ball enters one of the general winning ports 61 to 64 during the execution of a special game, the prize balls (3 balls) based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning port 61 to 64 are paid out regardless of the type of the general winning port 61 to 64 (regardless of whether the general winning port winning performance is executed or not).

In this embodiment, each time a bonus win occurs, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) awarded for that bonus win is added to the cumulative prize ball count, but this is not limited to the configuration. The number of prize balls based on all bonus wins that occur during one round of play (unit prize balls x number of bonus wins during one round of play) may be configured to be added to the cumulative prize ball count at the end of that round of play, or the number of prize balls based on all bonus wins that occur during one special game (unit prize balls x number of bonus wins during one special game) may be configured to be added to the cumulative prize ball count at the end of the final round of play or at the end of that special game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a board configuration is adopted in which the general prize opening 64 is located upstream of the second starting opening 51, but this configuration is not limited to this, and a board configuration in which the general prize opening 64 is located downstream of the second starting opening 51 may also be adopted. In that case, the general prize opening 64 may be located upstream of the large prize opening 54, or the general prize opening 64 may be located downstream of the large prize opening 54.

As a variation of this embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also serve as the operating opening (operating gate 53) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery is performed to determine whether the second starting opening 52 is opened, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 1 or 2) are paid out.

As described above, the general prize winning port winning effects (bonus prize winning effects, general prize winning port count-up effects) are effects that are triggered by a game ball entering the general prize winning port 64 when the currently active game state is a special game state, so even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port 64 when the currently active game state is a non-special game state, the general prize winning port winning effects (bonus prize winning effects, general prize winning port count-up effects) will not be performed. In other words, even if the currently active game state is a game state in which the game is mainly based on the variable display of the first special pattern (non-electric support state), or even if the currently active game state is a game state in which the game is mainly based on the variable display of the second special pattern (electric support state), the general prize winning port winning effects (bonus prize winning effects, general prize winning port count-up effects) will not be performed in response to a game ball entering the general prize winning port 64. In addition, when the currently active game state is a game state (electric support state) in which the main part of the game is the variable display of the second special symbol, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive wins (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the most recent special game) is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 on the screen, assuming that the consecutive wins state is still continuing. However, in this electric support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive wins is displayed, and even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64, the number of prize balls is not added to the cumulative number of prize balls (the general winning hole count-up performance is not performed), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not change (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the most recent special game is maintained).

Also, during the execution of a special game that is executed when the first win occurs (the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a jackpot), the bonus winning performance may not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning port 64. Also, the types of special games include a high-profit special game (e.g., a 16R special game) and a low-profit special game (e.g., a 4R special game), and during the execution of a high-profit special game, the bonus winning performance may be executed when a game ball enters the general winning port 64, and during the execution of a low-profit special game, the bonus winning performance may not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning port 64. In addition, the types of round games include a long-open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) at which a specified count number (full count) of game balls can enter or is easy to enter, and a short-open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 2 seconds) at which a specified count number (full count) of game balls can enter or is easy to enter, and the game may be configured such that a bonus prize winning performance is executed when a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the long-open round game, and a bonus prize winning performance is not executed even if a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the short-open round game. In addition, during the execution of a special game that is played when a specific jackpot (a special jackpot) is won, a bonus winning effect is executed by a game ball entering the general winning port 64, and during the execution of a special game that is played when a normal jackpot (a non-special jackpot) is won, the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning port 64.

<Other features of the winning performance>
Next, other features of the large prize winning slot winning performance and the general prize winning slot winning performance of this embodiment will be described. Note that since the large prize winning slot count-up performance and the general prize winning slot count-up performance are performances for the same display object (the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area 733), hereinafter, the large prize winning slot count-up performance and the general prize winning slot count-up performance may be collectively referred to simply as "count-up performance."

≪Count-up performance time≫
In this embodiment, the time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". In other words, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the large prize opening count-up performance is derived by multiplying the time value required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening 54, and the execution time of the large prize opening count-up performance is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". Similarly, the general winning port count-up effect is derived by multiplying the time value required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the general winning port 64, and the execution time of the general winning port count-up effect is "3 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds." For convenience, the execution time of the large winning port count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one large winning port count-up effect) will be abbreviated below as "count-up effect time A," and the execution time of the general winning port count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning port count-up effect) will be abbreviated below as "count-up effect time B." Here, the regular big prize winning performance, the over prize winning performance, and the bonus prize winning performance are configured not to be executed during the big prize start demo and the big prize end demo even when a special game is being played, and therefore, the big prize winning performance and the regular prize winning performance are also configured not to be executed during the big prize start demo and the big prize end demo even when a special game is being played.

(Relationship 1 of count-up performance time A)
The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as the "interval period") set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the big win end demo, and is a round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or end demo waiting time, which is a period during which the big prize winning hole 54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation. In this embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds" in common for all round games. In this embodiment, the count-up performance time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that even if a big prize winning hole count-up performance is performed based on a game ball entering the big prize winning hole 54 just before the end of a certain round game, the big prize winning hole count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. This reduces the possibility that the big prize entry port count-up performance will extend beyond the interval period and into the next round of play or the big prize end demo (if an over-winning occurs, there is a possibility that the interval period will be exceeded), and makes it possible to clearly define the division between each round of play or the division between the final round of play and the big prize end demo.

(Relationship 2 of count-up performance time A)
The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. As described above, the count-up performance time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (jackpot performances). The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final round of play in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round of play. In other words, the interval time after the end of the final round of play is set as the remaining time (grace time) of that round of play during which it is possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 54 and is validly detected (i.e., detected as a target for a prize ball payout, not judged as an illegal entry), but the execution time of the large prize end demo is set as the preparation time for the game (presentation mode) after the end of the special game that is separated from that round of play and during which it is not possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 54 and is validly detected. In this embodiment, the count-up performance time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that even if the jackpot entry port count-up performance is performed based on the game ball entering the jackpot entry port 54 just before the end of the final round game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final round game, or even if the jackpot entry port 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot entry port count-up performance is completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the jackpot entry port count-up performance is not performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation can be clearly defined. As a modified example, the entry of a game ball into the jackpot entry port 54 may be effectively detected within at least a portion of the execution time of the jackpot end demo.

(Relationship 3 of count-up performance time A)
In this embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the big prize opening 54 in one round of play, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of game balls in this one round of play (the big prize opening count-up performance for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round of play) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big prize end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of game balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the execution time of the big prize end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all big prize types (big prize during performance) as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that even if a plurality of game balls enter the jackpot entry port 54 in succession just before the end of the final round of play, and even if the jackpot entry port count-up performance is performed after the jackpot entry port 54 is closed after the final round of play (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot entry port count-up performance will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the jackpot entry port count-up performance will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation can be clearly defined.

In addition, even when the game balls enter the large prize opening 54 in a single round game in excess of the specified count number (when an over-winning occurs), it is preferable that the total time of the count-up performance time A for the cumulative count number (specified count number + over-winning number) in this single round game is set shorter than the execution time of the large prize end demo. In other words, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number in one round game plus the total time of the count-up performance time A for the over-winning number is set shorter than the execution time of the large prize end demo after the end of the round game. In the case where the large prize opening count-up performance is performed even after the closing of the large prize opening 54 after the final round game (even during the large prize end demo period), it is preferable that even if an over-winning occurs, the large prize opening count-up performance is ended within the execution time of the large prize end demo to clearly separate the end of the special game and the start of the variable display. Incidentally, the number of over wins is indefinite as it depends on the progress of the game (the launch status of the game balls and the flow status of the game balls), but even if it is assumed that there are 10 balls, which is the same as the specified count number, it is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the sum of the total time of count-up presentation time A for the specified count number in one round of play and the total time of count-up presentation time A for the number of over wins is 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo of 20 seconds), and it is configured in this way.

(Relationship 4 of count-up performance time A)
As a modified example of this embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the large prize opening 54 in one round of play, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of balls in this one round of play may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round of play. In this modified example, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified number of balls) = 4.5 seconds." Meanwhile, the interval time after the end of each round of play is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) in the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all rounds of play. In this modified example, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that even if multiple game balls enter the big prize 54 in succession just before the end of a certain round game, causing multiple big prize port count-up performances to be performed in succession, the big prize port count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, the big prize port count-up performance will not be performed beyond the interval period and will straddle the next round game or the big prize end demo, making it possible to clearly indicate the division between each round game or the division between the final round game and the big prize end demo.

Even if only one ball enters the large prize opening 54 in a single round of play (when only one over-winning ball occurs), it is preferable that the total time of the count-up performance time A for the cumulative count number (the specified count number + one over-winning ball) in this single round of play is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round of play. In other words, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number in one round of play plus the count-up performance time A for one over-winning ball (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4.95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round of play (6 seconds), so that even if an over-winning ball occurs, the large prize opening count-up performance ends within the interval period, making the division between rounds clear.

(Relationship 5 of count-up performance time A)
As a modified example of this embodiment, when a specified number of game balls (full count) enter the large prize opening 54 in all rounds of one special game, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the full count number (specified number of rounds x specified number of counts) occurring during the execution of this special game may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the large prize end demo. In this modified example, when the specified number of rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), if the game balls enter the large prize opening by the specified number of counts (10 balls) in all rounds, a total of 160 large prize opening count-up performances are executed. Therefore, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the total number of counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified number of counts) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds". On the other hand, in this modified example, the execution time of the large prize end demo is set to "120 seconds" in common to all types of large prizes (performances during large prizes). In this modified example, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for all counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demo. Therefore, if the large prize opening count-up performance is performed even after the large prize opening 54 is closed after the final round of play (even during the jackpot end demo period), even if the execution of the large prize opening count-up performance is delayed during a round of play or during the interval period due to consecutive entries of game balls into the large prize opening 54, it is guaranteed that all large prize opening count-up performances will be completed at least by the end of the jackpot end demo, making it possible to smoothly proceed with the performance during the jackpot.

<Priority of the first and second big winning slot count-up performance>
FIG. 23 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the large prize opening count-up performance. As shown in FIG. 23, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) enter the large prize opening 54 consecutively during the execution of a certain round game, two large prize opening count-up performances based on the consecutive winnings are executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the large prize opening count-up performance is established by the first game ball entering the large prize opening 54, the previous large prize opening count-up performance is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the large prize opening count-up performance is established by the second game ball entering the large prize opening 54, the subsequent large prize opening count-up performance is executed. The execution condition of the large prize opening count-up performance is a condition for starting the execution of the large prize opening count-up performance, and is established when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of a special game (entry of a game ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 541). At this time, if the execution condition of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is satisfied during the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance, the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is started after the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, without interrupting the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance. That is, in this embodiment, the priority of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the later large prize winning port count-up performance among the two earlier and later large prize winning port count-up performances, and the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is not started before the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, and the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is started after the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed. Note that, when the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is started after the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, it is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance and the later large prize winning port count-up performance to perform two large prize winning port count-ups continuously. However, as a modified example, after the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, the execution of the second large prize winning port count-up performance may be started after a predetermined time (infinite time) has elapsed, so that a clear division is made between the first large prize winning port count-up performance and the second large prize winning port count-up performance. Here, the large prize winning port count-up performance has been described, but the general prize winning port count-up performance may have the same specifications, and if the execution condition of the second general prize winning port count-up performance is satisfied during the execution of the first general prize winning port count-up performance, it is preferable to configure the execution of the second general prize winning port count-up performance to start after the execution of the first general prize winning port count-up performance is completed, without terminating the execution of the first general prize winning port count-up performance. Also, if the execution condition of the second general prize winning port count-up performance is satisfied during the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance, it is preferable to configure the execution of the second general prize winning port count-up performance to start after the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, without terminating the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance. Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the subsequent large prize slot count-up performance are met during the execution of the previous general prize slot count-up performance, it is preferable to configure the execution of the subsequent large prize slot count-up performance to begin after the execution of the previous general prize slot count-up performance has finished, without interrupting the execution of the previous general prize slot count-up performance.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if the execution conditions of the later large prize entry port count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance, the execution of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next large prize entry port count-up performance may be started. In other words, the priority of the later large prize entry port count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance. In that case, it is preferable to forcibly switch the count value to the final value of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance or the initial value of the later large prize entry port count-up performance at the time when the execution of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance is interrupted, and start the later large prize entry port count-up performance from that point. In this modified example, the large prize entry port count-up performance has been described, but the general prize entry port count-up performance may also have the same specifications, and if the execution conditions of the later general prize entry port count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the earlier general prize entry port count-up performance, the execution of the earlier general prize entry port count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next general prize entry port count-up performance may be started. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning slot count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning slot count-up performance, the execution of the previous large winning slot count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning slot count-up performance may be started. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent large winning slot count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning slot count-up performance, the execution of the previous general winning slot count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next large winning slot count-up performance may be started.

(Emphasis on cumulative winning balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the highlighting effect of this embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a case where an over winning effect is executed during the execution of the highlighting effect, and (B) in the figure shows a case where a bonus winning effect is executed during the execution of the highlighting effect. In this embodiment, when the value of the cumulative number of winning balls during the consecutive wins reaches a predetermined specific value, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the large winning port 54 or the general winning port 64 during the execution of the special game, a highlighting effect is executed to notify that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached the specific value. Note that the specific value is a multiple value of the predetermined number of winning balls (10,000). In other words, each time the current value of the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a multiple value of the predetermined number of winning balls (10,000, 20,000, 30,000, ...), a highlighting effect is executed. Therefore, the highlighting effect may be called a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighting display may be called a specific value corresponding display. In this embodiment, even if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value as a result of an over winning or bonus winning, an emphasis effect is executed, and in that case, the emphasis effect and the over winning effect or bonus winning effect are executed in conjunction with each other.

As shown in FIG. 24, the types of highlight effects include a highlight display effect in which a specific value reached by the cumulative number of winning balls (in the illustrated example, "20,000 pts") is enlarged in a highlight display area 735 in the center of the screen, and a highlight sound output effect in which a special sound (in the illustrated example, the sound "In top form") is output from the speaker 11.

The highlighting of the specific value continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and even if the cumulative prize ball display is updated (added) during that time due to the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 54 or the general prize opening 64, the highlighting is not updated (added). At this time, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of "cumulative prize ball display"<"highlighting"<"rounddisplay"."Layer" means each layer of a hierarchical structure that specifies the display priority of each image that constitutes the entire image. The higher the display priority of each layer, the higher the layer (the forward side as seen from the player), and the lower the display priority of each layer, the lower the layer (the rear side as seen from the player). In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the cumulative prize ball display are shown without being superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed to further emphasize the highlighting, and in that case, the highlighting may be configured to be displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball display (the highlighting is displayed covering part or all of the cumulative prize ball display) according to the above priority.

As shown in FIG. 24, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and when an over-winning or bonus winning occurs during the highlight display, the highlight image and the over-winning or bonus winning image are displayed simultaneously in parallel. When the highlight image and the over-winning or bonus winning image are displayed simultaneously, the highlight image may be given a higher priority than the over-winning or bonus winning image, or the over-winning or bonus winning image may be given a higher priority than the highlight image. In FIG. 24, the highlight display and the over-winning or bonus winning image are shown without being superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed to further emphasize the highlight display. In that case, the highlight display may be configured to be displayed in front of the over-winning or bonus winning image according to the above priority (the highlight display may cover part or all of the over-winning or bonus winning image).

In addition, if an over-winning occurs while a special sound is being output, the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is output overlapping with the special sound. When a special sound and an over-winning sound or bonus winning sound overlap, the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound may be set to a lower volume compared to the volume of the special sound with a higher priority, and vice versa, the volume of the special sound may be set to a lower volume compared to the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound with a higher priority. In this case, the volume of the sound with the lower priority (the lower volume) may be set to essentially "0".

<Over-winning effect/bonus winning effect when an error occurs>
In this embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, the possibility of executing the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is controlled according to the type of error. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining the types of errors in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the gaming machine are set as "door/frame open error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection/short circuit power supply error", "excessive winning error", "payout error", etc. Note that the above error types are only examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

A door/frame open error occurs when the glass frame 5, front frame 2, or rear set board 30 is open relative to the outer frame 1, or when there is a break or malfunction in the door open switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5, the frame open switch that detects the opening of the front frame 2, or the rear set open switch that detects the opening of the rear set board 30. This door/frame open error is cleared by checking for any abnormalities in the gaming machine and closing the glass frame 5, front frame 2, and rear set board 30.

Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the radio wave sensor detects radio waves, or when the magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or broken. Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors are cleared by checking for abnormalities in the gaming machine and turning the power back on.

A power supply error occurs when the radio wave sensor and the various switches on the game board are broken, short-circuited, or malfunction. A power supply error can be cleared by checking that there are no abnormalities in the game machine and then turning the power back on.

The excessive winning error is an error that occurs when an excessive number of game balls enter various winning ports. The excessive winning error is released when the game machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned back on. Here, the excessive winning error includes an excessive winning error at the large winning port 54 (also called the "large winning port excessive winning error") and an excessive winning error at the general winning ports 61 to 64 (also called the "general winning port excessive winning error"). For example, the excessive winning error at the large winning port is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 30 balls) enter the large winning port 54 during the execution of one round of play. The excessive winning error at the general winning port is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 30 balls) enter the general winning ports 61 to 63 per unit time (e.g., 30 seconds), or when a specific number of game balls (e.g., 60 balls) enter the general winning port 64 per unit time (e.g., 30 seconds). Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged so that game balls can enter more easily than the general winning openings 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has a more generous error judgment value (the number of game balls that is judged to be an error) based on the number of balls entering per unit time. In this embodiment, when a large winning opening excessive winning error occurs, or when a ball enters the large winning opening 54 when the large winning opening 54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, when an abnormal winning is detected regarding the large winning opening 54 (when an abnormal winning is judged), an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred is output from the external information terminal board 600. On the other hand, when a general winning opening excessive winning error occurs, that is, when an abnormal winning is detected regarding the general winning openings 61 to 64 (when an abnormal winning is judged), the external information terminal board 600 does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board 600 will be described later.

A payout error is an error that occurs when there is a problem with the payout of prize balls. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball tray 9 is full of game balls (full tank switch is on), a ball jam/ball jam error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a no-ball error in which game balls are not replenished from the game island. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. Notification level 1 is the level when the full tank switch remains on for 30 seconds after it is turned on. In notification level 1, only the voice notification "Please remove the balls" is executed. In this notification level 1, even if a ball enters the large prize opening 54 or the general prize openings 61 to 64, the payout of prize balls is not restricted (the payout of prize balls is not stopped). If the on state exceeds 30 seconds, the notification level changes to 2, and not only is an audio notification of "Please remove the balls," but also an image notification is displayed on the performance display device 70, displaying an image of "an image encouraging the player to remove the balls from the lower ball tray." Furthermore, even if a ball enters the large prize opening 54 or the general prize openings 61 to 64, the payout of prize balls is restricted (payout of prize balls is stopped). As a variation, only an image notification may be displayed at notification level 1, and both an image notification and an audio notification may be displayed at notification level 2. For ball jamming/ball jamming errors in the prize ball payout unit 34 and ball shortage errors where game balls cannot be replenished from the game island, payout of prize balls is restricted (payout of prize balls is stopped) even if a ball enters the large prize opening 54 or the general prize openings 61 to 64.

As shown in FIG. 25, the various errors are classified into "first error," "second error," and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. A first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) of the error is set to a medium level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing. The first errors include a "door/frame open error." A second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) of the error is set to a high level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing. The second errors include a "magnetic sensor error," "radio wave sensor error," "break/short circuit power supply error," and "excessive winning error." A third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) of the error is set to a low level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing. The third errors include a "payout error."

Here, when the above-mentioned error occurs in the gaming machine, various kinds of error notification such as image effects and sound effects are performed, and specifically, the contents of the error are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70, and an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at an error volume. Note that, as a modified example of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to flash at an error brightness.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine has a first error (door/frame open error), even if an over win or bonus win occurs, a part of the over win effect or a part of the bonus win effect is not performed. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, among the over win effect and bonus win effect, the over win image display effect and the bonus win image display effect are allowed to be executed, but the over win sound output effect and the bonus win sound output effect are restricted to be executed. Even if an over win or bonus win occurs during the first error, the over win effect and the bonus win effect are not executed, so that the gaming machine does not miss the first error state. In this case, the count-up effect (the large win port count-up effect and the general win port count-up effect) is allowed to be executed. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating that it is the first error is displayed to notify that it has become the first error, but it is not displayed on the entire screen, but is displayed using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over winning image or the bonus winning image, but they can all be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can also be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound is being output to notify that a first error has occurred, the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is not output (or is low in volume). Note that if an over winning or bonus winning occurs when the gaming machine is in the first error state, the payout of prize balls based on this over winning or bonus winning will be performed.

In addition, when the gaming machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short circuit power supply error, excess winning error), even if an over winning or bonus winning occurs, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not performed. In other words, when the gaming machine has a second error, the execution of both the over winning image display effect and the over winning sound output effect as the over winning effect is restricted, and the execution of both the bonus winning image display effect and the bonus winning sound output effect as the bonus winning effect is restricted. Even if an over winning occurs during the second error, the over winning effect and the like are not performed, so that the gaming machine does not miss the second error state. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (the large winning port count-up effect and the general winning port count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when the second error occurs, an error image indicating that it is a second error is displayed on the full screen to notify that the second error has occurred, so that the over winning image, the bonus winning image, and the count-up effect are not displayed. Additionally, while the error notification sound is being output to notify the player of the second error, the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is not output. If an over-winning or bonus winning occurs when the gaming machine is in the second error state, the payout of prize balls based on the over-winning or bonus winning will be performed.

In addition, even if the gaming machine is in a state where it is unable to pay out prize balls due to the third error (payout error), if an over-winning or bonus winning performance occurs, the over-winning or bonus winning performance is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any particular hindrance to continuing the game, and there is no risk of the player suffering any disadvantage, so if the over-winning or bonus winning performance is restricted by the error notification, there is a possibility that the interest in the game will be reduced. In this case, the count-up performance (the large winning port count-up performance and the general winning port count-up performance) is also executed. However, if an over-winning or bonus winning occurs when the gaming machine is in the third error state, the payout of prize balls based on the over-winning or bonus winning is not performed.

In this embodiment, when an over win or bonus win occurs while the gaming machine is in a "specific error", some or all of the over win effects are restricted according to the type of error that has occurred, and some or all of the bonus win effects are restricted. In other words, when the first error among the specific errors occurs, the execution of one or some of the element effects (over win sound output effect) of the over win effects is restricted, and when the second error occurs, the execution of multiple or all of the element effects (over win sound output effect, over win image display effect, etc.) of the over win effects is restricted. This is because, in this embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error is an error type that has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. The specific error may be an error type that prohibits the progress of the game. The specific error may also be an error type that occurs when an abnormality suspected of cheating (cheating) is detected. The specific error may also be an error type that is resolved by cutting off and re-turning the power.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over winning effect, for example, the error notification sound may be output preferentially over the over winning sound (for example, the sound level of the error notification sound may be set higher than that of the over winning sound), and the error notification image may be displayed preferentially over the over winning image (for example, the layer priority of the error notification image may be set higher than that of the over winning image).

<Over-winning performance at the end of the jackpot>
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over winning performance is performed at the end of the big win. A detection effective period (big winning port effective period) is set for each round game, during which the detection of the game ball by the big winning port switch 541 is effective. This detection effective period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball that entered just before the big winning port 54 is closed to reach the big winning port switch 541. In this embodiment, the detection effective period of the big winning port switch 541 is set across the entire period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening to the closing of the big winning port 54) and the interval period from the end of the round game (from the closing of the big winning port 54) until a predetermined time has elapsed. By setting this detection effective period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the big winning port switch 541 during the interval period after the end of the round period, the entry of the game ball into the big winning port 54 is treated as effective (it is subject to the payout of prize balls). In other words, the "period of execution of a round game (period of opening the large prize opening)" and the above-mentioned "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as a continuous detection valid period. Also, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In this embodiment, the period within the interval is set as an over prize performance permissible period in which the execution of the over prize performance is permitted when the execution timing of the over prize performance arrives. On the other hand, the period outside the interval is set as an over prize performance prohibited period in which the execution of the over prize performance is prohibited even if the execution timing of the over prize performance arrives.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(A), when the big prize opening switch 541 detects a game ball (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) that exceeds the specified count number during the interval period after the end of the final round of play, if the execution timing of the over prize production arrives during this interval period, the execution of the over prize production during this interval period is permitted. However, if the performance time of the over prize production (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the start timing of the execution of the over prize production to the end timing of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the over prize production by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over prize production at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, when the over prize production includes an over prize image and an over prize sound, the over prize image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the over prize sound may be output without interruption. In addition, like the over-winning effect, the large winning slot count-up effect may also be executed in response to an over-winning within the interval period.In that case, if the time from the start of the large winning slot count-up effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the time from the end of the interval period to the start of the large winning slot count-up effect, it is not possible to execute all of the large winning slot count-up effect by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the large winning slot count-up effect at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26(B), even if the big prize opening switch 541 detects a game ball that exceeds the specified count number (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) during the interval period after the end of the final round of play, when the timing for executing the over prize effect arrives during the big prize end demo period after the lapse of this interval period, the execution of the over prize effect during this big prize end demo period is prohibited. However, during the big prize end demo period, only the execution of the over prize effect is prohibited, and prize balls based on this over prize are still paid out. Also, in the above case, the execution of the big prize opening count-up effect may also be prohibited, just like the over prize effect.

As a modified example of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period may be set as an over-winning performance allowable period in which the execution of the over-winning performance is permitted, and the over-winning performance may be executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the over-winning performance allowable period. As an example, only the first 5 seconds of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period may be set as the over-winning performance allowable period, and the following 15 seconds may be set as the over-winning performance prohibited period. As a further modified example, the over-winning performance allowable period and the over-winning performance prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the 2 seconds interval period may be set as the over-winning performance allowable period, and the following 0.5 seconds may be set as the over-winning performance prohibited period, and the following jackpot end demo period may also be set as the over-winning performance prohibited period. As a further modified example, considering that the timing when the large prize opening switch 541 detects a game ball exceeding the specified count number and the timing when the over prize effect is executed are synchronized, if the large prize opening switch 541 detects a game ball exceeding the specified count number within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, the over prize effect is always executed (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period), and when it is executed, as described above, if the performance time of the over prize effect is longer than the time from the start of the execution of the over prize effect to the end of the interval period, the over prize effect is forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period (however, an over prize image and an over prize sound are provided as the over prize effect). In this case, the over winning image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased midway through), and the over winning sound may be output without interruption), and if a game ball is detected in the large winning port 54 during the large winning end demo period (if a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning port switch 541), the over winning effect may be configured not to be executed, and in this case, the large winning port count-up effect is also executed without fail if a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning port switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period), and when it is executed, as described above, if the time from the start timing of the execution of the large winning port count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the performance time of the large winning port count-up effect,
Based on the end of the interval period, the large prize opening count-up presentation may be configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period, and may be configured not to be executed if a game ball is detected in the large prize opening 54 during the large win end demo period (if a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large prize opening switch 541).

<<Bonus prize performance at the end of the big win>>
27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not bonus winning performance is performed at the end of the big win. In this embodiment, the period of the round period and the period of the interval period are set as bonus winning performance allowable periods in which the bonus winning performance is allowed to be performed when the bonus winning performance execution timing arrives. On the other hand, the period of the demo period at the end of the big win is set as a bonus winning performance prohibition period in which the bonus winning performance is prohibited from being performed even if the bonus winning performance execution timing arrives.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, if the timing for executing the bonus winning effect arrives within this interval period, the bonus winning effect is permitted to be executed within this interval period. However, if the performance time of the bonus winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the start timing of the bonus winning effect execution to the end timing of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the bonus winning effect by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the bonus winning effect includes a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. Also, like the bonus prize winning effect, the large prize winning port count-up effect may be executed in response to a bonus prize winning within the interval period. In that case, if the time from the start of the large prize winning port count-up effect execution to the end of the interval period is longer than the time from the end of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the large prize winning port count-up effect by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the large prize winning port count-up effect at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general prize opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, if the timing for executing the bonus prize winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the interval period has elapsed, the execution of the bonus prize winning effect during this jackpot end demo period will be prohibited. However, during the jackpot end demo period, only the execution of the bonus prize winning effect is prohibited, and prize balls based on this bonus prize will still be paid out. Also, in the above case, the execution of the bonus prize winning effect may also be prohibited, just like the bonus prize winning effect.

As a modified example of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period may be set as a bonus winning performance allowable period in which the bonus winning performance is allowed, and the bonus winning performance may be executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the bonus winning performance allowable period. As an example, only the first 5 seconds of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period may be set as the bonus winning performance allowable period, and the following 15 seconds may be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period. As a further modified example, the bonus winning performance allowable period and the bonus winning performance prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the 2 seconds interval period may be set as the bonus winning performance allowable period, and the following 0.5 seconds may be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period, and the following jackpot end demo period may also be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period. As a further modified example, considering that the timing when the game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641 is synchronized with the timing when the bonus winning effect is executed, if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, the bonus winning effect is always executed (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period), and when it is executed, as described above, if the performance time of the bonus winning effect is longer than the time from the start of the bonus winning effect to the end of the interval period, the bonus winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period (however, if the bonus winning effect includes a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption), during the jackpot end demo period. In addition, if a game ball is detected at the right general winning port 64 (if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641), the bonus winning effect may be configured not to be executed. In this case, the general winning port count-up effect is also always executed if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play (excluding a ball entering at the end of the interval period). When the general winning port count-up effect is executed, as described above, if the performance time of the general winning port count-up effect is longer than the time from the start of the execution of the general winning port count-up effect to the end of the interval period, the general winning port count-up effect may be forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. In addition, if a game ball is detected at the right general winning port 64 during the jackpot end demo period (if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641), the bonus winning effect may be configured not to be executed.

On the other hand, during the jackpot start demo period, theoretically, the game ball will not enter the large prize opening 54 (because over-entry will not occur), so the large prize opening entry performance (over-entry performance) will not be executed during the jackpot start demo period. Even during the jackpot start demo period, it is possible for a ball to enter the general prize opening 64, but even if a ball enters the general prize opening 64, the general prize opening entry performance (bonus prize entry performance) will not be executed during the jackpot start demo period. Furthermore, if a ball enters during the jackpot start demo period, no matter when the ball enters (especially if the ball enters at the end of the jackpot start demo period), the general prize opening entry performance (bonus prize entry performance) corresponding to that ball will not be executed in the first round of play after the jackpot start demo ends, and furthermore, the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to that ball is not included in the cumulative prize ball count display.

(Launch handle detection)
A game using this gaming machine PM is executed on the premise that a player rotates the launch handle 12 to launch a game ball toward the game area PA. The launch handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the launch handle 12. The touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the launch handle 12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the launch handle 12, it outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 300 to permit the energization of the launch solenoid. In addition, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the launch handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits a presentation control command (handle state presentation command) to the presentation control board 200. As a result, the presentation control board 200 identifies whether the player is touching the launch handle 12 (whether the launch handle 12 is being operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. Even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), when a game ball that was previously launched enters the large winning port 54 and a game ball that exceeds the specified count number (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) is detected (when an over winning occurs), the performance supervision means 220 executes the over winning effect. Similarly, even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), when a game ball that was previously launched enters the general winning port 64 and a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641 (when a bonus winning occurs), the performance supervision means 220 executes the bonus winning effect. That is, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over winning and the bonus winning. Therefore, even if the player's firing of game balls is stopped by the closing of the large prize opening 54 (ending the round of play), if an over prize or bonus prize occurs within that interval period, an over prize or bonus prize presentation will be generated, preventing the player from feeling dissatisfied or distrustful that no prize presentation is performed even though the game ball actually enters the large prize opening 54 or general prize opening 64.

(Game start preparation performance)
In this embodiment, when the currently executed game state is a normal game state (non-special game state), a standby demo performance (a demo performance waiting for customers) is executed when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more. "The game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more" means, for example, a period in which there are no special symbol activation reserved balls for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the special symbol variable display is not performed for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning hole for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the game ball is not shot for a predetermined time or more, etc. The end condition of this standby demo performance is when the interruption state of the game is released (when the game is started or resumed), and corresponds to, for example, when the touch sensor detects that the player touches the launch handle 12 (operates the launch handle 12) or when a ball enters a specific winning hole, the first starting hole 51 or the second starting hole 52, but does not correspond to the passage of a game ball through the operation gate 53 or the entry of a ball into the general winning holes 61 to 64 (the standby demo performance does not end even if a game ball passes through the operation gate 53 or enters the general winning holes 61 to 64). Also, during the standby demo performance, the volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than in the state where the standby demo performance is not in progress (the state where the game is being played), but it is possible to display a volume adjustment screen described later, and the standby demo performance is configured not to end even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, since there is no need to perform more effects than necessary when gameplay is interrupted, the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in this state, the standby demo performance is maintained (indicating that gameplay is interrupted), and the volume related to the performance after the standby demo performance ends (while gameplay is in progress, i.e., while the patterns are changing) is visualized and can be adjusted even during the standby demo performance.

Figure 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. When the touch sensor detects the touch of the player during the execution of the standby demo effect (when the handle state effect command is received from the main control board 100), the effect control means 220 ends the execution of the standby demo effect and starts the execution of the game start preparation effect (launch detection effect). The game start preparation effect is, for example, an effect that gives the player a sense of starting or resuming a game (an effect that welcomes the player) by displaying the word "Welcome" on the screen or outputting the sound "Welcome" from the speaker 11. This game start preparation effect is an effect that is executed immediately after the standby demo effect ends, and like this standby demo effect, it is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state).

In this embodiment, in a game state where a game start preparation effect can be performed (non-special game state), the over prize effect or bonus prize effect is not executed, and in a game state where an over prize effect or bonus prize effect can be executed (special game state), the game start preparation effect is not executed. In other words, the game start preparation effect and the over prize effect or bonus prize effect are not executed in the same game state, and naturally, they are not executed at the same time.

(Sound notification when power is restored after a power outage)
In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game, a power recovery notification effect is executed to notify the fact that the power has been restored from the power outage when the power is restored from the power outage. This power outage recovery notification effect is, for example, an effect in which an image (power recovery notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is displayed, and a sound (power recovery notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored is output from the speaker 11. The image indicating that the power has been restored is referred to as a power recovery notification image, a power outage recovery image, or a power outage recovery screen, and the sound indicating that the power has been restored from the speaker 11 is referred to as a power recovery notification sound or a power outage recovery sound. In this embodiment, the execution time of the power recovery effect (output time of the power recovery notification sound) is set to "30 seconds", which is longer than the maximum time of "29 seconds" for one round game (long open round game). For example, if a power outage occurs during a predetermined round of play and the power is restored in the middle of the predetermined round of play (if the game is resumed in the middle of the predetermined round of play), the power outage recovery sound is output at least for the remaining time of the round of play, so that the player can be sure that the round of play has been resumed. Here, if the power outage recovery sound and the big win performance sound compete with each other, it is preferable to prioritize the power outage recovery sound over the big win performance sound (for example, output the power outage recovery sound at a louder sound level than the big win performance sound, or stop outputting the big win performance sound). In addition, when the power outage recovery sound is output, even if an over win occurs in the restarted round of play, the power outage recovery sound may be configured to be prioritized over the over win sound (for example, output the power outage recovery sound at a louder sound level than the over win sound, or stop outputting the over win sound). Also, in order to make it possible to recognize that a jackpot is occurring, it is desirable to configure the display time of the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored to be shorter than the output time of the sound (power return notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored, and for example, it is desirable to set the display time of the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored to 15 seconds and the output time of the sound (power return notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored to 30 seconds. Also, when the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is displayed, the effects during a jackpot are not displayed, so the cumulative number of winning balls display, highlight display, over winning image, and bonus winning image are not displayed. In addition, when the power is restored after a power outage, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held before the power outage is erased, so when the display of the image indicating that power has been restored when the power was restored (power return notification image) ends and the performance during the jackpot is displayed, the cumulative prize ball count display will start again from zero ("0"), and the display conditions for the highlighting (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset. Therefore, even if the cumulative prize ball count display before the power outage was in a situation where a specific value would be reached with one more ball entering the large prize opening 54 (for example, 9999 just short of 10,000), during a jackpot after the power outage and restoration, the cumulative prize ball count display will be zero, so even if one ball enters the large prize opening 54 in this situation, the highlighting will not be displayed. In addition, when the display of the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored after the power has been turned off ends and the effects during a jackpot are displayed, if a ball enters the large prize winning port 54 or the general prize winning port 64 while the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is being displayed, the prize balls corresponding to the ball that entered will be paid out. However, while the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is being displayed, the over prize winning image, the bonus prize winning image, the cumulative number of prize balls, and the count-up effect (large prize winning port count-up effect, general prize winning port count-up effect) are being displayed. etc., are not performed, and in this case, (1) even when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) has ended and the jackpot performance has been restored, the cumulative prize ball count display may start from zero, or (2) when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) has ended and the jackpot performance has been restored, the cumulative prize ball count display may be a cumulative prize ball count display added with the numerical value for the prize balls paid out corresponding to balls entering the large prize opening 54 and the general prize opening 64 while the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is being displayed. In addition, if a power outage occurs when a count-up effect (big prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) is being performed before the power outage and has not yet ended, and the payout of prize balls corresponding to the count-up effect is also being performed and has not yet been completed (for example, when the count-up effect and payout of 300 prize balls is in the middle of being performed), the remaining count-up effect that was being performed before the power outage will not be performed after the power is restored, but the prize balls that have not yet been paid out will be paid out. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) is a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch), and when the power outage recovery involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in the combination "331".

(Right hit notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17 above, a right-hit notification image is displayed in the right-hit display area 731 of the screen, which urges the player to hit the ball to the right (to fire the game ball at the right-side area PA2). In addition, an over-winning image is displayed in the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen when an over-winning occurs. The right-hit display area 731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-hit notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. In addition, during the execution of the special game, a bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B of the screen when a bonus winning occurs. The right-hit display area 731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-hit notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over win or bonus win occurs during the execution of a special game, the over win image or bonus win image will not overlap with the right-hit notification image, and one piece of information will not obscure the other.

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the player simultaneously operates the left and right keys of the cross key during the execution of a special game, volume adjustment images showing a plurality of volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by the player operating the left or right key, it becomes possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker 11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, operating the right key increases the volume level, and operating the left key decreases the volume level.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether a special game is being played or not, more specifically, whether the over-winning performance is being played (the over-winning sound is being output) or the bonus winning performance is being played (the bonus winning sound is being output), the player is configured to be able to adjust the volume of the speaker 11 by operating the left and right keys. Therefore, when the player adjusts the volume during the over-winning performance (the over-winning sound is being output) or the bonus winning performance (the bonus winning sound is being output), the adjusted volume level changes in real time as the volume level of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound currently being output. In other words, the volume adjustment operation by the player changes the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound midway, making it possible to make the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound different before and after the volume adjustment operation. In addition, the sound image display area 736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the sound adjustment image and the over winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Similarly, the sound image display area 736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the sound adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, when an over winning or a bonus winning occurs during the execution of a special game, the over winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one information does not hide the other information. The highlighting and the volume adjustment screen are displayed superimposed when executed simultaneously, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when they are displayed superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighting (part or all of the highlighting is displayed in a form hidden by the volume adjustment screen).

<Conditions for excess winning errors at general winning slots>
The "error occurrence condition" is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition has been established, the main control board 100 transmits a predetermined performance control command (error performance designation command) to the performance control board 200, and the performance control board 200 performs an error notification performance.

Below, the condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described as one of the multiple error occurrence conditions. In this embodiment, among the multiple general winning openings 61 to 64, the condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions.

The condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning ports 61-63 is met when the number of game balls entering the general winning ports 61-63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning port switch 611) reaches a first specified number. The first specified number is set to "30 balls", for example. In other words, when 30 game balls enter the general winning ports 61-63 within 30 seconds, the condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning ports 61-63 is met.

The condition for an excessive winning error at the general winning port 64 is met when the number of winning balls entering the general winning port 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of winning balls detected by the right general winning port switch 641) reaches a second specified number. The second specified number is set to "60 balls", for example. In other words, when 60 game balls enter the general winning port 64 within 30 seconds, the condition for an excessive winning error at the general winning port 64 is met.

As a modification of this embodiment, the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of game state currently being executed. For example, in a game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main focus of the game, the ball entry frequency per unit time should be relatively higher in the general winning openings 61 to 63 than in the general winning opening 64, so the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is set to have a higher threshold value for the condition establishment than the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64. In that case, even if a game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under a predetermined condition (a predetermined ball entry frequency), the excess winning error condition is not established, but if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 under a predetermined condition (a predetermined ball entry frequency), an excess winning error will occur. On the other hand, in a game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main focus, the ball entry frequency per unit time should be relatively higher in the general winning opening 64 than in the general winning openings 61 to 63, so the threshold for the condition establishment is set to be higher for the excess winning error occurrence condition in the general winning opening 64 than for the excess winning error occurrence condition in the general winning openings 61 to 63. In that case, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 under specific conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excess winning error does not occur, but if a game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 64 under specific conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excess winning error will occur.

Even if the excess winning error occurrence condition for the general winning slots 61-63 and the excess winning error occurrence condition for the general winning slot 64 are set to different conditions, it is preferable to set the excess winning error release condition for the general winning slots 61-63 and the excess winning error release condition for the right general winning slot 64 to the same condition. Examples of error release conditions include conditions under which the error notification presentation ends (for example, 30 seconds have passed since the error notification screen was displayed/error notification sound began), conditions under which the on output of the outer end signal related to the excess winning error is stopped (conditions under which the output becomes off, for example, 300 seconds have passed since the output began), and power is turned off and then restored.

<Overlap and bonus prizes>
FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining the overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production. In this embodiment, when the over prize production and the bonus prize production occur at approximately the same timing, the over prize production and the bonus prize production are configured to be overlappingly executed. The overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over prize production and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus prize production overlap, and includes the case where the execution periods of both productions overlap in their entirety and the case where the execution periods of both productions overlap in part. The illustrated example shows a case where the execution period of the over prize production and the execution period of the bonus prize production overlap in part. In addition, when the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect are executed in a overlapping manner, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A in which the over prize winning image is displayed and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B in which the bonus prize winning image is displayed are provided as separate and independent display areas, so that the over prize winning image and the bonus prize winning image are not displayed one behind the other. On the other hand, the over prize winning sound and the bonus prize winning sound may be output in an overlapping manner, or only one of them may be output. In the case of the specification of outputting only one of the sounds, the earlier winning may be prioritized (i.e., if the earlier winning is a winning in the large winning opening 54 and the later winning is a winning in the general winning opening 64, the over winning sound is prioritized, and if the earlier winning is a winning in the general winning opening 64 and the later winning is a winning in the large winning opening 54, the bonus winning sound is prioritized), or the later winning may be prioritized (i.e., if the earlier winning is a winning in the large winning opening 54 and the later winning is a winning in the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning sound is prioritized, and if the earlier winning is a winning in the general winning opening 64 and the later winning is a winning in the large winning opening 54, the over winning sound is prioritized). In the case of prioritizing the earlier winning, for example, if a later winning occurs while the winning sound for the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound for the later winning may be output after the winning sound for the earlier winning is completely output, or the winning sound for the later winning may not be output at all. When priority is given to a later winning, for example, if a later winning occurs while the winning sound for an earlier winning is being output, the winning sound for the earlier winning may be interrupted when the later winning occurs, and then the output of the winning sound for the later winning may begin.

As a variation of this embodiment, if an over prize and a bonus prize occur at approximately the same time, the over prize image and the bonus prize image may be configured not to overlap. In other words, if an over prize and a bonus prize occur at approximately the same time, the display period (or display timing) of the over prize image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus prize image may not overlap. In this case, this includes cases where the display periods of both images do not overlap in their entirety and cases where only a portion of the display periods of both images do not overlap.

In addition, when the over prize image and the bonus prize image are not displayed overlapping, the bonus prize image and the over prize image that won first (the one in which the game ball was detected first) may be preferentially displayed. Alternatively, as the opposite configuration, when the over prize image and the bonus prize image are not displayed overlapping, the bonus prize image and the over prize image that won last (the one in which the game ball was detected last) may be preferentially displayed.

(Multiple Over Wins)
FIG. 32 is a time chart in the case where over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. In this embodiment, when over winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), the over winning performance is performed for the first over winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), but the over winning performance is not performed for the second or subsequent over winning (the winning of the 12th or subsequent game ball). In other words, when over winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, only the first over winning performance is allowed, and the second or subsequent over winning performance is restricted (regulated). However, the prize ball payout due to over winning is performed twice, and the large winning port count-up performance due to over winning is also performed twice (the first large winning port count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if multiple bonus wins occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus win performance is performed for each bonus win, two bonus wins are awarded, and the general win slot count-up performance is performed twice (two performances are performed without interrupting the first general win slot count-up performance). In other words, if multiple bonus wins occur within a predetermined period, the execution of all multiple bonus win performances is permitted. As a modified example, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, the over-winning performance is performed for the first over-winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), and the over-winning performance is also performed for the second and subsequent over-winnings (the winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls). On the other hand, when a second over-winning occurs during the execution of the first over-winning performance, (1) the execution of the second over-winning performance is started after the first over-winning performance is finished (completed), or (2) even if the first over-winning performance is in the middle, it may be interrupted by the second over-winning, and then the execution of the second over-winning performance may be started. In that case, in either case of (1) or (2), it is preferable that the prize ball payout due to the over-winning is performed twice, and the large winning port count-up performance due to the over-winning is also performed twice (the large winning port count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting the first large winning port count-up performance). Furthermore, when multiple bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period, the bonus prize performance is performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize performance is performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent bonus prizes are won during the execution of the first bonus prize performance, (3) the execution of the second bonus prize performance is started after the first bonus prize performance is finished (after it is completely completed), or (4) even if the first bonus prize performance is in the middle, it may be interrupted by the second bonus prize, and then the execution of the second bonus prize performance may be started. In that case, in either case of (3) or (4), it is preferable that the prize ball payout due to the bonus prize is performed twice, and the general prize winning port count-up performance due to the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize winning port count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting it).

<External information signal>
In this embodiment, the external information signals (external end signals) that the external information terminal board 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a winning ball signal, a jackpot signal, a winning streak signal, a pattern confirmation signal, a door frame opening signal, a security signal, a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection signal (abnormal ball entry passing time, etc.) and the like.

Here, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display and a hall computer. The data display is installed on the top of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful information for a player to decide on a gaming machine. The hall computer is a device that collects the operating state of each gaming machine (including the gaming machine PM) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the gaming establishment, and manages the operating status of each gaming machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without a data display.

(Winning ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number of game balls ("10" in this embodiment) are paid out from the gaming machine. That is, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal is output continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) each time 10 prize balls are paid out. In this embodiment, a prize ball number counter that counts the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided, and "1" is added to the prize ball number counter each time a game ball is detected by the payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit 34. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", a prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal board 600. Note that when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (i.e., it is counted from the initial value "0").

Figure 33 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning port 64. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on one game ball entering the general winning port 64 is "3". Therefore, when the right general winning port switch 641 detects the entry of a game ball, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition does not reach the predetermined number, and the prize ball signal is not output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition reaches the predetermined number once, and the prize ball signal is output once. Therefore, in this embodiment, when one game ball enters general winning port 64 (when the general winning port normal winning performance is executed once), there are cases where the prize ball signal is not output even once and cases where the prize ball signal is output once. Note that in the above explanation, of the multiple general winning ports 61 to 64, general winning port 64 is used as an example, but the same can be said for general winning ports 61 to 63.

Figure 34 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on one game ball entering the large prize opening 54 is "15". Therefore, when the large prize opening switch 541 detects the entry of a game ball, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition reaches a predetermined number once, and a prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (corresponding to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition reaches a predetermined number twice, and a prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 54 (when the large prize opening normal prize presentation or the large prize opening over prize presentation is executed once), the prize ball signal may be output once or the prize ball signal may be output twice.

<Relationship with other big win effects>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related effects (big winning hole winning effects, general winning hole winning effects) and other big win effects will be explained. Below, (C) reserved consecutive suggestion effects, (D) promotion effects, and (E) special effects will be exemplified as other big win effects.

≪C. Hold consecutive suggestion performance≫
The reserved consecutive ball suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that a consecutive ball in the reserved ball is established (there is a jackpot reserved ball) during the execution of a special game. As described above, the "reserved consecutive ball" means that when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol performed by consuming a certain preceding activated reserved ball is a jackpot, one or more subsequent activated reserved balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the time when the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol related to the activated reserved ball is permitted to the time when the special game executed as a trigger of the hit is ended contain an activated reserved ball (also called a "jackpot reserved ball"). In this embodiment, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of the currently executed special game is a specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also a specific game state (high base state), that is, when the consecutive ball is continuing, if there is a jackpot reserved ball in the reserved ball, the reserved consecutive ball suggestion effect is executed in the currently executed special game. Conversely, if the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of the currently running special game is a normal game state (low base state), even if there is a jackpot reserved in the reserve, the reserved consecutive suggestion performance will not be executed in the currently running special game. In addition, it is preferable that the currently running special game is based on the hit/miss judgment result related to the second special symbol, and further, it is preferable that the reserved jackpot in the reserve is also a reserve related to the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the timing for executing the reserved consecutive ball suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demo period, as shown in Figures 12 and 14. Whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive ball suggestion effect is determined at the start of special game execution, and is determined by lottery if the reserved consecutive ball suggestion effect execution conditions are met at the start of special game execution. As a variation, the reserved consecutive ball suggestion effect may be executed if the execution lottery held in response to the hold consecutive ball suggestion effect execution conditions being met immediately before or at the start of the jackpot end demo is won.

The reserve consecutive suggestion effect execution condition is a condition that is met when the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently running special game is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) and the activation reserve ball of one or more special patterns contains a jackpot that is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). In other words, even if a jackpot is present in the activation reserve ball of a special pattern, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot is not a high-profit jackpot (if it is a 4R specific jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot), the reserve consecutive suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are multiple jackpots in the activation reserve ball of a special pattern, if the jackpot type related to the first jackpot is a low-profit jackpot and the jackpot type related to the second jackpot is a high-profit jackpot, the reserve consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the currently running special game. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the reserved consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the execution of a special game, not only is it certain that a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) will occur in the variable display within a predetermined number of times (4 spins) after the end of the special game, but it is also certain that the special game following the special game in which the reserved consecutive suggestion effect was executed will not be a low-profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). Note that this embodiment employs a "special pattern 2 priority consumption method" that prioritizes the consumption of the activated reserved balls of the second special pattern over the activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and the activated reserved balls that are subject to consecutive wins within the reserved balls are limited to the activated reserved balls of the second special pattern.

The reserved consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the demo period at the end of the jackpot, and is an effect in which a special image that does not appear in any other situation is displayed. Examples of this special image include an effect image made up of a still image, an effect image made up of a video, and an effect image made up of both a still image and a video.

In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only when the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game). That is, the reserved consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only in the super-longevity jackpot effect as a jackpot effect pattern. On the other hand, the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect can be executed even if the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect can be executed in any of the super-longevity jackpot effect, the longevity jackpot A effect, the longevity jackpot B effect, the happy jackpot A effect, and the happy jackpot B effect as a jackpot effect pattern.

In this embodiment, the over winning effect or bonus winning effect is not executed while the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect is being executed. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or bonus winning effect. In other words, the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect and the over winning effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, and the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, and the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect and the over winning effect or bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a variation, the system may be configured to execute a reserved consecutive win suggestion effect during a round of play, in which case the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in overlap, or the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed in overlap. In such a configuration, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect may have a higher display priority (the over winning image or the bonus winning image may be displayed in the background or may not be displayed), and if a special sound effect occurs during the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect, this special sound effect may be output with priority (the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Since the reserved consecutive win is a reward that is more profitable for the player than the over winning or bonus winning, the execution time of the reserved consecutive win effect is set relatively long so that the player does not miss it.

In this embodiment, the consecutive wins in the reserved ball presentation is executed only as a "true presentation" that definitely notifies the establishment of consecutive wins in the reserved ball presentation, but as a modified example, it may include a "false presentation" in which the consecutive wins in the reserved ball presentation is not actually established. In this example, one of the conditions for executing the consecutive wins in the reserved ball presentation is that the preceding activated reserved ball is a reserved jackpot for a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), but this is not limited to this, and the preceding activated reserved ball may be a reserved jackpot other than a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), that is, a reserved jackpot corresponding to a low-profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

The display mode of the cumulative prize ball count display may be changed from a normal display mode (e.g., white display) to a special display mode (gold display) to suggest that consecutive wins have been achieved within the reserved balls. A consecutive win suggestion effect may also be performed at the timing of the execution of an emphasis effect (emphasis display) that is performed when the cumulative prize ball count value reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that consecutive wins have been achieved within the reserved balls by the display mode of the emphasis effect.

<D. Promotion Production>
The promotion effect is an effect in which, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of a special symbol, the profit mode related to the jackpot (for convenience, referred to as a "temporary profit mode") is suggested or notified before or at the start of the special game, and then whether the actual profit mode related to the jackpot during the execution of the special game is more profitable than the provisional profit mode. In other words, it is an effect that suggests whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and shows whether the profit mode of the jackpot will be promoted (changed) through this series of processes.

The types of promotion effects are broadly divided into round promotion effects and probability variable promotion effects. Round promotion effects are effects that suggest the possibility of round play continuing after the provisional number of rounds in a state in which it is uncertain whether the specified number of rounds (provisional specified number of rounds) of the special game suggested or notified at the time of the jackpot occurrence is the true number of rounds or the false number of rounds. These round promotion effects include those that simply suggest that rounds have been promoted, and those that suggest not only round promotion but also the true specified number of rounds or the long open round number. Probability variable promotion effects are effects that suggest the possibility of transitioning to a probability variable game state after the end of special play in a state in which it is uncertain whether the jackpot type (provisional jackpot type) suggested or notified at the time of the jackpot occurrence is the true jackpot type or the false jackpot type (state in which it is uncertain whether it is a specific jackpot or not). In this embodiment, when a promotion effect (round promotion effect, probability variable promotion effect) occurs during the execution of the special game, it is certain that promotion will be successful.

As shown in Figs. 11 and 16, the probability change promotion effect is executed when the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won in the normal game state, or when the "4R specific jackpot" of the second special symbol is won in the time-saving game state or the probability change game state, and the "Happy jackpot B effect" is selected as the jackpot performance pattern. The execution timing of this probability change promotion effect is set during the jackpot end demo period. This probability change promotion effect is performed by dropping and moving the movable role 24 so that it overlaps with the screen, and then moving the movable role 24 upward again to display the title "Longevity jackpot" on the exposed screen, making it look as if the "Longevity jackpot effect" has been promoted to the "Longevity jackpot effect" (the jackpot type has been promoted from a 4R normal jackpot to a 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in Figs. 11 and 14, the round promotion effect is executed when the "16 specific jackpot" of the second special pattern is won in the time-saving play state or the probability change play state, and the "July jackpot B effect" is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the 4th round to the interval period of the 4th round. This round promotion effect displays the words "Final Round" (fake display) on the screen once to make it look as if the currently executed round play is the final round play, then displays a cut-in image of the message "That can't be!" spoken by the main character of this machine, and then displays the title "Super Longevity Jackpot" to make it look as if the "July jackpot effect" has been promoted to the "Super Longevity jackpot effect" (the jackpot type has been promoted from a 4R specific jackpot to a 16R specific jackpot).

In this embodiment, the round promotion effect can only be executed when the currently executed special game is a "16R special game (high profit special game)," but the over prize effect and bonus prize effect can be executed when the currently executed special game is either a "16R special game (high profit special game)" or a "4R special game (low profit special game)."

In addition, in this embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the probability variable promotion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the probability variable promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. That is, the probability variable promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probability variable promotion effect and the over winning effect are not executed overlappingly, and the probability variable promotion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed overlappingly, and the probability variable promotion effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a variant, the device may be configured to execute a special rate promotion effect during a round of play, in which case the special rate promotion effect and the over prize effect may be executed in overlapping fashion, or the special rate promotion effect and the bonus prize effect may be executed in overlapping fashion. When configured in this way, the special rate promotion effect may have a higher display priority (the over prize image or the bonus prize image may be displayed in the background or may not be displayed), and if a special sound effect is generated during the special rate promotion effect, this special sound effect may be output with priority (the volume of the over prize sound or the bonus prize sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the over prize winning effect or the bonus prize winning effect can be executed in overlap during the execution of the round promotion effect. In other words, since the round promotion effect is executed from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round, if an over prize winning or bonus prize winning occurs within the interval period, the execution period (execution timing) of the round promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over prize winning effect or the bonus prize winning effect can overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect can be configured to have a higher display priority (the over prize winning image or the bonus prize winning image is displayed in the background or is not displayed), and if a dedicated sound effect occurs during the round promotion effect, this dedicated sound effect is output preferentially (the volume of the over prize winning sound or the bonus prize winning sound is reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the special rate promotion effect is set to "20 seconds" from the start of the jackpot end demo to its end. On the other hand, the execution times of the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect are each set to "0.5 seconds." Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution times of the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect. Also, the execution time of the special rate promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution times of the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect.

<E. Special Performance≫
The special effect is a rare effect that is executed when a predetermined consecutive win condition is met. The "predetermined consecutive win condition" refers to a specified number of consecutive wins (20 in this embodiment). ) and the type of the jackpot at least the specified number of times (the 20th in this embodiment) is the highest profit jackpot (16R special jackpot). This special effect appears during the special game (16R special game) that is triggered by the occurrence of the 20th big win. However, this special effect ends with the final round (16th round). However, the demo period after that is not included (however, it may include the interval period of the final round or may not include the interval period of the final round). In addition, this special performance is based on the rarity of this model. It is made up of a special movie in which highly premium characters are displayed in sequence, one cut at a time.

In addition, as a predetermined consecutive winning condition, in addition to the specified number of consecutive winnings, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the consecutive winning state reaches a specified number (the 16R specific jackpots of the second special pattern reach a specified number of times in succession), or the total number of rounds won or the cumulative number of winning balls in the consecutive winning state reaches a specified number, etc. may be added. Here, as described above, "consecutive winnings (consecutive winning state)" refers to a state in which, as a game state during a non-special game state, after the occurrence of the first win that triggers the transition from the non-special game state to the specific game state, the specific game state continues without returning to the non-special game state (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the specific game state from the first win). A "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transitioning to a special game is higher than in a normal game state, and in a broad sense, it is a game state in which any of the following functions is activated: the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern, the time reduction function of the special pattern, and the electric chute support function. In this embodiment, a specific game state refers to a game state in which at least the electric chute support function is activated, that is, a game state in which the main focus of the game is the changing display of the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the special effects can be executed only when the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect can be executed whether the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game).

In this embodiment, even if an over win or bonus win occurs while a special effect is being executed, the over win or bonus win effect is not executed. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over win or bonus win effect do not overlap. The reason for this is that when a special effect competes with an over win or bonus win effect, prioritizing the execution of the rare special effect (display of a premium character that can only be seen in a special effect) results in a more satisfying result for the player.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if an over-winning or bonus winning occurs during the execution of a special effect, the over-winning or bonus winning effect may be configured to be executed in a duplicated manner. When a special effect and an over-winning or bonus winning effect are executed in a duplicated manner, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the special effect is set higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning or bonus winning effect. However, since the special effect is displayed large across the entire screen, whereas the over-winning and bonus winning effects are displayed small toward the edge of the screen, the display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning or bonus winning effect may be set higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the special effect.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the special effects is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demo to the end of the final round of play (16th round). On the other hand, the execution times of the over prize winning effects and the bonus prize winning effects are each set to "0.5 seconds." Therefore, the execution time of the special effects is set to be longer than the execution times of the over prize winning effects and the bonus prize winning effects.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while a special game is being played (for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power outage, etc.), and an over win or bonus win occurs after the power is restored, the over win or bonus win performance will be executed after the power is restored. This is because the decision to execute the over win or bonus win performance is triggered by the over win or bonus win, that is, by an event that occurs after the power is restored from the power outage, and so it is possible to execute it. On the other hand, the power off recovery control command sent from the main control board 100 after the power is restored does not include data for restoring the reserved consecutive suggestion effects, promotion effects, and special effects, and since the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200 does not have a power backup, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game, even if the execution conditions for each effect are met or the execution opportunity arrives at the time of the power outage, the reserved consecutive suggestion effects, promotion effects, and special effects, which determine whether or not to execute them at the start of the special game, will not be executed after the power is restored because there is no data regarding whether or not to execute those effects after the power is restored. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power restoration) is a power outage recovery without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), and in the case of a power outage recovery accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the combination "331".

<Processing on the main control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 35 to 48. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the main control side main processing of the main control board 100. In this main control side main processing, after a security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program starts and processing from S1 onwards begins.

First, as the initial settings required when powering on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Next, a vector table is set that stores the top address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs (S3), and initial values are set in the built-in registers of main CPU 101 (S4).

Next, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is on or not (S5). If the RAM clear switch is on (S5: YES), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether information on normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, if the information of normal power off is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum calculated here at the time of power on contains the complement of the checksum calculated in the power off process described later, so if the backup is normal, the checksum at the time of power on will be "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of power on whether or not the information stored in RAM 103 before the power off is backed up correctly. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 described later to return to the state before the power off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of power on is set in RAM 103 (S10). Next, a performance control command ("performance initial command") is requested from the performance control board 200 to initialize the performance display device 70, the performance lamp LP, etc. (S11).

Next, in the power failure recovery setting process, the normal power-on information is set in RAM 103, various error settings are initialized, and communication with the payout control board 400 is initialized (S12). Here, the normal power-on information is set by storing normal power-on data in the power failure information flag to confirm that the power was turned on correctly, and turning off the power failure confirmation flag to initialize the information on the occurrence of a power failure. Next, the data transfer source address, data transfer destination address, and number of transferred bytes are set, and data for the number of transferred bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of the power failure is read, and power failure recovery processing related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Next, a request is made to send a performance control command ("power failure recovery command") for when the main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are restored from the power failure (S15). This power failure recovery command contains information regarding the inspection of the communication lines, the operation status of the special symbols, the number of probability changes, the number of time-saving times, the number of times the ball is easily scored, the change pattern selection status, and the error status. Any command requests that have not been sent before the power failure are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, information on the number of activated balls reserved for the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of the power failure is read, and a performance control command including this information on the number of activated balls reserved is requested (S16).

Next, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric role 522 to the state before the power was cut off (for example, the second start port 52 is open) (S17). Furthermore, a return setting is performed to return the special electric role 542 to the state before the power was cut off (for example, the large prize port 54 is open) (S18). Next, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operation state of the probability change function of the special pattern at the time of power cut is set (S19). The probability change flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special pattern game (a flag indicating that the probability change function of the special pattern is in operation). Next, in order to start the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Next, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (S21). Then, clear word 1 ("55H") is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, to determine whether a power outage has occurred, the value of the power outage confirmation flag is read to determine whether a power outage has occurred (S23). If a power outage has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur (S25), and the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition process (S21), and the loop process of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed periodically at a predetermined cycle, and the process of S21 to S25 is repeated using the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing. Then, if an interrupt request occurs in the interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing will be started when interrupt is permitted in S25. On the other hand, if the power cut confirmation flag is on in S23, that is, if a power cut has occurred, the process proceeds to S26, and the power cut processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the contents of the power-off information flag are normal power-on data (S27). If the contents are normal power-on information (S27: Yes), normal power-off data is set to the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the contents are not normal power-on information (S27: No), abnormal power-off data is set to the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a specified area of RAM 103 (excluding the checksum area) (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resulting value of this complement is set in the checksum area of RAM 103 (S31). Next, access to RAM 103 is prohibited (S32), and the process loops until the power is turned off.

<<Main control side timer interrupt processing>>
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt processing is started by a clock pulse every fixed time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main processing.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main CPU 101 are saved to the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation conditions are set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") is sent to restart the watchdog timer.
is set (S52). At this time, clear word 1 and clear word 2 are written in sequence to the WDT clear register of CPU 101 within a preset timeout period, thereby clearing and restarting the watchdog timer. In other words, when main CPU 101 is executing a program normally, clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input processing, information on the various switches connected to the main control board 100, other than the RAM clear switch, is read. That is, input information on the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the special prize port switch 541, the general prize port switches 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. is read, their status is determined, and the detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In these various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, the special symbol variation pattern random numbers, and the special symbol variation additional pattern random numbers are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random numbers and the special symbol variation additional pattern random numbers, a predetermined value (e.g. 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the result of the subtraction is less than 0, a predetermined value (e.g. 50000) is added to the result of the subtraction.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the normal symbol random number, the special symbol soft random number, and the special symbol symbol random number are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". In addition, if the counter value has gone around once, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used to control the game operation of the pachinko game machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted at the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71, 72. A specified variable time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the timer is subtracted as the time passes. In addition, if a small win game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed, the timing of the variable display of one special symbol is suspended during the execution of the small win game.

Next, the second start port valid period setting process is executed (S58). In this second start port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and winning invalid period of the second start port 51 are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the second start port 51 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, a switch passing inspection of the game ball is performed based on the detection information of the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switches 611 and 641 in the input process (S53). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a transmission request for a performance control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is made. Details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, based on the detection results of the winning monitoring process described above, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning, and a communication test with the payout control board 400 is performed by monitoring the data received from the payout control board 400.

Next, a normal symbol activation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol activation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball through the activation gate 53 is monitored, and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the activation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is obtained as activation pending ball information, and the number of activation pending balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is stored.

Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control processing, in order to carry out a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric role 522, normal symbol changing processing, normal symbol stop pattern display processing, normal electric role operation processing, normal electric role operation end demo processing, etc. are executed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. Note that in the normal symbol changing processing, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol changing or fixed.

Next, a normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol change start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol change start condition is met, one of the reserved normal symbol operation balls is consumed, and the following steps are performed in order: determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, determining the symbol, determining the change pattern, setting the change time, etc.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51 and the second start port 52 is monitored, and if a game ball enters, the number of reserved balls is updated, a random number related to the special symbol lottery is stored, a look-ahead preview performance is determined, and a command request for the number of symbols stored is made in sequence.

Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71, 72, a special symbol change start process (S420), a special symbol change process (S430), a special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like are executed according to the value of the special symbol game status, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the special electric device control process is executed (S66). In this process, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "big win" or a "small win," the operation process related to the special electric device 542 is executed in the following order: setting the start and end of operation of the special electric device 542, updating the opening time and number of times the big prize opening 54 is opened, setting the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function, setting the start of operation of the fluctuation time reduction function, setting the fluctuation pattern selection state, etc.

Next, the large prize opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this large prize opening valid period setting process, the large prize opening 54's valid prize period and invalid prize period are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the large prize opening 54 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring and control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring and control process, if there is a first special symbol or a second special symbol activation reserved ball, one reserved ball is consumed, and a command request for the number of symbols stored, a hit or miss judgment for the special symbol, a symbol judgment for the special symbol, a probability variation function judgment, a time reduction function judgment, a setting of the activation pattern of the special electric role, a setting of the demo performance time, and the like are performed in this order.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame open signal, etc. are sequentially inspected to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state is detected, a presentation control command including the error information (an "error presentation designation command") is generated to request the presentation control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, if the on signal of the winning detection switch is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time or longer, a ball passing time abnormality is set, and a request is made for a performance control command ("error performance designation command") that includes the error information, and a request is made to output a security signal to be output to an external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (S71). In this game status display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric device 542 will operate consecutively (prescribed number of rounds), the number of balls pending operation of normal and special symbols, etc. are created. In addition, display data is created to display information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the status indicator light of the main control board 100.

Next, LED output processing is executed (S72). In this LED output processing, the display data created in the special symbol control processing (S65), abnormality detection processing (S69), game status display processing (S71), etc., is output to each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol reserved lamp 73, 74, normal symbol reserved lamp 76, status indicator lamp of main control board 100, etc., in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric role device has been activated in succession, and errors, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, a launch control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, if no communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the launch of the game ball is permitted. On the other hand, if a communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Next, solenoid output processing is executed (S74). In this solenoid output processing, excitation signals are output to each electric role solenoid 623, 643 based on the control data acquired in the normal symbol control processing (S62) and the special electric role control processing (S66) to operate each electric role 542.

Next, a performance control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this performance control command transmission process, the performance control command specified by the pointer is read from the performance control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this performance control command is transmitted to the performance control board 200.

Next, an external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output process, game information related to this gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. The external information signal includes, for example, a winning ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection signal (ball entry passing time abnormality, etc.), a big win signal, a winning streak signal, a pattern determination signal, and the like.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to an interrupt-enabled state (S77). This ends the main control timer interrupt process, and the main control returns to the main control main process, where the main control main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a drop in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power outage confirmation flag. Then, it returns to the original processing and performs the above-mentioned power outage processing (S
26 to S32) will be executed.

<Winning monitoring process>
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port switch 511. If a detection signal has been input from the first start port switch 511, first start port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first start port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a first start port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start port switch 521. If a detection signal has been input from the second start port switch 521, second start port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second start port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a second start port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, an activation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the activation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the activation gate switch 531. If a detection signal has been input from the activation gate switch 531, activation gate winning data indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the activation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and an activation gate winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the activation gate switch 531, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, the large prize opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the large prize opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening switch 541. If a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening switch 541, large prize opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a large prize opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the large prize opening switch 541, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, a left general winning gate switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the left general winning gate switch 611 has been input.
When a detection signal is input from the left general winning port switch 611, left general winning port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered one of the general winning ports 61 to 63 is temporarily stored in a winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a left general winning port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in a command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, when no detection signal is input from the left general winning port switch 611, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

Next, right general winning port switch processing is executed (S106). In the right general winning port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the right general winning port switch 641. If a detection signal has been input from the right general winning port switch 641, right general winning port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning port 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a right general winning port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the right general winning port switch 641, the current winning monitoring processing is terminated.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processes related to the special symbol game include the above-mentioned start gate monitoring control process (S64), special symbol control process (S65), special electric role control process (S66), and special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

(Start port monitoring and control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been detected in the first starting hole 51 (S201). If a winning combination has been detected in the first starting hole 51 (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of activated balls for the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of four (S202).

If the number of activated balls for the first special symbol is less than four (S202: YES), the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the symbol for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol change pattern are obtained as the lottery random number values for the first special symbol game, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by 1 to update the number of activated balls for the first special symbol (S204), and the winning check for the first starting hole 51 is completed.

Then, it is determined whether or not a winning play has been detected in the second starting hole 52 (S205). If a winning play in the second starting hole 52 has been detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). If the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number value for the special pattern, the pattern random number value for the special pattern, and the random number value for the special pattern change pattern are obtained as the lottery random number value related to the second special pattern game, and each random number value is stored in the second special pattern reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter is incremented by 1 to update the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern (S208), and the winning check for the second starting hole 52 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, i.e., whether the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208 (S209). If the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S210).

Then, the state of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether it is time for a pre-determination (S211). If it is time for a pre-determination (S211: YES), a random number value for a special symbol win is read from a win random number buffer (such as a reserved n memory area or a register) to generate pre-reading determination information based on the various random numbers obtained when the starting port is won, and a pre-determination of whether it will be a win or a loss is made (S212). Then, a pre-determination command for whether it will be a win or a loss, including information on the pre-determination result (pre-determination number for whether it will be a win or a loss), is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

The random number value of the special winning pattern is read from the winning pattern random number buffer, and a pattern pre-determination is performed (S214). A pattern pre-determination command including information on the pre-determination result (pattern pre-determination number) is then generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). A random number value of the special pattern fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer, and a fluctuation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). A fluctuation pattern pre-determination command including information on the pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern pre-determination number) is then generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring and control process (S68) will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring and control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) described below is executed for the special symbol side of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that satisfies the change start condition. Note that if both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the change start condition, the process for the second special symbol side is executed preferentially, as described above.

First, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is occurring (S301). Next, it is determined whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, i.e., whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting to change)" (S302).

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), it is deemed that the condition for starting the change of the second special symbol is met, and the address of the second special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processes and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304), and the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) for the second special symbol. In other words, in this embodiment, when there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol, the reserved ball for the second special symbol is consumed preferentially, regardless of whether there is a reserved ball for the first special symbol. Details of this special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later using FIG. 68.

On the other hand, if the number of balls reserved for activation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of balls reserved for activation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). If the number of balls reserved is not "0" (S305: NO), it is assumed that the condition for starting the change of the first special symbol is met, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S306), and the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process for the first special symbol (S310).

If the conditions for starting the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped.

(Special symbol variation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above is referenced to execute processing on the special symbol side that is the subject of this change start, but because the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in special cases, the processing will be described together without distinguishing between the processing on the first special symbol side and the processing on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of reserved balls on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol memory number command is generated including the information on the number of reserved balls on the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, the special symbol reserved storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is accessed, and the random number value for the special symbol, the pattern random number value for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol change pattern stored in the most recent reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) are read in order, and these random number values are transferred to the special symbol hit/miss judgment area, the special symbol pattern judgment area, the special symbol change pattern judgment area, and the special symbol change additional pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180 for use in the special symbol hit/miss judgment process (S320), the pattern judgment process (S330), and the change pattern selection process (S423) described later (S313). Additionally, to update the reserved memory area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area to the reserved 4 memory area is shifted to a lower reserved memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to zero (S314).

Next, the special symbol hit/miss determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol hit/miss determination process (S320), first, a special symbol hit/miss lottery table is obtained. At this time, if the game state is a special symbol high probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained, and if the game state is a normal state, a low probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained. Next, a special symbol hit random number value is read from the special symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, by referring to the special symbol hit/miss lottery table, a hit/miss determination of the special symbol is executed based on the hit random number value. In addition, a value corresponding to this hit/miss determination result (big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H") is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Next, a pattern determination process is executed (S330). In the pattern determination process (S330), the stopping pattern of the special pattern and the character effect number (variable additional pattern information) are determined according to the result of the hit/miss determination. The currently determined stopping pattern (pattern group) and character effect number of the special pattern are stored in the pattern storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is determined based on a combination of the determined type of stopping pattern (pattern group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern and normal pattern (four patterns: special pattern probability variable on/special pattern probability variable off/normal pattern probability variable on/normal pattern probability variable off). If the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination corresponds to a jackpot (S342). If the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination corresponds to a miss (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

If the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot (S342: YES), the probability fluctuation count is determined as the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol will operate after the jackpot game ends based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of the jackpot win (S345). Also, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the fluctuation time reduction count is determined as the number of times the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol will operate after the jackpot game ends (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the electric support count is determined as the number of times the electric chute support function will operate after the jackpot game ends (S347). The results of this determination (probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count, electric support count) are stored in the time shortening count storage area and electric support count storage area of the main information storage means 180. Next, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric device 542 during the jackpot game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in each round, etc. are set as the operation pattern of the special electric device 542.

Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, the change pattern selection state after the end of the big win game or after the small win game is set (S349). Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330, the demo presentation time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big win game or small win game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol hit/miss judgment area and special symbol pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit/miss judgment process (S320) and pattern judgment process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status of the special symbol side that is the target of this change is transitioned from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (change start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control process)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether the special electric role 542 is not in operation, i.e., whether the special electric role play status is "00H (waiting for win)" (S401). Next, if the special electric role 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether the second special symbol play status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processes and address of RAM storage area) is set (S403) to execute the process related to the second special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control process (S410). On the other hand, if the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processes and address of RAM storage area) is set (S404) to execute the process related to the first special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control process (S410).

In the general special symbol control process (S410) described below, the first or second special symbol control table set in S403 or S404 described above is used to process the special symbol that is the subject of this change. However, since the processing method is the same for the first and second special symbols, they will be described together without distinguishing between the processing for the first and second special symbols, except in special cases. The details of this general special symbol control process (S410) will be described later using FIG. 43.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Next, a general-purpose special symbol control process is executed (S404, S407). Here, Fig. 43 is a flow chart showing the details of the general-purpose special symbol control process (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) is executed to move to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status of the special symbol that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (change start)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), it is shifted to the special symbol change start processing (S420). Details of this special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described later using FIG. 44. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol changing process (S430). Details of this special symbol changing process (S430) will be described later using FIG. 45. If the result is NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol is displayed)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol stopped symbol display process (S440). Details of this special symbol stopped symbol display process (S440) will be described later using FIG. 46.

(Special pattern variation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. Fig. 44 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is obtained based on the result of the winning/losing lottery and the variation pattern selection state, etc. (S421). Next, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of multiple variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (S423).

Next, a change time corresponding to the change pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as the setting for starting the change of the special symbol, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a change start command is generated for the performance control board 200 (S426). As the change start command, a communication check command, a change additional symbol information designation command, a change pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are generated in this order to start the symbol change performance in the performance display device 70, and these are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Next, the contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is transitioned from "01H (fluctuation start)" to "02H (fluctuation in progress)" (S428).

(Special pattern change processing)
Next, the special symbol variation process (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

First, in order to perform a variable display of the special symbol, a display pattern number switching process for the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data for the special symbol is generated at every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in an LED output process (S73) to display the special symbol as a variable display or a fixed display.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", i.e., whether the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). If the special symbol variation time has ended (S432: YES), a stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed is set on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 (S433). Next, a variation stop command is generated to instruct the performance control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the confirmed display time (S435). Note that the "confirmed display time" is the time required for the stopped symbol to be displayed definitively when the special symbol stops changing. Then, the special symbol game status is transitioned from "02H (changing)" to "03H (stopped symbol displayed)" (S436).

(Special pattern stop pattern display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440).

First, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", i.e., whether the fixed display time of the special symbol (stopped symbol) has ended (S441). If the fixed display time of the special symbol has ended (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is transitioned from "03H (stopped symbol is being displayed)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Next, it is determined whether the hit/miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is jackpot data "55H" (S443). If the hit/miss determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (S446). Specifically, the probability fluctuation flag is set to "00H (off)", and the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time reduction count counter, and the easy-to-score state count counter are set to "00H" and cleared to zero.

Next, as a start demo setting process for the special game, the start demo display time is set, and a presentation control command (jackpot start demo command) that instructs the start of the start demo presentation is generated (S447). Next, the number of times the variable pattern selection state is executed (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric role play status is transitioned from "00H (waiting for win state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, in order to clear the contents of the win/loss determination flag, "00H" is set (S450).

On the other hand, if the hit/miss determination data is not a hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). If the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S452). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability fluctuation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation counter after the decrement is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (S455).
If the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation (S455: YES), the time shortening counter in the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 as the number of times the special symbol has changed this time (step S456). Then, it is determined whether the variation time shortening counter is zero (step S457). If the variation time shortening counter is zero (S457: YES), it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time shortening state has ended is reached, and the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function is stopped (S458). If the variation time shortening counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether the electric chute support function is operating (S459). If the electric chute support function is operating (S459: YES), the electric support count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special pattern has changed this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether the electric support count counter is zero (step S461). If the electric support count counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the number of times the easy-to-score state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (S462). If the electric support count counter after decrement is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process moves to S463.

Then, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is referenced to determine whether the number of times the current variation pattern selection state has been executed has reached a preset end count, and if the end count has been reached, the state is switched to the next defined variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated that includes the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S465). Note that the presentation control board 200 sets and updates the presentation mode based on the information of this game state designation command.

(Special electric device control processing)
Next, the special electric role control process (S66) will be described. Figures 47 to 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric role control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether the special electric role play status is "01H (special play)" (S501). If the special electric role play status is "01H" (S501: YES), special game processing is executed in the following processing. In this special game processing, it is first determined whether the special electric role 542 is in operation (S502). If the special electric role 542 is not in operation (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the time to start operation of the special electric role 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric role 542 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric role 542 starts in each round of play.

If it is time to start operating the special electric device 542 (S503: YES), a performance control command (round performance designation command) is generated to start the round performance, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S504). The performance control board 200 executes a round performance corresponding to each round play during the special game based on the information of this round performance designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric device 542 is started (S505), and the processes of S506 to S510 are executed as the process during the operation of the special electric device 542.

As a process during the operation of the special electric device 542, it is determined whether or not the game balls have entered the large winning opening 54 a specified number of times (maximum number of winnings) (S506), and it is also determined whether or not the operation time (open time) of the special electric device 542 has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game balls have entered the large winning opening 54 a specified number of times (maximum number of winnings) (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric device 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), the operation of the special electric device 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 542 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (S509). If the number of consecutive operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 542 is incremented by one (S510).

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, where the special game hit end demo setting process sets the end demo display time and generates a presentation control command (jackpot end demo command) that instructs the start of the end demo presentation (S511).

Next, the variable time reduction count information set in S346 above is stored in the variable time reduction count counter (S512). Also, the electric support count information set in S347 above is stored in the electric support count counter (S513).

Next, by referring to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343 above, it is determined whether the operation of the condition device is due to a specific symbol (so-called probability variable symbol) (S514). If the condition device is due to a specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability fluctuation count (operation data) set in S345 above is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter of the main information storage means 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started (S515). On the other hand, if the condition device is not due to a specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter, and S515 is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether the variable time reduction count information stored in the time reduction count counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (S516). If it is variable time reduction function activation data (S516: YES), operation of the variable time reduction function for the special pattern is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not variable time reduction function activation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether the electric support count information stored in the electric support count counter is electric chute support function activation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is electric chute support function activation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chute support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is started (S519), the fluctuation time reduction function of the normal symbol is started (S520), and the opening extension function of the normal electric role 522 is started (S521) are executed in that order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chute support function activation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Then, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S523). The presentation control board 200 sets the presentation mode after the special game based on the information in this game state designation command. Then, the special electric role play status is transitioned from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for win state)" (S524).

<Processing on the performance control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the performance control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 49 to 55. The processing on the performance control board 200 side includes a reset start processing (including the performance control side main processing) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset after power-on, etc., a performance control side timer interrupt processing that is started at regular intervals, a reception interrupt processing of a performance control command that is started due to a strobe signal from the main control board 100, a lamp performance interrupt processing that is started in response to the arrival of a predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variable performance pattern, and a transmission interrupt processing of an image control command that is started at regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when multiple interrupt processes occur. In this example, the priority levels are set in the following order: "Reset start process by power reset: highest priority", "Reset start process by various abnormalities: highest priority" → "Performance control command reception interrupt process: level 7" → "WDT (runaway detection) reset start process: level 3" → "Image control command transmission interrupt process: level 2" → "Performance control side timer interrupt process: level 1". Note that the "reset start process by various abnormalities" is activated, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or by an illegal method, or when an error occurs during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer. In this embodiment, the above multiple types of interrupt processes are exemplified, but in reality, other interrupt processes also exist.

In the main processing on the performance control side, processing is basically performed after setting either all interrupts prohibited or interrupts other than interrupts receiving performance control commands prohibited. Then, when the main processing on the performance control side is in an interrupt-permitted state, each interrupt processing is started by suspending the main processing. In each interrupt processing, when a request for another interrupt processing is made during the execution of the interrupt processing (multiple interrupts have occurred), the interrupt request is in principle permitted if it is an interrupt processing with a higher priority level than the interrupt processing being executed, while the interrupt request is prohibited if it is an interrupt processing with a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or with the same priority level. In other words, each interrupt processing is processed in a state in which other interrupts with the same or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interrupt processing returns to the main processing on the performance control side in a state in which all interrupts are permitted. The priority levels (priority levels) of such interrupt causes are specified by the register settings of the performance control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<<Reset start process>>
First, the reset start process of the performance control board 200 will be described. Fig. 49 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the performance control board 200. In this reset start process, the program is started by resetting when the power is turned on, resetting due to various abnormalities, or resetting due to WDT (when a runaway is detected), and after a security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed, the program starts and processing from S601 onwards begins.

First, as an initial setting required when powering on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Next, as basic settings related to the hardware, initial values are set in the built-in registers provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Furthermore, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the performance control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, initial values are set for variables with initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by clearing them to 0. In addition, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203.

Next, interrupts other than interrupt processing for receiving performance control commands are prohibited (S605). Next, a process is performed to set the type of error that should be enabled for that model from among the various errors that have been set in advance for each model (S606). Furthermore, a request to turn off all of the performance lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) is made (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor for runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Next, the presentation control side main processing is executed as the main processing for the game presentation (S609). Details of this presentation control side main processing (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. Note that once the transition to the presentation control side main processing has been made in S609, it is normally not possible for the main processing to return to the reset start processing. However, in the unlikely event that a return to this processing occurs due to the occurrence of a program bug or the like, the system will transition to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

<<Main processing on the performance control side>>
Next, a description will be given of the main processing (S609) on the performance control side of the performance control board 200. Fig. 50 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S609) on the performance control side.

First, the main processing on the performance control side obtains an address (the start address where the program is expanded) to start checking whether the control program is correctly expanded in RAM 203 (S611). Next, all interrupts are permitted (permits the start of various interrupt processes) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is performed only once when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on (when resetting begins), and is performed for the purpose of confirming the position information required to control the operation of the movable role 24 by devices such as motors and solenoids. Note that when the initialization operation is completed, the movable role 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Then, in order to restart the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S614). At this time, if the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset timeout period, and the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input/output processing S912 in the timer interrupt processing described below is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and if the input port state is all "1" after multiple monitoring (e.g., four times), the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", if it is all "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and otherwise the signal level is not changed (this determines the input signal).

Next, an error presentation management process is executed (S616). In this error presentation management process, error presentations are started by various devices based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Furthermore, in the error presentation management process, an initial value (error presentation time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is updated by subtraction at 16 ms intervals in the error management timer update process (S920) of the presentation control timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error presentation is terminated.

Next, the effect button monitoring and control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring and control process, when a button preview effect is incorporated during the pattern fluctuation, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a specified effective operation time, and information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is retained.

Next, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice performance pattern that defines the contents of the notice performance that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern change process is determined by lottery according to the scenario of the change performance pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). The notice performance pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice performance pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In addition, an image control command for specifying this notice performance pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, if a role notice performance pattern is selected as the notice performance pattern, a role request is generated, and the driving pattern of the movable role 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). In this example, all of the multiple types of preview effects (preview performance patterns) that occur within one change of the decorative pattern are not drawn within a single main loop process, but rather, in order to improve the efficiency of the main loop process, they are divided into the time when the preview effects occur (for example, the change start stage, the reach occurrence stage, the change stop stage), and drawn across multiple main loop processes. In this case, the preview effects that occur at the decorative pattern change start stage need to be synchronized with the start of the decorative pattern change (the image control command needs to be sent immediately), so they are drawn within the first main loop process.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is a request for operation of various devices (lamp request, prop request) in the command analysis process (S620) described later, the pattern data corresponding to the performance number (lamp performance number, prop advance performance number) is identified from among the multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the performance lamp LP, lamp data corresponding to each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when drawing, etc. at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the performance display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable prop 24, drive data corresponding to each interrupt period (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals, and the target device begins to operate. On the other hand, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, when the output of the entire series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is complete, the performance lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable prop 24 is stopped, and control of the target device ends.

Next, a command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a performance control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if a performance control command is stored, the command is read out and a performance control process corresponding to the type of the read out performance control command is executed. Details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Then, during the current loop process, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of performance control commands) has been performed (S621). If it is immediately after command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, if command analysis has not been performed (S
621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, the effect selection random number update process is executed until the predetermined time has elapsed (S622). In this embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect selection random number update process, various effect selection random numbers such as pre-reading notice selection random numbers, decorative pattern random numbers, variable performance pattern random numbers, and notice performance pattern random numbers are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a performance control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and a performance control process corresponding to the type of the stored performance control command is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). If a game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to a presentation state transition process (S632). In the presentation state transition process (S632), a process for transitioning presentation modes is executed based on the game state information and variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pending command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the pending command includes a symbol memory number command and a pre-determination command. If this pending command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to pending information management processing (S634). In this pending information management processing (S634), the symbol memory number command or pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and a pre-reading determination is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and processing is performed to update the number of pending images displayed and the display mode (display color, etc.) displayed on the pending image display unit 710 of the performance display device 70.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pattern change related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the pattern change related command includes a change start command and a change stop command. If a pattern change related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to a change performance content determination process (S636). In this change performance content determination process (S636), if the received pattern change related command is a change start command, a process is executed to start the decorative pattern change performance, and if the received pattern change related command is a change stop command, a process is executed to end the decorative pattern change performance.

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot performance related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot performance related command includes a jackpot start demo performance command, a round performance designation command, and a jackpot end demo performance command. If a jackpot performance related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to a jackpot performance content determination process (S638). In this jackpot performance content determination process (S638), processing is performed to execute the start demo performance, round performance, and end demo performance.

Next, it is determined whether or not a small win performance related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small win performance related command includes a small win start demo performance command and a small win end demo performance command. If a small win performance related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to a small win performance content determination process (S640). In this small win performance content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small win start demo performance and a small win end demo performance is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a winning port winning-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the winning port winning-related commands include the first start port winning command, the second start port winning command, the operating gate winning command, the large winning port winning command, the left general winning port winning command, and the right general winning port winning command. If a winning port winning-related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning performance content determination process (S642). Details of this winning performance content determination process (S642) will be described later using FIG. 52.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error performance designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). If this error performance designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to an error performance content determination process (S644). In this error performance content determination process (S644), the error performance designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error performance pattern for notifying an error state by, for example, displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 70, lighting the performance lamp LP, or playing a sound from the speaker 11 is determined.

If no performance control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO), the command analysis process ends without doing anything.

(Winning Presentation Content Determination Process)
Next, the prize presentation content determination process (S642) will be described. Fig. 52 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize presentation content determination process (S642).

First, the first start hole winning presentation control process is executed (S701). In this first start hole winning presentation control process (S701), it is determined whether or not a first start hole winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If the first start hole winning command is stored, a first start hole winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the first start hole 51, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the second start hole winning presentation control process is executed (S702). In this second start hole winning presentation control process (S702), it is determined whether or not a second start hole winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the second start hole winning command is stored, a second start hole winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the second start hole 52, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the activation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this activation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not an activation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if an activation gate winning command is stored, an activation gate winning effect is executed to notify the user that the game ball has passed through the activation gate 53, provided that a predetermined effect execution condition is met.

Next, a special prize opening winning presentation control process is executed (S704). In this special prize opening winning presentation control process (S704), it is determined whether or not a special prize opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If the special prize opening winning command is stored, a special prize opening winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the special prize opening 54, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the left general prize slot winning presentation control process is executed (S705). In this left general prize slot winning presentation control process (S705), it is determined whether or not a left general prize slot winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if a left general prize slot winning command is stored, a left general prize slot winning presentation is executed to notify the player that a game ball has entered one of the general prize slots 61 to 63, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the right general prize opening winning presentation control process is executed (S706). In this right general prize opening winning presentation control process (S706), it is determined whether or not a right general prize opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the right general prize opening winning command is stored, a right general prize opening winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the general prize opening 64, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

<<Performance control command reception interrupt processing>>
Next, the reception interrupt process of the performance control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process of the performance control command. As described above, the reception interrupt process of the performance control command is started by an interrupt occurring based on the input of a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various performance control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. Note that the performance control command is configured to include one byte of MODE data and one byte of EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data is also referred to as the "first command" and the EVENT data is also referred to as the "second command".

First, when an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100, it is determined whether the input value of the performance control command has been confirmed (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is confirmed when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because there is a risk that the reading of the performance control command may fail due to noise, etc., and the input value is not confirmed until the same value is read twice in a row.

Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in a temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). The reason why the effect lottery random number is obtained when the effect control command is received is that the effect control command is transmitted at physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning or when the special pattern starts to change, so that the acquisition timing is not periodic by using that as a trigger. By making the acquisition timing of the effect lottery random number irregular in this way, it is less likely that the same effect will be selected repeatedly in various effect lotteries.

On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether the performance control commands have been received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is any inconsistency in the combination of the performance control commands. If there is no inconsistency in the combination of the performance control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is obtained (S906). Next, the first command and the second command are stored in the performance control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the performance control process corresponding to the type of the performance control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Furthermore, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in the above-mentioned S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the performance control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the original process before the interrupt is resumed.

<<Performance control side timer interrupt processing>>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the performance control side will be described. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the performance control side. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular intervals and is executed by interrupting the main process on the performance control side described above.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved to the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes from S911 onwards are executed in sequence. During this timer interrupt process, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as a performance control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Next, port input/output processing is executed (S912). In this port input/output processing, input and output processing of port data in the I/O port circuit 204 is performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output processing, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read and output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port).

Next, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output processing, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data identified in the device management processing (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this processing is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt period. When the drive data is set in this processing, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt period (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a performance timer update process is executed (S914). In this performance timer update process, the values of various performance timers used for performance operation control are updated by subtracting them at an interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The performance timers include a timer for managing the variable time of the decorative pattern and a timer for managing the timing of the preview performance. The performance timers manage the time schedule for the variable performance pattern, and manage the time on this time axis for the drive timing of the movable role object 24 and the lighting timing of the performance lamp LP. The performance timers are also used in the device control data output process (S913) and lamp data update process (S917) within this performance control timer interrupt process.

Next, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the valid time management timer for managing the operation valid time of the effect button 15 is updated by subtracting it at the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). Note that the operation valid time is the time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

Next, a task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value ("0" to "15") is updated at each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the task counter value is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the task counter value becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a cyclic period of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processes) are assigned corresponding to the currently updated task counter value, and each process such as a lamp control task (lamp data update process in S917), a runaway monitoring task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S9189), and an error management task (error management timer update process in S919) is executed according to the task counter value. In this example, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are assigned to the runaway monitoring task, and the other value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As mentioned above, the cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms in order to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the performance lamp LP. This minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the performance lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of an image frame, realizing synchronization between the image performance and the lamp performance.

Next, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data identified in the device management process (S621) or the like. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating the lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the performance lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer from the output port (serial port). This lamp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by writing the lamp data sequentially to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in byte units and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 for each bit in a form synchronized with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer is empty, and all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output by serial transfer to the lamp connection board 91.

Next, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring processing, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (approximately 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the image control board 300 is running away, and a reset signal is sent from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a specified reset processing due to the occurrence of the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301. Note that a toggle signal is a signal with a waveform in which H level and L level are alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer processing, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time set in the error presentation management processing (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, all interrupts are permitted, and the contents of the saved register are restored, after which the presentation control timer interrupt processing is terminated and the original processing before the interrupt occurred is resumed.

<<Image control command transmission interrupt processing>>
Next, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command will be described. Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing the transmission interrupt process of the image control command. This transmission interrupt process of the image control command occurs at a constant interval (500 µs) set in advance.

In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Then, a read pointer is obtained in the image control command buffer (S932). Then, it is determined whether or not an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not an image control command is stored can be confirmed, for example, by the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. If an image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit specified as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Then, the command data (the command data transmitted in the above S935) is cleared (S936). Then, the read pointer is incremented by one and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main advantages achieved by this embodiment can be summarized as follows:

First, according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 in excess of the specified count number during the execution of a special game, an over-winning effect is executed, clearly informing the player that an over-winning has occurred and enhancing the player's sense of satisfaction and elation at being able to enjoy a special benefit that would not otherwise be available, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a special game is being played, a large prize winning performance (over prize performance) is triggered when a game ball enters the large prize winning performance port 54, and when a game ball enters the general prize winning performance port 64, a general prize winning performance (bonus prize performance) is triggered. This creates a gap between the large prize winning performance and the general prize winning performance port during the special game, eliminating the monotony of the performance during a jackpot, and as a result, it becomes possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the execution of a special game, a general prize opening winning performance (bonus prize winning performance) is performed, which prevents the player from being solely interested in playing the game with the aim of winning the big prize opening 54, and allows the player to enjoy the fun of aiming for the general prize opening 64. It is expected that the player will have more opportunities to actively win the game ball into the general prize opening 64, which will increase the player's sense of gambling and make the game even more exciting, thereby making it possible to improve the excitement of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the execution time of the large prize winning port count-up performance can be appropriately set in relation to the large prize winning port end demo period and the interval period, so that the large prize winning port count-up performance can be completed appropriately without being excessively prolonged, regardless of the timing of the large prize winning port count-up performance or the number of consecutive large prize winning port count-up performances, etc., and therefore the division between the previous and next round games, and the division between the special game and the variable display after the special game is clearly set, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by configuring the total execution time of the large prize winning port count-up performance for the specified count number to be shorter than the execution time of the large prize winning port end demo, even if multiple large prize winning port count-up performances are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the large prize winning port consecutively just before the end of the final round game, the large prize winning port count-up performance will be completed within the large prize winning port end demo period. Therefore, the big winning port count-up performance is not performed beyond the demo period at the end of the big win to the variable display after the special game ends, and it is possible to clearly distinguish the end of the special game from the start of the variable display for the first rotation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, if the conditions for executing a later large prize slot count-up performance are met while a previous large prize slot count-up performance is being executed, the execution of the later large prize slot count-up performance is started after the execution of the previous large prize slot count-up performance is finished, thereby preventing the processing of the count-up performance from becoming complicated, and by clearly separating the two large prize slot count-up performances, the count-up display of the cumulative number of prize balls is not difficult for the player to see, and the player can watch with satisfaction as the cumulative number of prize balls increases one after another at a good pace on the screen, which results in increased interest in the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when an over-winning occurs and the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, an emphasis effect is performed, or when an over-winning occurs while an emphasis effect is being performed, the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect are executed in tandem, and the appearance of both effects clearly informs the player that a rare and special situation occurs in which the irregular timing of the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific number and the irregular timing of an over-winning coincide. This further enhances the player's sense of excitement and accomplishment, and as a result, makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when an over win or bonus win occurs in a situation where a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing occurs, the execution of the over win or bonus win effect is restricted so that the occurrence of a serious error in the gaming machine is not overlooked. On the other hand, when an over win or bonus win occurs in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing occurs, there is no particular harm caused by allowing the execution of the over win effect and the bonus win effect, and if the over win effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's motivation to play may be reduced, so the over win effect is executed. In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the over win according to the type of error that occurs in the gaming machine, the player's motivation to play can be maintained without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over win effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a streak continues, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed not only while the special game is being played, but also in the electric support state after the special game ends, which is expected to encourage the player to continue playing in the hope of further increasing the cumulative number of winning balls during the streak, further increasing the player's desire to hit a jackpot and improving the operating rate of the gaming machine, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a special game is being played, the bonus prize presentation is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 64 located in the right area PA2, but the bonus prize presentation is not executed even if a game ball enters the general prize openings 61-63 located in the left area PA1. This prevents the bonus prize presentation from occurring too frequently and becoming monotonous (repetitive), and further increases the joy of an incidental prize that occurs when a game ball is shot with the aim of winning the large prize opening 54 into the general prize opening 64, thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when an over win and a bonus win occur at approximately the same time during the execution of a special game, the over win effect and the bonus win effect are executed in overlapping fashion, so that the player can be clearly notified of both the over win and the bonus win that occur incidentally as a result of playing the game with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the large prize opening 54. This makes the special game even more interesting and prevents the effects during the big win from becoming monotonous, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, while restricting the execution of the over prize effect or bonus prize effect during the jackpot end demo period, it allows the execution of the over prize effect or bonus prize effect during the interval period immediately after the final round of play. This prevents the overall game presentation from lacking consistency due to an interruption of one of the prize effects (over prize effect or bonus prize effect) even though the end of the special game is announced during the jackpot end demo, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, if multiple bonus wins occur within a specified period during special play, the execution of the bonus win effects is permitted multiple times, while if multiple over wins occur within a specified period during special play, only the over win effect corresponding to the first of the multiple over wins is executed, thereby preventing the over win effects from occurring excessively and becoming monotonous (stale), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, a prize ball signal can be output once when one gaming ball enters the general winning port 64, but by configuring the system so that a prize ball signal can be output twice when one gaming ball enters the large winning port 54, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be notified to the player by the data display, allowing the player to use it as information for selecting a gaming machine or as reference information for playing, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of winning balls is notified by numerical information (e.g., "1000pt"), but this is not limited to the configuration, and the cumulative number of winning balls may be notified by image information such as an icon or meter.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a count-up effect for the cumulative number of winning balls during a winning streak (a large winning slot count-up effect, a general winning slot count-up effect) was given as an example, but this is not limited to this configuration, and the same effect can be achieved by applying the above characteristic configuration to a count-up effect (a large winning slot count-up effect, a general winning slot count-up effect) for the cumulative number of winning balls (number of winning balls during a jackpot) during the execution of one jackpot game.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment described above, and the following description will omit the explanation of the parts having the same configuration by using the same reference numerals, and will mainly describe the different parts. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be explained below in order. Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment employs a small win rush in which "small wins" occur frequently as a result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol when the gaming state is a latent probability change gaming state. The playability of this small win rush will be described later.

The hit/miss judgment of the special symbol in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the special symbol hit/miss lottery table in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is referred to in a game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated. In this special symbol hit/miss lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol hit random number and the hit/miss judgment result (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated. As shown in FIG. 56, in the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol, in the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the big hit is obtained when the special symbol hit random number falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the big hit is obtained when the special symbol hit random number falls within the range of "0 to 818". In other words, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot changes from a low probability of "1/320" to a high probability of "1/80". In this way, the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the game state, but the probability of winning the jackpot is designed to be equal between the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the hit/miss judgment does not correspond to a jackpot, the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol has a relatively high probability of winning a small jackpot of "1/1.1". The probability of winning a small jackpot is designed to be the same regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state). In this second embodiment, a small jackpot is set only in the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol, but for example, a small jackpot may also be set in the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol, and the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol may have a higher probability of winning a small jackpot than the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol.

In the second embodiment, if the result of the hit/miss judgment for one of the first and second special symbols is a jackpot, and the hit/miss judgment for the other special symbol is executed while the variable display of that special symbol is in progress (during the variable display of a jackpot), the hit/miss judgment result for the other special symbol is prohibited from deriving a jackpot, and only a minor hit or miss is derived. If the result of the hit/miss judgment for the other special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the result of the hit/miss judgment is forcibly changed from a jackpot to a miss. In other words, in the above special symbol winning/losing lottery table, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, if the random number value of the special symbol winning falls within the range of "0 to 204", the result of the winning/losing judgment is forcibly made a miss (a big win is replaced with a miss), and when the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, if the random number value of the special symbol winning falls within the range of "0 to 818", the result of the winning/losing judgment is forcibly made a miss (a big win is replaced with a miss). As a modified example, in addition to the above special symbol winning/losing lottery table, a table for no big win lottery that does not include a big win judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning/losing judgment of the special symbol may be prepared, and during the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol, a method may be adopted in which a small win lottery is performed in which the result of the winning/losing judgment is only a small win or a miss by referring to a table dedicated to the no big win lottery processing instead of the above special symbol winning/losing lottery table. In this modified example, if the specifications do not include a small win as a result of the hit/miss determination, a method may be adopted in which a miss is immediately determined without performing a hit/miss determination.

Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the second embodiment will be explained. In this second embodiment, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a "jackpot," the jackpot type (jackpot pattern, pattern group) is determined by referring to the special pattern jackpot pattern table shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 57(A) is a diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, the prescribed number of rounds of jackpot play, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port 54 for each round are respectively associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbols is omitted). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, they are divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). The 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A) is a jackpot game with a prescribed number of rounds of 10 rounds, and 1
The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in one round of play is 28 seconds. For the 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in one round of play is 28 seconds.

Figure 57 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port 54 for each round are associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, they are divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I). For the 10R special jackpot (symbol group E), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For the 6R special jackpot (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For the 4R special jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group H), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various types of jackpots, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers the execution of a long-open round game in which the large prize winning hole 54 is open for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers the execution of a short-open round game in which the large prize winning hole 54 is open for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the long-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large prize winning hole 54 is set so that a specified number of game balls (full count: 15 balls) can or can be easily inserted into the large prize winning hole 54. The short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large prize winning hole 54 is set so that a specified number of game balls (full count: 15 balls) cannot or can not be easily inserted into the large prize winning hole 54.

Although not shown, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small win, one small win symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of small win symbols (symbol groups), and when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the selected small win symbol (symbol group) is displayed stationary. The opening and closing pattern (opening time, number of openings) of the large prize opening 54 during the small win game may be configured to differ depending on the type of small win symbol.

Next, the game state of the second embodiment will be described. Fig. 58 is a transition diagram of the game state and the presentation mode in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a "normal game state", a "time-saving game state", a "latent probability game state", and a "probability change game state" are set as a plurality of game states. The types of game states are as follows: (1) a game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", (2) a game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated but the electric chute support function is not activated is called a "latent probability variation game state (latent probability variation game state)" or "latent probability variation state", (3) a game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated but the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "time shortening state" or "time shortening game state", and (4) a state in which all functions are not activated is called a "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability variation game state", and the "time shortening game state" can all be said to be game states that are more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state". In addition, each game state can be expressed as (1) a high probability high base state for a high probability game state, (2) a low probability low base state for a low probability game state, (3) a low probability high base state for a time-saving game state, and (4) a low probability low base state for a normal game state, depending on the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state/low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chute support function (high base state/low base state). Here, with regard to the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it is sufficient that at least the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is the main focus of the game in that game state, between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is shortened. In other words, the special pattern change time shortening function can be said to be operating if the change time of the first special pattern is shortened in a game state in which the change display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game (normal game state), and if the change time of the second special pattern is shortened in a game state in which the change display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game (time-shortened game state, potential probability game state, probability variable game state).

Figure 59 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of pattern group), a game state to which the player will transition after the jackpot game ends is set. In this embodiment, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is set according to (A) the jackpot type (type of pattern group) and (B) the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special pattern is displayed) is set based on the number of probability changes (the number of times the probability change is activated) when the probability change function of the special pattern is activated, the number of time reductions (the number of time reductions) when the time reduction function of the special pattern is activated, and the number of electric support times (the number of electric support times) when the electric chute support function is activated. Note that "ST" is a period (abbreviation for special time) during which the probability of a jackpot is set to a high probability up to the specified number of times of change displays. In other words, a machine that maintains a high probability state (high probability game state) until a specified number of times of change display, but transitions to a normal state (normal game state) if no jackpot occurs within the specified number of times of change display, is called an "ST machine." In this sense, the specified number of times of change display is also referred to as the "specified ST number" or "ST number" below.

When the first special symbol wins a "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)", the game state after the jackpot game ends will be set to a potential game state, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win. When the game transitions to a potential game state after the jackpot game ends, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100", the number of fluctuation time reductions is set to "100", and the number of electric support times is set to "0". This potential game state will continue until the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are displayed reaches the specified ST number (100), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100). When the potential game state ends because the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are displayed reaches the specified ST number (100), the game will transition to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

If the first special symbol wins "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the game state after the jackpot play ends will be set to the special jackpot play state. If the game transitions to the special jackpot play state after the jackpot play ends, the number of probability changes will be set to "100 times", the number of time reductions will be set to "100 times", and the number of electric support times will be set to "100 times". This special jackpot play state will continue until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the specified number of ST times (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number of ST times (100 times). If the special symbol changes reach the specified number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol changes ends the special jackpot play state, the game will transition to the normal play state from the next special symbol change display.

When the first special symbol wins a "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)," the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a time-saving game state, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win. When the game transitions to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times," the fluctuation time reduction count is set to "70 times," and the electric support count is set to "70 times." This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specific number (70 times). When the time-saving game state ends because the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times), the game transitions to a normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

If the second special symbol is a "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)", the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game will differ depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win. Specifically, if the game state at the time of the jackpot win is a normal game state, a sure-win game state will be set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the game state at the time of the jackpot win is a time-limited game state, a sure-win game state, or a likely-win game state, a likely-win game state will be set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. When the game moves to the probability change game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change number of times "100 times", the change time shortening number of times "100 times", and the electric support number of times "100 times" are set, and when the game moves to the potential probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change number of times "100 times", the change time shortening number of times "100 times", and the electric support number of times "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probability change game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the probability change game state ends because the number of times the special pattern changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the game moves to the normal game state from the next special pattern change display. Similarly, the potential probability game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), ending the potential play state, the game will transition to the normal play state from the next time the special symbol changes.

If the "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the game state after the jackpot play ends will be set to the special jackpot play state. If the game transitions to the special jackpot play state after the jackpot play ends, the number of probability changes will be set to "100 times", the number of time reductions will be set to "100 times", and the number of electric support times will be set to "100 times". This special jackpot play state will continue until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the specified number of ST times (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number of ST times (100 times). If the special symbol changes reach the specified number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol changes ends the special jackpot play state, the game will transition to the normal play state from the next special symbol change display.

If a "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the game state after the jackpot play ends will be set to the time-saving play state. If the game transitions to the time-saving play state after the jackpot play ends, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction count is set to "70 times", and the electric support count is set to "70 times". This time-saving play state will continue until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specific number (70 times). If the time-saving play state ends because the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times), the game will transition to the normal play state from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

As mentioned above, the occurrence of a big win can be a transition trigger for the game state, but the occurrence of a small win does not trigger a transition. In other words, if the result of the judgment of whether or not the special pattern is a small win, the game state at the time of winning the small win will continue as it is, except for the final variable display that is the end condition of the game state (for example, the variable display at the 100th spin of the sure-change game state and the potential game state, and the variable display at the 70th spin of the time-saving game state), and the transition control of the game state is not performed in response to the winning of the small win. In other words, if the game state before the small win is a normal game state, the game state during and after the small win will also be a normal game state, and if the game state before the small win is a time-saving game state, the game state during and after the small win will also be a time-saving game state.
If the game state before the occurrence of a small win is a probability variable game state, the game state during and after the small win will also be a probability variable game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of a small win is a potential probability game state, the game state during and after the small win will also be a potential probability game state.

Next, the presentation modes of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, multiple presentation modes are set, including a normal mode, a time-saving mode, a potential mode, and a probability mode. Depending on the game state (or the variable pattern selection state), one of the multiple presentation modes is selectively set, and a variable presentation corresponding to the set presentation mode is executed.

Basically, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving mode" is set, when the game state is the potential probability game state, the "potential probability mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability variable game state, the "probability variable mode" is set. However, when the game state transitions to the normal state based on the end of a non-normal game state (time-saving game state, potential probability game state, probability variable game state), the special presentation mode is set in the predetermined number of variable displays immediately after the game state transitions to the normal game state, and the normal presentation mode is set when the predetermined number of variable displays is completed. The predetermined number is "4 times" as the number of times that the variable displays of the special pattern are performed. This means that the cumulative number of times that the first special pattern and the second special pattern are performed is "4 times". In other words, when the number of times that the variable displays of the special pattern reach the predetermined number, it means that the total number of times that the variable displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern have been performed has reached "4 times". In addition, as a modified example, the special mode may be ended (or the normal mode may be switched to) when only the number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined number (four times), or when only the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined number (four times). When any of the presentation modes is set, a background image (background image that displays the decorative symbol behind) dedicated to that presentation mode is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variable presentation) indicating that the presentation mode is in progress, and BGM dedicated to that presentation mode is output from the speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode they are currently in from the type of background image or BGM.

Next, the change time (change pattern) of the special symbol in the second embodiment will be explained. Figure 60 is a comparison table of the change time of the special symbol in the second embodiment. Note that in this second embodiment, the change pattern table of the special symbol is not illustrated, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the change time (change pattern) of the special symbol is selected by referring to the change pattern table of the special symbol.

In the figure, (A) shows the change time of the special symbols when the game is in the normal game state. The change time of the first special symbol is set to "3 to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and is set to "30 to 90 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot. The change time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a minor hit or a miss, and is set to "30 to 90 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot. In other words, the change time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long change time (1000 seconds) compared to the other change times, except when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot.

(B) in the figure shows the change time of the special symbols when the game state is the time-saving game state, the sure-win game state, or the potential sure-win game state. The change time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a big win. The change time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, and is set to "0.
If the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot, the time is set to "30 to 60 seconds."

Next, the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows the normal symbol win/lose lottery table, (B) shows the normal symbol change pattern table, and (C) shows the normal electric role opening pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the probability of winning with a normal symbol is set to "1/1.02" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is not activated, and is set to "1/1.01" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is activated. Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is a low base state or a high base state, the specification is such that a win is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit/miss determination for normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chute support function (function to reduce the fluctuation time of normal symbols) is not activated, and is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chute support function (function to reduce the fluctuation time of normal symbols) is activated. In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to an extremely short time. Note that, regardless of which normal symbol fluctuation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds." Note that the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61(C), the opening pattern of the normal electric role 522 is set to "1 second open → 2 seconds closed → 1 second open → 2 seconds closed → 1 second open" when the electric chute support function (open extension function) is not activated, and is set to "5.9 seconds open" when the electric chute support function (open extension function) is activated. In other words, the opening pattern of the normal electric role 522 is that in the low base state, a 1 second opening action is performed three times, so the total opening time is "3 seconds," and in the high base state, a 5.9 second opening action is performed only once, so the total opening time is "5.9 seconds."

Next, the simultaneous change processing (change interruption processing, change forced stop processing) of the first special pattern and the second special pattern will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous change processing (change interruption processing, change forced stop processing) in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the first special pattern change start condition judgment and the second special pattern change start condition judgment are performed separately and independently, so that the first special pattern change display by the first special pattern display device 71 and the second special pattern change display by the second special pattern display device 72 are simultaneously performed in parallel (so-called parallel machine specifications). In other words, the operation reserved ball of the first special pattern and the operation reserved ball of the second special pattern are consumed separately and independently, so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern are configured to perform the corresponding winning/losing lottery and change display in parallel. Therefore, even if the display of one of the first and second special symbols is performed for a long time, the display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the display of the other special symbol, so that the display of the other special symbol does not stop while the display of the other special symbol is being performed. Note that, hereinafter, regarding the display of the first or second special symbol, the display of the big win is referred to as the "big win display," the display of the small win is referred to as the "small win display," and the display of the lose is referred to as the "lose display."

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, when the display of one of the first and second special symbols is a big win display, a small win display, or a miss display, and the display of the other special symbol is a small win display, and the display of the one special symbol and the display of the small win display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, if the display of the small win display of the other special symbol ends before the display of the one special symbol ends, the display of the one special symbol is interrupted (the measurement of the time of the display of the one special symbol is interrupted) from the time when the display of the small win display of the other special symbol ends until the small win game ends. Note that the interruption of the display ... Then, when the small win game of the other special symbol ends, measurement of the fluctuation time related to the variable display of one of the special symbols is resumed, and when the combined time of the measured fluctuation time before the restart and the measured fluctuation time after the restart reaches a preset specified fluctuation time (the fluctuation time according to the design value), the variable display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuation forced stop processing)
On the other hand, in the case where the variation display of one of the first and second special patterns is a big win variation display and the variation display of the other special pattern is a small win variation display or a miss variation display, in a situation where the big win variation display of one special pattern and the small win variation display or miss variation display of the other special pattern are executed in parallel, if the big win variation display of one special pattern ends before the small win variation display or miss variation display of the other special pattern ends, even if the measured time of the small win variation display or miss variation display of the other special pattern reaches a preset specified variation time (variation time according to the design value), at the end of the big win variation display of one special pattern, the small win variation display or miss variation display of the other special pattern is forcibly ended in conjunction with or synchronized with it. In addition, when the small win variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (confirmed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small win variable display is replaced with a miss symbol from the small win symbol. In other words, the small win variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a miss variable display (resulting in the small win game being canceled). This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big win game) of one special symbol and the special game (small win game) of the other special symbol compete with each other. In addition, when the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols starts as a big win variable display, it is preferable that the variable display of the other special symbol that starts to vary after that is a variable display other than the big win variable display (that is, it is a miss variable display or a small win variable display, and if the win/loss random number corresponds to a big win in the win/loss judgment process, the win/loss judgment result is forcibly replaced with a miss and a miss variable display). In addition, when the change display of one special pattern starts as a jackpot change display, the change display of the other special pattern that starts to change after that may be a miss change display (if the hit/miss determination process results in a hit/miss random number that corresponds to a jackpot or small hit, the hit/miss determination result is forcibly replaced with a miss and a miss change display is displayed).

<Small Hit RUSH Gameplay>
Next, the gameplay of the small win RUSH (latent mode) will be described. The small win RUSH (latent mode) is a gameplay that aims to generate small wins continuously and intensively until a big win is won by making small wins occur frequently in the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern by making the game ball enter the second starting hole 52.

When the game state is a potential game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a win is derived in the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern with an extremely high probability (1/1.02). In this potential game state (low base state), when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is won, the normal electric role 522 performs an opening operation three times for one second. Therefore, if the right hit is performed aiming at the second start hole 52, it is possible or easy to make the game ball enter the second start hole 52 while the normal electric role 522 is in the open state. In addition, in this potential game state, the winning probability of a small win in the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1.1), and the fluctuation time of the second special pattern when a small win is won is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), so there is a high possibility that small wins will occur frequently based on the game ball entering the second start hole 52.

At this time, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 and wins a small win while the normal electric device 522 is performing three one-second opening operations, the variable display of the second special symbol ends in an extremely short time, and the small win game starts immediately. Here, the normal electric device 522 performs a two-second closing operation immediately after performing a one-second opening operation (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small win game starts, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is more likely to pass through the upper surface of the closed normal electric device 522 (movable member 524) and reach the large winning hole 54 while the normal electric device 522 is performing a two-second closing operation. Therefore, during the small win game, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric role 522, and flows down toward the large prize opening 54 located diagonally below it, so that it can enter the large prize opening 54. Therefore, when the game state is a latent probability change game state, the game ball is made to enter the second start opening 52, the second special pattern is displayed with high frequency, and the small win game is executed with high frequency until the next big win occurs. As a result, by making about 2 to 3 game balls enter the large prize opening 54 each time a small win game is executed, and winning about 20 to 30 prize balls in succession each time, the player can proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls he has.

On the other hand, even when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability of winning, the probability of a small win is extremely high when determining whether the second special symbol is a hit or not, and the fluctuation time of a small win is set to be extremely short, so small wins tend to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the playability of the small win rush to the potential probability game state only, and for game states other than the potential probability game state, the following measures have been taken to suppress the increase in balls held due to the small win game.

Specifically, when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability-changing game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived in the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern with an extremely high probability (1/1.01). In this game state (high base state), when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is won, the normal electric role 522 performs an opening operation once for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if the right hit is made aiming at the second start hole 52, it is extremely easy to make the game ball enter the second start hole 52 while the normal electric role 522 is in the open state. Also, even in this time-saving game state or the probability-changing game state, the winning probability of a small hit in the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1.1), and the change time of the second special pattern when a small hit is won is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), so there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the game ball entering the second start hole 52.

Here, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 while the normal electric device 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds and wins a small win, the variable display of the second special symbol ends in an extremely short time, and the small win game starts immediately. At this time, if a small win game is executed while the normal electric device 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting hole 52 is in the open state), the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is very likely to enter the normal electric device 522 during the opening, and the possibility of it reaching the large winning hole 54 becomes extremely low. On the other hand, when a small win game is executed after the normal electric device 522 is closed (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the time from when the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53 until the normal electric device 522 is opened is set to a very short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), so that the game ball is likely to enter the immediately opened normal electric device 522. In other words, during the execution of a small win game, the normal electric device 522 (second starting port 52) is almost always open, and the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is very likely to enter the open normal electric device 522 (second starting port 52), and it is very difficult to enter the large prize opening 54 located downstream. Therefore, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a sure-win game state (high base state), even if small wins occur frequently in the judgment of whether the second special pattern is a hit or not, the possibility of the game ball reaching the large prize opening 54 is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls won by playing with small wins.

Even when the game state is the normal game state, the probability of winning a small jackpot in the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1.1), but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), even if the player puts the game ball into the second starting hole 52 and plays a game aiming for a small jackpot, the efficiency of consuming the second special symbol is very low, and small jackpot games cannot be played frequently. In addition, in the predetermined number of fluctuation displays immediately after the transition to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not extremely long). In other words, in the predetermined number of fluctuation displays immediately after the transition to the normal game state (fluctuation display within four rotations), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average fluctuation time) is shortened compared to the fluctuation display after the end of this predetermined number of fluctuation displays (fluctuation display after the fifth rotation), and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the small win RUSH (latent mode), the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area 733 on the screen, and the cumulative number of prize balls can be notified to the player. When the game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the execution of this small win RUSH (latent mode), the bonus prize performance is not performed, but the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed (general prize opening count-up performance). Also, during the execution of this small win RUSH (latent mode), when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54 in the small win game that is performed when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a small hit, it is preferable that the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed (large prize opening count-up performance). As a variant, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 64 during the execution of the small win rush (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is not added up (general winning port count-up effect).

In addition, by applying the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the first embodiment described above, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

As a modification of the second embodiment, the second starting hole 52 may be configured as a winning hole that is always open. That is, in this modification, the first starting hole 51 and the second starting hole 52 are configured as non-variable starting holes (starting holes that are always open), and no normal electric device is installed. FIG. 63 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, the second starting hole 52 is arranged in the area to the right of the center ornament 21 (right area PA2), and the large winning hole 54 is arranged diagonally below to the left. The second starting hole 52 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is equipped with a second starting hole switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This second starting hole 52 is a winning hole that is always open and opens upward, and is mainly capable of receiving game balls (game balls hit to the right) that flow down the right area PA2. That is, the second starting port 52 also serves as the general winning port 64 into which the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can always enter, and is configured to always be able to enter whether in a special game state or a non-special game state. In this modified example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning port 64) during the execution of a special game, a bonus winning performance and an addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls (general winning port count-up performance) are performed. Note that when a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning port 64) during the execution of a special game, only the addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls (general winning port count-up performance) is performed, and the bonus winning performance may not be performed. Also, during the execution of a small win RUSH (latent mode), even if a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning port 64), the bonus winning performance may not be performed, and the addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls (general winning port count-up performance) may not be performed.

[Third embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals will be used to designate the parts having the same configuration, and the description will be omitted, and the differences will be mainly described. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, the configuration common to the first embodiment can be applied.

[Main control display device]
Fig. 64 is a schematic diagram showing the main control display device 27 of the third embodiment. The main control display device 27 is an LED display device that is controlled to be turned on by the main control board 100, and is disposed at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 20. As shown in Fig. 64, the main control display device 27 is provided with various display means such as a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reserved lamp 73, a second special symbol reserved lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, a normal symbol reserved lamp 76, a round indicator lamp 77, a status indicator lamp 78, a right hit indicator lamp 79, and an error indicator lamp Er.

The first special pattern display device 71 is composed of eight LED segments G to N, and the changing display of the first special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segments. The first special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED segments stop blinking and switch to a lit display. More specifically, the first special symbol is displayed in a state where only LED segments M and N are blinking and the other LED segments are off, and the first special symbol is displayed in a state where only LED segments M and N are on and the other LED segments are off if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and the combination of lighting and extinguishing of LED segments LED segments G to N differs depending on the type of special game to be executed if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments G to N are turned on/on/on/off/off/on/on/on or off/on/off/on/on/on/on/on, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the LED segments G to N are turned on/on/on/on/on/on/on/on/on or off/on/on/off/on/off/on/on). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The second special pattern display device 72 is composed of eight LED segments Q to X, and the changing display of the second special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segments. The second special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED segments stop blinking and switch to a lit display. More specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments W and X are flashing and the other LED segments are off, and the confirmed display of the first special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments W and X are on and the other LED segments are off if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, and if the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED segments Q to X differs depending on the type of special game being executed (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments Q to X are on/off/off/on/on/on/on or off/on/on/on/on/on/on/on/off/off, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the LED segments Q to X are off/on/on/on/on/on/on/on/off or on/off/on/off/off/on/on/on/on/
(The light goes out.) Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The first special symbol reserved lamp 73 is composed of two LED segments O and P, and displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) of the first special symbol by the lighting, blinking, and off display of the LED segments. Similarly, the second special symbol reserved lamp 74 is composed of two LED segments Y and Z, and displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) of the second special symbol by the lighting, blinking, and off display of the LED segments. More specifically, when one LED segment is off, it indicates 0 balls, when it is blinking, it indicates 1 ball, and when it is on, it indicates 2 balls, and a combination of two of each display expresses a maximum of 4 (for example, when LED segment O is on and LED segment P is on, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4, and when LED segment O is blinking and LED segment P is off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal pattern display device 75 is composed of one LED segment C, and displays the fluctuation and confirmation of the normal pattern. More specifically, the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is a state in which the LED segment C is flashing, and the confirmation display of the normal pattern is a state in which the LED segment C is off when the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss, and a state in which the LED segment C is lit when the result of the win/loss judgment is a win. This LED segment may be called an LED lamp, or simply a lamp.

The normal symbol reserved lamp 76 is composed of two LED segments A and B, and indicates the number of reserved normal symbols (maximum 4) by the lighting/flashing of the LED segments. More specifically, when one LED segment is off, it indicates 0, when it is flashing, it indicates 1, and when it is on, it indicates 2, and a combination of two of each indication expresses a maximum of 4 (for example, when LED segment A is on and LED segment B is on, it indicates that the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and when LED segment A is flashing and LED segment B is off, it indicates that the number of reserved normal symbols is 1). Each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The round indicator light 77 is composed of a left indicator light 67a and a right indicator light 67b, and indicates the number of rounds played in the special game (prescribed number of rounds: the number of times the special electric device operates in succession). The left indicator light 67a is composed of two LED segments, and the right indicator light 67b is composed of seven LED segments, and the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is displayed by the combination of the lighting of each LED segment (for example, when only the central LED segment of the seven LED segments of the right indicator light 67b is turned off and the other LED segments are turned on, that is, when the six LED segments at the top, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right, and bottom are turned on, a combination indicating "0" is displayed). For example, when the number "10" is lit on the round indicator lamp 77 (that is, when the left indicator lamp 77a, which is the indicator lamp showing the second digit of the round number, is lit in a combination showing the number "1" and the right indicator lamp 77b, which is the indicator lamp showing the first digit of the round number, is lit in a combination showing the number "0"), it is indicated that the specified number of rounds for the special game is 10 times (10 rounds). Each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The status indicator lamp 78 is composed of two LED segments D and E, and indicates the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol by lighting the LED segments. Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The right hit indicator light 79 is composed of one LED segment F, and indicates whether the game state is such that the game ball should be shot toward the right side of the game area PA (game state where the ball should be shot to the right) by lighting up this LED segment. More specifically, if the game state is such that the game ball should be shot toward the right side of the game area PA (game state where the ball should be shot to the right), such as in a high base state or special game state, the LED segment F is lit up, and if the game state is such that the game ball should be shot toward the left side of the game area PA (game state where the ball should be shot to the left), such as in a low base state (non-special game state), the LED segment F is turned off. This LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The error indicator lamp Er is composed of one LED segment Er, and the lighting of the LED segment Er notifies the occurrence of an error in the gaming machine PM (whether an error has occurred or not). More specifically, if an error has occurred, the LED segment Er lights up, and if no error has occurred, the LED segment Er goes out. However, if a specific error has occurred, the LED segment Er may be turned off (for example, if the first or second error described above has occurred, the LED segment Er lights up, but if the third error described above or an error related to the setting function described below (an error that occurs when the setting value is out of range or when the setting change state is terminated without confirming the setting change) has occurred, the LED segment Er goes out). Note that this LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

[Winning Performances]
Next, the winning-related effects of the third embodiment will be described. The winning-related effects are effects that are executed when a game ball enters the big prize opening 54 or the general prize opening 64 during the execution of a big win game. The winning-related effects include the big prize opening winning effects and the general prize opening winning effects, as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18, etc.).

<Big Winner Winner Production>
The large prize winning performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball enters the large prize winning port 54 during the execution of a big win game. As shown in FIG. 18, the large prize winning performance includes a large prize winning port normal winning performance, a large prize winning port over winning performance, and a large prize count-up performance. The contents of the large prize winning port winning performance (large prize winning port normal winning performance, large prize winning port over winning performance, and large prize count-up performance) have already been described in detail in the first embodiment, so a basic description will be omitted. In the following, as a condition for executing the large prize winning port over winning performance (over winning performance), the game balls that exceed the specified count number during the execution of one round game (in this embodiment, the 11th game ball or later) enter the large prize winning port 54 and the excess game balls are effectively detected by the large prize winning port switch 541 (i.e., an over winning occurs), which is also referred to as an "over winning performance execution condition". As described above, the big prize count-up effect is an effect display in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening 54 is counted up in sequence, but this big prize opening count-up effect is not limited to counting up the number of prize balls one by one, and may be a count-up display of the number of prize balls in multiples of two or more (for example, if the number of prize balls for one entry into the big prize opening 54 is 15, a count-up display of 15 balls at a time, such as 0 balls → 15 balls, may be displayed). Alternatively, the count-up display may be for each number obtained by dividing 15 by a predetermined number (here, "5"), such as 0 → 3 → 6 → 9 → 12 → 15), or a random number (for example, if the number of winning balls for one ball entering the large prize opening 54 is 15, then the order would be 0 → 23 → 45 → 11 → 64 → 32 → 15, and the display is intended to indicate that the numbers are changing except for the first 0 and the last 15) (this is also the case for the first and second embodiments described above). In addition, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the following terms are used synonymously: (a) the game ball entering the large prize opening 54, (b) the game ball entering the large prize opening 54, (c) the game ball being detected by the large prize opening switch 541, (d) the main control board 100 sending a large prize opening entry command, and (e) the performance control board 200 receiving the large prize opening entry command.

＜General prize winning performance＞
The general winning port winning performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball wins the general winning port 64. As shown in FIG. 18, the general winning port winning performance includes a general winning port normal winning performance and a general winning count-up performance. The contents of this general winning port winning performance (general winning port normal winning performance, general winning count-up performance) have already been described in detail in the first embodiment, so a basic description will be omitted. In the following, except in special cases, (a) a game ball wins the general winning port 64, (b) a game ball enters the general winning port 64, (c) a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch 641, (d) the main control board 100 transmits a right general winning port winning command, and (e) the performance control board 200 receives the right general winning port winning command, are used synonymously.

<Characteristics of the winning performance>
Next, the features of the winning-related effects (big winning hole winning effect, general winning hole winning effect) of the third embodiment will be described. Note that the components of the winning-related effects of the third embodiment and the components of the winning-related effects of the first embodiment described above may be combined as appropriate, and when combining these, it is also possible to omit, replace, or change some or all of the components.

<Emphasis on cumulative winning balls>
First, the highlighting effect (highlighting) of the cumulative number of winning balls in the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the highlighting effect is an effect that notifies the player that the value of the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a predetermined specific value by a game ball entering the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64 during the execution of a big winning game.

Figure 65 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display of an emphasis effect. The emphasis effect (emphasis display) is an effect in which an emphasis display image (in the illustrated example, "2500pt achieved") indicating that the value of the cumulative prize ball count has reached a specific value is displayed in the emphasis display area 735 in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 65. The emphasis display image "2500pt achieved" in the illustrated example is an image that combines the characters "2500pt", which are a display corresponding to the specific value (2500) that the value of the cumulative prize ball count has reached, and the character "achieved", which is a display indicating that this specific value has been reached. This emphasis display image can be displayed separately and independently from the cumulative prize ball count display (cumulative prize ball count display image) displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area 733 of the screen, and while this emphasis display image is displayed, the emphasis display image and the cumulative prize ball count display (cumulative prize ball count display image) coexist. In this embodiment, the execution time of the highlighting effect (display time of the highlight image) is set to "3 seconds," as described in detail below, so that when the highlight image appears on the screen, the highlight image and the cumulative prize ball count display (cumulative prize ball count display image) are displayed simultaneously for only 3 seconds.

The emphasis effect is executed when a specific execution condition (called the "emphasis effect execution condition") is met during the jackpot game. This emphasis effect execution condition is met when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter mentioned above reaches a specific, predetermined value. This specific value is a number that corresponds to a multiple of the specified number of prize balls (2,500). In other words, the emphasis effect execution condition is met every time the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of the specified number of prize balls (2,500, 5,000, 7,500, 10,000...), and the emphasis effect is performed based on the fact that this emphasis effect execution condition is met.

Figure 66 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table. This emphasis effect pattern table is referenced when selecting an emphasis effect pattern (display pattern of an emphasis image) to be displayed on the screen. As shown in Figure 66, this emphasis effect pattern table associates the value (specific value) of the cumulative prize ball counter, the emphasis effect pattern to be determined, and its display content. In this embodiment, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "2500", emphasis effect pattern PK1 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "2500pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "5000", emphasis effect pattern PK2 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "5000pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "7500", emphasis effect pattern PK3 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "7500pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, When the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "10000", an emphasis effect pattern PK4 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "10000pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, and when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "12500", an emphasis effect pattern PK5 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "12500pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, and when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "15000", an emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "15000pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen. Note that, although only six kinds of emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6 are shown in FIG. 66, even after the emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed, each time the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value (17500, 20000, 22500...) of the predetermined prize ball number, an emphasis effect pattern corresponding to the multiple value is executed. In addition, as the emphasis performance pattern, until the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (97500), there are each emphasis performance pattern corresponding to a multiple value of 2500, but even if the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (for example, 100000 or 102500), the emphasis performance pattern may be configured not to be executed. Furthermore, after the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (97500), a special emphasis performance pattern such as "99999pt achieved" is displayed only once by the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaching a value (99999) different from the multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number, and even if the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (for example, 100000 or 102500), the emphasis performance pattern may be configured not to be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of types of emphasis effects (in other words, to avoid having an unlimited number of types of emphasis effects), while still being able to execute emphasis effects until the player acquires a prize ball that significantly exceeds (for example, 10 times) the expected value of winning balls during a winning streak, as described below.

Here, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned multiple types of emphasis performance patterns are configured so that two consecutive emphasis performance patterns are not executed overlappingly. In other words, the execution period or execution timing of one of the two consecutive emphasis performance patterns (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK1) and the execution period or execution timing of the other emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK2) are not overlapped with each other (including the case where the entire execution period of both do not overlap and the case where a part of the execution period of both does not overlap). Here, if, during the execution of one of the two consecutive emphasis performance patterns (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK1), the execution condition of the other emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK2) is satisfied (for example, the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches 5000), even if the execution condition is satisfied, the other emphasis performance pattern may be configured not to be executed so that the display content does not become complicated. As a variant example, if, during the execution of one of two consecutive emphasis presentation patterns (e.g. emphasis presentation pattern PK1), the conditions for executing the other emphasis presentation pattern (e.g. emphasis presentation pattern PK2) are satisfied (e.g. the value of the cumulative winning ball counter reaches 5000), the execution of one emphasis presentation pattern may be forcibly terminated and the other emphasis presentation pattern executed instead so as not to clutter the display content.

The display size of the highlight image (highlight effect display) on the screen may be changed as appropriate according to the type of each highlight effect pattern. In other words, the display size of the highlight image (highlight effect display) may be configured to differ according to the type of each highlight effect pattern. For example, in order to prevent the highlight image (enlarged image) from going beyond the screen due to an increase in the number of digits of the cumulative prize ball number indicated by the highlight image, the size of the highlight image may be reduced when the number of digits of the cumulative prize ball number that has reached a specific number becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined number. As a modified example, for the highlight effect pattern when the value of the cumulative prize ball number counter reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000, etc.) of a specific prize ball number (e.g., 10000) in order to strengthen the degree of blessing for the player (to make the player feel even more blessed) than other highlight effect patterns, the display size of the highlight image (highlight effect display) may be increased or the execution time of the highlight effect may be lengthened (e.g., 5 seconds instead of 3 seconds).

<Special effects for emphasis>
Next, the special effect that accompanies the occurrence of the highlighting effect will be described. In this embodiment, when the highlighting effect is executed during the execution of a big win game, a special effect display (also simply called "special effect", or simply called "additional effect" or "additional display") is performed to apply a specific special effect to the highlighting image (add a specific effect) at the start and end of the highlighting effect, and a specific sound effect is output to auditorily notify the start and end of the highlighting effect.

Special effect displays include special effect displays in which the highlighted image itself is transformed (enlarged or reduced, inverted, moved, etc.) or changed (color tone change, brightness change, color/black and white switching, etc.) to produce special effects, and special effect displays in which an image different from the highlighted image imparts a visual effect to the highlighted image. In this embodiment, the special effect displays include fade-in displays in which the highlighted image gradually appears, fade-out displays in which the highlighted image gradually disappears, and effect displays in which a specific effect image (for example, countless small star images or electrified images) is displayed around the highlighted image. Mainly, effect displays and fade-in displays are performed when the highlighted image appears, and fade-out displays are performed when the highlighted image is erased (effect displays are not performed when the highlighted image is erased). As a modified example of this embodiment, a configuration may be made in which a special effect display is applied only at the start or end of the highlighting performance. In addition, as a special effect display, a concealment display in which a blurred image or a mosaic image is superimposed on the front side of the highlighted image may be performed.

The specific sound effect is a specific sound effect output at the start and end of the emphasis performance. The specific sound effect includes a specific sound effect A (e.g., a sound of "bang") outputted at approximately the same time as the start of the emphasis performance, and a specific sound effect B (e.g., a sound of "pico") outputted at approximately the same time as the end of the emphasis performance. As a modified example, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may be outputted at the start of the emphasis performance, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may not be outputted at the end of the emphasis performance. Conversely, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may be outputted at the end of the emphasis performance, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may not be outputted at the start of the emphasis performance. As another modified example, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) outputted at the start of the emphasis performance and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) outputted at the end of the emphasis performance may be configured with the same sound. In addition, when the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) output at the start of the emphasis performance and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) output at the end of the emphasis performance are made to be the same sound, the output levels (audio levels) of both sounds may be the same or may be different (for example, the output level of the specific sound effect A may be higher than the output level of the specific sound effect B, or the output level of the specific sound effect B may be higher than the output level of the specific sound effect A). In addition, it is preferable to configure the specific sound effects A and B to fade out (gradually reduce the volume) toward the end of output, and by configuring in this way, the impact at the start of the specific sound effects can be strengthened. In such a configuration, the specific sound effects A and B can be configured to fade in (gradually increase the volume) immediately after the start of output, so that the impact can be further strengthened. In such a configuration, it is more effective to make the fade-out period (for example, 1 second) longer than the fade-in period (for example, 0.3 seconds) (it is possible to have a speed and swiftness of increasing the volume to the maximum volume and then gradually decreasing the volume).

Next, we will explain the timing of highlighting, special effects, and specific sound effects during a jackpot game. Figure 67 is a time chart showing the timing of highlighting, special effects, and specific sound effects during a jackpot game.

First, after the jackpot game is started, at timing T1, the execution period of the jackpot start demo ends, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls begins. Next, at timing T2, the execution of the highlighting effect begins when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value. At the start of this highlighting effect, a special effect display (effect display in the illustrated example) is performed to apply a special effect to the appearance of the highlighting image, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) is output to notify the start of the highlighting effect. Next, at timing T3, the execution of the highlighting effect ends. At the end of this highlighting effect, a special effect display (fade-out display in the illustrated example) is performed to apply a special effect to the disappearance of the highlighting image, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) is output to notify the end of the highlighting effect. Then, at timing T4, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls ends, and then the current jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 67, at the start (timing T1) and end (timing T4) of the cumulative prize ball display, no special effect display is performed to apply a special effect to the cumulative prize ball display, and no special effect sound is output to notify the start and end of the cumulative prize ball display. In this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect and the execution period of the special effect display at timings T2 and T3 are shown as being approximately the same period, but the output period of the specific sound effect may be longer than the execution period of the special effect display. By configuring in this way, the visibility of the highlighting effect (the visibility of the display related to the number of prize balls acquired) is not unnecessarily hindered by the special effect display, while the output of the specific sound effect that is not involved in the visibility is continued even after the execution of the special effect display is completed, so that the auditory blessing period for the player is long, and the synergistic effect of the visual blessing and the auditory blessing can be further expected. In addition, in this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect at timing T2 is shown as being shorter than the execution period of the highlighting effect, but it may be the same (or approximately the same) as the execution period of the highlighting effect or longer than the execution period of the highlighting effect. In addition, in this time chart, the start timing of the specific sound effect and the start timing of the special effect display at timing T2 are shown as timings that precede the start timing of the emphasis performance, but they may be the same timing (or approximately the same timing). In addition, in this time chart, the end timing of the specific sound effect and the end timing of the special effect display at timing T3 are shown as timings that follow the end timing of the emphasis performance, but they may be the same timing (or approximately the same timing).

<Execution time of emphasis effect>
Next, the execution time of the emphasis effect will be described. Fig. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the big win end demo.

The execution time of the emphasis effect is the time from when the display of the highlight image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of winning balls starts to when it ends. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpot types (jackpot games) as in the first embodiment, and the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to "3 seconds", which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this embodiment, even if the emphasis effect is executed by any of the emphasis effect patterns among the multiple emphasis effect patterns (the emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6 in the illustrated example of FIG. 66), the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to "3 seconds". As a modified example, the execution time of the emphasis effect may be different depending on the type of emphasis effect pattern. For example, the execution time of the emphasis effect may be set to be longer as the value of the cumulative number of winning balls that is the target of this emphasis effect display (enlarged display) becomes larger (the execution time may tend to become longer). As mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time (interval period) set after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game has elapsed until the end of the jackpot game. In other words, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time (interval period) set after the end of the final round game. It should be noted that this interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" and is not set only after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game, but also the interval time (interval period) between each round game (for example, the period during which the large prize winning hole 54 is closed between the first and second rounds or between the fifth and sixth rounds). The interval time after the end of the final round game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the final round game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning hole 54 may be effectively detected within that interval time. On the other hand, the execution time of the big win end demo is set as a preparation period for the game after the end of the big win game separated from the final round of play, during which there is no possibility of validly detecting the entry of a game ball into the big win opening 54.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the highlight effect (3 seconds) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo (20 seconds), so that even if the highlight effect is executed in response to the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific value just before the end of the final round of play, the highlight effect is configured to be completed by the time the jackpot end demo ends. As a result, even if the highlight effect is executed just before the end of the final round of play, the highlight effect will not extend beyond the end of the jackpot game and extend to the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, and the division between the end of the jackpot game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game can be clearly defined. In addition, for example, if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the large winning port 54 at the specified count number (here, the 10th count) in the final round of the jackpot game, the final round of the game ends and a two-second interval period starts in order to satisfy the end condition of the final round of the game. During this two-second interval period, at least a part of the emphasis effect is executed. With regard to this "at least a part," the emphasis effect may be executed when "2500 points are achieved." (More specifically, when the emphasis effect starts, a special effect display is executed and then a display related to the number of prize balls such as "2500 points achieved" is displayed, but when the emphasis effect is executed during an interval period triggered by the ball entering the large prize opening 54 at the specified count number in the final round of the jackpot game, the display related to the number of prize balls after the special effect display is executed during that interval period can be seen; in other words, the display of the number of prize balls can be seen before the jackpot end demo starts.) By configuring it in this way, it is possible to confirm which pattern the emphasis effect was (which number of prize balls was achieved) before the jackpot end demo period in which the performance related to the end of the jackpot game is executed starts, and a flow of performance that does not feel strange in line with the progress of the jackpot game can be realized.

The execution time of the emphasis effect may be set to be longer than the interval time between each round or between the final round play and the jackpot end demo. Also, if the emphasis effect is not completed by the end of the round play, the emphasis effect may be configured to be forcibly ended at the end of the round play, at the start of the interval period after the end of the round play, or at the start of the end demo.

<<Timing of highlighting effects, lighting effects, and special effects>>
Next, the execution timing of the highlighting effect, the light emitting effect, and the special effect will be described. Fig. 69 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the highlighting effect, the light emitting effect, and the special effect.

During the execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp 10 is lit or flashes in a special light-emitting mode. Examples of this special light-emitting mode include a mode in which the frame lamp 10 is lit in a special light-emitting color such as rainbow colors, or a mode in which the frame lamp 10 is flashed in this special light-emitting color at a predetermined flashing interval (normal flashing interval). As a variation of this special light-emitting mode, a mode in which the frame lamp 10 is flashed in a predetermined light-emitting color such as blue at a flashing interval shorter than the predetermined flashing interval (normal flashing interval) may be adopted. In addition, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the board lamp 25 provided on the game board 20 (center decoration 21) may be configured to be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode. In addition, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp 10 may be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode, and the board lamp 25 may be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode. In other words, during execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp 10 may be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode and the board lamp 25 may be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode approximately simultaneously (in parallel) (including cases where the light-emitting periods of both lamps 10 and 25 entirely overlap and cases where the light-emitting periods of both lamps 10 and 25 partially overlap). Also, even when the highlighting effect is executed, some of the frame lamps 10 may not be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode. Specifically, when the frame lamp 10 is configured to have a frame lamp A (e.g., a top lamp), a frame lamp B (e.g., a side lamp), and a frame lamp C (e.g., a globe lamp), when an emphasis performance is performed in a situation where these frame lamps A to C are lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode, during the execution of this emphasis performance, some of the frame lamps A to C are lit or flashing in a special light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode switches from the normal light-emitting mode to the special light-emitting mode), while the other lamps are lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode is maintained in the normal light-emitting mode). In that case, it is preferable that the lamp mounted on the performance button 15 is also lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode is maintained in the normal light-emitting mode) regardless of whether or not the emphasis performance is performed. Similarly, even when an emphasis performance is performed, some of the board lamps 25 may be configured not to be lit or flashing in a special light-emitting mode. Specifically, if the board lamp 25 is configured to have board lamp A and board lamp B, when an emphasis effect is executed in a situation where board lamps A and B are lit or flashing in the normal light emission mode, during the execution of this emphasis effect, one of board lamps A and B is lit or flashing in the special light emission mode (the light emission mode switches from the normal light emission mode to the special light emission mode), while the other lamp is lit or flashing in the normal light emission mode (the light emission mode is maintained in the normal light emission mode).

While the highlighting effect is being performed, the reel lamp (the LED lamp provided on the movable reel 24) described below lights up or flashes in a predetermined light emission mode. Examples of this predetermined light emission mode include lighting up a predetermined light color such as blue, or flashing this predetermined light color at a predetermined flashing interval (normal flashing interval).

When an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp 10 and the accessory lamp described later are lit or flashed in an error light emission mode. An example of this error light emission mode is a mode in which the frame lamp 10 and the accessory lamp described later are lit or flashed in a specific light emission color such as red. When the frame lamp 10 and the accessory lamp described later are flashed in a specific light emission color, they may be flashed at a predetermined flash interval (normal flash interval), or at a flash interval shorter than the predetermined interval. In this way, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp 10 and the accessory lamp described later are lit or flashed in an error light emission mode different from the predetermined light emission mode and the special light emission mode, so that it is possible to accurately notify that the gaming machine is in an error state.

During the execution of the highlighting effect, a special movable part 24 is driven in a predetermined operating mode to perform a special effect. The movable part 24 is a logo part formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape using a translucent resin material, as shown in FIG. 1. The front side of the movable part 24 is provided with a logo-shaped decorative part that depicts, for example, the title of the game machine. Inside the movable part 24, a special part lamp is mounted to illuminate the decorative part formed on the front side. The special part lamp is composed of, for example, a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in a matrix. As the light-emitting element, a full-color LED having light-emitting elements capable of emitting R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. This movable part 24 is designed so that the entire decorative part on the front side is illuminated when the special part lamp emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

The reel performance of this embodiment can be performed by combining the performance operation of the movable reel 24 and the light display of the reel lamp. In other words, the reel performance is configured as a performance in which the performance operation of the movable reel 24 (reel moving performance) and the light display of the reel lamp (reel light display) can be performed in a composite manner.

The movable reel performance is a performance in which the movable reel 24 executes a performance operation according to a predetermined performance operation pattern. This movable reel performance is performed mainly for the purpose of exerting a visual performance effect by operating the movable reel 24 (including holding or stopping at a predetermined position) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern or during the execution of the jackpot game, assuming that the initialization operation at the time of power-on has been completed. This movable reel performance is a performance including, for example, a lowering operation that lowers the movable reel 24 from the initial position to a predetermined movable position, a holding operation that stops and holds the movable reel 24 at the predetermined movable position (for example, the front position of the screen, which is the position after the lowering operation) for a predetermined time, and a rising operation that raises the movable reel 24 from the predetermined movable position to the initial position.

The role light emission performance is a performance in which the role lamp of the movable role 24 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. In this embodiment, the light emission patterns (light emission modes) of the role lamp are set to light emission pattern 1 (white light emission), light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission), light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission), and light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission, i.e., multiple color gradation light emission), and one light emission pattern is selected from the multiple light emission patterns 1 to 4 (all of these light emission patterns are flashing modes). As described above, when the role lamp emits light during the execution of the highlight performance, light emission pattern 2 is selected. In other words, the predetermined light emission mode of the role lamp corresponds to light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission). Here, the light emission pattern of the role lamp is related to the level of the jackpot expectation, and when the role lamp emits light during the variable display of the special pattern, the jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) < light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission) < light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission) < light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission). Note that the light emission pattern of the accessory lamp is merely an example, and it may be configured to emit light in multiple colors in one light emission pattern, light emission patterns with different blinking times may be prepared, or the number of types of light emission patterns may be changed. Similarly to the accessory lamp, the frame lamp 10 may also be configured to be able to adopt light emission modes of light emission patterns 1 to 4. Similarly to the frame lamp 10, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the accessory lamp may also be lit or blinked in a specific light color such as red as an error light emission mode.

Next, with reference to Figure 69, we will explain the specific execution timing of highlighting effects, light emission effects, and special effects during jackpot play.

First, at timing T1, a big win game starts. At this time, the movable role 24 waits at the initial position which is the starting point of the operation, and the role lamp is in a non-illuminating state (off state). Note that the role lamp may be configured to emit light in the illumination pattern 1 (white light emission) instead of in a non-illuminating state (in that case, it should be noted that "illumination" in this time chart becomes "blue light emission" and "non-illumination" is replaced with "white light emission").

Next, at timing T2, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific number (for example, 5,000), which triggers the execution of the highlighting effect to be met and the execution of the highlighting effect to begin. Also at this timing T2, the performance operation of the movable part 24 begins, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the display of the highlighting effect, the performance operation of the movable part 24, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) begin approximately simultaneously (these performances begin synchronously).

Next, at timing T3, the execution of the highlighting effect ends. Also at this timing T3, the performance operation of the movable part ends, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) ends. In other words, in this embodiment, the display of the highlighting effect, the performance operation of the movable part 24, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) end at approximately the same time (these effects end synchronously).

In this embodiment, the timing of the start and end of the highlighting effect, the timing of the start and end of the operation of the movable role 24, and the timing of the start and end of the light emission of the role lamp (or the start of the change from white light emission to blue light emission) and the end of the light emission (or the start of the change from blue light emission to white light emission) are approximately simultaneous, so that these effects become a cohesive effect (a performance with a sense of unity), and the flow of each effect is easy for the player to understand. In addition, when executing the highlighting effect, the movable role 24 is operated and the role lamp is illuminated (or changes from white light emission to blue light emission) without ending with only the highlighting display (enlarged display) of the effect display device 70, which can further improve the satisfaction and sense of superiority of the player, and can also appeal to surrounding players about the cumulative number of winning balls that is highlighted. In addition, the frame lamp 10 may also be configured to have the same configuration as the role lamp (i.e., start/end the light emission display at each timing in the same way as the role lamp, or start/end the change from white light emission to blue light in the same way as the role lamp).

As a modified example, the highlighting effect may be started after the performance operation of the movable role 24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started. This allows the player to have an expectation that the highlighting effect will be executed after the performance operation of the movable role 24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started, respectively, and increases the player's satisfaction and excitement at the fact that the highlighting effect has actually been executed. In addition, by starting the performance operation of the movable role 24 after the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) is started, each performance can be advanced at a good tempo, such as the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) → the operation of the movable role 24 → the display of the highlighting effect. Conversely, the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started after the performance operation of the movable role 24 is started. Even in this case, each performance can be performed at a good tempo, such as the operation of the movable role 24 → the illumination of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) → the display of the highlight performance. Note that the performance executed before the highlight performance may be either the operation of the movable role 24 or the illumination of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the rest may be executed approximately simultaneously with the highlight performance. Note that the frame lamp 10 may also be configured to have the same configuration as the role lamp (i.e., to start/end the illumination display at each timing like the role lamp, or to start/end the change from white light emission to blue light like the role lamp at each timing).

In addition, after the execution of the highlighting effect is started, the performance operation of the movable role 24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started. With this configuration, the highlighting effect starts suddenly before the performance operation of the movable role 24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are performed, so that it is possible to give surprise and unexpectedness to the player and to prevent the player from finding out that the highlighting effect is occurring. Note that what is executed after the highlighting effect may be either the operation of the movable role 24 or the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the other may be executed approximately simultaneously with the highlighting effect. Note that the frame lamp 10 may also be configured to adopt the same configuration as the role lamp (i.e., to start/end the light display at each timing like the role lamp, or to start/end the change from white light emission to blue light like the role lamp at each timing).

Similarly, the highlighting effect may be terminated after the performance operation of the movable role 24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are completed. The one that ends before the highlighting effect may be either the operation of the movable role 24 or the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the other may be terminated approximately simultaneously with the highlighting effect. With this configuration, it is possible to move to the next performance development immediately after the highlighting effect is completed (without waiting for the end of the operation of the movable role 24 and the end of the light emission of the role lamp), making it possible to proceed with the game at a good tempo. The performance operation of the movable role 24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be terminated after the execution of the highlighting effect. The one that ends after the highlighting effect may be either the operation of the movable role 24 or the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the other may be terminated approximately simultaneously with the highlighting effect. This configuration can prevent the emphasis effects from being drawn out more than necessary, and by shifting the execution timing (end timing) of each effect, it is possible to create a more striking effect. The frame lamp 10 may also be configured in the same way as the special feature lamp (i.e., to start/end the light emission display at each timing, just like the special feature lamp, or to start/end the change from white light emission to blue light at each timing, just like the special feature lamp).

During a jackpot game, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 emit light in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the jackpot game. Specifically, the jackpot performance that progresses during a jackpot game is a performance in which a moving image (a moving image in which a character is introduced or a moving image in which characters fight each other) indicating that a jackpot is occurring is played, and a song with or without lyrics is played. Depending on the progress of the jackpot performance, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 are configured to change and loop their emission modes in a time series such as white light → white flashing → yellow light → yellow flashing → white light → .... In this way, the predetermined light emission mode is changed according to the progress of the performance during the big win. As a further modified example, the highlight performance may be executed to interrupt the light emission in the predetermined light emission mode, and the role lamp and the frame lamp 10 may be configured to change to blue light emission. In this case, the role lamp and the frame lamp 10 may end the blue light emission and return to the predetermined light emission mode with the end of the highlight performance (for example, if the highlight performance is executed while the light emission mode of the role lamp and the frame lamp 10 is yellow, this yellow light emission is forcibly terminated and blue light emission occurs, and when the highlight performance ends, the blue light emission ends and returns to yellow light emission, or the time during which the blue light emission has been performed has passed, crossing the predetermined switching timing of the light emission mode, and returning to yellow flashing instead of yellow light emission). In addition, the start timing of the blue light emission of the role lamp and the frame lamp 10 in this case may be approximately simultaneous with, later, or earlier than the start timing of the execution of the highlight performance, and may be approximately simultaneous with, later, or earlier than the start timing of the operation of the movable role lamp 24. Furthermore, when configured in this manner, the timing at which the blue light emission of the reel lamp and frame lamp 10 ends may be approximately simultaneous with, later than, or earlier than the timing at which the execution of the emphasis effect ends, and it may also be approximately simultaneous with, later than, or earlier than the timing at which the operation of the movable reel 24 ends (it should be noted that the aforementioned effects that are applied will differ depending on which timing is selected).

In addition to the role lamp and frame lamp 10, many other lamps are provided. Some of them include, for example, the start port lamp attached to the first start port 51 (which is normally lit or turned off in white, but when the reserved ball that is created by winning in the first start port 51 is a reserved ball with a high probability of winning, it lights up in one of the following light emission modes in the order of the probability of winning: blue → green → red → rainbow) and the performance button lamp attached to the performance button (which is lit or turned off in white when it is not in the valid operation time, but lights up in blue when it is in the valid operation time). The start port lamp and the performance button lamp also emit white light (lights up in white) during a jackpot game (during a jackpot performance), but unlike the role lamp and frame lamp 10, they are configured to maintain white light emission (lights up in white) even when an emphasis performance is executed so as not to mislead the player into thinking that a prize has been won in the first start port 51 or that the valid operation time is in progress. Furthermore, in the event that an error occurs in the gaming machine, whether it is the role lamp, frame lamp 10, starter lamp, or effect button lamp, the error light-emitting mode is always configured to light up or flash in a specific light color such as red, regardless of the previous light-emitting mode (even if it is a light-emitting mode corresponding to the execution of an emphasis effect or a light-emitting mode corresponding to a jackpot effect).

<Relationship between the role production during fluctuation and the role production during the big win>
In this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned specific movable role (movable role 24) performing a predetermined action and emitting light (also referred to as the "first role performance"), a specific movable role (movable role other than the movable role 24) performing a predetermined action and emitting light (also referred to as the "second role performance") is prepared as various role performances. Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, a door role (left and right door members) provided at the central opening of the center decoration 21 is exemplified as the specific movable role. The door role (left and right door members) is configured to be reciprocated in the left and right direction between an initial position (open position) and a movable position (closed position) in front of the screen of the performance display device 70. When the door role (left and right door members) is in the initial position (open position), the door role (left and right door members) is hidden on the back side of the game board 20, and almost the entire screen (display area) of the performance display device 70 is visible. On the other hand, when the door role (left and right door members) are in the movable position (closed position), the door role (left and right door members) overlap the front of the screen of the performance display device 70 (the left and right door members are adjacent to each other and completed), and the screen (display area) of the performance display device 70 becomes invisible or only a part of the display area is visible (at least the visible display area becomes smaller than the state in the initial position). In addition, this door role (left and right door members) also has a role lamp (light-emitting body) for illuminating the door member (left and right door members) like the above-mentioned movable role (logo role) 24. In this embodiment, the second role performance can be performed not only during the execution of a jackpot game (during the display of a highlighted image) but also during the variable display of the pattern. In other words, this second role performance is roughly divided into a variable role performance performed during the execution of the variable display of the pattern and a jackpot role performance performed during the execution of a jackpot game. In the following explanation, the "during-variation" role performance means a role performance in which a predetermined movable role (door role) performs a predetermined action and emits light while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, and the "during-jackpot" role performance means a role performance in which a predetermined movable role (door role) performs a predetermined action and emits light while the jackpot game is being executed. Also, the illumination of the role lamp in the "during-variation" role performance means that the role lamp of the predetermined movable role (door role) emits light while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, and the illumination of the role lamp in the "during-jackpot" role performance means that the role lamp of the predetermined movable role (door role) emits light while the jackpot game is being executed.

The during-variation role performance is performed, for example, when the decorative pattern is changing and before the SP reach develops (after the reach is established and before the SP reach develops), to suggest that the N reach will develop into an SP reach (for example, it is configured so that the development into an SP reach is confirmed by the execution of the during-variation role performance during an N reach), or when it notifies of a jackpot win at the win/lose branching point after the SP reach develops (the branching point where the final result of the SP reach will indicate either a jackpot or a miss) (for example, it is configured so that the execution of the during-variation role performance at the end of the SP reach confirms a jackpot, and not executing the during-variation role performance at the end of the SP reach makes the possibility of a miss very high). On the other hand, during a jackpot, the special effects are also used, for example, when an ally character launches a preemptive attack during the first jackpot gameplay in a battle scene with an enemy character (a jackpot promotion teasing effect), resulting in a promotion to a jackpot, i.e., when a jackpot promotion effect is executed; or when the provisional number of rounds announced when a jackpot occurs (when the jackpot pattern stops and is displayed) is a false number of rounds, and the true number of rounds (a number greater than the provisional number of rounds) is announced during the jackpot gameplay, resulting in a round promotion, i.e., when a round promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the number of times that the in-flight role effects are executed during one flicker display and the number of times that the in-flight role effects are executed during one flicker game are configured to be different. In detail, the in-flight role effects may occur only once or multiple times during the execution of the flicker display (naturally, there may be cases where they do not occur even once). In the above example, the case where they occur only once is exemplified by a case where a first in-flight role effect that suggests that the flicker display will develop into an SP reach is performed before the flicker display develops into an SP reach, and then a miss is confirmed in the flicker display, so that a second in-flight role effect is not performed. In addition, in the above example, the case where they occur multiple times is exemplified by a case where a first in-flight role effect that suggests that the flicker display will develop into an SP reach is performed before the flicker display develops into an SP reach, and then a second in-flight role effect that notifies of a jackpot win is performed at the win/lose branch after the SP reach develops. Note that three or more in-flight role effects may be performed during the execution of the flicker display.

On the other hand, the jackpot role effect does not occur multiple times during the jackpot game, but always occurs only once (naturally, there are cases where it does not occur even once). In other words, as explained in the above example, during the jackpot game, only one of the jackpot role effect performed at the time of the probability variable promotion (during the execution of the probability variable promotion effect) and the jackpot role effect performed at the time of the round promotion (during the execution of the round promotion effect) can be performed. Here, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect is not performed during the execution of the probability variable promotion effect, and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect is not performed during the execution of the round promotion effect. On the other hand, during the jackpot game, after the execution of the probability variable promotion effect is finished or before the execution of the probability variable promotion effect is started, the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect during the same jackpot game can be performed. Similarly, during the execution of a jackpot game, after the execution of the round promotion effect is completed, or before the execution of the round promotion effect is started, the highlight effect and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the occurrence of the highlight effect during the same jackpot game are configured to be executable. In either case, it is preferable that the promotion effect (probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the occurrence of the highlight effect are not executed overlappingly (including the case where the entire execution period of both effects does not overlap, and the case where a part of the execution period of both effects does not overlap). In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the promotion effect (probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the highlight effect are executed overlappingly, but the promotion effect (probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the occurrence of the highlight effect may be configured not to be executed overlappingly (including the case where the entire execution period of both effects does not overlap, and the case where a part of the execution period of both effects does not overlap). In addition, as a further modified example, during the execution of a jackpot game, only one of the role effect (first role effect) performed when an emphasis effect occurs, the role effect (second role effect) performed when a probability variable is promoted, and the role effect (second role effect) performed when a round is promoted may be performed. In other words, the emphasis effect, the probability variable promotion effect, and the round promotion effect are configured not to be performed simultaneously during one jackpot game. In other words, the emphasis effect may not be performed in a jackpot game in which a probability variable promotion effect is performed, and the emphasis effect may not be performed in a jackpot game in which a round promotion effect is performed. Note that the probability variable promotion effect and the round promotion effect may be configured to be equipped with only one of them. Also, the general effects that ultimately notify the player that a jackpot game is actually a high-profit jackpot game, such as the probability variable promotion effect and the round promotion effect, are referred to as "promotion effects". In addition, as a further modification, during the execution of a jackpot game, the emphasis effect and the role effect (first role effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs are not executed during the execution of the aforementioned reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect), while the emphasis effect and the role effect (first role effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs during the same jackpot game can be executed after the execution of the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) ends, or before the execution of the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) starts. In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, it is preferable that the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) and the role effect (first role effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs do not overlap (including the case where the execution periods of both effects do not overlap in whole and the case where the execution periods of both effects do not overlap in part). When configured in this manner, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) and the emphasis effect are executed in an overlapping manner, but the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) and the role effect (first role effect) that is executed when the emphasis effect occurs may be configured not to be executed in an overlapping manner (including cases where the entire execution period of both effects does not overlap and cases where only part of the execution period of both effects does not overlap).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the number of times during the fluctuation feature performance (the fluctuation feature performance executable during one jackpot fluctuation) performed during the execution of the fluctuation display of the jackpot (jackpot fluctuation display) may differ from the number of times during the jackpot feature performance (the jackpot feature performance executable during one jackpot game) performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the fluctuation display stops. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation feature performance to be executed multiple times during the execution of the fluctuation display, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and unexpectedness, and to increase the player's interest in the occurrence of the feature performance (the fluctuation feature performance). In addition, when a during-variation role performance is executed while the jackpot variation display is being executed, and a jackpot role performance is executed during the execution of a jackpot game that is performed after the end of the jackpot variation display, the light emitted by the role lamp in the during-jackpot role performance is more likely to be a specific mode of light emission (rainbow light emission) than the light emitted by the role lamp in the during-variation role performance, or, it is preferable that the type of light emitted by the role lamp in the during-variation role performance also includes light emission in modes other than the specific mode of light emission (including blue light emission in addition to rainbow light emission), while the light emitted by the role lamp in the during-jackpot role performance only includes light emission in a specific mode (only rainbow light emission). More specifically, the illumination color of the role lamp during the role performance during a jackpot is only rainbow regardless of whether an emphasis performance or a promotion performance is performed, but the illumination color of the role performance during change that indicates the development from N reach to SP reach before the development of the SP reach (after the reach is established and before the development of the SP reach) is blue, and the illumination color of the role performance during change that notifies of a jackpot win at the win/loss branch scene after the development of the SP reach (the branch scene where the final result of the SP reach indicates either a jackpot or a loss) is rainbow. In this embodiment, the number of times that the variable feature performance performed during the execution of the jackpot variable display is different from the number of times that the jackpot feature performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot variable display has stopped is illustrated as being different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times that the variable feature performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot variable display is different from the number of times that the jackpot feature performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot variable display different from the certain jackpot variable display has stopped) may be different. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot variable display and the jackpot game that are triggered by the same one jackpot, the number of times that the variable feature performance performed during the execution of one jackpot variable display is different from the number of times that the jackpot feature performance performed during the execution of one jackpot game may be different. In addition, in this embodiment, the light emission color of the role lamp in the variable role performance performed during the execution of the jackpot variable display and the light emission color of the role lamp in the jackpot game during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot variable display has stopped are illustrated as different light emission colors, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emission color of the role lamp in the variable role performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot variable display and the light emission color of the role lamp in the jackpot game during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot variable display different from the certain jackpot variable display has stopped) may be different light emission colors. In other words, regardless of whether there is a relationship between the jackpot variable display and the jackpot game triggered by the same one jackpot, the light emission color of the role lamp in the variable role performance performed during the execution of one jackpot variable display and the light emission color of the role lamp in the jackpot game during the execution of one jackpot game may be different light emission colors.

Here, we will explain the execution times of the role-changing effects during fluctuations and the role-changing effects during big wins. Figure 70 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role-changing effects during fluctuations, and Figure 70 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role-changing effects during big wins.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance and the operation time TD2 of the door role in the big win role performance are configured to be different. Here, the operation times TD1 and TD2 of the door role are basically the time from when the door role (left and right door members) start their operation with the initial position as the starting point of the operation to when they return to the initial position and end their operation. In addition, these operation times TD1 and TD2 include not only the movement time when the door role is actually moving, but also the holding time (post-movement position holding time) when the door role is stopped and held at a predetermined movable position. In this embodiment, this holding time (post-movement position holding time) is the time when the door role is held in an integrated state (the door role is completed state) by the left and right door members being adjacently arranged at their respective movable positions. In this embodiment, the holding time (post-movement position holding time) of the door role in the jackpot role performance is longer than the holding time (post-movement position holding time) of the door role in the variable role performance, so that the respective operation times TD1 and TD2 are different. In other words, when comparing the execution time TD1 of the variable role performance with the execution time TD2 of the jackpot role performance, the closing direction movement time during which the door role (left and right door members) move in the closing direction from the initial position to the movable position is equal to the opening direction movement time during which the door role (left and right door members) move in the opening direction from the movable position to the initial position, but the holding time (post-movement position holding time) during which the door role (left and right door members) are held at a predetermined movable position is different, so that the operation time TD2 of the movable role in the jackpot role performance is longer than the operation time TD1 of the movable role in the variable role performance. According to this configuration, even when the during-changing device performance is executed while the jackpot changing display is being executed, and the jackpot device performance is executed during the jackpot game that is played after the jackpot changing display has ended, that is, even when multiple device performances are performed between the start of the jackpot changing display and the end of the jackpot game, since the operation times of the door device (left and right door members) are different, it is possible to give the player a different impression even if the operation sequence of the door device (left and right door members) is the same, thereby making it possible to further enrich the variety of device performances. In this embodiment, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during the execution of the jackpot variable display is different from the operation time TD2 of the door role in the jackpot game after the jackpot variable display is stopped, but this is not limited to this, and the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during a certain jackpot variable display and the operation time TD2 of the door role in the jackpot game during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot variable display different from the certain jackpot variable display is stopped) may be different. In other words, regardless of whether there is a relationship between the jackpot variable display and the jackpot game triggered by the same one jackpot, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during the execution of one jackpot variable display and the operation time TD2 of the door role in the jackpot game during the execution of one jackpot game may be different. According to this, as in the above-mentioned effect, even if the same door role is used in the role performance (second role performance), it is possible to give a different impression to the player, and the variety of the role performance can be further enriched. Also, regarding the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance, the operation time of the variable role performance that notifies the winning of the jackpot at the scene of the win/loss branch after the SP reach development (the branching scene of whether the final result of the SP reach is a content indicating a jackpot or a content indicating a loss) is longer than the operation time of the variable role performance that suggests the development from N reach to SP reach before the SP reach development (after the reach is established to before the SP reach development), so that the variation of the role performance within one big win change (within one big win change display) can be further enriched. Here, as a modified example, the operation time TD1 of the door device in the variable device performance may be configured to be longer than the operation time TD2 of the door device in the jackpot device performance. By configuring it in this way, even during a jackpot game, which has a limited execution period (the end of the execution period may be brought forward depending on the ball entry status into the large winning opening 54), the jackpot device performance can be completed as much as possible within that execution period, and the variable device performance executed during the predetermined variable time can further heighten the player's sense of anticipation by having a long execution time.

As a modified example, when a predetermined movable part (door part) or a specific movable part (movable part 24) is held at a predetermined movable position, the movable part may be transformed into another form or combined with another movable part to form a completed body. In addition, the closing direction movement time and the opening direction movement time of the door part in the variable part performance may be different from the closing direction movement time and the opening direction movement time of the door part in the jackpot part performance, so that the operation time TD1 of the door part in the variable part performance and the operation time TD2 of the door part in the jackpot part performance may be different. In addition, as described above, the operation time TD2 of the door part in the jackpot part performance may be configured to be shorter than the operation time TD1 of the door part in the variable part performance, or the operation time TD1 of the door part in the variable part performance and the operation time TD2 of the door part in the jackpot part performance may be configured to be the same time. In addition, when the variable role performance is executed multiple times during the display of the changing pattern, as described above, for example, the execution time of the variable role performance (variable role performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot) performed at the scene of the winning/losing branch after the SP reach development may be longer than the execution time of the variable role performance performed before the SP reach development, or conversely, the execution time of the variable role performance (variable role performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot) performed at the scene of the winning/losing branch after the SP reach development may be shorter than the execution time of the variable role performance performed before the SP reach development. Also, the operation pattern (operation distance, operation sequence, operation speed, etc.) of the door role in the variable role performance may be different from the operation pattern (operation distance, operation sequence, operation speed, etc.) of the door role in the jackpot role performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light emission mode of the role lamp in the variable role performance and the light emission mode of the role lamp in the jackpot role performance are configured to be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(A), during the execution of the variable role performance (for example, the variable role performance before the SP reach development), the role lamp emits light in a predetermined light emission color (blue). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(B), during the execution of the jackpot role performance, the role lamp emits light in a specific light emission color (rainbow color). By making the light emission color of the role lamp different between the variable role performance and the jackpot role performance in this way, the player's interest can be attracted not only to the operation of the door role but also to the light emission color of the role lamp from the start of the variable display to the end of the jackpot game, and the performance effect of the role performance can be improved. In addition, in the time chart shown in Figure 70, the door function lamp may be configured to emit white light rather than being in a non-illuminating state (in that case, it should be noted that "non-illuminating" in this time chart is replaced with "white light emission").

In addition, during the variable role performance at the time of the win/lose branch after the development of the SP reach, the role lamp of the door role may be configured to emit a specific light color (rainbow color). In this way, even if two variable role performances are performed during one variable display, the light color of the role lamp will be different, so even if the operation of the door role is the same, it is possible to give the player a different impression, and the variety of role performances can be further enriched.

<<Execution Restrictions on Emphasis Effects and Over Winning Effects>>
Next, the execution restriction when the execution conditions of the highlighting effect and the over winning effect are satisfied will be described. Fig. 71 (A) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the highlighting effect is performed, and Fig. 71 (B) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the over winning effect is performed.

As described above, the highlight effect can be executed when the highlight effect execution condition is satisfied during a jackpot game, and the over prize effect can be executed when the over prize effect execution condition is satisfied during a jackpot game (one round of play). However, even if the highlight effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are satisfied, if a special effect described below is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the special effect and/or the over prize effect is restricted. In other words, if a special effect is being executed when the highlight effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are satisfied, or if a special effect is scheduled to be executed when the highlight effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are satisfied (if it has been decided by a lottery to execute a special effect), the execution of the highlight effect and/or the over prize effect is restricted (cancelled) even if the highlight effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are satisfied. In addition, the time chart in FIG. 71 shows the case where the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect, but if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied before the execution of the special effect (when the special effect is not being executed) or if the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect or over-winning effect being executed is stopped midway when the timing to start the execution of the special effect arrives while the emphasis effect or over-winning effect is being executed. As a modified example, if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied before the execution of the special effect (when the special effect is not being executed) or if the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect or over-winning effect being executed may be configured to be executed to the end without being stopped midway, unlike when the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the emphasis effect or over-winning effect ends midway.

Here, the special effects in this embodiment are predetermined effects that can be performed during the execution of a special game (a big win game or a small win game), and examples of such effects include the following:

(1) Reserve consecutive winning indication performance Reserve consecutive winning indication performance (also called reserved consecutive winning performance) is an indication that reserved consecutive winning has occurred, as described above. In addition, "reserved consecutive winning" refers to the fact that when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern performed by the consumption of a certain preceding operating reserved ball is a jackpot, one or more subsequent operating reserved balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the time when the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern related to the preceding operating reserved ball is permitted to the time when the jackpot game that is executed as a trigger of the jackpot is ended, which includes an operating reserved ball (also called "jackpot reservation") that is expected to become a jackpot. Here, the reason for restricting the execution of the highlighting effect and the over winning effect when the reserved consecutive winning indication performance is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that if the highlighting effect or the over winning effect is executed in overlap with the reserved consecutive winning indication performance, the notification contents of both effects will be difficult for the player to recognize, and the effect of both effects may be reduced. Furthermore, for a player, the information that the next jackpot is guaranteed (that a consecutive win in the reserved lottery has occurred) is more useful than the fact that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value or that an over-winning has occurred, and since it is possible to know that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value by checking the cumulative number of winning balls display, prioritizing the execution of the reserved lottery suggestion effect over the execution of an emphasis effect or an over-winning effect increases the enjoyment of the game.

(2) Promotion performance Promotion performance is a performance that suggests or informs the player of the profit mode (for convenience, referred to as "temporary profit mode") related to the jackpot when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of a special pattern, before or at the start of the jackpot game, and then suggests or informs the player that the actual profit mode related to the jackpot during the jackpot game is more profitable than the provisional profit mode. In other words, it suggests whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and shows whether the profit mode of the jackpot will be promoted through this series of processes (as mentioned above, it is a performance that finally informs the player that the jackpot game is actually a high profit jackpot game while appearing to be a low profit jackpot game). There are two types of promotion performance: the probability promotion performance and the round promotion performance. The contents of the probability promotion performance and the round promotion performance have been described above, so repeated explanations will be omitted. Here, the reason for restricting the execution of the highlighting effect and the over-winning effect when the promotion effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that if the highlighting effect or the over-winning effect is executed in overlap with the promotion effect, the notification contents of both effects may be difficult for the player to recognize, and the effect of both effects may be reduced. Also, for the player, the information that the profit state of the jackpot is promoted (promoted to a certain jackpot or the jackpot game is rounded up) is more useful than the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific number or that an over-winning has occurred, and furthermore, the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value can be understood by checking the cumulative number of prize balls display, so that the interest of the game is increased by prioritizing the execution of the promotion effect over the execution of the highlighting effect or the over-winning effect.

(3) Low-profit jackpot performance When the jackpot performance performed during a jackpot game is a so-called low-profit jackpot performance, even if the emphasis performance execution condition and/or over-winning performance execution condition are satisfied during the execution of the low-profit jackpot performance, the emphasis performance and/or over-winning performance will not be executed. Note that the "low-profit jackpot" refers to, for example, a jackpot type (low round jackpot) in which the specified number of rounds is set to a relatively small number of rounds, a jackpot type (short opening jackpot) in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot entry port of each round is set to a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and a jackpot type (normal jackpot) that is an opportunity to transition to a normal game state (low probability low base state) or a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. The reason for restricting the execution of the highlighting effect and the over winning effect when the low-profit jackpot effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that when such a low-profit jackpot is won, even if the highlighting effect or the over winning effect is executed in the jackpot game (even if a congratulatory effect is executed because the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value or an over winning occurs), it is not possible to evoke a sense of satisfaction or superiority in the player, and a sufficient performance effect cannot be expected. In addition, when a short-open jackpot is won, the cumulative number of winning balls is not displayed during the short round game, so that even if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value (the value of the cumulative number of winning balls counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of winning balls) or an over winning occurs, the highlighting effect or the over winning effect that is performed in conjunction with the cumulative number of winning balls display is not executed.

In addition, the types of jackpots can be broadly divided into high-profit jackpots, which are set to be relatively advantageous to the player, and low-profit jackpots, which are set to be relatively advantageous to the player, and the system can be configured so that an emphasis effect is executed when an emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot effect that is performed when a high-profit jackpot is won, while an emphasis effect is not executed when an emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot effect that is performed when a low-profit jackpot is won.

(4) Big Win End Demo Performance In this embodiment, the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over prize performance execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of the big win end demo performance, and the emphasis performance and/or the over prize performance are not executed as a result of the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over prize performance execution condition being satisfied during the execution of the big win end demo performance. Specifically, in this embodiment, as described above, the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening 54 is not effectively detected during the execution time of the big win end demo performance, and the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over prize performance execution condition are not satisfied during the execution time of this big win end demo performance. In other words, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of the final round of play is designed not to be detected after the jackpot end demo has started beyond the interval period (in other words, the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 in the final round of play is structured to be detected always during the execution of the final round of play or within the interval period immediately thereafter), so the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition will not be satisfied during the execution of this jackpot end demo effect, and the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect will not be executed in duplicate. In the unlikely event that, due to some factor (for example, game balls exceeding the specified count number become stuck in front of the winning detection sensor inside the large prize opening 54), a ball enters the large prize opening 54 before the start of the jackpot end demo (at this point, the ball is not detected as it has not passed the ball entry detection sensor inside the large prize opening 54), but even if the ball passes the ball entry detection sensor inside the large prize opening 54 during the jackpot end demo, no prize ball will be generated as a result of the passage, and the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition will not be satisfied during the jackpot end demo performance.

In addition, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 54 just before the end of the final round game (especially when the game balls exceed the specified count number), the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54 is designed to be effectively detected before the end of the final round game or the interval period, so if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are established before the interval period has elapsed, the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect will be started with the establishment of the execution condition as a trigger. In that case, the emphasis effect may continue even during the execution of the big win end demo effect beyond the final round game and the interval period, but as mentioned above, the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the big win end demo effect (20 seconds), so the emphasis effect is completed before the big win end demo effect ends (before the variable display after the end of the big win game starts) (the over prize effect may be configured in the same way as the emphasis effect). As a modified example of this embodiment, for example, when the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition are satisfied by the game ball entering the big prize opening 54 just before the end of the final round of play, and the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect that is triggered by the satisfaction of the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition is not completed by the end of the interval period, the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect may be forcibly terminated when the big win end demo effect (big win end demo period) starts (even if the execution time of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect remains at the start of the big win end demo effect, it may be forcibly terminated). As a further modified example, the execution time of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect may be set shorter than the interval time (interval period) so that the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect that is started at least by the end of the final round of play is not executed beyond the interval period (i.e., the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect and the big win end demo effect may not be executed overlappingly).

(5) First round presentation in small win game As a variation of this embodiment, when a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed type gaming machine (a model generally referred to as a small win V) that combines the first type of playability and the second type of playability is applied, the machine may be configured so that the emphasis presentation and/or over winning presentation are not executed even if the emphasis presentation execution condition and/or over winning presentation execution condition are satisfied during the first round (initial round presentation) of the small win game.

Specifically, this gaming machine of the type called "small win V" has a first type of gameplay in which a big win game is executed when the result of the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays a big win pattern, and a second type of gameplay in which a big win game is executed when a game ball that enters the big win opening 54, which is in an open state when the result of the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays a small win pattern, passes through a specific area (V area). Therefore, if a game ball that enters the big win opening 54 passes through the specific area during the execution of a small win game, the right to develop into a big win game is granted after the end of the small win game. As a result, the first round of the small win game becomes an important round game that encourages the player to enter the game ball into the big win opening 54 and pass through the specific area (called "V entry"). Therefore, in the first round of this small win game, the execution of a V-winning instruction effect, which instructs the game ball to enter a specific area by displaying a message image showing the words "Aim for a V-winning!", for example, takes precedence over the execution of an emphasis effect and/or an over-winning effect indicating that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific number. In other words, even if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over-winning effect are satisfied by the ball entering in the first round of the small win game, the emphasis effect and/or the over-winning effect are not executed. However, for the second round and onwards, which are executed when the ball passes through the specific area (V area) in the first round and becomes a big win game, the emphasis effect and/or the over-winning effect are executed by satisfying the emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over-winning effect.

In addition, if a V entry occurs in which the game ball passes through a specific area in the first round of this small win game, a special effect (round number suggestion effect) is played for the game ball entering the large prize entry port 54 that occurs after the V entry in the first round (for example, if a V entry occurs with the first ball entering the large prize entry port 54, then the second or subsequent balls enter the large prize entry port 54), and in this special effect, the display mode (display color) of a specific object image is changed each time the game ball enters the large prize entry port 54, and the number of rounds of the subsequent large prize game is suggested depending on the display mode (display color) after the change. More specifically, the special effect (round number suggestion effect) is an effect in which the word "Congratulations!" is displayed when a V win occurs, and the color of the "Congratulations!" word can change with each subsequent ball that enters the large winning port 54 (until the specified count is reached), and the more rounds there are, the higher the likelihood of the number of rounds increasing in the order of the color of the words white → blue → red → rainbow (examples of the number of rounds include 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds, and the rainbow colored number determines the highest number of rounds). Even in this case, it is preferable to prioritize the execution of the special effect (round number suggestion effect) that is performed after a V win, and to limit the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect even if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition are met.

In the above embodiment, if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are satisfied while the special effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect is restricted (stopped), but in addition to this, if the special effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect, the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect may be forcibly terminated or temporarily suspended when the execution of the special effect starts. If the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect is temporarily suspended when the execution of the special effect starts, it is preferable to resume the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect when the execution of the special effect ends.

<Recovery after power failure while displaying the jackpot type>
Next, a case where a power failure occurs during the execution of a jackpot game and the first specific performance (jackpot type display) that indicates the specified number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game is being performed will be described. Figure 72 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during the execution of the jackpot type display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot start demo, a jackpot type display (Choju jackpot display, Kotobuki jackpot display, Ki jackpot display) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 to indicate the type of jackpot that will trigger the execution of the jackpot game, and the player is suggested or informed of the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed. Specifically, the "Choju jackpot display" is a display in which the text "Choju jackpot!!!" is displayed on a rainbow background during the execution of the jackpot start demo, the "Kotobuki jackpot display" is a display in which the text "Kotobuki jackpot!" is displayed on a red background during the execution of the jackpot start demo, and the "Kitobuki jackpot display" is a display in which the text "Kitobuki jackpot" is displayed on a blue background during the execution of the jackpot start demo. During the execution of a jackpot game (jackpot start demo), if the Choju jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or notified that the currently executed jackpot game is a 16-round game (it is suggested or notified that the Choju jackpot has been won), and if the Ju jackpot display or Ki jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or notified that the currently executed jackpot game is a 4-round jackpot game (it is suggested or notified that the Ju jackpot or Ki jackpot has been won). And, if a power outage occurs during the execution of this jackpot game (jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is resumed when the power outage is restored, the jackpot type display that was interrupted by the power outage is not restored, and after the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is resumed, a power outage recovery image (power outage recovery screen) showing the words "Recovering" is displayed during the jackpot game (jackpot start demo). In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs during a jackpot game (a jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (a jackpot start demo) is resumed by recovering from the power failure, the display by the performance display device 70 is restored before the display by the main control display device 27 (a round display to be described later) is restored (that is, after the power failure is restored, the display by the performance display device 70 is restored, and then the display by the main control display device 27 is restored; that is, after the display by the performance display device 70 is restored, the lighted display of the round display lamp 77 is restored). When the power failure is restored and the jackpot game (a jackpot start demo) is resumed, the jackpot type display is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 when the display by the performance display device 70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is displayed. This power failure recovery image is continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the final round or the end of the jackpot end demo). In this way, when the power is restored and the jackpot game is resumed, the notification of the power restoration is prioritized over the execution of the jackpot type display that was interrupted by the power failure, so that the player can be promptly notified that the power has been restored and the jackpot game can be resumed. Furthermore, after the power is restored, the notification of the power restoration is prioritized over the execution of the round display that was interrupted by the power failure, so that the player can be promptly notified that the power has been restored and the jackpot game can be resumed. Note that the above-mentioned power restoration (power restoration) is a power restoration that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and in the case of a power restoration that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and is restored in a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination of "331".

As a variant, if a power outage occurs while the jackpot start demo is being executed and the power recovery image is displayed as the power is restored, the device may be configured to return to the normal jackpot presentation (for example, the above-mentioned Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, or Happy jackpot presentation) after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds have elapsed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or when the jackpot start demo ends (in other words, the device may return to the normal round presentation after a predetermined time has elapsed or from the start of the first round). In addition, a round performance screen according to the type of the performance during the big win (Choju big win performance, Kotobuki big win performance, Ki big win performance) is displayed; that is, when the performance pattern during the big win is Choju big win performance, a Choju big win round screen (for example, a performance screen in which five characters are introduced on a rainbow background), when the performance pattern during the big win is Kotobuki big win performance, a Kotobuki big win round screen (for example, a performance screen in which two characters are introduced on a red background), when the performance pattern during the big win is Ki big win performance, a Ki big win round screen (for example, a performance screen in which one character is introduced on a blue background) is displayed. In addition, as another modified example, after a power outage occurs during the execution of the big win start demo and a power outage recovery image is displayed with the power outage recovery, a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, five seconds have elapsed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or the big win start demo has ended, the screen may be configured to return to a big win screen dedicated to after power outage recovery (a round screen dedicated to after power outage recovery) (that is, it may return to a normal round performance after a predetermined time has elapsed or from the start of the first round). Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power restoration) refers to a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and in the case of a power outage recovery that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed frozen in the "331" combination.

<Recovery after power loss while displaying the round>
Next, a case where a power failure occurs during a jackpot game is being played and a second specific effect (round display) is being played, which indicates the number of rounds in the currently played round game, will be described. Fig. 73 is a time chart showing a power failure that occurs during the round display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, a round display is performed on the screen of the performance display device 70 to suggest or inform the player of which round the currently executed round game is, and the number of rounds of the currently executed round game is suggested or informed to the player. This round display corresponds to the display content of the round display area 730 described above, but even during the jackpot game, it is not displayed during the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo, but is displayed during the round game (it may also be displayed during the interval period, but in such a configuration, it is preferable to display the round corresponding to the certain round game during the interval period after the end of a certain round game). Also, during the execution of the jackpot game, the round indicator light 77 that informs the specified number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game is lit on the main control display device 27. The lit display of this round indicator light 77 is configured to be lit not only during the round game during the jackpot game, but also during the jackpot start demo, the jackpot end demo, and the interval period. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs during a jackpot game (round game) and the jackpot game (round game) is resumed due to the recovery of the power failure, the display of the performance display device 70 is restored before the display of the main control display device 27 is restored (after the power failure is restored, the display of the main control display device 27 is restored after the display of the performance display device 70 is restored, that is, the display of the round indicator lamp 77 is restored after the display of the performance display device 70 is restored). Then, when the power failure is restored and the jackpot game (round game) is resumed, the round display is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 when the display of the performance display device 70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is displayed. This power failure recovery image continues to be displayed until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the final round game or the end of the jackpot end demo). In other words, after the power is restored, the notification of the power restoration is prioritized over the execution of the round display that was interrupted by the power failure, so that the player can be promptly notified that the power has been restored and the big win game can be resumed. Note that the above-mentioned power restoration (power restoration) is a restoration from a power failure that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and in the case of a restoration from a power failure that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to a normal game state (low probability low base state), and the game is restored to a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of "331", and the round indicator lamp 77 is restored to an off state.

On the other hand, after the power outage is restored, the main control display device 27 displays the round indicator light 77 and the specified number of rounds of the resumed jackpot game. Therefore, when the power is restored, the player can first check the power outage recovery image on the performance display device 70, and then check the round indicator light 77 on the main control display device 27. In this way, the display on the performance display device 70 is first restored to quickly inform the player that the power outage is being restored, which can reassure the player. Subsequently, the display on the main control display device 27 is restored and the round indicator light 77 is lit to inform the player of the type of jackpot game that was interrupted due to the power outage (the player can earn the specified number of rounds displayed by the round indicator light 77), which can give the player an even greater sense of security. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) refers to a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and in the case of a power outage recovery that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and the decorative patterns are restored to the stopped display of the "331" combination, and the round indicator light 77 is restored to the off display.

Also, as mentioned above, when a jackpot game is resumed due to recovery from a power outage, the cumulative number of prize balls is not displayed during the resumed jackpot game, and even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 54, the cumulative number of prize balls display is not updated, the count-up effect, the highlight effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed. Also, even if more game balls than the specified number enter the large prize opening 54 (over entry) during the resumed jackpot game, the over entry effect is not executed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the resumed jackpot game, the cumulative number of prize balls display is not updated, the count-up effect, the bonus prize effect are not executed. In this embodiment, from when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power supply being restored until the jackpot game is finished, the power supply recovery image is continuously displayed on the performance display device 70, and the jackpot type display, round display, cumulative prize ball number display, large prize port winning performance (over prize performance), and general prize port winning performance (bonus prize performance) are not executed. As a modified example, when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power supply being restored, the cumulative prize ball number display (updated display) is displayed, but the highlight performance may not be executed even if the highlight performance execution condition is satisfied. Also, when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power supply being restored, the cumulative prize ball number display (updated display) is displayed, but the over prize performance may not be executed even if the over prize performance execution condition is satisfied. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) refers to a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and in the case of a power outage recovery that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed frozen in the "331" combination.

In addition, as a variant, after a power outage occurs during the execution of a certain round of play and the power recovery image is displayed as the power is restored, the normal jackpot presentation (for example, the above-mentioned Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, and Happy jackpot presentation) may be restored after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds have elapsed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or when the certain round of play ends (in other words, if the power is cut off and then restored during, for example, the third round of play, the normal round presentation may be restored from the start of the fourth round of play). As described above, the round performance screen according to the type of performance during the jackpot (Choju jackpot performance, Kotobuki jackpot performance, Ki jackpot performance) is displayed. That is, when the performance pattern during the jackpot is Choju jackpot performance, the Choju jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which five characters are introduced on a rainbow background) is displayed, when the performance pattern during the jackpot is Kotobuki jackpot performance, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which two characters are introduced on a red background) is displayed, and when the performance pattern is Ki jackpot performance, the Ki jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which one character is introduced on a blue background) is displayed. In this case, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but it starts from "0" instead of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power failure, and the cumulative number of prize balls counter is also cleared to "0" and starts. However, even if the game starts from "0", the cumulative number of winning balls display is updated, a count-up effect is displayed, and a highlight effect (enlarged display) is displayed when a game ball enters the big winning opening 54, and if a game ball enters the big winning opening 54 in excess of the specified number (over-winning) during the resumed big win game, an over-winning effect is displayed. Similarly, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the resumed big win game, an update of the cumulative number of winning balls display is displayed, a count-up effect is displayed, and a bonus winning effect is displayed. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) is a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and if the power outage recovery involves RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the game returns to a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

In another variant, if a power outage occurs during a round of play and the power recovery image is displayed as the power is restored, the game may be configured to return to a special jackpot screen (a round screen dedicated to after power recovery) when a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 5 seconds have elapsed since the power recovery image was displayed) or when the round of play ends (i.e., if the power is cut and then restored during, for example, the third round of round play, the game may return to the normal round presentation from the start of the fourth round of round play). In this case, the cumulative number of winning balls is not displayed during the restarted round of play and subsequent jackpot games, and even if a game ball enters the large winning hole 54, the cumulative number of winning balls display is not updated, the count-up effect is not performed, and the highlighting effect (enlarged display) is not performed. Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the large winning hole 54 in excess of the specified number (over-winning) during the restarted jackpot game, the over-winning effect is not performed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during the restarted jackpot game, the cumulative number of winning balls display is not updated, the count-up effect is not performed, and the bonus winning effect is not performed. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) is a power outage recovery without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and if the power outage recovery is accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the game returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the combination "331".

The main advantages achieved by the third embodiment can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the third embodiment, by using a special effect display that applies a predetermined special effect when the emphasis display appears and/or disappears, which is displayed when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, the degree of emphasis provided by this emphasis display can be dramatically improved, making it possible to make an even greater impression on the player that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value.In addition, by clearly indicating the start and end of the emphasis display (i.e., by clearly indicating before and after the division when the emphasis display during a jackpot game is considered to be a division of the jackpot game), it is possible to add contrast to the game during the jackpot game, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the third embodiment, the rarity of the highlighting display can be increased by preventing multiple display patterns of the highlighting display from being displayed overlapping at the same time. Furthermore, by configuring the execution time of the highlighting display to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even if the highlighting display is performed when the highlighting display execution condition is met based on the ball entering the big prize opening 54 just before the end of the final round of play, the highlighting display is completed within the jackpot end demo period, so the highlighting display does not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period and extend to the variable display after the end of the jackpot game (the end of the jackpot game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation can be clearly separated), and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the third embodiment, when a rare effect (special effect) or an effect (special effect) that is important to the player is executed during a jackpot game, the execution of the highlight effect display is restricted even if the condition for executing the highlight effect is met when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, thereby reliably guaranteeing the execution of this high priority special effect, and preventing a decline in the player's expectations and interest in the occurrence of the special effect, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the third embodiment, when executing a rare effect (special effect) or an effect (special effect) that is important to the player during a jackpot game, the execution of the over-winning effect is restricted even if a game ball enters the jackpot opening 54 in excess of the specified count number, thereby reliably guaranteeing the execution of this high priority special effect, and preventing the player's expectations and interest in the occurrence of a special effect from decreasing, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the third embodiment, if a power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the restoration of the performance display device 70, which is the area that the player pays the most attention to, is prioritized when the power is restored, and the player is quickly notified that the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the power outage can be resumed. When the display of the main control display device 27 is restored, information indicating the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is displayed, allowing the player to clearly determine the type of jackpot game currently being played (number of rounds won). This makes it possible to appropriately realize various notifications and performance displays performed when the power is restored without complicating the game, and it becomes possible to smoothly proceed with the jackpot game that is resumed when the power is restored, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine and the entertainment value of the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment and/or the third embodiment described above, and the following description will be given to the same parts with the same reference numerals and will omit the description, and will mainly describe the different parts. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment and/or the third embodiment.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be explained below in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a setting function that allows the user to set the probability of winning the special symbol win/loss judgment, and a performance information display function that displays the performance information of the game.

<Board configuration>
First, the board configuration of the gaming machine 20 of the fourth embodiment will be briefly described. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment), the game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can mainly enter any one of the first start opening 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged below the center ornament 21. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any one of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second start opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged to the right of the center ornament 21. The game balls that enter each winning opening are detected by each winning opening switch and are discharged to the back side of the game board 20. In addition, at the bottom end of the game area PA, an out opening 29 is provided for discharging the game balls that flow down without entering each winning opening to the back side of the game board 20. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area PA and used for play, that is, the number of game balls (played balls) that have entered each winning hole or outlet 29 of the game area PA and been discharged to the back side of the game board 10, is counted by a played ball detection switch 891 described later. Note that, among the game areas PA equipped with various winning holes, a hitting method in which the game balls are shot so that they flow down to the left side area PA1 is called a "left hit," and a hitting method in which the game balls are shot so that they flow down to the right side area PA2 is called a "right hit."

<Electrical configuration of gaming machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. In this fourth embodiment, the main control board 100 is equipped with a setting key switch 810, a RAM clear switch 820, a performance display monitor 830, etc., which will be described in detail later. In addition, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to a played ball detection switch 891 that detects a game ball discharged from the game area PA, a frame opening switch 892 that detects whether the front frame 2 is opened relative to the outer frame 1, etc. These played ball detection switch 891 and frame opening switch 892 output their respective detection signals to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104. Also in this fourth embodiment, the main control display device 27 (see FIG. 64) is provided with various display means such as a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reserved lamp 73, a second special symbol reserved lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, a normal symbol reserved lamp 76, a round indicator lamp 77, a status indicator lamp 78, a right hit indicator lamp 79, an error indicator lamp Er, etc. Note that the other configurations are basically the same as those in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

<Major functional configuration of gaming machine>
Next, various functions of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200) will be described. Figure 75 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200), and Figure 76 is a functional block diagram showing the power-on transition mode control means 175 and performance information management means 176 of Figure 75. As shown in Figures 75 and 76, the main control board 100 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a power-on transition mode control means 175 and a performance information management means 176 as a difference from the first embodiment.

The power-on transition mode control means 175 controls four modes (setting change mode, setting check mode, RAM clear mode, and game mode, which will be described later) to which the mode is transitioned in response to a selection operation performed when the gaming machine is powered on. As shown in FIG. 76, this power-on control means 175 comprises setting change processing means 175A, setting check processing means 175B, and RAM clear processing means 175C. The setting change processing means 175A executes setting change processing if the setting change mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on. The setting check processing means 175B executes setting check processing if the setting check mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on. The RAM clear processing means 175C executes RA clear processing if the RAM clear mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on.
M clear processing is executed. Note that these setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clear processing are executed in the main control side main processing (see FIG. 35) that is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. On the other hand, when a game mode (a mode that allows playing) is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the processing related to the progress of the game (including processing when the power is turned off) is executed by each of the means 110 to 190 provided on the main control board 100. That is, in this embodiment, each of the means 110 to 190 provided on the main control board 100 becomes a game mode processing means that executes the processing of the game mode (processing related to the progress of the game (including processing when the power is turned off)) when a game mode is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Also, the game mode in this embodiment means a state that allows the progress of a series of games such as a hit/miss judgment processing of special symbols/normal symbols, a variable display processing, and a special game execution processing (a state that allows playing). Therefore, at least the processing performed after the timer interrupt processing on the main control side (FIG. 37) is started is included in the processing in the game mode. The details of the transition modes when the power is turned on (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) will be described later.

The performance information management means 176 executes processing related to the measurement and display of game performance information as processing for managing game performance information. As shown in FIG. 76, the performance information management means 176 includes a performance information measurement control means 176A and a performance information display control means 176B. The performance information measurement control means 176A executes processing for measuring game performance information. The performance information display control means 176B executes processing for displaying game performance information. This processing for measuring and displaying game performance information is repeatedly executed at a predetermined interrupt period (4 ms) by the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). However, part of the processing for measuring and displaying game performance information may be executed by the main control side main processing (see FIG. 35) that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on. The contents related to the measurement and display of game performance information will be described later.

Next, the main control board unit 100U of the fourth embodiment will be described. Figure 77 is a front view showing the main control board unit 100U of the fourth embodiment, and Figure 77 is a schematic diagram showing the performance display monitor 830 mounted on the main control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 77, the main control board unit 100U is configured with a main control board 100 and a main control board case 100A that houses the main control board 100.

The main control board case 100A is comprised of a bottom case 100B that covers the solder side of the main control board 100, and a top case 100C that covers the component mounting side of the main control board 100, such as electronic and electrical components. A so-called crimping mechanism 100D is provided at the case end that is aligned front to back when the top case 100C is attached to the bottom case 100B and closed. Both the bottom case 100B and the top case 100C are formed by a molding method such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (e.g. polycarbonate, etc.), and are configured so that the inside of the main control board case 100A (main control board 100) can be seen from the outside.

The main control board 100 is configured as a rectangular printed wiring board, and on its component mounting surface are the main control microcomputer 110 (see Figure 74), multiple connectors CN1 to CN5, setting key switch 810, RAM clear switch 820, and performance display monitor 830. The main control board 100 is fixed to the inner surface of the main control board case 100A (top case 100B) using multiple screws.

The setting key switch 810 is a key switch mechanism that can be switched between the ON and OFF states by turning a setting change key (a dedicated key managed by an arcade staff member, etc.) inserted into the keyhole.

As described in the first embodiment, the RAM clear switch 820 is an operation button that is operated to clear the RAM when the gaming machine is turned on. This RAM clear switch 820 is an operation switch that can be pressed, and is in the ON state when operated and in the OFF state when not operated. The RAM clear switch 820, which will be described in detail later, also serves as a setting change switch that allows the setting value of the winning probability of a jackpot (the probability of winning a jackpot by determining whether a special pattern is a hit or a miss) to be set (changed) in cooperation with the setting key switch. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 820 is mounted on the main control board 100, but the RAM clear switch 820 may be mounted on the power supply board 500 as in the first embodiment described above.

The setting key switch 810 and the RAM clear switch 820 are covered by a small door 100E that is pivotably attached to the top case 100C, and the setting key switch 810 and the RAM clear switch 820 can be exposed by pivoting the small door 100E upward (i.e., they can be operated).

As shown in FIG. 78, the performance display monitor 830 is configured with four-digit display units 831-834. Specifically, the performance display monitor 830 is configured with, from left to right, a first display unit 831, a second display unit 832, a third display unit 833, and a fourth display unit 834. Each digit display unit 831-834 is configured with seven LED segments SG1-SG7 arranged in a figure of eight and one LED segment SG8 formed in a dot point shape. In this way, each digit display unit 831-834 is configured with eight LED segments SG1-SG8. Therefore, each digit display unit 501-504 can display information such as numbers from 0 to 9, letters, and symbols by selectively lighting up the eight LED segments SG1-SG8. In the following, in order to distinguish between the LED segments SG1 to SG8, the seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 constituting the so-called seven segments are also referred to as "seven-segment SG1 to SG7," and the single LED segment SG8 constituting the dot point is also referred to as "dot-segment SG8." In this embodiment, the four display sections 831 to 834 are switched to the first display section 831 → second display section 832 → third display section 833 → fourth display section 834 → first display section 831 → ... by dynamic lighting control at each interruption (every 4 ms), and the afterimage phenomenon is utilized to make it appear to the naked eye that all four display areas 831 to 834 are emitting light (continuously lit). Each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The display units 831 and 832 of the top two digits of the performance display monitor 830 constitute an identification display unit (identification segment) 830a that displays an identifier (identification symbol) for identifying the performance information of the game and the type of error, etc., as will be described later. The display units 833 and 834 of the bottom two digits of the performance display monitor 830 constitute a ratio display unit (ratio segment) 830b that displays a numerical value (base value) indicating the performance information of the game. In this embodiment, the set value of the jackpot probability (six-level set value from "1" to "6" in this embodiment) is displayed on the fourth display unit 834. In this way, various information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 can be seen from the outside through the transparent main control board case 100A. As a modified example of this embodiment, instead of displaying the set value of the jackpot probability on the performance information display monitor 830, a dedicated display device for displaying the set value may be provided.

Next, we will explain the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. Figure 79 is a diagram showing the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

<Setting value>
First, the setting value of the jackpot probability will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In this embodiment, the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is determined by six setting values. In this embodiment, the six setting values are "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In the following, the setting value of 1 is called "setting value 1", the setting value of 2 is called "setting value 2", the setting value of 3 is called "setting value 3", the setting value of 4 is called "setting value 4", the setting value of 5 is called "setting value 5", and the setting value of 6 is called "setting value 6". In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, only one setting value that determines the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol may be set (i.e., a gaming machine with one setting having only one setting value (setting value 1) may be adopted). As a result, in this gaming machine with one stage setting, in the setting confirmation mode, only "1" is displayed as the current setting value, and in the setting change mode, processing is performed so that the setting value is not changed from "1" (for example, even if an operation to change the setting value is performed, the setting value is not changed from "1" to another number, such as "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → ...), making it possible to design a gaming machine with a software configuration and hardware configuration that are substantially equivalent to a gaming machine equipped with a setting change function (a gaming machine with multiple setting values).

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability for each setting value increases by one step in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state, the jackpot probability for setting value 1 is 1/320, the jackpot probability for setting value 2 is 1/301, the jackpot probability for setting value 3 is 1/280, the jackpot probability for setting value 4 is 1/260, the jackpot probability for setting value 5 is 1/240, and the jackpot probability for setting value 6 is 1/220. Also, when the game state is a high probability state, the jackpot probability when the setting value is 1 is "1/102", when the setting value is 2 is "1/95", when the setting value is 3 is "1/89", when the setting value is 4 is "1/82", when the setting value is 5 is "1/76", and when the setting value is 6 is "1/70". In addition, in each of the setting values 1 to 6, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to be the same ratio (in this embodiment, the denominator of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the denominator of the jackpot probability in the high probability state are rounded off to the first decimal place). In other words, no matter which of the setting values 1 to 6 is selected, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (the change rate of the jackpot probability) is the same. As mentioned above, these six setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830.

<Judgment of the special design>
Next, the judgment of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram showing the special symbol winning/losing lottery table in the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to each set value 1 to 6 is provided, and the special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the currently set set value is selected to execute the winning/losing judgment process of the special symbol. Here, FIG. 80(A) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 1, FIG. 80(B) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 2, FIG. 80(C) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 3, FIG. 80(D) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 4, FIG. 80(E) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 5, and FIG. 80(F) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 6.

As in the first embodiment, each special symbol hit/miss lottery table includes a table that is referenced in a game state where the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated (low probability state), and a table that is referenced in a game state where the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated (high probability state). In addition, each special symbol hit/miss lottery table is associated with a random number range for the special symbol hit random number value and the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (jackpot, miss). Note that Figure 80 also includes the jackpot probability as a reference value.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), when the setting value is 1, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 643". In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/320", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/102".

As shown in FIG. 80(B), when the setting value is 2, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 217", and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 686". In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/301", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/95".

As shown in FIG. 80(C), when the setting value is 3, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 233," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 735." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/280," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/89."

As shown in FIG. 80 (D), when the setting value is 4, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 251," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 791." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/260," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/82."

As shown in FIG. 80(E), when the setting value is 5, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 272," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 857." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/240," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/76."

As shown in FIG. 80(F), when the setting value is 6, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 297," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 935." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/220," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/7."

＜Jackpot type＞
Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is "jackpot", the jackpot type (jackpot symbol, symbol group) is determined by referring to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 81. As described above, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and "normal jackpot" means a jackpot (non-probability jackpot) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Details will be described later, but when a specific jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the jackpot game, and continues until the number of times the special symbol's variable display reaches the specified ST number (100 times) from the end of the jackpot game, or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). In addition, regardless of whether a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" is won, the special symbol change time shortening function and the electric chute support function will be activated after the jackpot game ends, and will continue until the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In this embodiment, the special symbol change time shortening function and the electric chute support function start and end their operation at the same time, so the "number of times change time shortened" and the "number of times electric support is activated" will be the same number (for this reason, in Figure 81, the "number of times change time shortened" and the "number of times electric support is activated" are listed in the same column).

Figure 81 (A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol random number value is associated with a symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), specified number of rounds of jackpot play, and opening time of the jackpot opening 54 for each round. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening 54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot opening 54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the probability change number of times is set to "100 times", the change time shortening number of times is set to "100 times", and the electric support number of times is set to "100 times", and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a probability change game state. This probability change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the special symbol variation display count reaches the set number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol variation state ends, the game will transition to normal play from the next special symbol variation display.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" of the first special symbol is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening 54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot opening 54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won with the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the probability fluctuation number is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number is set to "100 times", and the electric support number is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number (100 times). If the time-saving game mode ends when the number of times the special symbol changes is reached a predetermined number (100 times), the game will transition to normal game mode from the next time the special symbol changes.

Figure 81 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol random number value is associated with a symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), number of specified rounds of jackpot play, and opening time of the jackpot opening 54 for each round. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 8R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D).

When the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "8 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening 54 in one round game is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the jackpot opening 54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the probability change number of times, the change time shortening number of times, and the electric support number of times are set to "100 times", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, and a probability change game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This probability change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the probability variable game state ends when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a prescribed number of ST times (100 times), the game state transitions to a normal game state from the next time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" of the second special symbol is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening 54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot opening 54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the probability fluctuation number is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number is set to "100 times", and the electric support number is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number (100 times). If the time-saving game mode ends when the number of times the special symbol changes is reached a predetermined number (100 times), the game will transition to normal game mode from the next time the special symbol changes.

Here, whether the number of times the special symbol has been displayed has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number is determined based on whether the combined number of times the first special symbol has been displayed and the number of times the second special symbol has been displayed has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number. As a variation, the determination may be based on whether the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been displayed, whichever is the main special symbol in the game, has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 79, the normal symbol game in the fourth embodiment (probability of winning a normal symbol, opening time of the normal electric device 522, etc.) is the same as the normal symbol game in the first embodiment (probability of winning a normal symbol, opening time of the normal electric device 522, etc.), so a description is omitted.

＜Number of prize balls＞
Next, the number of prize balls in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the number of prize balls set for each winning port (the unit number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of one game ball) is set to "4" for the first start port 51, "1" for the second start port 52, "3" for the general winning ports 61 to 64, and "15" for the large winning port 54. The unit number of prize balls is not limited to the one exemplified in the fourth embodiment, and other unit numbers of prize balls may be applied.

<Transition mode when power is turned on>
Next, the transition modes when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Fig. 82 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation when the power is turned on and the transition modes. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in Fig. 82, a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM clear mode, and a game mode are provided as four transition modes to which the gaming machine can be transitioned when the gaming machine is powered on (when the gaming machine is restored from a power cut). In other words, in this embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation shown in Fig. 82 at the same time as the gaming machine is powered on, the transition mode to which the gaming machine is transitioned when the gaming machine is powered on can be selected.

As shown in FIG. 82, the operations performed when the game machine is turned on include the operation of the setting key switch 810, the operation of the RAM clear switch 820, the opening and closing operation of the front frame 2, and the operation of the power switch. Whether the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 is determined by the detection information of the frame opening switch 892 described above. This frame opening switch 892 is ON when the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1, and is OFF when the front frame 2 is closed relative to the outer frame 1. In this embodiment, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is switched on when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is detected as being open), but when the game machine is switched on when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is not in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is detected as being open). That is, when the RAM clear mode or the game mode is switched on, even if the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is open) or the front frame 2 is closed relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an OFF state when the front frame 2 is closed), it is possible to switch by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on. Note that, as a modified example, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is switched on, it is not required that the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is open), that is, even if the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is open) or the front frame 2 is closed relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an OFF state when the front frame 2 is closed), it may be configured to be able to switch by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on. In addition, regardless of which mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) is selected, a power failure recovery image is displayed on the performance display device 70.

The setting change mode is a mode to which the device is switched when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the front frame 2 open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is in the ON state where it detects the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 820 is turned on. When the device is switched to this setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 first displays the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (at the time of the most recent power off). In other words, when the device is switched to the setting change mode, the current setting value (the setting value that was already set before the transition to the setting change mode) can first be confirmed. As a modified example, a predetermined setting value (for example, "1") may be always displayed regardless of the setting value that was already set before the transition to the setting change mode. In addition, during the execution of this setting change mode, the setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 820. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed, the display of the setting value is switched in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → .... If the setting key switch 810 is switched to OFF while the desired setting value is displayed, the setting value (desired setting value) is confirmed and the setting change mode is terminated. Then, when the setting change mode is terminated, the game moves to a game mode in which play is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from setting value information to performance information. When the setting change mode is terminated and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from setting value information to performance information, an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined period of time (described in detail later). As a modified example, in addition to the case where the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch 810 turned on and the RAM clear switch 820 turned on when the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 is turned on when the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame 2), and the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) while the display of the performance display device 70 is subsequently restored (particularly, for one second after the display has been restored), specifically, while the power off recovery image (power off recovery screen) is being displayed (particularly, for the first one second of the three seconds during which the power off recovery image is displayed), the setting change mode may also be entered even if the setting key switch 810 is switched from OFF to ON. By configuring in this way, even if an operation to shift to the RAM clear mode is performed by mistake when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. Note that, even in the case of configuring in this way, as in the above, it is not required that the front frame 2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is detected to be in an open state), that is, even if the front frame 2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when the front frame 2 is detected to be in an open state), or even if the front frame 2 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an OFF state when the front frame 2 is detected to be in a closed state), it is possible to configure so that the shift can be made by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The setting confirmation mode is a mode that is entered when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON) with the front frame 2 open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 820 is turned OFF. When the setting confirmation mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 displays the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (when the power was turned off) with a dot. This allows the current setting value to be confirmed when the setting change mode is entered. The reason why the setting value is displayed with a dot in this setting confirmation mode is to distinguish it from the display of the setting value when the setting change mode is entered (display without a dot). Then, when the setting key switch 810 is switched to OFF, the setting confirmation mode ends. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the game moves to a play mode in which play is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the setting value information to the performance information. When the setting confirmation mode ends and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 switches from setting value information to performance information, an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined period of time (described in detail later). As a modified example, in addition to the case where the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch 810 turned on and the RAM clear switch 820 turned off when the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame 2), the power can also be turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch 810 turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 turned off when the front frame 2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame 2), and the setting confirmation mode can also be entered even if the setting key switch 810 is switched from OFF to ON while the display of the performance display device 70 is subsequently restored (particularly, for one second after the display has been restored), specifically, while the power off recovery image (power off recovery screen) is being displayed (particularly, for the first one second of the three seconds during which the power off recovery image is displayed). By configuring in this way, even if an operation to switch to the game mode is performed by mistake when the power is turned on, it is possible to switch to the setting confirmation mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. Note that, even when configured in this way, as described above, it is not required that the front frame 2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame 2), that is, even if the front frame 2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame 2) or in a closed state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in an OFF state when it detects the closed state of the front frame 2), it may be configured to be able to switch by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The RAM clear mode is a mode to which the game is switched when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch 810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch 820 pressed (turned ON). When the game is switched to the RAM clear mode, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 103 mounted on the main control microcomputer 110 is initialized (so-called RAM clear processing is performed). The RAM clear mode is automatically terminated after the RAM clear processing is executed. When the RAM clear mode is terminated, the game is switched to a game mode in which the game can be played, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the setting value information to the performance information. When the RAM clear mode is terminated, the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the setting value information to the performance information, and an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all the display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined period of time (described in detail later).

The game mode is a mode to which the game is switched when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch 810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch 820 turned OFF. This game mode is switched to after the backup data saved in the RAM 103 at the time of the previous power outage is restored. When switching to the game mode after the setting change mode, the game mode is switched to after the setting change is completed and the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is erased, when switching to the game mode after the setting check mode, the game mode is switched to after the setting check is completed and the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is restored, when switching to the game mode after the RAM clear mode, the game mode is switched to after the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is erased. When switching to this game mode, the game becomes playable, and an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined period of time (details will be described later).

<Processing during setting change mode>
Next, the process in the setting change mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notifications during setting changes)
First, when the transition mode at the time of power-on is the setting change mode, the notification contents of the performance display monitor 830, the main control display device 27, the external information terminal board 600, the speaker 11, the frame lamp 10, and the performance display device 70 will be described. Figure 84 (A) is a diagram showing the notification contents during the setting change mode.

When the setting change mode is entered at power-on, the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 displays the set value of the jackpot probability. As mentioned above, while this setting change mode is in progress, the display of the set value changes in the following order each time the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → ... In this setting change mode, a number indicating the set value (for example, the number "1" when the set value is "1") is displayed in the seven segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display section 834, but no dot is displayed in the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display section 834 (dot segment SG8 is turned off).

When the setting change mode is entered, the error indicator light Er of the main control display device 27 is turned on. The error indicator light Er remains on from the start of the setting change mode until it is ended. The other indicator lights 71-79 of the main control display device 27 are turned off from the start of the setting change mode until it is ended. As a variation, all of the other indicator lights 71-79 or some of the indicator lights may be turned on or flashing. In that case, it is preferable to turn on all of the multiple LED segments that make up each indicator light on or flashing. As another variation, all of the indicator lights of the main control display device 27, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device 27, may be turned off.

When the machine transitions to the setting change mode, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board 600 to an external device (such as a data display or hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine. This security signal starts to be output when the setting change mode starts, and stops being output a predetermined time (128 ms) after the setting change mode ends.

When the setting change mode is entered, the speaker 11 outputs a voice message saying "Settings are being changed." This voice message "Settings are being changed" is output repeatedly from when the setting change mode is entered until it is ended.

When the setting change mode is entered, a setting change image showing the words "setting change in progress" is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70. This setting change image is displayed continuously from the start of the setting change mode until it ends.

(Payout of prize balls during setting changes)
Next, the payout of prize balls when the transition mode at the time of power-on is the setting change mode will be described. First, when the setting change mode is entered at the time of power-on, the payout of all prize balls is restricted until the setting change mode is ended, and prize balls are not paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34. In other words, during the execution of the setting change mode, the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering each winning port including the large winning port 54 and the general winning port 64 is restricted. In this embodiment, the payout of prize balls is permitted when the setting change mode is ended and the game mode is started. When the setting change mode is ended, the RAM clear mode may be started instead of the game mode (the game mode may be started by ending the RAM clear mode).

Here, the processing in the case where a power outage occurs during the payout of prize balls and the setting change mode is entered when the power is restored will be described. Specifically, when a power outage occurs while the prize ball payout unit 34 is paying out prize balls, the power is cut off with the information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out backed up in the memory area of the RAM 103. Here, when the power is restored after the power outage, if a normal power-on operation (power-on operation without turning on the RAM clear switch 820) is performed, the information on the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is stored in the memory area of the RAM 103, so that the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out will be paid out after the power is restored. On the other hand, when the power is restored after the power outage, if a transition operation to the setting change mode (power-on operation with the setting key switch 810 turned on and the RAM clear switch 820 turned on) is performed, the information related to the game stored in the memory area of the RAM 103 is erased, and the information on the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out that was backed up at the time of the power outage is also erased, so that the prize balls that have not yet been paid out will not be paid out when the power is restored after the power outage. Furthermore, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls that was backed up when the power was turned off is not erased when the setting change mode is started, but is erased when the setting change mode is ended.

In addition, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if a game ball enters one of the winning ports between the time the power is turned on and the time the setting change mode is ended (for example, an input signal is input to the input port of the I/O port circuit 104 of the main control board 100 by causing a game ball to enter the general winning port 64, forcing the large winning port 54 to open and causing a game ball to enter, or forcing each winning port switch to be turned ON), the setting change mode does not end and the game mode is not entered (the main control side timer interrupt process is started and input process (S53), winning monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc. are not executed), so the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit 104. Therefore, information that a game ball has entered one of the winning ports is not stored in the memory area of the RAM 103, and prize balls are not paid out while the setting change mode is being executed.

(Other processes during configuration changes)
Next, other processing when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on will be described. During the setting change mode, even if the launch handle 12 is touched and rotated, the operation of the launch handle 12 is determined to be invalid, or the touch and rotation of the launch handle 12 are not detected (the launch detection is restricted). In other words, even if the launch handle 12 is touched and rotated, the launch of game balls is not possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the launch of unintended game balls (use of game balls) and unintended ball entry in advance by accidentally touching the launch handle 12 and rotating it during the setting change mode. In addition, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more during the setting change mode, the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended despite being in the setting change mode. In addition, during the setting change mode, the display of the special pattern change is not started (special pattern change start condition is not satisfied), and during the setting change mode, the display of the normal pattern change is not started (normal pattern change start condition is not satisfied). By configuring in this way, even if there is an unexpected ball entry (such as a game ball that has been staying in the game area PA), it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting change mode or the game mode by not making an unintended hit/miss judgment and a change display based on it. Furthermore, even during the setting change mode, while it is possible to detect certain errors (for example, a door/frame opening error or a magnetic sensor error), it is configured not to display an error notification regarding the specific error, and it is configured to be possible to detect and notify certain errors (for example, a setting value abnormality error or a setting change abnormality error, which will be described later). By configuring in this manner, during the setting change mode, unlike the game mode, error notifications for specific errors are restricted and notifications of predetermined errors (errors related to settings) are prioritized, making it possible to provide an error notification format suitable for the setting change mode, and unlike specifications that restrict launch detection, display of the standby demo screen, and the variable display of special and normal patterns during the setting change mode, there is no restriction on the detection of specific errors, allowing the player himself to properly grasp the current situation.

As a variation of the transition to the setting change mode, touching and rotating the launch handle 12 during the setting change mode may be enabled (touching and rotating the launch handle 12 makes it possible to launch a game ball). Also, during the setting change mode, a standby demo screen (a customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the game is suspended for a predetermined period of time or more. Also, if an error is detected during the setting change mode, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image is set in a layer higher or lower than the layer of the above-mentioned "Setting value changing" image.

(Processing when returning from changing settings)
Next, the process when returning from the setting change mode to the game mode will be described. Even if the player continues to hold the launch handle 12 (even if the player continues to touch and rotate the handle, or even if the player continues to touch the handle) during the game mode (a specific time has passed since the start of the game mode) that is transitioned from the setting change mode to the game mode after the end of the setting change mode, the touch effect is not executed (the touch operation is invalidated). Note that the touch effect is an effect that is executed on the condition that the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12) during a standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers). Specifically, when the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12) during the standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), a voice message "Start playing!" is output and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device 70. Note that, when returning from the setting change mode to the game mode, the game is configured to transition to the standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers) when a state in which no game is being played (a state in which the game is interrupted) continues for a specific time or more immediately after the return or after the return. In other words, even if the launch handle 12 is continuously held (even if the hand is touched and the rotation operation is continued, or even if the hand is continued to touch) during the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers waiting demo performance) from during the setting change mode to during the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode is ended (the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers demo performance) executed after the game mode is started), the touch performance is not executed during the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers waiting demo performance). Also, even if the volume button (left key or right key) is continuously pressed during the setting change mode to during the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode is ended, the volume level is not changed during the game mode (the volume operation is invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the volume level is not changed (the volume operation is invalid). Note that the volume adjustment can be executed during the variable display in the game mode, so this configuration does not assume that the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when the game mode is returned to, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level set before the transition to the setting change mode (before the power is turned off), the volume level is always set to "3" among the light levels "1" to "5"). In addition, even if the light level button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed from the setting change mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode ends, the light level is not changed during the game mode (the light level operation is invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the light level is not changed (the light level operation is invalid). Note that the light level adjustment can be performed during the variable display in the game mode, so this configuration does not assume that the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when the game mode is returned to, the light level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level set before the transition to the setting change mode (before the power is turned off), the light level is always set to "3" among the light levels "1" to "5").

In addition, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, low priority error notifications (abnormal notifications) may not be executed, while high priority error notifications (abnormal notifications) may be executed. In this way, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, low priority errors are ignored, so that the processing during the setting change mode is not hindered, and the processing load due to the error notifications can be prevented from increasing. Here, a high priority error is an error type (first type error) in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to a high level. The first type errors include magnetic sensor errors, radio wave sensor errors, disconnection/short circuit power supply errors, excessive winning errors, door/frame opening errors, setting value abnormal errors, setting change abnormal errors, etc. A low priority error is an error type in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to a low level. The second type errors include payout errors (prize ball errors), such as ball tray full errors, ball jamming/ball jamming errors, and no ball errors. The setting value abnormal error is an error that occurs when a value that should not be set (for example, a value that is not within the range of 1 to 6) is set as the setting value, and the setting change abnormal error is an error that occurs when a power outage occurs during the setting change state and an operation to switch to a mode other than the setting change mode is performed, that is, when an operation to switch to a mode other than the setting change mode is performed even though the setting value (desired setting value) has not been confirmed, and an abnormal operation is deemed to have been performed. The contents of the other errors are described in the first embodiment, so they will not be described here. In addition, when the setting change mode is switched to when the power is turned on, the launch of the game balls may be restricted (the launch handle 12 is disabled) regardless of whether a first type error or a second type error occurs.

<Processing during setting confirmation mode>
Next, the process in the setting check mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notifications during setting confirmation)
First, when the transition mode at the time of power-on is the setting confirmation mode, the notification contents of the performance display monitor 830, the main control display device 27, the external information terminal board 600, the speaker 11, the frame lamp 10, and the performance display device 70 will be described. Figure 84 (B) is a diagram showing the notification contents during the setting confirmation mode.

When the setting check mode is entered at power-on, the fourth display unit 834 of the performance display monitor 830 displays the current setting value that was set before power-on (at the most recent power-off). When the setting check mode is entered, a numerical value indicating the setting value (for example, the number "1" when the setting value is "1") is displayed on the seven-segment SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display unit 834, and a dot is displayed on the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display unit 834. That is, the current setting value and a dot are displayed in pairs on the fourth display unit 834. When the setting check mode is entered, the current setting value is displayed with a dot on the fourth display unit 834 in order to distinguish it from the display of the setting value (without a dot) when the setting change mode is entered. In this way, when the setting check mode is entered at power-on, the current setting value can be confirmed.

When the setting check mode is entered, the error indicator light Er of the main control display device 27 is turned on. The error indicator light Er remains on from the start of the setting check mode until it is ended. The other indicator lights 71-79 of the main control display device 27 are turned off from the start of the setting check mode until it is ended. As a variation, all of the other indicator lights 71-79 or some of the indicator lights may be turned on or flashing. In that case, it is preferable to turn on all of the multiple LED segments that make up each indicator light on or flashing. As another variation, all of the indicator lights of the main control display device 27, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device 27, may be turned off.

When the setting check mode is entered, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board 600 to an external device (such as a data display or hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine. The security signal starts to be output when the setting check mode is started, and stops being output a predetermined time (128 ms) after the setting check mode is ended.

When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the speaker 11 outputs a voice message saying "Checking setting values." This voice message "Checking setting values" is output repeatedly from the start of the setting confirmation mode until it ends.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, a setting confirmation image showing the words "Setting confirmation in progress" is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70. This setting confirmation image is displayed continuously from the start of the setting confirmation mode until it ends.

(Paying out prize balls while checking settings)
Next, we will explain the payout of prize balls when the transition mode when the power is turned on is the setting confirmation mode.

Here, we will explain the process when a power outage occurs during the payout of prize balls and the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is restored. Specifically, if a power outage occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit 34, the power is cut off with information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out backed up in the memory area of RAM 103. When the power is restored, if an operation to enter the setting confirmation mode is performed (turning the setting key switch 810 ON while leaving the RAM clear switch 820 OFF to turn on the power), information on the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is stored in the memory area of RAM 103, but the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is entered. The reason for temporarily suspending the payout of prize balls until the setting confirmation mode ends is that when switching to this setting confirmation mode, a game store employee or the like must open the front frame 2 and operate the setting key switch 810 or the like from the back side of the front frame 2, and with the front frame 2 open, the supply of game balls from the ball supply device on the game store side to the gaming machine cannot be performed normally, and there is a risk that the prize balls will not be paid out correctly. For this reason, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout of prize balls is resumed after switching to the gaming mode.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if a game ball enters one of the winning ports between the time the power is turned on and the time the setting confirmation mode is ended (for example, an input signal is input to the input port of the I/O port circuit 104 of the main control board 100 by making a game ball enter the general winning port 64, forcibly opening the large winning port 54 to allow a game ball to enter, or forcibly turning on each winning port switch), the setting confirmation mode does not end and the game mode is not entered (the main control side timer interrupt process is started and input process (S53), winning monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc. are not executed), so the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit 104. Therefore, information that a game ball has entered each winning port is not stored in the memory area of the RAM 103, and prize balls are not paid out while the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, and the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power outage is resumed, during the execution of the resumed jackpot game, the payout of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 during the aforementioned setting confirmation mode is not performed, and the display (including update display) of the cumulative number of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 during the aforementioned setting confirmation mode and the count-up performance are not performed. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of the resumed jackpot game (for example, during the execution of a round game immediately after the return), the payout of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 is performed, but the display (update display) of the cumulative number of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 and the count-up performance are not performed. The reason for limiting the display (update display) of the cumulative number of winning balls and the execution of the count-up effect after the jackpot game is resumed in this way is that after the power is restored or after the setting confirmation mode is ended and the game mode is started, a predetermined power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) or a jackpot screen dedicated to after the power is restored (round screen dedicated to after the power is restored) is displayed, and the notification of the power recovery is prioritized over the notification of information related to winning or the number of winning balls. In addition, as a modified example, when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power being restored or the setting confirmation mode being ended and the game mode being started, a predetermined power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) is displayed in the round game at the time of the restart, and the game may be switched to a normal round effect (jackpot effect) from the start of the next round game of the restarted round game (for example, the sixth round game if the game is resumed from the fifth round), and the display (update display) of the cumulative number of winning balls based on the entry of game balls into the big prize opening 54 and the count-up effect may be executed.

As a further variant, a certain round of jackpot play that was interrupted due to a power outage may be resumed when the setting check mode ends and the game mode starts, and after a power outage recovery image is displayed as the power is restored during the execution of that certain round of play (or the setting check mode ends and the game mode starts), a normal jackpot presentation (for example, the above-mentioned Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, and Happy jackpot presentation) may be restored after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 5 seconds have passed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or when that certain round of play ends (in other words, if the power is cut off and then restored during, for example, the third round of round play (or the setting check mode ends and the game mode starts), the normal round presentation may be restored from the start of the fourth round of round play). As described above, the round performance screen according to the type of performance during the jackpot (Choju jackpot performance, Kotobuki jackpot performance, Ki jackpot performance) is displayed. That is, when the performance pattern during the jackpot is Choju jackpot performance, the Choju jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which five characters are introduced on a rainbow background) is displayed, when the performance pattern during the jackpot is Kotobuki jackpot performance, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which two characters are introduced on a red background) is displayed, and when the performance pattern is Ki jackpot performance, the Ki jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which one character is introduced on a blue background) is displayed. In this case, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but it starts from "0" instead of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power failure, and the cumulative number of prize balls counter is also cleared to "0" and starts. However, even if it starts from "0," when a game ball enters the large prize opening 54, the cumulative prize ball count display is updated, a count-up effect, a highlight effect (enlarged display), etc. are executed. Furthermore, if more game balls than the specified number enter the large prize opening 54 (over-entry) during the resumed jackpot game, the over-entry effect is executed. Similarly, when a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the resumed jackpot game, the cumulative prize ball count display is updated, a count-up effect, and a bonus prize effect are executed.

In addition, as a further variant, a certain round of jackpot play that was interrupted due to a power outage may be resumed when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, and after a power outage recovery image is displayed as the power is restored during the execution of that certain round of play (or the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts), the screen may be configured to return to a jackpot screen dedicated to after power recovery (a round screen dedicated to after power recovery) upon the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds after the power outage recovery image is displayed) or upon the end of the round of play (i.e., after the passage of a predetermined time, or, for example, when the power is cut and restored during the third round of play (or when the setting confirmation mode ends), When the game mode is started after the end of the game, the normal round presentation may be resumed from the start of the fourth round of gameplay. In this case, the cumulative number of winning balls is not displayed during the jackpot game after the restarted round game, and even if a game ball enters the big prize opening 54, the cumulative number of winning balls display is not updated, the count-up presentation is not performed, and the highlighting presentation (enlarged display) is not performed. Furthermore, even if more game balls than the specified number enter the big prize opening 54 (over-entry) during the restarted jackpot game, the over-entry presentation is not performed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the restarted jackpot game, the cumulative number of winning balls display is not updated, the count-up presentation is not performed, and the bonus prize presentation is not performed.

(Other processes during configuration check)
Next, other processing when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on will be described. During the setting confirmation mode, even if the launch handle 12 is touched and rotated, the operation of the launch handle 12 is determined to be invalid, or the touch and rotation of the launch handle 12 are not detected (the launch detection is restricted). In other words, even if the launch handle 12 is touched and rotated, the launch of the game ball is not possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the launch of an unexpected game ball (use of a game ball) or an unexpected ball entry in advance by accidentally touching the launch handle 12 and rotating it during the setting confirmation mode. In addition, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more during the setting confirmation mode, the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended despite being in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the display of the special pattern change is not started (special pattern change start condition is not satisfied), and during the setting confirmation mode, the display of the normal pattern change is not started (normal pattern change start condition is not satisfied). By configuring in this way, even if there is an unexpected ball entry (such as a game ball that has been staying in the game area PA), it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting confirmation mode or the game mode by not making an unintended hit/miss judgment and a change display based on it. Furthermore, even during the setting confirmation mode, while it is possible to detect specific errors (for example, door/frame opening errors and magnetic sensor errors), it is configured not to display an error notification regarding the specific error, and it is configured to be possible to detect and notify certain errors (for example, setting value abnormality errors and setting change abnormality errors). By configuring in this manner, during the setting check mode, unlike the game mode, error notifications for specific errors are restricted and notifications of predetermined errors (errors related to settings) are prioritized, making it possible to provide an error notification format suitable for the setting check mode, and unlike specifications that restrict launch detection, display of the standby demo screen, and variable display of special and normal patterns during the setting check mode, there is no restriction on the detection of specific errors, allowing the player himself to properly grasp the current situation.

As a variation of the case where the setting check mode is entered, touching and rotating the launch handle 12 during the setting check mode may be enabled (touching and rotating the launch handle 12 allows the launch of a game ball). Also, during the setting check mode, a standby demo screen (a customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the game is suspended for a predetermined period of time or more. Also, if an error is detected during the setting check mode, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image is set in a layer higher or lower than the layer of the above-mentioned "Checking setting values" image.

(Processing when returning from checking settings)
Next, the process when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode will be described. Even if the player continues to hold the launch handle 12 (even if the player continues to touch and rotate the handle, or even if the player continues to touch the handle) during the game mode (a specific time has passed since the start of the game mode) that is transitioned from the setting confirmation mode to the end of the setting confirmation mode, the touch effect is not executed (the touch operation is invalidated). Note that the touch effect is an effect that is executed on the condition that the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12) in a situation during a standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers). Specifically, when the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12) during the standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), a voice message "Start playing!" is output and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device 70. Note that, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, the standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers) is entered when a state in which no game is being played (a state in which the game is interrupted) continues for a specific time or more immediately after or after the return. In other words, even if the launch handle 12 is continuously held (even if the hand is touched and the rotation operation is continued, or even if the hand is continued to touch) during the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers waiting demo performance) from the setting check mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting check mode is ended (waiting demo performance (waiting for customers demo performance) executed after the game mode is started), the touch performance is not executed during the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers waiting demo performance). Also, even if the volume button (left key or right key) is continuously pressed from the setting check mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting check mode is ended, the volume level is not changed during the game mode (the volume operation is invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the volume level is not changed (the volume operation is invalid). Note that the volume adjustment can be executed during the variable display in the game mode, so this configuration does not assume that the waiting demo performance (waiting for customers demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when the game mode is returned to, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level that was set before the setting check mode was switched to (before the power was turned off), the volume level is always set to "3" out of the light levels "1" to "5"). In addition, even if the light level button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed from the setting check mode to the game mode to which the setting check mode is switched to after the setting check mode is terminated, the light level is not changed during the game mode (the light level operation is invalidated). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the light level is not changed (the light level operation is invalidated). Note that the light level adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, so this configuration does not assume that the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when the game mode is returned to, the light level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level that was set before the setting check mode was switched to (before the power was turned off), the volume level is always set to "3" out of the light levels "1" to "5".
").

<Performance information>
Next, the base value, which is the performance information of the game, will be explained. In a broad sense, the base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of game balls launched by the player (the number of game balls that reach the game area PA). However, the base value applied in this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, means the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of game balls launched by the player (the number of game balls that reach the game area PA) when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state.

In this embodiment, data related to game performance information (such as the base value, total number of outs, number of outs under normal conditions, and number of winning balls under normal conditions, which will be described later) is stored in the performance information storage area 103C of the RAM 103 provided on the main control board 100.

Here, FIG. 85(A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the memory area of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100. The RAM 103 is provided with a game control information memory area 103A, a setting value information memory area 103B, a performance information memory area 103C, and the like. The game information memory area 103A stores information for controlling the progress of the game (information on the variable display of the special and normal symbols, information on the jackpot game, information on the game state, information on the payout of prize balls, etc.). The setting value information memory area 103B stores setting value information for specifying the winning probability (jackpot probability) at which the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot. The performance information memory area 103C stores information for specifying the performance information (base value) of the game. Note that the performance information memory area 103C may store information used in processing for performing tests specified by the game rules. In this embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the information stored in the setting value information storage area 103B and the performance information storage area 103C is not erased.

Figure 85 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the performance information storage area 103C of the RAM 103. The performance information storage area 103A includes a total outs counter 1030, a normal outs counter 1031, a normal prize balls counter 1032, a base information storage area 1033, a base information switching counter 1034, a base information output data area 1035, an output display switching timer 1036, and a new start flag 1037.

The total out counter 1030 is a counter for counting the total number of outs. The "total number of outs" is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA in all game states. All game states include a special game state in which a special game is being played, and a non-special game state in which a special game is not being played. The non-special game states also include a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probability game state. In the case of a gaming machine that employs a small hit rush mode, as in the second embodiment described above, the non-special game states include a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a probability game state, and a potential probability game state. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have a probability fluctuation function (for example, a small win V model that has a fluctuation time shortening function), the non-special gaming state includes the normal gaming state and the time-shortened gaming state, and in the case of a gaming machine that does not have either a probability fluctuation function or a fluctuation time shortening function (for example, a small win V model that does not have a fluctuation time shortening function), the non-special gaming state includes only the normal gaming state.

The normal out counter 1031 is a counter for counting the number of normal outs. The "normal out number" is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state).

The total number of outs and the number of outs under normal conditions are calculated based on detection information from a played ball detection sensor 891 that detects game balls discharged from the rear side of the game board 20 (played balls that have entered each winning hole or the out hole 29 and finished playing). As another method for counting the total number of outs and the number of outs under normal conditions, for example, the total number of outs (total number of fired balls) and the number of outs under normal conditions (number of fired balls under normal conditions) may be calculated based on detection information from a fired ball detection sensor that detects the number of game balls fired toward the game area PA (number of fired balls). In that case, it is preferable to use a value obtained by subtracting the number of game balls (foul balls) that returned without reaching the game area PA from the number of game balls fired toward the game area PA.

The normal prize ball counter 1032 is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in normal play. The "normal prize ball number" is the number (total number) of prize balls paid out to a player when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). In other words, the normal prize ball number does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (special game state) when a jackpot game is being played in the low probability low base state, but only includes the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (normal game state) when a jackpot game is not being played in the low probability low base state. Therefore, this normal prize ball number is the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first start hole 51, the second start hole 52, and the general prize hole 61 to 64 in the normal game state. In this embodiment, each time a game ball enters a prize opening (a prize opening excluding the large prize opening 54) that is eligible for prize ball payout during normal gameplay, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize opening into which the ball entered is cumulatively added to the normal prize ball number counter 1032 (the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding the number to the normal prize ball number counter 1032 in the RAM 103). As another method for counting the number of prize balls under normal gameplay, the number of prize balls under normal gameplay may be counted based on detection information from a prize ball count sensor that counts the number of prize balls actually paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34.

The base information storage area 1033 is an area that stores base values that indicate the performance information of the game. The "base value" is the ratio of the number of prize balls in normal time to the number of outs in normal time. In other words, the base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number) paid out to the player to the number of game balls (total number) discharged from the game area PA when the currently executed game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), and is a value calculated by the formula "number of prize balls in normal time ÷ number of outs in normal time × 100". Therefore, the base value in this example is the base value measured in the normal game state, and does not mean the base value in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special game state) or the base value in a special game state.

This base value, which will be described in detail later, is calculated for each pre-set management interval (basically for each interval until the value of the total out counter 1030 reaches "60,000"). The base values calculated for each management interval are stored sequentially in the base information storage area 1033. This base information memory area 1033 consists of a current base value memory area 1033a which stores the base value (current base value) calculated in real time in the currently executed section, a previous base value memory area 1033b which stores the base value (previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the previous section (the section previous to the currently executed section), a second previous base value memory area 1033c which stores the base value (second previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the second previous section (the section second to the currently executed section), and a third previous base value memory area 1033d which stores the base value (third previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the third previous section (the section third to the currently executed section). Although details will be described later, in the section where the total number of outs is less than 299 from the time the gaming machine is first turned on (when it is newly started up) (section A described below), the base value is not calculated.

The base information switching counter 1034 is a counter for switching the base value displayed on the performance display monitor 830. When the value of the base information switching counter 1034 is "0", the base value of the current interval is displayed on the performance display monitor 830, when the value of the base information switching counter is "1", the base value of the previous interval is displayed on the performance display monitor 830, when the value of the base information switching counter is "2", the base value of the second interval before is displayed on the performance display monitor 830, and when the value of the base information switching counter 1034 is "3", the base value of the third interval before is displayed on the performance display monitor 830.

The base information output data area 1035 is an area that stores the display data of the four display units 831 to 834 in the performance display monitor 830. Although not shown, the base information output data area 1035 has a first output data area that stores the display data of the first display unit 831, a second output data area that stores the display data of the second display unit 832, a third output data area that stores the display data of the third display unit 833, and a fourth output data area that stores the display data of the fourth display unit 834.

The output display switching timer 1036 is a timer for switching the display data stored in the base information output data area 1035. In this embodiment, the display data stored in the base information output data area 1035 is switched at a predetermined cycle based on the time value of the output display switching timer 1036.

The new start-up flag 1037 is a flag that indicates whether or not the gaming machine is being powered on for the first time (new start-up). In other words, if the new start-up flag 1037 is ON, it indicates that the gaming machine is being powered on for the first time, and if the new start-up flag 1037 is OFF, it indicates that the gaming machine is not being powered on for the first time. Note that the new start-up flag 1037 is turned OFF immediately after the gaming machine is powered on for the first time (immediately after a new start-up) (it is preferable that the flag is turned OFF at least while the power is being turned on for the first time). Note that, as a modified example, the new start-up flag 1037 may be configured to be turned OFF when the total out counter 1030 starts counting when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time.

<<Display of base value>>
Next, the display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 830. As described above, the performance display monitor 830 has an identification display section (identification segment) 830a consisting of a first display section 831 and a second display section 832 of the upper two digits, and a ratio display section (ratio segment) 830b consisting of a third display section 833 and a fourth display section 834 of the lower two digits. In this specification, the term "illumination" is used as a concept including both continuous illumination and blinking illumination, but in order to distinguish between them as necessary, continuous illumination may be simply referred to as "illumination" or "illumination display", and blinking illumination may be simply referred to as "blinking" or "blinking display".

The identification segment 830a displays an identifier for identifying the type of base value (the section for which the base value is managed). That is, the identification segment 830a can display "bL.", which indicates that it is the base value for the current section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the base value for the previous section, "b2.", which indicates that it is the base value for the section two sections ago, and "bL3.", which indicates that it is the base value for the third section (the base value three times ago) (details will be described later).

The ratio segment 830b displays the calculation result of the base value corresponding to the identifier (measurement section) displayed in the identification segment 830a. That is, the ratio segment 830b can display the base value (real-time value) of the current section, the base value (final result value) of the previous section, the base value (final result value) of the second previous section, and the base value (final result value) of the third previous section (details will be described later). In this embodiment, "display of the base value" means that, except in special cases, the display of the identification segment 830a and the display of the ratio segment 830b are displayed together.

Here, FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display of the base value for each section. As described above, the base value is measured for each predetermined management section (each of sections A, B, C, D, etc. described below). The performance display monitor 830 switches between displaying the base value for the current section (FIG. 86(B)), displaying the base value for the previous section (FIG. 86(C)), displaying the base value for the section two sections ago (FIG. 86(D)), and displaying the base value for the section three sections ago (FIG. 86(E)) at specific times (predetermined display switching time). In this embodiment, the display switching time for the base value is set to "4.8 seconds". The base value display switching process is performed based on the value of the base information switching counter 1034 described above.

First, in the display of the base value of the current section, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the identification segment 830a displays "bL." in a lit or flashing manner, and the ratio segment 830b displays the real-time base value currently being measured (the base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a) in a lit manner. In addition, in the display of the base value of the previous section, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the identification segment 830a displays "b1." in a lit or flashing manner, and the ratio segment 830b displays the base value at the end of the previous section (the base value stored in the previous base value storage area 1033b) in a lit manner. In addition, in the display of the base value of the section two sections ago, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the identification segment 830a displays "b2." in a lit or flashing manner, and the ratio segment 830b displays the base value at the end of the section two sections ago (the base value stored in the previous base value storage area 1033c) in a lit manner. Furthermore, when displaying the base value of the third previous interval, as shown in FIG. 86(E), "b3." is displayed lit or flashing in the identification segment 830a, and the base value at the end of the third previous interval (the base value stored in the third previous base value storage area 1033d) is displayed lit in the ratio segment 830b.

The ratio segment 830b displays the integer part (integer value) after rounding off the base value measurement result to the first decimal place. For example, if the base value measurement result is 35.49, "35" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and if the base value measurement result is 35.50, "36" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. If the value after rounding off the base value measurement result is less than 10, "0" is displayed in the tens digit of the ratio segment 830b (for example, "00" to "09"). If the value after rounding off the base value measurement result is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. In other words, if the value after rounding is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and if the value after rounding is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment 830b (a dot is displayed). This is because the ratio segment 830b of the performance display monitor 830 can only display the base value as a two-digit number, so "99." is displayed (a dot is displayed after the 99) to notify that the base value exceeds 100%. As a variation, the base value measurement result may be rounded down to one decimal place and only the integer portion (integer value) displayed; even in this case, if the rounded number is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and if the rounded number is 100 or more, "99." is displayed (a dot is displayed) in the ratio segment 830b.

When the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored after being turned off), as shown in FIG. 86(A), all display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 perform a full blinking display (also called "initial display") in which all display sections 831 to 834 are switched between a fully lit state and a fully unlit state for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) at a predetermined interval (predetermined cycle). In this embodiment, this predetermined interval (predetermined cycle) is 0.6 seconds, and "lighting for 0.3 seconds -> blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets. In other words, the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor 830 is a display in which all LED segments SG1 to SG8 (a total of 32 LED segments) of the four display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 are blinking when the gaming machine is turned on. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E),
As shown in FIG. 1, after the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor 830 ends, the display of the base value (switching of the display of the base value) is performed. During the initial display period (full blinking display period) of the performance display monitor 830, the main control side timer interruption process is activated, and game mode processes such as special electric role control process (processing for returning the large winning opening 54 to the open state before the power is turned off, etc.), prize ball control process (processing for paying out unpaid prize balls before the power is turned off, etc.), LED output process (processing for controlling the lighting of the main control display device 27, etc.), and special symbol control process are executed.

Here, in this embodiment, the timing at which the display of the base value starts can differ depending on the transition mode at the time of power-on. For example, when the gaming machine is switched to the gaming mode when the gaming machine is powered on, the performance display monitor 830 displays the initial display (all blinking display) for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), and then the display of the base value starts. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is switched to the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, or the setting check mode when the gaming machine is powered on, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, or the setting check mode ends, and the performance display monitor 830 displays the initial display (all blinking display) for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), and then the display of the base value starts. Note that the predetermined time (initial display time, all blinking display time) is not limited to the aforementioned 4.8 seconds, but is preferably set to, for example, a time between 4.5 seconds and 5.5 seconds (5 seconds ±10%).

<<Base value measurement procedure>>
Next, the flow of measuring the base value from the first power-on of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the display contents displayed in the identification segment 830a and the ratio segment 830b for each management section (measurement section). Note that "first power-on of the gaming machine" refers to the first power-on of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, whether or not it is the first power-on of the gaming machine is determined based on the state of the new start-up flag 1037 provided in the performance information storage area 103C. That is, if the new start-up flag is ON, it indicates that it is the first power-on of the gaming machine, and if the new start-up flag is OFF, it indicates that it is not the first power-on of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the new start-up flag 1037 is ON, counting is started in the section A (the period in which the identifier is displayed in the identification segment 830b in a blinking manner and the ratio segment 830b is displayed in a lit state "--"). When the power of this gaming machine is turned on for the first time, all values of the total out counter 1030, the normal out counter 1031, the normal prize ball counter 1032, the base information storage area 1033, etc. are set to the initial value "0." When the currently executed section ends, the total out counter 1030, the normal out counter 1031, and the normal prize ball counter 1032 are cleared. In addition, when the currently executed section (excluding section A described later) ends and moves to the next section, the base values of the past sections stored in the 1-time-ago base value storage area 1033b and the 2-time-ago base value storage area 1033c are shifted to the base value storage area of the previous section (the 2-time-ago base value storage area 1033c and the 3-time-ago base value storage area 1033d), respectively, and the final value of the base value of the current section stored in the current base value storage area 1033a (the base value when the total number of outs reaches 60,000) is shifted to the 1-time-ago base value storage area 1033b, and the current base value storage area 1033a is cleared. Note that the base value stored in the 3-time-ago base value storage area 1033d is erased by shifting and overwriting the base value stored in the 2-time-ago base value storage area 1033c.

First, in the section (referred to as "section A") in which the value of the total out counter 1030 is less than 299 from the time the power is first turned on, this section is a test section in which game balls are shot and prizes are won for the purpose of inspecting the gaming machine and test-running (adjusting) at the gaming parlor, and an accurate base value cannot be obtained, so it is excluded from the calculation of the base value. In other words, this section A is set as a section in which the counting of the normal out counter 1031 and the normal winning ball counter 1032 is not performed (a section in which the base value is not calculated). However, even during the execution of this section A, the counting of the total out counter 1030 is performed to determine the switching of the section (to determine the switching to the next section).

When displaying the base value of the currently executed section A, the identification segment 830a flashes "bL." and the ratio segment 830b lights "--". In other words, the flashing display of "bL." in the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the currently executed section A cannot be displayed. Also, since the previous section (the section from one to three sections back) does not exist, when displaying the base value of the previous section (the section from one to three sections back), the ratio segment 830b lights "--". Specifically, when displaying the base value of the previous section, the identification segment 830a flashes "b1." and the ratio segment 830b lights "--". The flashing display of "b1." in the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the previous section cannot yet be displayed. When displaying the base value for the second previous interval, "b2." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b in a lit manner. The flashing display of "b2." in the identification segment 830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value for the second previous interval cannot yet be displayed. When displaying the base value for the third previous interval, "b3." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and "--" is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment 830b. The flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment 830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value for the third previous interval cannot yet be displayed. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lit for 0.3 seconds → flashing for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter 1030 since the first power-on reaches 299, the currently executing section A ends and a new section (called "section B") begins. When the currently executing section A ends, as described above, the total outs counter 1030, the normal outs counter 1031, and the normal prize balls counter 1032 are reset (cleared to zero). Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

Section B ends when the value of the total out counter 1030 reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section A. In section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103. When displaying the base value of the currently running section B, if the value of the normal out counter 1031 is less than 6,000 (0 to 5,999), "bL." is displayed in a blinking manner in the identification segment 830a, and the base value (real-time value) of the current section B, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment 830b. Here, the reason for displaying the identification segment 830a in a blinking manner when the value of the normal out counter 1031 is less than 6,000 is to inform the user that the base value is not stable because the measurement results of less than 6,000 samples are too few to calculate the base value of the current section. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment 830a and the base value (real time value) of the current section B, i.e., the base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Furthermore, in this section B, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section A), "b1." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and "--" is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment 830b. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the previous section (section A), so the flashing display of "b1." in the identification segment 830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the previous section cannot be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the base value of the section two sections ago, "b2." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and "--" is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment 830b. This is because the section two sections ago does not exist, so the flashing display of "b2." in the identification segment 830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the section two sections ago cannot be displayed yet. Furthermore, when displaying the base value of the third previous interval, "b3." is displayed flashing in the identification segment 830a, and "--" is displayed lit in the ratio segment 830b. This is because there is no interval three times ago, so the flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment 830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the third previous interval cannot yet be displayed. Note that in this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → flashing for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter 1030 reaches 60,000, the currently executing section B ends and a new section (called "section C") begins. When the currently executing section B ends, as described above, the total outs counter 1030, the normal outs counter 1031, and the normal prize balls counter 1032 are cleared. Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

Section C ends when the value of the total out counter 1030 reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section B. In section C, as in the previous section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value storage area 1033a of RAM 103. When displaying the base value of this currently executing section C, if the value of the normal out counter 1031 is less than 6,000 (0 to 5,999), "bL." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and the base value (real-time value) of the current section C, i.e., the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment 830b. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment 830a and the base value (real time value) of the current section C, i.e., the base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section C, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section B), "b1." is displayed in the identification segment 830a and the final value of the base value of the previous section (section B), that is, the base value stored in the previous base value storage area 1033b, is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. In addition, when displaying the base value of the section two sections ago, "b2." is displayed in flashing mode in the identification segment 830a and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the section two sections ago (section A), so the flashing display of "b2." in the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the section two sections ago cannot be displayed. In addition, when displaying the base value of the section three sections ago, "b3." is displayed in flashing mode in the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b. Since there is no section three times before, the flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment 830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the section three times before cannot yet be displayed. Note that in this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → flashing for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total out counter 1030 reaches 60,000, the currently executed section C ends, and a new section (referred to as "section D") starts.
When the currently executed section C ends, as described above, the total out counter 1030, the normal out counter 1031, and the normal prize ball counter 1032 are cleared. In addition, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Section D ends when the value of the total out counter reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section C. In section D, as in the previous section C, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value storage area 1033a of RAM 103. When displaying the base value of this currently running section D, if the value of the normal out counter 1031 is less than 6,000 (0 to 5,999), "bL." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and the base value (real-time value) of the current section D, i.e., the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment 830b. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment 830a and the base value (real time value) of the current section D, i.e., the base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section D, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section C), the identification segment 830a lights up "b1." and the ratio segment 830b lights up the final value of the base value of the previous section (section C), i.e., the base value stored in the previous base value storage area 1033b. When displaying the base value of the section two sections ago (section B), the identification segment 830a lights up "b2." and the ratio segment 830b lights up the final value of the base value of the section two sections ago (section B), i.e., the base value stored in the second previous base value storage area 1033c. When displaying the base value of the section three sections ago (section A), the identification segment 830a flashes "b3." and the ratio segment 830b lights up "--". Since the base value was not calculated in the section three times before (section A), the blinking display of "b3." in the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value for the section three times before cannot be displayed. Note that in this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter 1030 reaches 60,000, the currently executing section D ends and a new section (called "section E") begins. When the currently executing section D ends, as described above, the total outs counter 1030, the normal outs counter 1031, and the normal prize balls counter 1032 are cleared. Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

After that, each time the total out counter reaches 60,000 after the start of each section, that section ends and a new section begins. In other words, due to space limitations, Figure 87 shows sections A through D, but when section D ends, a new section E begins, and when section E ends, a new section F begins, and so on, with each section starting and ending when the total out counter reaches 60,000.

<Relationship between performance indication and expected value of winning ball>
Next, the relationship between the performance display and the expected value of winning balls will be described. FIG. 88 is a time chart when the first hit occurs during the execution of the section A. In this embodiment, the identification segment 830a (identifier) of the performance display monitor 830 is displayed in a blinking manner until a predetermined period has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on. Specifically, as described above, when the currently executed measurement section is section A, that is, when the total number of outs is less than a predetermined number X1 (299 balls) counting from the time the power of the gaming machine was first turned on, the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 is displayed in a blinking manner. Also, in the next section B after the end of this section A, that is, in the section B counting from the end of section A until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 balls, when the number of outs in normal times is less than a predetermined number X2 (6,000 balls) counting from the start of the section B, the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 is displayed in a blinking manner. As a modified example, in the next section B after the end of section A, that is, in section B from the end of section A until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, if the number of outs under normal conditions is less than a predetermined number X2 (6,000) from the time the power is first turned on, the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 may be configured to flash. If the identifier flashing on the identification segment 830a is the identifier (bL) indicating the current section, the real-time value of the base value measured in the current section is displayed in a lit state on the ratio segment 830b. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycles), and the "lighting 0.3 seconds → flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

In contrast, the expected value of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) paid out during the execution of a jackpot game, which is performed when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a jackpot, is set to the above-mentioned predetermined number X1 (299 balls). In other words, the expected value of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) at the time of the first hit is set to the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of section A. Specifically, there are "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" and "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" for the jackpot type of the first special symbol, but the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is set to 4 rounds for both jackpot types, and all of the round games are long-time open round games (long-open round games), so the expected value of winning balls at the time of the first hit for both jackpot types is 600 balls (4 rounds x 10 counts x 15 winning balls = 600 balls). In this embodiment, the expected value of winning prize balls at the time of the first hit (600 balls) is set as the total number of outs to be reached, so that it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of the section A. In other words, if the first hit is drawn while staying in the section A, it is possible to win a larger number of prize balls (maximum 600 balls) than the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of the section A. Therefore, if the first hit can be drawn while staying in the section A, while the number of prize balls (maximum 600 balls) acquired at the first hit is shot out as one's own balls toward the play area PA, the game balls discharged from the play area PA, i.e., the total number of outs, are likely to reach the predetermined number X1 (299 balls), and it is expected that the transition from section A to section B will be triggered by the total number of outs reaching the predetermined number X1 (299 balls). As a result, while the base value is hidden in section A (display of "--" in identification segment 830b), the base value is displayed in real time by moving to section B. As a result, in this embodiment, if the first hit is hit early after the game machine is first turned on, section A (test section) can be ended and the next section B can be moved to, causing the performance display to function (the base value of the current section can be displayed in real time) before the number of winning balls (600 balls) acquired in the jackpot game triggered by the first hit is used up, making it possible to detect fraudulent behavior (whether there are any abnormalities in the ball output performance) at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the expected value of winning balls during the consecutive wins including the first win (i.e., the expected value of winning balls paid out in the jackpot games played from the first win to the end of the consecutive win state) is set to a predetermined number X2 (6000 balls) or less. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of entering the special mode (65%), the ST continuation rate (set value 1 = 63% to set value 6 = 76%), the theoretical number of winning balls for each jackpot game (4R jackpot = 600 balls, 8R jackpot = 1200 balls), etc. are set so that the expected value of winning balls during the consecutive wins including the first win is the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls) or less. According to this configuration, by making it difficult to acquire the number of balls required to stop the blinking of the performance display monitor 830 (the number of balls required to reach 6000 in normal times) in one initial hit (i.e., by requiring multiple initial hits), even if the initial hit occurs immediately and the normal shot is continued with the acquired game balls (even if the game is continued until the balls are exhausted), the blinking of the performance display monitor 830 is not stopped unless more game balls are shot, and the base value can be managed more accurately. Note that the expected value of winning balls during this consecutive win is preferably the expected value of winning balls that can be acquired before returning to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) based on the type of jackpot at the time of the initial hit and its selection rate.

In this embodiment, the shortest time required for the jackpot game at the time of the first hit and the shortest time required for the electric support state to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game are set in relation to the expected value of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) at the time of the first hit. Here, the launch speed of the game balls is set to a maximum of 100 balls per minute, and it takes 6 minutes to shoot out all the prize balls paid out at the time of the first hit (expected value of winning balls: 600 balls). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total time of the shortest time required for the jackpot game to be played at the time of the first hit (the time required when the game balls are constantly shot during the execution of the jackpot game) and the shortest time required for the electric support state to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game (the time required when the game balls are constantly shot during the execution of the electric support state 100 times without interrupting the reserved balls) is configured to be 6 minutes or more. As a result, all of the winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) acquired at the time of the first hit will be shot out by the time the electric support state ends, provided that the game balls continue to be fired.

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for satisfying the highlighting effect execution condition for executing the above-mentioned highlighting effect (enlarged display) is that the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls), and this predetermined number of prize balls (the minimum value of the specific value) corresponds to a value equal to or greater than a predetermined number X1 (299 balls) and equal to or less than a predetermined number X2 (6000 balls). In other words, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the highlighting effect (enlarged display) is performed every time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500 balls), and at least one highlighting effect (enlarged display) is performed between the cumulative number of prize balls reaching the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) or more and the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls) (in this embodiment, between the cumulative number of prize balls reaching the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) or more and the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls), the highlighting effect is performed twice, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 2500 balls and when it reaches 5000 balls). In this way, by making the conditions for executing the emphasis effect less stringent than the conditions for canceling the blinking display of the identification segment 830a, the likelihood that the conditions for executing the emphasis effect will be met is increased even in a situation where the blinking display has not been canceled at the start of play, and the emphasis effect can be generated at an early stage, increasing the player's motivation to play.

<<Updating the base value during the initial display period when the power is turned on>>
Next, the update process of the base value during the initial display period will be described. Fig. 89(A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage is a special game state, and Fig. 89(B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage is a normal game state.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored after a power failure), all the display sections 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 are turned on and off for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), and a full flashing display (initial display) is performed in which the display section 831 to 834 repeats a lighting display state and an off state every 0.3 seconds. Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), if the game state at the time of power recovery is a low base state (special game state) during a big win game, during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 at the time of powering on, the counting of the total out counter 1030 is performed, and a judgment process (section switching process) for switching to the next section is executed, but the counting of the normal out counter 1031 and the normal prize ball counter 1032 is not performed, and a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value is not executed. In other words, when a ball is detected in the first starting hole 51 or the general winning holes 61-64 during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on, and an out related to the ball is detected, a judgment process (section switching process) for switching to the next section is executed during the initial display period, but a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value is not executed. Therefore, after the end of the initial display period, the section may have switched to a section different from the section before the power was turned off, but the base value before the power was turned off is not changed (if the section has not switched to a section different from the section before the power was turned off, the base value in the current section "bL." is not updated, and if the section has switched to a section different from the section before the power was turned off, the base value in the section "bL." before the power was turned off and the base value in the section "b1." after the power was turned off and after the initial display period has ended are not updated and are the same). Note that this base value update process starts after the end of the initial display period. As a modified example, when the special game state continues even after the initial display period ends, the base value update process may be configured not to be executed at least until the special game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state (more specifically, until the high base state that is transitioned to after the special game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), when the game state at the time of power off recovery is a low base state (normal game state) during non-jackpot play, the total out counter 1030, the normal out counter 1031, and the normal prize ball counter 1032 are counted during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 at the time of power on, and a judgment process (zone switching process) for switching to the next zone and a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value are respectively executed. In other words, if a ball is detected entering the first starting port 51 or the general winning ports 61-64, etc., and an out related to the ball is detected during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on, a judgment process (section switching process) for switching to the next section and a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value are each executed during the initial display period, so that after the initial display period ends, the section may have switched to a section different from the section before the power was cut off, and the base value before the power was cut off may have been changed (if the section has not switched to a section different from the section before the power was cut off, the base value in the current section, "bL.", is updated, and if the section has switched to a section different from the section before the power was cut off, the base value in "bL.", which is the section before the power was cut off before the switch, and the base value in "b1.", which is the section after the power was restored after the switch and after the initial display period ends, may be updated and may be different). In this embodiment, even if the game state at the time of power off recovery (power on) is the same low base state, whether or not the base value is calculated during the initial display period at the time of power off recovery (power on) is switched depending on whether it is a low base state during a jackpot game (special game state) or a low base state during a non-jackpot game (normal game state), so that the performance of the gaming machine can be appropriately evaluated. In addition, whether it is a low base state during a jackpot game or a low base state during a non-jackpot game, the total number of outs counter 1030 is counted during the initial display at the time of power off recovery (power on), so that the intervals (intervals A, B, C, D, ...) of each time can be appropriately switched. Note that the above-mentioned power off recovery (power recovery) is a power off recovery without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), and if the power off recovery is accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch 820), the game machine transitions to a normal game state (low probability low base state).

When this initial display period ends, the base information switching counter 1034 starts counting from "0". Therefore, after the initial display period ends, the performance display monitor 830 first starts by displaying the base value of the current section. Then, after this base value of the current section is displayed for 4.8 seconds, as described above, the base value of the previous section, the base value of the second section before, and the base value of the third section before are displayed in turn for 4.8 seconds each, and then the base value of the current section is displayed again.

As a variant, the counting of base information switching counter 1034 may be started at the start of the initial display period, and the count value of base information switching counter 1034 may be switched every 4.8 seconds even during the initial display period (internally, each section is switched every 4.8 seconds), and at the end of the initial display period, the base value of the section corresponding to the timing of the end of the initial display period may be displayed.

<Updating the base value when a prize ball error occurs>
Next, the update of the base value when an error (a prize ball error) occurs during the execution of a big win game will be described. Figure 90 is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a big win game. This prize ball error means the same error as the payout error described in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, if a prize ball error (payout error) occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended from the time the prize ball error occurs until the prize ball error is released. Therefore, if a prize ball error occurs while prize balls are being paid out in response to a game ball entering the large prize opening 54 during the execution of a jackpot game, the payout of prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error occurred among the prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 is stopped until the prize ball error is released. Also, if a game ball enters the large prize opening 54 after the prize ball error occurs even during the execution of the jackpot game, the payout of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 is stopped until the prize ball error is released. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, if the game moves to a high probability game state (high base state) or a time-saving game state (low base state), and the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches 100 times in this high base state (i.e., if the jackpot is not won within 100 spins), the game will fall into a normal game state (low probability low base state) after the end of these 100 spins. However, if the above-mentioned prize ball error is released in this normal game state (low probability low base state), the payout of prize balls will be resumed in the normal game state (low probability low base state). In other words, the prize balls that would have been paid out during the execution of the jackpot game (prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of a prize ball error) will be paid out in the normal game state to which the game moved via the high base state after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the normal prize ball counter 1032 counts the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state, but this counts the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state when a game ball enters any winning port (excluding the large winning port 54) during the execution of the normal game state. Therefore, if a prize ball that would normally be paid out during the execution of a jackpot game (a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into the large winning port 54) is paid out in the subsequent normal game state, it is excluded from the counting target of the normal prize ball counter 1032. In other words, if a prize ball that was not paid out during the execution of a jackpot game due to the occurrence of a prize ball error is paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the release of the prize ball error, the number of prize balls is not counted by the normal prize ball counter 1032 and is excluded from the calculation of the base value, thereby ensuring proper management of the base value.

As mentioned above, if a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, the prize balls based on the game balls entering the large prize opening 54 that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game are not counted by the prize ball counter 1032 under normal circumstances and are not subject to updating of the base value. However, the number of game balls that entered the large prize opening 54 (number of winning balls) is counted by the total out counter 1030 as valid game balls used in the game (game balls discharged from the game area PA) and is treated as a valid count value for switching the base value range.

In addition, if a prize ball is not paid out due to a prize ball error during the execution of a jackpot game, not only the prize ball based on the game ball entering the big prize opening 54, but also the prize ball based on the game ball entering other prize openings such as bonus prizes (first start opening 51, second start opening 52, general prize openings 61 to 64) are not counted by the normal prize ball counter 1032 and are not subject to updating of the base value. In addition, the number of game balls (number of winning balls) that entered other prize openings (first start opening 51, second start opening 52, general prize openings 61 to 64) during the execution of a jackpot game should also be counted as the number of valid outs (number of shots) used in the game in the game area PA, and therefore are subject to updating of the total outs counter 1030.

In addition, if a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, that is, as described above, if a prize ball error occurs during the payout of prize balls triggered by a game ball entering the large prize entry port 54 during the execution of a jackpot game, and the prize ball error continues until the normal game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game via the special probability game state, and the prize ball error is then resolved in the normal game state, during the execution of the jackpot game and after the prize ball error has occurred, even if there were prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game (even if the payout of prize balls was limited) due to the occurrence of the prize ball error, the entry of a game ball into the large prize entry port 54 (the entry of a game ball into the large prize entry port 54 that triggered the generation of the prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error was resolved) is triggered (the value of the cumulative prize ball counter is incremented), and the cumulative prize ball count display is updated and displayed,
A count-up effect is executed. Even after the prize ball error occurs, an emphasis effect (enlarged display) is executed when an emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning opening 54 (the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning opening 54 that triggered the generation of the prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error was resolved) (when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of a predetermined number of prize balls), and an over prize winning effect is executed when an over prize winning effect execution condition is satisfied.

<Base value display update cycle>
Next, the update cycle when updating the display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, in each section (measurement section) except for the first section A, until the normal out number counter 1031 reaches 6000, when displaying the base value of the currently executed section, "bL." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment 830a, and the real-time value of the base value is displayed in a lighting manner in the ratio segment 830b. At this time, the flashing display of the identification segment 830a (flashing display of "bL.") is performed in a manner that alternates between lighting for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the flashing cycle of the identification segment 830a is set to 0.6 seconds (lighting 0.3 seconds + turning off 0.3 seconds). The switching between lighting and turning off in the flashing display of this identification segment 830a is performed based on the time value of the output display switching timer 1036 of the RAM 103. In this embodiment, the timer value of the output display switching timer 1036 is incremented by "1" for each interruption (every 4 ms) of the main control timer interrupt process, and when the timer value of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple value of "75", that is, when 0.3 seconds (4 ms x 75 = 300 ms) have elapsed, the identification segment 830a is switched between on and off. In other words, each time the timer value of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple value of "75", a process of setting the identifier on data and a process of setting the identifier off data are alternately switched in the first output data area and the second output data area of the base information output data area 1035.

On the other hand, when displaying the base value of the currently executed section in the ratio segment 830a, display data corresponding to the base value of the current section is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. Here, in the currently executed section, a base value (real-time value) is calculated for each interruption of the timer interrupt process, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103. At this time, display data corresponding to the base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. However, the update period of this display data is the same as the blinking period of the ratio segment 830a described above. In other words, the update period of the display data is not every period (4 ms corresponding to one interruption) in which the base value is calculated, but every 0.6 seconds (600 ms) corresponding to the blinking period of the ratio segment 830a. Therefore, each time the time count of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple value of "150", a process is performed to set the display data of the ratio segment 830b in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. Therefore, if the ratio segment is turned on for 0.3 seconds and then turned off for 0.3 seconds as one blinking display (unit display), the display data of the ratio segment 830a is updated at the start of one unit display (when the 0.3 second lighting display starts). As a result, if the display data of the ratio segment 830b is updated at the start of one blinking display of the identification segment 830a, even if the base value (current base value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a is updated during the period of the one blinking display, the display data of the ratio segment 830b is not updated (the base value displayed on the ratio segment 830b is not switched), and the base value corresponding to the display data updated at the start of the one blinking display continues to be displayed on until the end of the one blinking display. Then, when the blinking display ends and the next blinking display starts, the display data of the ratio segment 830b is updated to new display data corresponding to the current base value (the current base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a), and the base value displayed in the ratio segment 830b is also switched to the current base value (real-time value) corresponding to the new display data. By synchronizing the blinking period of the identifier displayed in the identifier segment 830a with the update period of the base value (real-time value) displayed in the ratio segment 830b in this way, the visibility of the base value can be improved, making it possible to accurately and easily check the performance of the game.

In this embodiment, all or part of the display of the performance display monitor 830 may be displayed in a blinking manner, for example, when all display sections 831-834 are displayed in a blinking manner in the initial display of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on, or when the identification segment 830a (first display section 831 and second display section 832) is displayed in a blinking manner until the value of the normal out counter reaches 6000 in each section (excluding section A). In this case, the blinking period (0.6 seconds as mentioned above) of each display section 831-834 is set to the same period as the blinking period of the initial display when the power is turned on and the blinking period of the identification segment 830a until the value of the normal out counter reaches 6000 in each section (excluding section A). This blinking period (0.6 seconds) is set to a longer period than the count-up display time (the execution time of the count-up performance) of 15 prize balls paid out based on the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening 54. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", and the count-up display time for the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening 54 (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N+15") is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up display time for one ball) = 0.45 seconds", so the blinking period (0.6 seconds) of each display unit 831-834 is longer. The reason for setting the blinking cycle of each display unit 831-834 longer than the count-up display time of the cumulative prize ball count is that the display time of the count-up display of the cumulative prize ball count is set on the assumption that the average player will be able to recognize that the count-up display is being displayed, and if this count-up display time is considered as a guide for switching the display, setting the blinking cycle longer than this count-up display time means that it can be reliably recognized that each display unit 831-834 is being displayed blinking.

In the above embodiment, the update period for the display data (on data, off data) of the identification segment 830a is every 0.3 seconds, and the update period for the display data of the ratio segment 830b is every 0.6 seconds, but this update period can be set appropriately, and the update period for the display data of the ratio segment 830b may be the same as the update period for the display data of the identification segment 830a.

<Relationship between base value display switching time and game ball launch time>
In this embodiment, the display of the base value in the performance display monitor 830 is switched every predetermined display switching time (4.8 seconds), such as display of the base value of the current section → display of the base value of the previous section → display of the base value of the second previous section → display of the base value of the third previous section, and this display switching time of the base value (4.8 seconds) is set to be shorter than the time required to launch the game balls of the specified count number (10 counts) in one round of play. Specifically, the launch speed of the game balls is set to a maximum of 100 shots per minute, and the launch time of the game balls of the specified count number (10 counts) is "6 seconds (10 counts x 60 seconds ÷ 100 shots)". As a result, the display switching time of the base value (4.8 seconds) is shorter than the launch time of the game balls of the specified count number (6 seconds). According to this configuration, during the execution of a jackpot game, the display of the base value can be switched before one round of play is completed. Therefore, even if the value of the total number of outs counter reaches 60,000 during the execution of one round of play (even if the current measurement period ends and the next measurement period begins), the switching status can be recognized during the execution of one round of play.

In this embodiment, the effect button 15 is configured so that its internal mechanism can cause the effect button itself to vibrate and the movable object inside the effect button 15 to rotate. In this way, the effect button 15 is configured so that not only can the effect content displayed on the effect display device 70 be changed by the player's operation, but also so that the operation of the effect button 15 itself can suggest or notify the player of the likelihood of a jackpot. Such an operation of the effect button 15 is referred to as effect button operation.

This effect button operation can be performed during the variable display or during jackpot play; during the variable display, it is executed to suggest or notify that the likelihood of a jackpot is very high (for example, it is executed in association with the execution of a specific preview effect executed by the effect display device 70, or it is executed suddenly regardless of the execution of such a specific preview effect), and during jackpot play, it is executed in association with the execution of the promotion effect or consecutive win effect in the reserved state, as described above.

More specifically, during the variable display, the effect button operation is executed simultaneously when the next notice effect (a notice effect with a high probability of a big win that suggests or notifies future performance development) is executed in the middle of the variable display (before the reach is established in the middle), and when the variable during role effect that notifies the winning of a big win is executed at the aforementioned win/lose branching scene (a branching scene where the final result of the SP reach is a content that indicates a big win or a content that indicates a loss) executed in the middle of the variable display (after the reach is established in the final stage) (the effect button operation associated with the notice effect). Note that, in one variation (big win variation), both the next notice effect and the variable during role effect that notifies the winning of a big win are configured to be executed, but the execution time of the effect button operation is configured to be longer when the variable during role effect that notifies the winning of a big win is executed. In addition, a specific preview performance other than a specific preview performance (for example, a comment preview performance, etc.) is configured so that the performance button operation is not associated with it and executed, but the execution timing overlaps with the performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead, which will be described later, and may be executed at the same time by chance. In addition, as a look-ahead preview performance, if a performance button operation (a performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead) is executed as a look-ahead preview, which suddenly executes a performance button operation immediately after the start of the fluctuation display related to the operating reserved ball that is consumed before the target of the look-ahead preview performance (for example, the above-mentioned next preview performance or the high expectation fluctuation that may be executed during the fluctuation to notify the winning of the jackpot), even at the start of the fluctuation display related to the target of the look-ahead preview performance that has arrived via the look-ahead preview performance, the performance button operation is executed as a preview performance that suggests or notifies the expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation, not as a look-ahead preview (performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation via look-ahead). In addition, the performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead and the performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation via look-ahead are configured to be executed in a shorter time than the performance button operation associated with the above-mentioned preview performance. In addition, the effect button operation is completed during one variable display, and is not continued across two or more variable displays (for example, the vibration of the effect button 15 is not configured to continue from the end of a certain variable display to the beginning of the next variable display after the certain variable display). In addition, during a jackpot game, it is executed in association with the execution of a promotion effect or a consecutive win effect in a reserved state, and is executed in association with the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot during role effect (effect button operation during a jackpot). In addition, the effect button operation during a jackpot is configured to be executable across multiple rounds of play (for example, the vibration of the effect button 15 is configured to be continued from the end of a certain number of rounds of play to the beginning of the next number of rounds of play after the certain number of rounds of play).

Here, the effect button actions are broadly divided into those that are executed based on the player's operation of the effect button 15 and those that are not executed based on the player's operation of the effect button 15. In other words, they are broadly divided into those that are executed immediately when the player operates the effect button 15 and those that do not even require the player to operate the effect button 15. The aforementioned effect button action during a jackpot and the effect button action associated with the during-variation device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win are instantly executed when the player operates the effect button 15 (in other words, when the player operates the effect button 15, a promotion effect, a consecutive win in reserved play effect, or a during-variation device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win is executed), and the aforementioned effect button action at the start of variation as a pre-read, the effect button action at the start of variation via pre-read, and the effect button action associated with the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button 15 in the first place (in other words, the effect button action at the start of variation, the effect button action at the start of variation via pre-read, and the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button 15). Here, as a variant, even if the player operates the performance button 15 despite the jackpot change display, there may be a case where the during-change gimmick performance that notifies the jackpot win is not executed and the corresponding performance button operation is not executed (when the win/lose branch scene indicates a miss), and in such a case, the word "Revival!" may be displayed in the same change display at a timing after the timing when the win/lose branch scene indicates a miss to indicate or notify the jackpot win. When configured in this way, the performance button operation is executed even during the performance in which the word "Revival!" is displayed (also called the resurrection performance or reversal performance), and this performance button operation is configured to be executed without the player having to operate the performance button 15 in the first place.

When the effect button operation is performed, the frame lamp 10 and the above-mentioned role lamp are configured to emit light in a specific manner. The light emission manner (light emission color) is configured to differ depending on the performance situation when the effect button operation is performed. Specifically, when a promotion performance, consecutive wins in reserved play performance, a role performance during change that notifies a jackpot win, or a revival performance is performed, the light is emitted in rainbow colors, and when a performance button operation at the start of change, a performance button operation at the start of change via pre-reading, or a next preview performance is performed, the light is emitted in blue. However, in any case, if an error state occurs while the rainbow or blue light is emitted by the effect button operation, the light is always switched to red.

In addition, when a selection operation to switch to the RAM clear mode or the game mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the button operation is executed after the power is turned on as an operation check, not as an operation. In this case, the button operation is executed in a relatively short time (it is executed in a shorter time than the button operation associated with the variable role effect that notifies the winning of a prize), and the frame lamp 10 and the role lamp described above also emit red light. In addition, when the variable display starts during the button operation, a button image that prompts the player to operate the button may be displayed, but even during this button operation, it is possible to change the display on the performance display device 70 by operating the button (for example, by operating the button, the button image is erased and a comment notice performance is displayed). In addition, when a selection operation to switch to the setting change mode or the setting check mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the button operation as an operation check is not performed after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to omit the button operation as an operation check. In addition, as a modified example, the button operation as an operation check may be executed by terminating the setting change mode or the setting check mode.

The main advantages achieved by the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the fourth embodiment, if the first hit occurs at an early stage (section A where the total number of outs is less than 299) after the gaming machine is first turned on, it becomes possible to win a predetermined number (299 balls) or more of prize balls during the execution of the jackpot game, and while the acquired game balls are being shot out (until the game balls in hand are used up), the game can move to the next section (section B) and the base value display (real-time display) can be activated, so that fraudulent behavior (whether there are any abnormalities in the ball output performance) can be detected early and an appropriate evaluation of the game performance can be achieved.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, even if the game state is the same low base state, the situation of whether or not measurement is required can be appropriately determined depending on whether or not the game state is one in which special play is granted, and calculations for updating the base value can be performed from the initial display period after power-on (full blinking display period). This makes it possible to appropriately manage the base value from an early stage after power-on, thereby enabling appropriate evaluation of game performance.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, if prize balls that were not paid out during a jackpot game due to a prize ball error occur and are paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the release of the prize ball error, the number of prize balls can be excluded from the base value update target, thereby enabling proper management of the base value and realizing an appropriate evaluation of game performance.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, the payout of prize balls is restricted for unexpected winnings during the setting check mode, and for winnings in a jackpot game that is resumed after the setting check mode has ended, the payout of prize balls is prioritized to allow the player to obtain actual profits, while the display of effects triggered by the payout of prize balls is restricted, making it possible to reduce the processing burden of the gaming machine while not causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, if a power outage occurs while prize balls are being paid out during a jackpot game, appropriate prize ball payout restriction measures are implemented that are appropriate for the transition mode when the power is restored, depending on whether the transition mode is a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode. If the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout restriction measures are lifted when the jackpot game is resumed, and the display of the effects triggered by the payout of the prize balls continues to be restricted, thereby reducing the processing burden on the gaming machine while not causing any disadvantage to the player.

[Fifth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment and/or the third embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals are used to designate the parts having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and the different parts are mainly described. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment and/or the third embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment described above.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be explained below.

First, the board configuration of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. Figure 91 is a front view of the game board 20 of the fifth embodiment. An outer rail 41, an inner rail 42, and a rail ornament 43 are attached to this game board 20, and a substantially circular game area PA is defined and formed inside surrounded by the outer rail 41, the inner rail 42, and the rail ornament 43. The game area PA is defined based on the center ornament 21 located approximately in the center into a left area PA1, which is the area to the left of the center ornament 21, and a right area PA2, which is the area to the right of the center ornament 21.

In this fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, etc., game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can mainly enter either the first starting gate 51 or the general winning gates 61 to 63 located below the center ornament 21. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter either the operation gate 53, the second starting gate 52, or the large winning gate 54 located to the right of the center ornament 21. On the other hand, an outlet 29 is provided at the bottom of the game area PA to discharge game balls that flow down without entering each winning gate to the back side of the game board 20. Among the game areas PA equipped with various winning gates, a hitting method in which a game ball is shot so that it flows down the left area PA1 is called a "left hit", and a hitting method in which a game ball is shot so that it flows down the right area PA2 is called a "right hit".

Mounted on the game board 20 are multiple movable parts 651, 652 that perform presentation actions according to the game development status. Note that FIG. 91 shows the movable parts 651, 652 in a state where they have returned to their initial positions (a state where they are located in their initial positions).

The first movable gadget 651 is attached to the center ornament 21 so as to be freely slidable in the vertical direction across both the left and right ends of the center ornament 21. In addition, a drive mechanism (consisting of a stepping motor, a gear mechanism, etc.) for driving the first movable gadget 651 is attached to the center ornament 21. The first movable gadget 651 is a logo gadget having a logo-shaped decorative part that designs characters, patterns, designs, etc. such as the title name of the gaming machine PM, and is configured to be able to emit light by the first gadget lamp (LED board) 651a arranged inside. The first gadget lamp 651a has multiple light-emitting elements. As this light-emitting element, a full-color LED having a light-emitting element that can emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. This first movable part 651 is configured to be able to slide (move back and forth) up and down between an initial position located at the top end of the center ornament 21 (also called the "first initial position" to distinguish it from the other initial positions) and a movable position located at the bottom end of the center ornament 21 (also called the "second movable position" to distinguish it from the other movable positions).

The second movable part 652 is attached to the center ornament 21 so that it can swing left and right with the lower right part as a fulcrum. A drive mechanism (comprised of a stepping motor, gear mechanism, etc.) for driving the second movable part 652 is attached to the center ornament 21. The second movable part 652 is formed in a shape that imitates a handgun (pistol), and is configured to be able to emit light by the second part lamp (LED board) 652a arranged inside. The second part lamp 652a has multiple light emitters. As this light emitter, a full-color LED having a light-emitting element that can emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. The second movable prop 652 is configured to be able to swing between an initial position (also called the "second initial position" to distinguish it from the other initial positions) in which it swings to the right around the fulcrum and retreats behind the center ornament 80, and a movable position (also called the "second movable position" to distinguish it from the other movable positions) in which it swings to the left around the fulcrum and appears in front of the screen of the performance display device 70.

In addition, a performance display device (liquid crystal display device) 70 that displays performance images is attached approximately in the center of the game board 20. The performance display device 70 is a liquid crystal display device with an image display section (display area) provided on the front side, and the image display section (display area) can be viewed from the front side of the game machine PM through the opening in the center ornament 21.

The display area of the performance display device 70 includes a decorative pattern display area 700, a reserved image display area 710, a changing image display area 720, a small pattern display area 730, and a reserved number display area 740.

As described above, the decorative pattern display area 700 is a display area for displaying the decorative patterns in a variable and stopped state (determined stop display, temporary stop display). The decorative pattern display area 700 has three display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that are variable display areas for the decorative patterns, and the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display area Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display area Z2, and the right pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display area Z3 are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns in this embodiment are, for example, composed of patterns (number patterns) having identification elements consisting of numbers. For example, nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are set as the identification elements of the decorative patterns (i.e., there are nine types of decorative patterns in total). The decorative patterns are arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and on the performance display device 70, they are displayed in a circular or scrolling manner in the order of "1" to "9" (or "9" to "1") in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, returning to "1" after "9" (or returning to "9" after "1").

In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot (also called a "jackpot symbol combination" or "jackpot eye") is composed of a stop pattern combination of "* * *" in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are lined up (*: decorative symbol of any number). In other words, this jackpot symbol combination (jackpot eye) is a stop pattern combination in which all decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are lined up, such as "1-1-1", "2-2-2", "3-3-3", "4-4-4", "5-5-5", "6-6-6", "7-7-7", "8-8-8", and "9-9-9".

A combination of decorative symbols that indicates a loss (also called a "loss symbol combination" or "loss mark") is a combination of stopping patterns in which at least one of the three decorative symbols is a decorative symbol with a number different from the other numbers (for example, "1, 3, 8" or "5, 6, 7"). Here, among the losing symbol combinations, stopping pattern combinations in which the left and right decorative symbols match and only the center symbol differs (for example, shifted by a few frames forward or backward) (for example, "2, 4, 2" or "7, 8, 7") are also called "reach loss combinations" or "reach loss marks".

Note that when the decorative patterns are being displayed in a changing state, the combination of decorative patterns when the left and right patterns of the three decorative patterns match and are temporarily stopped while the remaining middle pattern is displayed in a scrolling state (i.e., the combination of decorative patterns when a reach is achieved) is also called a "reach eye."

The reserved image display area 710 is a display area for displaying reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of special symbols. In the case of a game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main focus of the game, this reserved image display area 710 displays reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and in the case of a game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main focus of the game, a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed. In this reserved image display area 7
10, a maximum of four reserved images of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (four corresponding to the maximum number of activated reserved balls for each special pattern) can be displayed. The reserved images of the first special pattern are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence of the activated reserved balls of the first special pattern (ball entry order), and the reserved images of the second special pattern are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence of the activated reserved balls of the second special pattern (ball entry order). Details of the reserved images will be described later.

The changing image display area 720 is a display area for displaying a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing changing display. In the game state (normal game state) in which the changing display of the first special symbol is the main focus of the game, this changing image display area 720 displays a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the changing display of the first special symbol, and in the game state (time-saving game state, probability change game state) in which the changing display of the second special symbol is the main focus of the game, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the changing display of the second special symbol is displayed. Details of the changing image will be described later. In addition, the pending image and the changing image are display contents that suggest that a change is scheduled or is currently occurring, so both may be collectively referred to as a "changing suggestion display", the pending image may be referred to as a "changing suggestion display before the change start condition is satisfied", and the changing image may be referred to as a "changing suggestion display after the change start condition is satisfied".

The small symbol display area 730 is a display area for displaying small symbols (also called "simple symbols") in a variable display and a stop display (determined stop display). A small symbol is the fourth symbol following a special symbol, a normal symbol, and a decorative symbol. That is, in this embodiment, a variable display of a small symbol is displayed small on the screen as a variable display of a performance symbol that shows the variable display of a special symbol in a dramatic way, in addition to the variable display of a decorative symbol. This small symbol is composed of three symbols corresponding to the left, middle, and right symbols of the decorative symbol, respectively, and is composed of nine types of numerical identification elements, for example, "1" to "9", just like the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol may be called the "main decorative symbol" or the "first decorative symbol", and the small symbol may be called the "sub decorative symbol" or the "second decorative symbol".

This small symbol display area 730 is formed in a relatively smaller display area than the decorative symbol display area 700. Although detailed illustration is omitted, this small symbol display area 730 has three display areas (left small symbol display area, medium and small symbol display area, right small symbol display area) that are variable display areas for small symbols, and the left symbol of the small symbol (referred to as the "left small symbol") corresponds to the left small symbol display area, the middle symbol of the small symbol (referred to as the "medium and small symbol") corresponds to the medium and small symbol display area, and the right symbol of the small symbol corresponds to the right small symbol display area. Of the three symbols that make up this small symbol, the left small symbol corresponds to the left symbol of the decorative symbol, the medium and small symbol corresponds to the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, and the right small symbol corresponds to the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. The small symbol changes display in sync with the special symbol and decorative symbol changes, and the small symbol stops displaying in sync with the special symbol and decorative symbol stops displaying.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols display a definite stop and a tentative stop, whereas the small symbols display a definite stop but do not display a tentative stop. In other words, even if the decorative symbols (at least one of the left symbol, symbol, and right symbol) display a tentative stop, the small symbols continue to display in a variable manner without displaying a tentative stop.

The variable display of the small symbols may be in a display mode in which the numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled (for example, vertically or horizontally) in the same way as the variable display of the decorative symbols, but unlike the variable display of the decorative symbols, a display mode in which a predetermined specific combination of numbers is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals is preferable. One example of this is to use "1, 3, 5", "4, 6, 8", "7, 9, 2" and the like as combinations of three symbols (specific combinations of numbers) that make up the small symbols, and change the display mode from "1, 3, 5" to "4, 6, 8" to "7, 9, 2" to "1, 3".
It is possible to apply a configuration in which a specific number is repeatedly displayed, such as "5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → .... With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control of the variable display of the small symbols.

The small symbols only need to enable the player to recognize that the special symbols are being displayed as a variable or fixed stop symbol, and do not necessarily have to be a combination of three symbols to display the variable or fixed stop symbol, as with the decorative symbols; they may be a combination of two symbols, or just one symbol to display the variable or fixed stop symbol (or other simplified symbols, colors, or other identifying elements).

In addition, during the execution of the Super Reach performance, the decorative pattern may be displayed small (alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the decorative pattern may be hidden (alternative pattern may not be displayed either), but in such a situation, the small pattern is always displayed in a variable manner. This small pattern is displayed in a variable manner while the special pattern is changing, and is displayed in a stationary manner while the special pattern is stopped, and like the decorative pattern, the three patterns are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner. By providing this small pattern, even in a situation where you want to make the decorative pattern small or hidden (for example, when executing the Super Reach performance, when the first movable role 651 or the second movable role 652 is performed and the center of the performance display device 70 is hidden, etc.), it is possible to notify that the decorative pattern is changing (in other words, the result of winning or losing has not been determined). In other words, this small pattern can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern).

As mentioned above, when the small symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that they continue to be displayed in a variable manner from the start of the special symbol's change until it is stopped. In other words, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped midway (for example, when a special decorative symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo consecutive performance), it is preferable that the small symbols are configured not to be temporarily stopped midway (for this reason, there is no special symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT" for the small symbols, and the small symbols are fixed and stopped). Furthermore, in order to prevent a misconception that a miss is a jackpot, and in order to prevent a jackpot from being detected in advance in the case of a jackpot, it is preferable to display the fluctuation while maintaining the symbol combination that indicates a miss to the player, whether it is a miss or a jackpot (for example, as described above, if the types of small symbols are "1" to "9", the fluctuation is displayed as follows: "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → ...). Furthermore, when the decorative pattern and small pattern start to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination (the pattern combination to which the pattern combination immediately before the change starts is switched from the pattern combination immediately before the change starts, and the pattern combination to which the patterns of each pattern row immediately before the change starts is the first to be switched immediately after the change starts) is a pattern combination that is one step forward from the pattern combination at the fixed state, but when the small pattern starts to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination is a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the fixed state. For example, if the number combinations for the decorative and small symbols are both fixed at "2, 4, 3" and the decorative and small symbols begin to change, the starting symbol combination for the decorative symbols will be "3, 5, 4," but the starting symbol combination for the small symbols is fixed at "1, 3, 5." If the number combinations for the decorative and small symbols are both fixed at "3, 3, 3," and the decorative and small symbols begin to change, the starting symbol combination for the decorative symbols will be "4, 4, 4," but the starting symbol combination for the small symbols is fixed at "1, 3, 5."

Also, the decorative symbol display area 700, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the small symbol display area 730 for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the decorative symbol). This is not limited to the situation where the decorative symbol and the small symbol are fixed and stopped, or the decorative symbol is immediately after forming a reach state (a reach state in a state where it has not yet developed into a super reach performance) and the small symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, but is preferable to configure in this way even in the situation where the decorative symbol is a small symbol during a super reach performance or the like and the small symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

By setting the display position of the decorative pattern to a different display position depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal presentation mode, or stage A in the normal presentation mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., special bonus presentation mode, or stage B in the normal presentation mode), it is possible to realize a diversity of presentations with the decorative pattern depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since it is sufficient for the small pattern to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by displaying it in the same position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. Details of the presentation modes will be described later.

By changing the display mode of the decorative symbols depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (for example, the normal presentation mode, or stage A in the normal presentation mode) or the second presentation mode (for example, the special bonus presentation mode, or stage B in the normal presentation mode), it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the decorative symbols depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols are composed only of the decorative symbols of numbers (decorative symbols such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols are composed by combining the decorative symbols of numbers with the decorative symbols of friendly characters (decorative symbols such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since it is sufficient for the small symbols to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbols, it is preferable to configure the small symbols only with the same display mode, for example, only with the decorative symbols of numbers, regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern display area 700 can be varied (moved or made into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not a super reach is in progress, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the small patterns only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative patterns, it is preferable to keep the small pattern display area 730 unchanged (not moved, not made into a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design.

The decorative patterns can be made to vary in speed from slow, medium, fast, or super fast depending on the changing situation (e.g., whether the change has just begun, is in the middle of changing, is about to end, etc.), which allows for greater variety in the presentation of the decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the small patterns only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative patterns, it is preferable not to make the speed of change of the small patterns variable, or to reduce the number of stages in which it is variable (for example, only slow and fast), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. In terms of the direction of change, it is also preferable that the decorative patterns can change not only from top to bottom, but also from bottom to top (allowing for change in multiple directions), while the small patterns can only change from top to bottom.

The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped while the special symbols are in the middle of changing, with slight fluctuations) before they are definitively stopped (stopped when the special symbols stop), and at that time, a specific symbol that is a decorative symbol other than a number (for example, a decorative symbol with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts the development into a Super Reach performance) is temporarily stopped, thereby making it possible to link the performance of the decorative symbols with other performances. On the other hand, since the small symbols only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbols, it is preferable not to temporarily stop the small symbols or to temporarily stop the specific symbols, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern overlaps with the display area of other preview performances (e.g., comment preview performance, step-up preview performance, etc.), that is, it is displayed in a superimposed manner. In order to use as much of the area on the performance display device 70 as possible to create a powerful performance, such superimposed display is permitted, but for small patterns, in order to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern, it is desirable to design the small pattern display area 730 so that it does not overlap (does not display in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview performances. However, in relation to special preview performances that inevitably overlap (e.g., group preview performances, background preview performances, etc. displayed on the entire performance display device 70), it is preferable to set the display priority of the small pattern higher than the display priority of the special preview performance (set so that the small pattern is displayed in front of the special preview performance). Also, since it is desirable that the right hit notification image (different from the image displayed during the special game, the right hit notification image for the high base state displayed during the high base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game) is always visible to the player, it is desirable to design it so that the small symbol display area 730 and the display area of the right hit notification image do not overlap (do not display in a superimposed manner). However, when the decorative symbol display area 700 is moved or enlarged, the decorative symbol display area 700 and the display area of the right hit notification image may overlap (display in a superimposed manner), and in that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative symbol lower than the display priority of the right hit notification image (set so that the decorative symbol is displayed behind the right hit notification image).

During a special game, the decorative symbols may be displayed only one at a time, not in combination. For example, if a special game is executed after "7-7-7" is fixed, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if a special game is executed after "2-2-2" is fixed, "2" is displayed during the special game. This allows the player to recognize which decorative symbol was the jackpot during the special game. As a variant, only decorative symbols corresponding to jackpots with a high degree of advantage (for example, "3-3-3", "5-5-5", "7-7-7", etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during the special game. It is desirable that the display area displaying one decorative symbol displayed during the special game in this way does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game, that is, the round display area, the right hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., does not overlap with the highlighted display area (however, the highlighted display area may overlap with the highlighted display area, in which case the highlighted display area has a higher display priority). Additionally, it is preferable to hide the small symbols during special play (because no variable display occurs during special play), but they may be displayed during special play. If configured in this way, it is preferable that they do not overlap with the other display areas during special play, such as the round display area, right hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., they are not displayed in a superimposed manner, and it is also preferable that they are not displayed in a superimposed manner with the highlighted display.

In addition to changing (for example, scrolling from top to bottom), the decorative symbols may also display with a specified action when they start changing, immediately after a provisional stop, after a reach is reached, during a provisional stop, etc. (The action in each situation may be called the action at the start of change, the action at the provisional stop, the action at the reach is reached, or the swinging action). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed as "624" at the time of the final stop), when the change starts, the left, middle, and right symbols in the decorative symbols all expand and then change begins, then when the left symbol temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion is performed a little, then at the final stop timing, all the actions of the left, middle, and right symbols end. In this case, the small symbol does not perform any of the actions.

In addition, in the case of a normal reach (when the decorative pattern and small pattern are displayed as "212" at the time of the fixed stop), when the variation starts, the left, middle, and right patterns in the decorative pattern all expand and then start to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and continues to swing, then the left and right patterns rotate to notify that it is a reach, then continue to swing again, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the fixed stop timing, all the movements of the left, middle, and right patterns are completed (the middle pattern does not rotate). In this case, the small pattern does not perform any of the movements.

In addition, if it develops into a Super Reach performance (when the decorative and small symbols are displayed as "232" at the time of the final stop), when the change begins, the left, middle, and right symbols in the decorative symbols all expand and then start to change, then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then the left and right symbols rotate to notify that it is a reach and then continue to swing again, then the left and right symbols start to swing During this process, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol changes from top to bottom while enlarged, and the left and right symbols that did not overlap or had a small overlap ratio before now overlap or overlap at a high ratio), and then the normal background changes to the reach background to execute the Super Reach performance, and when the Super Reach performance announces that it is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol continue to swing for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol movements end (the middle symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the small symbol does not perform any movements. This configuration allows for diversity in the performance of the decorative symbols, while the small symbol only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the decorative symbols, so it is preferable to configure the small symbol not to perform any particular movement and to avoid unnecessary development and design.

In addition, even if the variation stops and the standby demo performance is displayed, the decorative pattern may perform a swinging motion after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) after the variation stops, but even in this situation, it is preferable that the small pattern does not perform any motion. By configuring in this way, even during game standby (pattern stopped), it is possible to stimulate the desire to play, and the small pattern does not perform a swinging motion, so that the notification that the game is on standby can be guaranteed. Note that "on standby" is a variable standby state (non-variable state) in which neither the first special pattern activation reserved ball nor the second special pattern activation reserved ball exists. In addition, when the standby demo performance is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed, but the small pattern is preferably continued to be displayed. In this way, it is possible to ensure the display of what pattern is stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demo performance screen. However, if the standby demo performance is on, the small pattern may also be hidden because no game is being played. In addition, a specific decorative symbol (for example, the middle symbol "7") may be configured to not perform a predetermined action or to have a lower probability of performing a predetermined action compared to other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the above-mentioned provisional stop action (a bouncing action) (especially for the middle symbol "7" after a reach is established). By configuring in this way, the rarity of the action for the specific symbol can be increased. In addition, when a decorative pattern is formed by combining a decorative pattern of a number with a decorative pattern of an ally character (decorative patterns such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"), both the decorative pattern of the number and the decorative pattern of the ally character will perform a swinging motion, but the swing width (the swing distance; for example, if swinging up and down, the distance width between the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swinging motion) may be made different to achieve a dynamic swinging motion. In such a configuration, the swing width of the decorative pattern of the number may be made smaller than the swing width of the decorative pattern of the ally character, or the decorative pattern of the number may not perform a swinging motion, and only the decorative pattern of the ally character may perform a swinging motion.

The reserved number display area 740 is a display area for displaying the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern. This reserved number display area 740 includes a first reserved number display area 741 that displays the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second reserved number display area 742 that displays the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern.

The game board 20 is also provided with a main control display device 27 controlled by the main control board 100, and a sub-control display device 28 controlled by the performance control board 200. Note that the main control display device 27 is described in detail in the third embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Figure 92 is a schematic diagram showing the sub-control display device 28. The sub-control display device 28 is an LED display device whose lighting is controlled by the performance control board 200, and is disposed at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 20. This sub-control display device 28 auxiliary displays some of the various information displayed by the main control display device 27 described above.

As shown in FIG. 92, the sub-control display device 28 is provided with various display means such as a first change state auxiliary display section 801, a second change state auxiliary display section 802, a first reserved number auxiliary display section 803, and a second reserved number auxiliary display section 804.

The first variable state auxiliary display unit 801 is composed of one LED lamp (LED segment). In this first variable state auxiliary display unit 801, the variable display of the first special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED lamp, and the first special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED lamp stops blinking and switches to a lit display or an off display. Specifically, when the first special pattern is displaying a variable display, the blinking display is repeated, when the first special pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot, the display is lit, and when the first special pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a miss, the display is off.

The second variable state auxiliary display unit 802 is composed of one LED lamp (LED segment). In this second variable state auxiliary display unit 802, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED lamp, and the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed when the LED lamp stops blinking and switches to a lit display or an off display. Specifically, when the second special symbol is displaying a variable display, the blinking display is repeated, when the second special symbol is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot, the display is lit, and when the second special symbol is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a miss, the display is off.

The first reserved number auxiliary display unit 803 is composed of two LED lamps (LED segments). This first reserved number auxiliary display unit displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) for the first special pattern by turning on, blinking, or off the two LED lamps. Specifically, when the two LED lamps of the first reserved number auxiliary display unit 803 are turned off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is "0", when one of the two LED lamps is blinking and the other LED lamp is turned off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is "1", when the two LED lamps are blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is "2", when one of the two LED lamps is turned on and the other LED lamp is blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is "3", and when the two LED lamps are turned on, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is "4".

The second reserved number auxiliary display section 804 is composed of two LED lamps (LED segments). In this second reserved number auxiliary display section 804, the lighting of the two LED lamps
The number of reserved balls (maximum 4) for the second special pattern is displayed by blinking/off. Specifically, when the two LED lamps of the second reserved number auxiliary display unit 804 are off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "0", when one of the two LED lamps is blinking and the other LED lamp is off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "1", when the two LED lamps are blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "2", when one of the two LED lamps is lit and the other LED lamp is blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "3", and when the two LED lamps are lit, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "4".

Furthermore, like the gaming machines of the above embodiments, the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with an effect button 15 and a cross key 16 as input devices that can be operated by the player. Here, FIG. 93 is a perspective view showing the effect button 15 and the cross key 16. The effect button 15 is also referred to as the "operation means."

The performance button 15 has a built-in performance button lamp (LED board) 15a that can emit light. This performance button lamp 15a is equipped with multiple surface-mounted LEDs as light emitters for illuminating the performance button 15. As this light emitter (LED), a full-color LED having light-emitting elements that can emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. In addition, the performance button 15 has a performance button detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the performance button 15 has been operated. The detection signal of this operation detection sensor is input to the performance control board 200. In addition, the performance button 15 has a built-in vibration motor (not shown) that can generate vibration. This vibration motor is configured to be able to impart (transmit) vibration to the performance button 15 under the control of the performance control board 200.

The cross key 16 is configured with four keys 16a-16d arranged in a cross shape, one above, one below, one to the left, and one to the right. This cross key 16 is equipped with a cross key detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the cross key 16 has been operated (which of the directional keys 16a-16d has been operated). The detection signal of this cross key sensor is input to the performance control board 200. Each of the four keys 16a-16d is an independent key, and a detection sensor is provided for each.

[Various performances]
In the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game, etc. In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as a plurality of effect modes, when the game state is a normal game state, a "normal effect mode" is set, when the game state is a time-saving game state, a "time-saving effect mode" is set, and when the game state is a probability variable game state, a "probability variable effect mode" is set. Depending on the game state (or the variable pattern selection state) and the number of times the special pattern is displayed, which are managed on the main control board 100 side, any one of the plurality of effect modes is alternatively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. When any one of the effect modes is set, a background image (background image that is a back display of the decorative pattern) dedicated to the effect mode is displayed on the screen as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the effect mode is being stayed in, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, the player can recognize which presentation mode he or she is currently in from the type of background image or BGM.

More specifically, the "normal performance mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Prediction Stage", and the progress of 20 or more changes or S
When the P reach is missed, the player will transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B," from "Stage B" to "Stage C," and from "Stage C" to "Stage A." If the pre-reading preview performance judges that the "Pre-reading Stage" will be executed (transitioned), the player will transition from the current stage to the "Pre-reading Stage." (At the point when the player transitions to the "Pre-reading Stage," the execution of the SP reach is confirmed, and if a jackpot is hit, a double number will be displayed in the "Pre-reading Stage," and if a miss occurs, a number other than a double number will be displayed in the "Pre-reading Stage," and the player will return to the stage before the transition to the "Pre-reading Stage" at the next change.) The background music (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and the "pre-reading stage" (it is different from the stage BGM in the "time-saving presentation mode" and the stage BGM in the "certainty bonus presentation mode"), but in "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) when the player does not reach a winning chance, and the stage BGM is restarted from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts, and in "Stage B,""StageC," and the "pre-reading stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) even when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) when the player does not reach a winning chance, and the stage BGM is output continuously for the next fluctuation (the "time-saving presentation mode" and "certainty bonus presentation mode" are configured to output continuously in a similar manner).

Here, pseudo consecutive performances can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and the "Pre-reading Stage," but in any stage, when the pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped (when a specified pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed changing and changing near a specified temporary stop position as the middle pattern and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-changing display triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or it switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-changing display. Thereafter, when the SP reach develops in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" or "Pre-reading Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were on) will change to the background image of the SP reach performance (and also change to BGM dedicated to the SP reach), and while the SP reach is being executed, the stage BGM will not be output, and when a performance indicating a miss is displayed in the SP reach, the background image of each stage will change again within the changing display in which the SP reach was executed (the background image of the stage displayed before the SP reach developed); in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next changing display begins, the stage BGM will not be output, and the BGM dedicated to the SP reach will not be output either (it will be silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the SP reach will be output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) without a reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (end), and even if it is "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM continues to be output for the next fluctuation (or "Stage A" where it is not), if it is a miss via an SP reach, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins.

In addition, in the "time-saving performance mode" and the "probability change performance mode", the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed. Here, a special performance that suggests that the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed (for example, a continuation dialogue notice, "It will continue!", which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo consecutive performance, and "Maybe it will continue?", which does not confirm the execution of the subsequent pseudo consecutive performance) is executed, suggesting that the pseudo consecutive performance (re-change display) will be executed later, but this special performance is displayed only in "Stage A" and "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Prediction Stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of the pseudo consecutive performance being executed can be sensed in advance and a stage where it cannot be sensed, and repeating the stage transition between the stages, a performance that does not make the player bored is realized. In addition, in "Stage A", a special performance with a character A as a motif is executed, but in "Stage B", a special performance with a character B as a motif is executed. In addition, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is provided, which is different from the special effect and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed thereafter simply by its occurrence (for example, when character C appears, the dialogue "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed). Furthermore, a development confirmation effect is provided, which is different from both the special effect and the pseudo consecutive performance and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will not be performed thereafter and will develop into an SP reach simply by its occurrence (for example, when character D appears, the dialogue "Development confirmed!" is always displayed). This pseudo confirmation effect and development confirmation effect can be performed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Pre-reading stage". In this way, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and when a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, one or more combinations of special effects, pseudo consecutive performances, and development confirmation effects are displayed to diversify the expectation of the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance and the expectation of the development into an SP reach. In addition, during one re-change display, all of the special effects, pseudo consecutive change confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed, and in this case, during a certain re-change display (for example, the pseudo 2-change display or pseudo 3-change display described below), there may be a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo consecutive change confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed.Here, in a pattern in which a special effect is executed during a certain re-change display (for example, the pseudo 2-change display or pseudo 3-change display described below), after a special effect is executed during that certain re-change display, a pseudo consecutive change confirmation effect may further be executed during that certain re-change display.

Next, we will explain the various game effects, such as "button operation effects (button effects)," "button vibration effects," "left hit notification effects," "hold change effects," and "hold change suggestion effects (action effects)."

[Button operation effects]
The button operation effect (hereinafter referred to as "button effect") of this embodiment will be described. Fig. 94 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of the button effect. The button effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the player of the probability of a big win based on the operation of the effect button 15 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 94, the button effects include an operation prompt selection and an operation trigger effect (also called an "operation result effect"). The button effects are also called "operation effects."

The operation promotion effect is an effect that is executed during the valid operation period of the effect button 15, and is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 15. The valid operation period is the period during which, when the effect button 15 is operated, this operation is validly accepted (the operation acceptance period during which the operation of the effect button 15 is validly accepted by the effect control board 200). This operation promotion effect can also be said to be an effect that notifies the player that the operation is in the valid operation period. The operation promotion effect is also called an "operation means promotion effect" or an "operation means promotion image".

While the operation promotion effect is being executed (during the valid operation period), a button image imitating the effect button 15 (also referred to as the "effect button image" or "operation means image") and an indicator image (also referred to as the "meter image" or "valid operation period indication image") that visually shows the remaining period of the valid operation period are displayed on the screen, and a notification is given that operation of the effect button 15 is valid or to encourage operation of the effect button 15.

During the execution of the operation promotion effect (during the valid operation period), the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a specific notification mode (continuously lit in red light) along with the display of the button image and the indicator image. In this embodiment, during the non-valid operation period (excluding the initialization operation of the effect button 15), the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a predetermined notification mode (for example, continuously lit in white light), while during the valid operation period, the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a specific notification mode (for example, continuously lit in red light). That is, in this embodiment, when the effective operation period of the effect button 15 starts, the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a is controlled to be switched from a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a white light emission color) to a specific notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a red light emission color). When the effective operation period of the effect button 15 ends or when the effect button 15 is operated during the effective operation period, the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a is controlled to be switched from a specific notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a red light emission color) to a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a white light emission color), or the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a is controlled to be switched from a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a red light emission color) to a special notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a rainbow light emission color). Details will be described later, but during the initialization operation of the effect button 15, the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a special notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is flashing in a red light emission color).

Here, in this embodiment, the "alert mode of the performance button lamp 15a" includes the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is lit and the alert mode in which it is turned off, and further, the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is lit includes the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit (also simply referred to as "lit") and the alert mode in which it is flashing (also simply referred to as "flashing"). And, as necessary, the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit (lit), the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is flashing (flashing), and the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is turned off (not lit) are used to distinguish between them. In the following description, the "alert mode of the performance button lamp 15a" may be appropriately rephrased as the "light emission mode of the performance button lamp 15a", "light emission mode of the performance button 15", "light emission mode of the performance button 15", "light emission mode of the performance button 15", etc.

As a modified example of this embodiment, during the non-operation effective period (excluding the initialization operation of the effect button 15), the effect button lamp 15a may be configured to be in a non-illuminated or turned off notification mode, while during the operation effective period, the effect button lamp 15a may be configured to be in a predetermined notification mode (an alarm mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in white) or a specific notification mode (an alarm mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in red).

The operation trigger performance is a performance that is executed when the performance button 15 is operated. This operation trigger performance is a performance mode (such as a role action, image display, sound output, lamp light emission, button vibration, etc.) that corresponds to the type of button performance. In this embodiment, "executed when the performance button 15 is operated" includes (1) the meaning that it is executed only when the performance button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, and (2) the meaning that it is executed when the performance button 15 is operated within the operation effective period or when the operation effective period ends without the performance button 15 being operated within the operation effective period. Therefore, the execution condition of the operation trigger performance includes (a) a case where it is established only when the performance button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, and (b) a case where it is established not only when the performance button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, but also when the operation effective period ends without the performance button 15 being operated within the operation effective period. That is, in the above execution condition (a), if the effect button 15 is operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation trigger effect will start after the operation prompting effect ends with the operation of the effect button 15, but if the effect button 15 is not operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation prompting effect will end with the trigger of the operation valid period without being executed. On the other hand, in the above execution condition (b), if the effect button 15 is operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation trigger effect will start after the operation prompting effect ends with the operation of the effect button 15, and if the effect button 15 is not operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation trigger effect will start after the operation prompting effect ends with the passage of the operation valid period. In this embodiment, the expectation of a big win is set higher when the button effect B based on the above execution condition (b) is executed than when the button effect based on the above execution condition (a) is executed. The conditions for executing the operation trigger effects (whether it belongs to a or b) in each of the button effects A to D described below will be explained in the section on specific examples of each of the button effects A to D. Also, as will be described in detail later, the button vibration effect of this embodiment can be "executed as a trigger of the operation of the effect button 15" or "executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button 15". This "executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button 15" means that it is executed regardless of the operation of the effect button 15 or the effective period of the operation, that is, it is executed regardless of the button effect (in the first place, the button image is not displayed, and it is actively executed without the need for the operation of the effect button 15). The button vibration effect is also called "effect button action" or "effect button action effect".

Figure 95 is a schematic diagram showing the types of button effects in this embodiment. As shown in this Figure 95, the button effects in this embodiment include button effect A, button effect B, button effect C, and button effect D.

Button performance A is a button performance that is executed when the variable display starts. In this button performance A, if the performance button 15 is operated within the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period ends without the performance button 15 being operated within the valid operation period, execution condition A of the operation trigger performance is met. If execution condition A is met, a role performance in which the first movable role object 651 falls to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed as the operation trigger performance of button performance A.

Button performance B is a button performance that is executed when the variable display starts or while the variable display is being executed (before a reach is established). In this button performance B, if the performance button 15 is operated within the operation valid period, the execution condition B of the operation trigger performance is established. If this execution condition B is established, a line preview performance (also called a "comment preview performance") in which a specified character image speaks a line is executed as the operation trigger performance of button performance B.

Button effect C is a button effect that is executed while the variable display is being executed (after a reach is established and before the development of an SP reach). In this button effect C, if the effect button 15 is operated within the valid operation period, or if the effect button 15 is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid operation period ends, the execution condition C of the operation trigger effect is established. If this execution condition C is established, an SP reach development effect that suggests the development to an SP reach (for example, the display of a dedicated background image that confirms the development to an SP reach) and a button vibration effect (first button vibration effect β) described below are executed as the operation trigger effect of the button effect C. Note that the button effect C may be a button effect that is executed while the variable display is being executed (after the development of an SP reach and before the win/lose branch).

The button vibration effect D is a button effect that is executed when the SP reach is in progress (when the win/lose branch occurs). In this button effect D, if the effect button 15 is operated within the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period ends without the effect button 15 being operated within the valid operation period, the execution condition D of the operation trigger effect is met. If this execution condition D is met, the operation trigger effect of the button effect D is executed by executing a role effect in which the first movable role object 651 falls to the front of the screen and a button vibration effect (second button vibration effect) described below.

As mentioned above, button effects C and D are performed in conjunction with the button vibration effect described below (because the button vibration effect is executed as part of these button effects C and D (operation trigger effect)), so these two button effects C and D will be explained again in the button vibration effect section described below.

[Button vibration effect]
Next, the button vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 15) will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute the button vibration effect during the execution of the variable display. This button vibration effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expectation of a big win by vibrating the effect button 15. In addition to the button vibration effect, a button rotation effect, which is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expectation of a big win by rotating a movable object inside the effect button 15 by the internal mechanism of the effect button, may be provided. The button vibration effect and the button rotation effect may be collectively referred to as "effect button operation" or "effect button operation effect". In the explanation of the button vibration effect, it is added that the "button vibration effect" can be read as "button rotation effect" (or "effect button operation" or "effect button operation effect").

The button vibration effect can be executed at a predetermined timing between the start and end of the display of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, when the display of the decorative pattern is a SP reach display, the button vibration effect can be executed regardless of whether the display is a jackpot or a miss display in order to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display. In addition, even if the display is not a SP reach display, if the display is a N reach display that is a jackpot, the button vibration effect can be executed to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display. In other words, in a display that is not a reach and does not result in a jackpot, the button vibration effect is not executed to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display. However, when the button vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, the button vibration effect can be executed even in a display that is not a reach and does not result in a jackpot in order to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display that is scheduled after the display, not the display. The button vibration effect in this case is the same as the first button vibration effect α described below, and is a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button 15.

As a modified example of this embodiment, as described above, even if the change display of the decorative pattern is a change display of a non-reach or a change display of an N-reach, the button vibration effect may be configured to be executable. Also, as a modified example of this embodiment, the button vibration effect may be configured to be executed only in the change display of a specific SP reach among the multiple types of SP reaches. For example, when there are multiple types of SP reaches, such as SP reach A, SP reach C, and SP reach C (SP reach A < SP reach B < SP reach C in the order of higher jackpot expectation), the button vibration effect may be executed in the change display in which at least SP reach C is executed. In this case, the SP reach A and SP reach B may be SP reaches that develop from normal reaches, and the SP reach C may be an SP reach that develops from an N-reach or SP reach A, B, and a change pattern X that develops from an N-reach to an SP reach C and a change pattern Y that develops to an SP reach C via an SP reach A or SP reach B may be provided. When the former variation pattern X is selected, a button vibration effect may be executed during the execution of N reach (before it develops into SP reach), and the execution of this button vibration effect may be configured to suggest that it will develop into SP reach C. In addition, in the case of the latter variation pattern Y, a button vibration effect may be executed during the execution of SP reach A or SP reach B (before it develops into SP reach), and the execution of this button vibration effect may be configured to suggest that it will develop into SP reach C. Note that, in the case of a variation display that results in a jackpot, even if the variation display develops into SP reach A and SP reach B (not into SP reach C), the button vibration effect may be executed. Also, when a button vibration effect is executed in a variation display that develops into SP reach A and SP reach B (not into SP reach C), a jackpot is confirmed (even if a button vibration effect is executed in a variation display that develops into SP reach C, a jackpot is not confirmed).

FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the button vibration effect of this embodiment. In the figure, the basic flow of the variable display of the SP reach is shown in chronological order from left to right on the page. Note that FIG. 96 conceptually shows the execution timing of the button vibration effect, and the actual execution timing may be changed without departing from the scope of the description of this embodiment.
The timing may be slightly earlier or later than that shown in the figure. The first button vibration effect α and the first button vibration effect β may or may not be executed in both the variable display of the big win and the variable display of the miss, and the second button vibration effect and the third button vibration effect are executed in the variable display of the big win but not in the variable display of the miss, and only either the second button vibration effect or the third button vibration effect is executed in the variable display of the big win.

The SP reach of this embodiment is configured as a battle presentation (battle reach presentation) in which, for example, an ally character fights an enemy character. SP reach A is a battle presentation in which an ally character fights an enemy character A (10% chance of winning), SP reach B is a battle presentation in which an enemy character fights an enemy character B (20% chance of winning), and SP reach C is a battle presentation in which an enemy character fights an enemy character C (60% chance of winning). In this embodiment, multiple presentation routes 1 to 3 are set as presentation routes for the variable display of this SP reach, and the result of the variable display (the outcome of the battle presentation) is derived through a different presentation process for each presentation route. To explain this briefly, presentation route 1 is a "big hit" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) is a victory, presentation route 2 is a "miss" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) is a defeat, and presentation route 3 is a "big hit" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) appears to be a defeat, and then a comeback victory is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 96, the button vibration effects in this embodiment include a first button vibration effect that is executed between the start of the variable display and the development of a specific effect (SP reach), a second button vibration effect that is executed while the specific effect (SP reach) is being executed, and a third button vibration effect that is executed after the specific effect (SP reach) ends.

The first button vibration effect is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests or notifies that there is a high expectation that the result of the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot. This first button vibration effect is a high expectation effect (super hot effect), but it is not a jackpot guaranteed effect, so even if the first button vibration effect is executed, the result of the variable display may be a "miss." There are two types of first button vibration effects: first button vibration effect α, which is performed when the variable display starts, and first button vibration effect β, which is performed while the N reach of the variable display is being executed (after the reach is established and before the development of the SP reach). Examples of first button vibration effect α and first button vibration effect β will be described later.

The second button vibration effect is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests or notifies that the currently executing variable display is a jackpot. This second button vibration effect is performed immediately after the win/lose branch at the end of the SP reach in the variable display. In other words, this second button vibration effect is an effect (jackpot confirmation effect) that is executed when notifying that a jackpot has been won immediately after the win/lose branch. An example of this second button vibration effect will be described later.

The third button vibration effect is executed as a revival effect that suggests or notifies the player that the result of the currently executing variable display is a jackpot after initially appearing to be a miss. An example of this third button vibration effect will be described later.

During the execution of each button vibration performance, the button lamp 15a emits light. During the execution of the first button vibration performance α, the button lamp 15a emits light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in white light). During the execution of the first button vibration performance β, the button lamp 15a emits light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in white light) or in a specific notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in red light). During the execution of the second button vibration performance, the button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in rainbow light). During the execution of the third button vibration performance, the button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in rainbow light). The notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a during this button vibration performance is related to the jackpot expectation degree, and is set so that the jackpot expectation degree increases by one step in the order of a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in white light emission color) < a specific notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in red light emission color) < a special notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in rainbow light emission color). The special notification mode (rainbow light emission) is a notification mode for a confirmed jackpot win, and is therefore selected only when the second button vibration performance or the third button vibration performance is executed. In addition, when each button vibration performance is executed, the vibration level of the effect button 15 and the operation time of the effect button 15 (the time during which the effect button 15 vibrates) may be executed in different modes. For example, the higher the vibration level of the effect button 15, the higher the jackpot expectation degree, or the longer the operation time of the effect button 15 (the time during which the effect button 15 vibrates), the higher the jackpot expectation degree. Also, during the execution of the first button vibration performance α, the performance button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in white light) or a specific notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in red light), and during the execution of the first button vibration performance β, the performance button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in white light). Furthermore, in either or both of the first button vibration performance α and the first button vibration performance β, the performance button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a special notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in rainbow light), and in that case, it is preferable to configure the performance button lamp 15a so that the probability of the performance button lamp 15a being emitted in the special notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in rainbow light) is lower than in the second button vibration performance or the third button vibration performance.

In addition, various button vibration effects are classified into a type of button vibration effect that is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button 15 (i.e., a type of button vibration effect executed as an operation trigger effect) and a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button 15 (i.e., a type of button vibration effect executed independently of the button effect). Specifically, the first button vibration effect includes a type of button vibration effect that is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button 15 (first button vibration effect β) and a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button 15 (first button vibration effect α). On the other hand, the second button vibration effect belongs to a type of button vibration effect that is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button 15. In addition, the third button vibration effect belongs to a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button 15. Note that the meaning of "executed triggered by the operation of the effect button 15" here is the same as the meaning of "executed triggered by the operation of the effect button 15" in the above-mentioned button effect. In addition, the first button vibration effect β and the second button vibration effect are effects that are executed when the operation promotion effect is executed first, and the effect button 15 is operated within the operation effective period during the execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the effect button 15 is not operated within the operation effective period and the operation effective period ends. As a modified example of this embodiment, the button vibration effect (for convenience, referred to as the "button vibration effect γ") may be executed as an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 15 (there may be a button vibration effect that is executed in a situation where the operation promotion effect is being executed and the effect button 15 is not operated). That is, when a predetermined button effect is executed, an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image may be displayed on the screen as the operation promotion effect, and an effect (button vibration effect γ) that vibrates the effect button 15 while the operation promotion image is being displayed may be executed. In that case, it is preferable to hide the operation promotion image and end the execution of the button vibration effect γ when the effect button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period ends without the effect button 15 being operated within the operation effective period. In addition, when the button vibration effect γ is configured as an operation promotion effect, a button vibration effect may be further executed as an operation trigger effect corresponding to the operation promotion effect. In addition, when the button vibration effect γ is configured as an operation promotion effect, the button vibration effect may not be executed again as an operation trigger effect corresponding to the operation promotion effect. In addition, when the button vibration effect γ is configured as an operation promotion effect, the button effect accompanied by the button vibration effect γ may be configured to have a relatively higher jackpot expectation than when a button effect performed without the button vibration effect γ is executed. Specifically, when the button vibration effect is executed during the display of an operation promotion image corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the second button vibration effect (the button vibration effect γ is executed), the second button vibration effect is always executed, or the probability of the second button vibration effect being executed may be higher than when the button vibration effect is not executed during the display of an operation promotion image corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the second button vibration effect (the button vibration effect γ is not executed). In addition, when a button vibration effect is being executed (button vibration effect γ is being executed) while an operation prompting image displayed after a reach corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the first button vibration effect β is being displayed, the first button vibration effect β is always executed, or the probability of the first button vibration effect β being executed may be higher than when a button vibration effect is not being executed (button vibration effect γ is not being executed) while an operation prompting image displayed after a reach corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the first button vibration effect β (the premise is that, in addition to the first button vibration effect β, a preview effect that has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the first button vibration effect β and is not a button vibration effect may be executed as an operation trigger effect when a button operation is performed while an operation prompting image displayed after a reach corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the first button vibration effect β is being displayed).

Next, an example of the first button vibration effect α will be described. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration effect α. First, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the previous variable display ends and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the start condition for the current variable display (variation start condition) is met and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins. At the start of this variable display, the first button vibration effect α is executed, in which the effect button 15 vibrates, suggesting that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the current variable display began, the first button vibration effect ends.

Next, an example of the first button performance β will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration performance β. First, as shown in FIG. (A), the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Next, as shown in FIG. (B), of the three rows of decorative patterns, the left pattern is temporarily stopped with "6" and the right pattern is temporarily stopped with "6", so that a reach is established in the variable display. Next, as shown in FIG. (C), during the execution of the N reach, the button performance (operation promotion performance as the button performance C) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. (D), by operating the performance button 15 within the operation effective period, a dedicated background image that determines that the game will develop into an SP reach is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger performance, and the button vibration performance β in which the performance button 15 vibrates is executed. The occurrence of this operation trigger performance suggests to the player that the game will develop into an SP reach (there is a high expectation of a big win). Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game progresses to an SP reach, a battle performance begins in which, for example, an ally character fights an enemy character. In addition to the first button vibration performance β, the operation trigger performance in this case may be a pre-notification performance that has a lower chance of winning than the first button vibration performance β and is not a button vibration performance.

Next, an example of the second button vibration effect will be described. Figures 99 to 100 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the second button vibration effect. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, among the three rows of decorative symbols, a "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and a "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right symbol, so that a reach is established in the variable display. Next, although not shown, as in FIG. 98 (D), during the execution of an N reach, a button effect (operation promotion effect as a button effect C) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen, and as shown in (D) in the figure, by operating the effect button 15 within the operation effective period, a dedicated background image that determines that the game will develop into an SP reach is displayed on the screen as an operation trigger effect, and a button vibration effect β in which the effect button 15 vibrates is executed, and the occurrence of this operation trigger effect suggests to the player that the game will develop into an SP reach (there is a high expectation of a big win). Next, as shown in (D) in the figure, a battle performance is started as a performance during the SP reach. Next, as shown in (E) in the figure, the SP reach approaches the end, and at the time of the winning/losing branch, a button performance (operation promotion performance as button performance D) occurs. Next, as shown in (F) in the figure, when the performance button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, as the operation trigger performance, a role performance in which the first movable role 651 falls to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is performed, and a second button vibration performance in which the performance button 15 vibrates is performed, suggesting that a jackpot has been won in the variable display. In addition, in this button performance D, as described above, even if the performance button 15 is not operated within the operation effective period, when the operation effective period ends, the same operation trigger performance (role performance, second button vibration performance) as above will be performed. Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, the ally character wins against the enemy character, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a provisional stop with a combination of "6, 6, 6" (jackpot) indicating a jackpot. In addition, the second button vibration effect continues even during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern. As a modified example, the second button vibration effect may be temporarily suspended for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) between (F) and (G) in the figure and then resumed. Next, as shown in (H), the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop with a combination of "6-6-6" (a jackpot) indicating a jackpot. In addition, the second button vibration effect ends before the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in (I), the game moves to a jackpot game. In addition, during the execution of this jackpot game, the decorative pattern, the small pattern, the reserved image, and the changing image are not displayed, but the number of reserved balls for the special pattern (reserved ball number information displayed in the reserved number display area 740) continues to be displayed (in the illustrated example, "2" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, and "0" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern). As a modified example, the small symbols (for example, "6-6-6") may also be continuously displayed during the execution of a jackpot game.

Next, an example of the third button vibration effect will be described. Figures 101 and 102 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the third button vibration effect. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, of the three rows of decorative symbols, a "6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol, and a "6" is temporarily stopped on the right symbol, so that a reach is established in the variable display. Next, although not shown, as in FIG. 98 (D), during the execution of the N reach, a button effect (operation promotion effect as a button effect C) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen, and as shown in (D) in the figure, by operating the effect button 15 within the operation effective period, a dedicated background image that determines that the game will develop into an SP reach is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger effect, and a button vibration effect β in which the effect button 15 vibrates is executed, and the occurrence of this operation trigger effect suggests to the player that the game will develop into an SP reach (there is a high expectation of a big win). Next, as shown in FIG. (C), the N reach develops into the SP reach. Next, as shown in FIG. (D), a battle performance is started as a performance during the SP reach. Next, as shown in FIG. (E), at the time of the win/lose branch at the end of the SP reach, a performance in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed. At this time, as a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, the left and right patterns of the decorative pattern are temporarily stopped at "6", and the center pattern of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at "7", so that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a combination of "6, 7, 6" (reach miss). Next, as shown in FIG. (F), in a state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the reach miss, a text image (resurrection suggestion performance or resurrection teasing performance) that suggests or encourages a revival performance, "The battle is just beginning," is displayed on the screen. Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, as a revival performance, a role performance in which the first movable role 651 falls in front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed, and a third button vibration performance in which the performance button 15 vibrates is executed. Note that, as a modified example, as a revival performance, a role performance in which the first movable role 651 falls in front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is not executed, and instead, a role performance in which the second movable role 652 slides in front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed, and a third button vibration performance in which the performance button 15 vibrates is executed, and a third button vibration performance in which the performance button 15 vibrates may be executed. In addition, as a further modified example, as a revival performance, a performance in which an ally character is wrapped in a rainbow-colored aura on the screen may be executed, and a third button vibration performance in which the performance button 15 vibrates may be executed, without operating either the first movable role 651 or the second movable role (moving to a movable position). Next, as shown in (H) in the figure, immediately after the display (revival display) of the friendly character winning against the enemy character is displayed on the screen, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the combination of "6, 6, 6" (a big win). The second button vibration display continues even during the temporary stop of the decorative symbols. As a modified example, the second button vibration display may be temporarily suspended for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) between (G) in the figure and (H) in the figure, and then resumed. Then, as shown in (I) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are definitely stopped at the combination of "6, 6, 6" (a big win) indicating a big win. The third button vibration display ends before the decorative symbols are definitely stopped. Then, as shown in (J) in the figure, the game shifts to a big win game. During the execution of this jackpot game, the decorative symbols, small symbols, reserved images, and changing images are hidden, but the number of reserved balls for the special symbols (reserved ball number information displayed in the reserved number display area 740) continues to be displayed (in the illustrated example, "2" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol). As a variation, the small symbols (for example, "6-6-6") may also be displayed continuously during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, the execution patterns when various button vibration effects are executed will be described. FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing an execution pattern table of the button vibration effect. In this embodiment, when the variable performance pattern of the decorative pattern is a variable performance pattern accompanied by a specific performance (SP reach), the execution pattern of the button vibration effect is selected by lottery with reference to this execution pattern table. Specifically, as the execution pattern of the button vibration effect, the execution pattern PB0 is an execution pattern in which none of the button vibration effects are performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB1 is an execution pattern in which only the first button vibration effect α is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB2 is an execution pattern in which only the first button vibration effect β is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB3 is an execution pattern in which only the second button vibration effect is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB4 is an execution pattern in which only the third button vibration effect is performed during the variable display. In other words, the execution patterns PB1 to PB4 are execution patterns in which one button vibration effect is performed during the variable display. Moreover, the execution pattern PB5 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α and the second button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α is performed and then the second button vibration performance is performed). The execution pattern PB6 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α and the third button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α is performed and then the third button vibration performance is performed). The execution pattern PB7 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β and the second button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β is performed and then the second button vibration performance is performed). The execution pattern PB8 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β and the third button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β is performed and then the third button vibration performance is performed). Thus, in this embodiment, there are cases in which the button vibration performance is not performed once during the execution of one variable display, cases in which the button vibration performance is performed only once during the execution of one variable display, and cases in which the button vibration performance is performed multiple times during the execution of one variable display. Also, although not shown, there are an execution pattern PB9 in which the first button vibration performance α and the first button vibration performance β are performed, an execution pattern PB10 in which the first button vibration performance α, the first button vibration performance β, and the second button vibration performance are performed, and an execution pattern PB11 in which the first button vibration performance α, the first button vibration performance β, and the third button vibration performance are performed. In this embodiment, the probability of a big win is relatively higher when the button vibration performance is performed only once during the execution of the variable display than when the button vibration performance is not performed even once during the execution of the variable display, and the probability of a big win is relatively higher when the button vibration performance is performed multiple times during the execution of the variable display than when the button vibration performance is performed only once during the execution of the variable display. Also, it is easier to execute the second button vibration performance or the third button vibration performance when either the first button vibration performance α or the first button vibration performance β is executed than when neither the first button vibration performance α nor the first button vibration performance β is executed. Furthermore, the second button vibration effect or the third button vibration effect is more likely to be executed when both the first button vibration effect α and the first button vibration effect β are executed than when either the first button vibration effect α or the first button vibration effect β is executed. However, in any execution pattern, the third button vibration effect is less likely to be executed than the second button vibration effect (for example, execution pattern 6 is less likely to be selected than execution pattern 5).

<Initialization of moving body>
Next, the initialization operation of the movable body when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the initialization operation process of the movable body. The initialization operation of the movable body is a confirmation operation executed when the gaming machine PM is turned on (when the power is restored), and is performed for the purpose of confirming whether the movable body operates normally. In this embodiment, the first movable role 651, the second movable role 652, and the performance button 15 are also collectively referred to as "movable body". In addition, in the following description, except in special cases, "power on" or "recovery from power off" refers to power on or power off recovery without the above-mentioned setting change operation and setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key switch 810) (that is, power on or power off recovery when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not entered when the power is turned on or the power is restored).

In the initialization operation process of this movable body, as shown in FIG. 104, an initialization operation process of the first movable part 651 (S941), an initialization operation process of the performance button 15 (S942), and an initialization operation process of the second movable part 652 (S943) are performed. In this embodiment, the process is executed in the order of the initialization operation process of the first movable part 651 (S941) → the initialization operation process of the performance button 15 (S942) → the initialization operation process of the second movable part 652 (S943), but is not limited to this. For example, the process may be executed in the order of initialization operation process of the first movable role 651 → initialization operation process of the second movable role 652 → initialization operation process of the performance button 15 (processing that prioritizes the initialization operation process of the movable role 651, 652), or the process may be executed in the order of initialization operation process of the performance button 15 → initialization operation process of the first movable role 651 → initialization operation process of the second movable role 652 (processing that prioritizes the initialization operation process of the performance button 15). In addition, the initialization operation process of the first movable role 651 and the initialization operation process of the performance button 15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Alternatively, the initialization operation process of the second movable role 652 and the initialization operation process of the performance button 15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Alternatively, the initialization operation process of the first movable role 651, the initialization operation process of the second movable role 652, and the initialization operation process of the performance button 15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel.

In the initialization operation process (S941) of the first movable role 651, a control for returning the first movable role 651 to the initial position and a control for confirming the operation of the first movable role 651 are performed. Specifically, although not shown, each operation is performed in the order of (1-1) returning the first movable role 651 to the initial position, (1-2) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the first initial position sensor, (1-3) moving the first movable role 651 downward, (1-4) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the first movable position sensor, (1-5) moving the first movable role 651 upward, and (1-6) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the first initial position sensor, and the initialization operation of the first movable role 651 is completed. Note that, if the first movable role 651 is in the initial position at the start of the initialization operation, the process of (1-1) is skipped and the process is performed from the process of (1-2). That is, in this initialization operation, different operations can be executed depending on the position of the first movable role 651 at the start of the initialization operation (depending on whether the first movable role 651 is in the initial position or not). Here, the first initial position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the first movable role 651 is in the initial position (first initial position), and the first movable position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the first movable role 651 is in the movable position (first movable position). During the initialization operation of the first movable role 651, the light emission control of the first role lamp 651a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the first movable role 651, the first movable role lamp 651a starts to emit light, and then the initialization operation of the first movable role 651 starts. In addition, after the initialization operation of the first movable role 651 ends, the light emission of the first role lamp 651a ends (at this time, the first movable role 651 is not in the performance operation). In addition, the notification mode of the first reel lamp 651a of the first movable reel 651 is different between the notification mode during the initialization operation (for example, the notification mode of flashing white light) and the notification mode during the performance operation (for example, the mode of continuously lighting red light). Note that the emission of the first reel lamp 651a does not have to end after the initialization operation of the first movable reel 651 is completed, and in such a configuration, the notification mode of the first reel lamp 651a of the first movable reel 651 may be different before and after the initialization operation of the first movable reel 651 is completed (for example, the notification mode may be a mode of flashing white light before the initialization operation is completed, and the mode of continuously lighting white light after the initialization operation is completed).

In the initialization operation (S942) of the performance button 15, in order to confirm the operation of vibrating the performance button 15, the vibration motor is driven to vibrate the performance button 15 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). During the initialization operation of the performance button 15, the illumination control of the performance button lamp 15a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the performance button 15, the illumination of the performance button lamp 15a is started, and then the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is started. In this embodiment, during the initialization operation of the performance button 15, the performance button lamp 15a is illuminated in a special notification mode (announcement mode in which the performance button lamp 15a flashes with a red illumination color). Then, after the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is completed, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a is switched to a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously illuminated with a white illumination color). Here, as the initialization operation of the performance button 15, first, the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (announcement mode in which the light is flashed in red) for a specific time (for example, 5 seconds), and then, while continuing the emission of the special notification mode (announcement mode in which the light is flashed in red), the vibration motor is driven to vibrate the performance button 15 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and then, even if the vibration is stopped, the emission of the special notification mode (announcement mode in which the light is flashed in red) is continued for a specified time (for example, 5 seconds), thereby completing the initialization operation of the performance button 15. Here, the emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the performance button lamp 15a may be approximately the same as the emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp 651a, and the emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the performance button lamp 15a may be approximately the same as the emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp 651a. In addition, in the case where the internal mechanism of the effect button is equipped with a button rotation effect, which is a preview effect that suggests or notifies the likelihood of a jackpot by rotating a movable object inside the effect button 15, the initialization operation of the effect button 15 involves controlling the rotation motor to rotate the movable object inside the effect button 15 for a predetermined period of time in order to confirm the rotation of the movable object inside the effect button 15, and during the initialization operation of the effect button 15, control of the illumination of the effect button lamp 15a is also performed at the same time, and in the initialization operation process of the effect button 15, the initialization operation of the effect button 15 is started after the illumination of the effect button lamp 15a begins, and during the initialization operation of the effect button 15, the effect button lamp 15a illuminates in a special notification mode (an alarm mode in which it flashes in red light), and after the initialization operation of the effect button 15 is completed, the alarm mode of the effect button lamp 15a switches to a predetermined alarm mode (a mode in which it is continuously lit in white light).

In the initialization operation (S943) of the second movable role 652, control is performed to return the second movable role 652 to the initial position and control is performed to confirm the operation of the second movable role 652. Specifically, although not shown, each operation is performed in the order of (2-1) returning the second movable role 652 to the initial position, (2-2) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second initial position sensor, (2-3) swinging the second movable role 652 to the left when viewed from the front, (2-4) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second movable position sensor, (2-5) swinging the second movable role 652 to the right when viewed from the front, and (2-6) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second initial position sensor, and the initialization operation of the second movable role 652 is completed. Note that, if the second movable role 652 is in the initial position at the start of the initialization operation, the process of (2-1) is skipped and the process is performed from (2-2). That is, in this initialization operation, different operations can be executed depending on the position of the second movable role 652 at the start of the initialization operation (depending on whether the second movable role 652 is in the initial position or not). Here, the second initial position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the second movable role 652 is in the initial position (first initial position), and the second movable position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the second movable role 652 is in the movable position (first movable position). During the initialization operation of the second movable role 652, the light emission control of the second role lamp 652a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the second movable role 652, the second movable role lamp 652a starts to emit light, and then the initialization operation of the second movable role 651 starts. In addition, after the initialization operation of the second movable role 652 ends, the light emission of the second role lamp 652a ends (at this time, the second movable role 652 is not in the performance operation). Here, the light emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the second role lamp 652a may be approximately the same as the light emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp 651a, and the light emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the second role lamp 652a may be approximately the same as the light emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp 651a. Also, the notification mode of the second role lamp 652a of the second movable role 652 is different between the notification mode during the initialization operation (for example, the notification mode in which the white light is flashed) and the notification mode during the performance operation (for example, the mode in which the red light is continuously lit). In addition, the second reel lamp 652a does not have to stop emitting light after the initialization operation of the second movable reel 652 is completed. If configured in this way, the notification mode of the second reel lamp 652a of the second movable reel 651 may be different before and after the initialization operation of the second movable reel 652 is completed (for example, the notification mode may be a flashing white light before the initialization operation is completed, and a continuous white light after the initialization operation is completed).

Here, the timing of execution of the initialization operation process of the movable body will be described. Figure 105 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display screen displayed on the performance display device 70 after the gaming machine is powered on. In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on (when the power is restored after being turned off), the initialization operation process of the movable body is configured to start at the same time or approximately the same time when the display screen of the performance display device 70 returns to the normal screen described below.

First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), when the gaming machine is in a power-off state, nothing is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70. As shown in FIG. 105(B), when the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power-off state, nothing is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), but after the predetermined time has elapsed, the performance display device 70 displays a recovery screen (referred to as a power recovery notification image, a power-off recovery image, or a power-off recovery screen in the above third embodiment, etc.) including a text image of "Recovery in progress" (an image indicating that the gaming machine or the performance display device is in a recovery state). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(C), after the recovery screen is displayed on the performance display device 70 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), it switches to a normal screen (standby screen). On this normal screen, an initial combination of decorative patterns and a predetermined background image are displayed as a predetermined default display, regardless of the performance state before the power-off. In the illustrated example, the combination of "3, 3, 1" indicating a predetermined predetermined miss is displayed as the initial combination of the decorative pattern. Also, in the illustrated example, a background image (for example, the background image of stage A in the normal presentation mode) corresponding to a predetermined default presentation mode (presentation stage) is displayed as the predetermined background image. In this embodiment, the initialization operation process of the movable body is started almost at the same time as the display of this initial screen starts. After this initial screen is displayed, the presentation display device 70 is in a state where the decorative pattern can be displayed (the presentation display by the presentation display device 70 is completely restored). In other words, after returning to the initial screen, the presentation display device 70 is enabled to display a presentation corresponding to the presentation control command when a presentation control command is sent from the main control board 100 to the presentation control board 200 (for example, the presentation display device 70 starts displaying the decorative pattern when a variation start command is sent from the main control board 100 to the presentation control board 200). For example, when the power is restored after being turned off, if the state is a standby state (non-varying state) in which no variable display is being performed and there are no reserved balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern (before the power is turned off in the standby state), the display of the initial screen is displayed, and even while the initialization operation process of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole 51, so that the variable display of the first special pattern can be started, and at the same time, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be started in the performance display device 70. As a modified example of this embodiment, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal screen was displayed. Also, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the recovery screen was displayed (before the normal screen is displayed). Furthermore, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined performance control command is received from the main control board 100. In the following, "initialization operation of the movable bodies" does not refer to each of the initialization operation of the first movable part 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part 652, but rather to all of the initialization operation of the first movable part 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part 652 (until all of these multiple initialization operations have been started and all have been completed).

<<Button vibration during initialization>>
Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibration performance will be described. FIG. 106 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibration performance. Here, for the time chart of the button vibration performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is not treated as "execution". Note that, in FIG. 106, due to the space, a simplified screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small patterns and reserved images are omitted) is shown.

First, at time t1, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a variable standby state (non-variable state). At time t2, the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power outage. At time t3, at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine is powered on, a recovery screen is displayed on the performance display device 70. At time t4, the display screen of the performance display device 70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen (standby screen). Also, at this time t4, an initialization operation process for the movable bodies is started, and the initialization operation of the first movable role 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable role 652 are performed in that order.

At time t5, during the initialization operation of the movable body, the game ball enters the first starting hole 51, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Also, a variable start command is sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, and the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the small symbol are started. Also, at this time t5, a performance lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and as the execution pattern of the button vibration performance, execution of execution pattern PB5 (the first
The execution of the button vibration performance α and the execution of the second button vibration performance) are determined. Therefore, originally, at the start of the variable display (i.e., time t5), the first button vibration performance α should be executed, but since the initialization operation of the movable body is being executed, the execution of the first button vibration performance α is prohibited in order to prioritize the initialization operation of this movable body. Here, in this embodiment, as the initialization operation of the movable body, even if (1) the initialization operation of the movable role objects 651, 652 is being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is not being executed, or (2) the initialization operation of the movable role objects 651, 652 is not being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is being executed, the execution of the first button vibration performance α is restricted during the initialization operation of the movable body. In other words, if the execution timing of the first button vibration performance α overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body, whether it is the initialization operation of the movable role pieces 651, 652 or the initialization operation of the button performance 15, the execution of the first button vibration performance α will be restricted (the execution of the first button vibration performance α will be canceled). In addition, if the execution timing of the first button vibration performance α arrives just before the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, not only is the execution of the first button vibration performance α prohibited until the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, but the remaining part of the first button vibration performance α (the first button vibration performance for the execution period that does not overlap with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body out of the execution period of the first button vibration performance α) will not be executed after the initialization operation of the movable body is completed. As a modified example of this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the movable parts 651, 652 is being executed at the start timing of the execution of the first button vibration effect α, if the vibration for a specified period of time which is the initialization operation of the effect button 15 has been completed (or is not in execution state), the initialization operation of the effect button 15 (vibration operation for operation confirmation) and the effect operation (vibration operation for effect) do not conflict with each other, so the first button vibration effect α may be executable.

At time t6, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, is started. The start of the initialization operation of this performance button 15 triggers the performance button lamp 15a to emit light in a special notification mode (flashing red light) (switching from an off state to a flashing red state). At time t7, the initialization operation of the performance button 15 ends. The end of the initialization operation of this performance button 15 triggers the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a to switch from the special notification mode (flashing red light) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit white light). At the same time, the vibration for the predetermined period of time also ends.

Next, at time t8, the initialization operation of the movable bodies is completed; that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part 652 are all completed. Note that at this time t8, the variable display continues.

Next, at time t9, button effect D (operation prompt effect) is started as a win/lose branch effect, and an operation prompt image such as a button image appears on the screen. When this operation prompt effect starts, the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a switches from a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a white light color) to a specific notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in a red light color).

At time t10, the effect button 15 is operated (or the effective operation period has elapsed without the effect button 15 being operated), and a feature effect in which the first movable feature 651 falls (moves to a movable position) and a second button vibration effect in which the effect button 15 vibrates are both executed, indicating that the variable display is a jackpot. While the effect button 15 is vibrating, the effect button lamp 15a lights up in a special notification mode (lights up continuously in rainbow colors).

At time t11, the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a combination (a jackpot) indicating a jackpot. Then, at time t12, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the combination (a jackpot) indicating a jackpot.

In this embodiment, if the first button vibration effect α and the second button vibration effect are scheduled to be executed in the variable display that is performed by winning the start-up prize while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed (if the execution of both button vibration effects is won in the effect lottery), the first button vibration effect α scheduled to be executed at the start of the variable display is restricted in order to prioritize the initialization operation of the movable body, while the second button vibration effect scheduled to be executed at the end of the variable display is allowed to be executed since there is no risk of it being executed at the same time as the initialization operation of the movable body.

As a modified example of this embodiment, a button vibration simultaneous display effect (button vibration linked display effect) that displays a predetermined effect image (for example, a dialogue image saying "It's your chance") before or during the execution of the first button vibration effect α may be configured as an effect that can be executed simultaneously (in conjunction with) the first button vibration effect α. In that case, in the application of the above FIG. 106, since the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized, it is preferable that the execution of the first button vibration effect α is restricted, while the execution of the display of the predetermined effect image, which is the button vibration simultaneous display effect (button vibration linked display effect), is permitted. In this way, even if the execution of the first button vibration effect α is restricted, the button vibration simultaneous display effect (button vibration linked display effect) is executed, so that the player can be made aware that the situation is such that the first button vibration effect α should have been executed (there is a high probability of a jackpot).

<<Button effect A during initialization>>
Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button performance A will be described. FIG. 107 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button performance. Here, for the time chart of the button vibration performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is not treated as "execution". Note that, in FIG. 107, due to space limitations, a simplified screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small patterns and reserved images are omitted) is shown.

First, time points t21 to t24 are the same as time points t1 to t4 described above, so a duplicated explanation will be omitted. At time t25, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, begins. When the initialization operation of this performance button 15 begins, the performance button lamp 15a lights up in a special notification mode (a mode in which it flashes in red) (it switches from an off state to a flashing red state).

Next, at time t26, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole 51, thereby starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, a variable start command is sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the small symbol. Also, at this time t26, a performance lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and it is decided that the button performance A and the second button vibration performance will be executed. Therefore, at this time t26 (the start of the variable display), the button performance A (operation promotion performance) is executed, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image appears on the screen.

Next, at time t27, the effect button 15 is operated within the operation valid period. However, even if the effect button 15 is operated within this operation valid period, during the initialization operation of the movable body, that is, while the effect button lamp 15a is emitting light in a special light-emitting mode (a mode in which it flashes with red light), the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a does not change and continues to be in the special notification mode triggered by the operation of the effect button 15. Also, at this time 27, if the effect button 15 is operated within the operation valid period, a role performance in which the first movable role object 651 falls (moves to a movable position) should be executed as the operation trigger performance, but since the initialization operation of the movable body is being executed, the execution of the role performance is prohibited in order to prioritize the initialization operation of the movable body. Here, in this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the movable body is in a state where (1) the initialization operation of the movable parts 651, 652 is being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is not being executed, or (2) the initialization operation of the movable parts 651, 652 is not being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is being executed, the execution of the performance of the role is restricted during the initialization operation of the movable body. In other words, if the execution timing of the button vibration performance overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body, whether it is the initialization operation of the movable parts 651, 652 or the initialization operation of the performance button 15, the execution of the role performance is restricted (the execution of the role performance is canceled). As a modified example of this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is in progress at the time when the execution of the reel performance by button performance A begins, if the initialization operation of the movable reels 651, 652 has been completed (or is not in execution), there is no conflict between the initialization operation of the movable reels 651, 652 (reel operation for operation confirmation) and the performance operation (reel operation for performance), so that reel performance may be executed.

At time t28, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, ends. When the initialization operation of the performance button 15 ends, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a switches from a special notification mode (flashing red light) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit white light). At the same time, the vibration for the predetermined period of time also ends.

At time t29, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part 652 are all completed. Note that at this time t29, the variable display continues.

At time t30, button effect D (operation prompt effect) starts as a win/lose branching effect, and an operation prompt image such as a button image appears on the screen. At time t31, triggered by the operation of effect button 15 (or the expiration of the effective operation period without the effect button 15 being operated), a function effect in which the first movable part 651 falls (moves to a movable position) and a second button vibration effect in which the effect button 15 vibrates are executed, respectively, suggesting that the variable display is a jackpot.

At time t32, the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot. Then, at time t33, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the execution of button performance A and the execution of the second button vibration performance are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by winning the start-up during the initialization operation of the movable body (when the execution of button performance A and the second button vibration performance are won in the performance lottery), the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a during the initialization operation of the movable body and during the effective operation period of the button performance A that is performed at the start of the variable display is a special notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a flashes with a red light color), whereas the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a during the effective operation period of the second button vibration performance that is performed at the end of the variable display is a specific notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit with a red light color), and thus the notification modes of the two are different.

As a modification of this embodiment, a special effect effect (effect collective effect) may be executed by utilizing the time before the button effect is executed, i.e., the time before the button image (operation prompt image) appears on the screen. This special effect effect (effect collective effect) is configured as a button appearance suggestion effect (a button appearance teasing effect that teases whether or not the effect button will appear) that suggests that a button effect will occur, i.e., that a performance in which a button image appears on the screen (sometimes referred to as a "button appearance performance") will be executed.

Here, FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special effect effect (effect collection effect). As shown in FIG. 108(A), this special effect effect displays a special effect image that depicts four effect buttons 15 semi-transparently, and these special effect images are gathered in one place and synthesized to form one complete button image (non-transparent button image), as shown in FIG. 108(B). Note that in this embodiment, the relationship between the special effect effect and the effective operation period can be determined so that the special effect effect is performed until the effective operation period begins, and the effective button operation period begins when the button image is completed.

Here, we will explain the case where this special effect presentation (effect collection presentation) is applied to the button appearance suggestion presentation (button appearance teaser presentation) of the above-mentioned button presentation A. Figure 109 is a time chart showing a modified example of Figure 107. Note that Figure 109 differs from the above-mentioned Figure 107 only in the example screen at time t30, and therefore explanations of other parts will be omitted unless otherwise noted.

In this embodiment, the button appearance effect patterns include a first button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed with a special effect effect (a button appearance suggestion effect or a button appearance teasing effect), and a second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without a special effect effect (a button appearance suggestion effect or a button appearance teasing effect). In the button effects of this embodiment, in the button effect A performed at the start of the fluctuation, the second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without a special effect effect is executed. On the other hand, in the button effect D performed at the time of the winning/losing branch, the first button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed with a special effect effect is executed. Therefore, when the execution of the button effect A starts at time t26 in FIG. 109, the second button appearance effect pattern is executed, so that the button image is displayed without a special effect effect. On the other hand, when the execution of the button effect D starts at time t30 in FIG. 109, the first button appearance effect pattern is executed, so that the special effect effect is executed first and then the button image appears.

In this modified example, when the execution of button performance A and the execution of the second button vibration performance are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by winning the start-up during the initialization operation of the movable body (when the execution of button performance A and the second button vibration performance is won in the performance lottery), a special effect performance is not executed when the button image appears in button performance A that is executed during the initialization operation of the movable body and at the start of the variable display, but a special effect performance is executed when the button image appears in button performance D that is executed at the end of the variable display. By doing so, the initialization operation is prioritized in button performance A during the initialization operation of the movable body, preventing a cumbersome game progress, and the player's expectations can be heightened by the occurrence of a special effect performance in button performance D after the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, and it becomes possible to carry out appropriate game progress processing according to the game situation.

As a modified example of this embodiment, the button performance A performed at the start of the fluctuation may be configured to execute a first button appearance performance pattern that displays a button image accompanied by a special effect performance. In that case, it is preferable that the probability of the first button appearance performance pattern that displays a button image accompanied by a special effect performance is relatively lower when the button performance A is executed than when the button performance D is executed (that is, the first button appearance performance pattern is less likely to be executed in the button performance A than in the button performance D). Also, the button performance B performed at the start of the fluctuation may be configured to execute a second button appearance performance pattern that displays a button image without a special effect performance. In that case, it is preferable that the probability of the second button appearance performance pattern that displays a button image without a special effect performance is relatively lower when the button performance D is executed than when the button performance A is executed (that is, the second button appearance performance pattern is less likely to be executed in the button performance D than in the button performance A).

This special effect effect may have multiple display modes, and in such a configuration, for example, a special effect effect with a red effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a special effect effect with a blue effect, or multiple types of button images may be provided (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a high expectation preview effect is more likely to be executed with a red button image than with a blue button image, for example, a red comment preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue comment preview effect), and a specific button image (for example, a red button image) may be displayed for a special effect effect with a red effect than for a special effect effect with a blue effect.

Also, a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) special effect effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) special effect effect, or a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) special effect effect may be configured to have a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) special effect effect. Also, when a plurality of types of display modes of the special effect effect are provided, it may be configured so that a special effect effect with a higher expectation is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach, for example, the timing of execution of button effect D) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach, for example, the timing of execution of button effect B). Also, a special effect effect may not be executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and only the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) may be configured to be executed.

In addition, the possibility of executing the special effect effect may be determined by lottery, and the probability of winning in the variable display may be relatively higher when the special effect effect is executed than when the special effect effect is not executed. In addition, the longer the execution time of the special effect effect (the display time of the special effect image) is, the higher the probability of winning in the variable display may be, or a highly accurate performance indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won may be generated by button operation. In that case, when the special effect effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach that is the latter half of the variable display described above, for example, the execution timing of the button performance D), it is preferable that the performance time of the special effect effect (the display time of the special effect image) is set to a longer time than the effective operation period of the performance button 15. In addition, the opposite to that configuration, the performance time of the special effect effect (the display time of the special effect image) may be set to a shorter time than the effective operation period of the performance button 15. As another variation, multiple display modes (for example, blue button image, red button image, rainbow button image, large button image, small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. In that case, the possibility of executing a special effect and the duration of the effect if executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the button image that is scheduled to be executed later.

As a further modified example, a comment preview effect can be executed (a button image can be displayed) even during one or more variable display times before the pending activation ball that is the subject of the pre-reading is consumed (a pre-reading variable display that is a variable before the target), and the possibility of a special effect effect being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the subject of the pre-reading is consumed (the relevant variable display), and the possibility of a special effect effect with a high expectation (such as a special effect effect accompanied by a red effect as described above or a special effect effect of a long duration (for example, 4 seconds)) being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the subject of the pre-reading is consumed (the relevant variable display).

As another variation, in the case where a special effect effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach, for example, the timing of executing button effect B) (or a special effect effect with low expectation is executed instead of a special effect effect with high expectation), and a special effect effect is executed in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach, for example, the timing of executing button effect D) (or a special effect effect with high expectation is executed instead of a special effect effect with low expectation), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot may be, or the button image at the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be configured to be an image with high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image).

<<Button effect during initialization B>>
Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button performance B will be described. FIG. 110 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the second button performance. Here, for the time chart of the button vibration performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button 15 is not treated as "execution". Note that, in FIG. 107, due to space limitations, a simplified screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small patterns and reserved images are omitted) is shown.

First, time points t41 to t44 are the same as time points t1 to t4 described above, so a duplicate explanation will be omitted. At time point 55, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, begins. When the initialization operation of this performance button 15 begins, the performance button lamp 15a lights up in a special notification mode (a mode in which it flashes in red) (it switches from an off state to a flashing red state).

Next, at time t46, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole 51, thereby starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Furthermore, a variable start command is sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the small symbol. Furthermore, at this time t46, a performance lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and it is decided whether to execute button performance B or the second button vibration performance. Therefore, at this time t46 (the start of the variable display), button performance B (operation promotion performance) starts, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image appears on the screen.

Next, at time t47, the effect button 15 is operated within the operation effective period. However, even if the effect button 15 is operated within this operation effective period, during the initialization operation of the movable body, that is, while the effect button lamp 15a is emitting light in a special light-emitting mode (a mode in which it flashes with red light), even if the effect button 15 is operated, the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a does not change and the special notification mode continues. Also, at this time t47, by operating the effect button 15 within the operation effective period, a line effect (also called a "comment preview effect") in which a line image of "Chance!!" is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger effect is executed. However, as described above, the operation trigger effect (line preview effect) of this button effect B is executed under the condition that the effect button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, so if the operation effective period ends without the effect button 15 being operated within the operation effective period, the button effect B ends without executing this operation trigger effect (line effect).

At time t48, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, ends. When the initialization operation of the performance button 15 ends, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a switches from a special notification mode (flashing red light) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit white light). At the same time, the vibration for the predetermined period of time also ends.

At time t49, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed; that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part 652 are all completed. Note that at this time t49, the variable display is still continuing.

At time t50, button effect D (operation prompt effect) starts as a win/lose branching effect, and an operation prompt image such as a button image appears on the screen. At time t51, the effect button 15 is operated (operation trigger effect), and a function effect in which the first movable role object 651 falls (moves to a movable position) and a second button vibration effect in which the effect button 15 vibrates are each executed, suggesting that the variable display is a jackpot. Note that this button effect D differs from the previously executed button effect B in that even if the effect button 15 is not operated within the effective operation period, the end of the effective operation period will trigger the execution of the operation trigger effect (role object effect, second button vibration effect).

At time t52, the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot. Then, at time t53, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot.

In this embodiment, even if the variable display starts during the initialization operation of the effect button performed immediately after power-on, the button effect B that can be performed at the start or in the first half of the variable display (a button effect that is relatively likely to be executed in overlap with the initialization operation) is a type of button effect that is executed only when the effect button 15 is actually operated within the operation effective period (a button effect that has only button operation as the execution condition for the operation trigger effect). This reduces the processing load when the initialization operation of the movable body and the button effect B are executed in overlap. Note that, as a modified example, the button effect B that can be performed at the start or in the first half of the variable display may be configured to be executed not only when the effect button 15 is operated within the operation effective period, but also when the operation effective period ends without the effect button 15 being operated within the operation effective period, just like the button effect D that can be performed in the middle (after the establishment of a pseudo-link or a reach) or the latter half (after the development of a SP reach) of the variable display (a button effect that is relatively unlikely to be executed in overlap). However, in this case, it is preferable that the probability of the operation trigger effect being executed when the effect button is not operated within the valid operation period is relatively lower when button effect B is executed than when button effect D is executed (in other words, it is less likely that the operation trigger effect will be executed when the effect button 15 is not operated within the valid operation period when button effect B is executed than when button effect D is executed).

<Other effects of button vibration effects>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the button vibration effect (e.g., the first button vibration effect α, the first button vibration effect β, the second button vibration effect, the third button vibration effect, etc.) is not executed across multiple variable displays (e.g., between the current variable display and the next variable display). In other words, the button vibration effect of this embodiment is not executed when the fixed stop display of the pattern is displayed (it is not executed across before and after the fixed stop display), and is always completed during the execution of one variable display (before the variable display is displayed as a fixed stop).

On the other hand, when a button vibration effect (for example, the fourth button vibration effect, which is a button vibration effect executed in conjunction with the execution of a promotion effect or a consecutive win effect in a reserved game) is executed during the execution of a jackpot game, this button vibration effect is configured to be executable across multiple rounds of play (for example, between the current round and the next round). In other words, the end condition of one round of play is when the maximum opening time of the big prize winning hole 54 has elapsed, or when the entry of a specified count number of game balls is detected before the maximum opening time has elapsed, and the execution time of this one round of play is not always a fixed time value, and if the round of play ends at an early stage before the maximum opening time is reached depending on the progress of the round of play (the entry status of game balls into the big prize winning hole 54), the button vibration effect can be executed across multiple rounds of play. However, this button vibration effect is not executed continuously from the first round of play (first round) to the final round of play (last round). In addition, this button vibration effect is performed for a time shorter than the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 54.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern changes, the button vibration effect is not executed during the execution (at least at the start of execution) of the aforementioned temporary stop operation and reach establishment operation in order to draw attention to the display mode (reach mode) of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern. However, during the execution (at least at the start of execution) of the change start operation, the first button vibration effect α can be executed to further liven up the change start operation, and during the shaking operation (at least at the start of execution), the first button vibration effect β, the second button vibration effect, and the third button vibration effect can be executed to prevent the shaking operation from becoming monotonous. However, the button vibration effect is not executed during the execution of the shaking operation, which may be executed between the stop of the change and the display of the standby demo effect.

In addition, even if the light intensity is adjusted during the execution of the button vibration performance, the light intensity of the specific notification mode (continuous lighting in red light) or special notification mode (continuous lighting in rainbow light) of the performance button lamp 15a accompanying the execution of the button vibration performance does not change (is not adjusted), but the light intensity of the board lamp 25 provided on the game board 20 (center decoration 21) continuously lighting in red or rainbow light during the execution of the button vibration performance changes (is adjusted). In addition, as a modified example, when the light intensity is adjusted during the execution of the button vibration performance, the light intensity of the specific notification mode (continuous lighting in red light) or special notification mode (continuous lighting in rainbow light) of the performance button lamp 15a accompanying the execution of the button vibration performance and the light intensity of the board lamp 25 provided on the game board 20 (center decoration 21) continuously lighting in red or rainbow light during the execution of the button vibration performance may also be configured to change (adjust). However, if the light intensity is adjusted during the initialization operation (vibration) of the effect button 15, the light intensity of the special notification mode (flashing red light) of the effect button lamp 15a associated with the initialization operation (vibration) of the effect button 15 does not change (is not adjusted).

In addition, if the button image when button effect D during a jackpot fluctuation is executed is the aforementioned blue button image, the second button vibration effect may be executed or the third button vibration effect may be executed, whereas if it is a red button image or a rainbow button image, which have a higher jackpot expectation than a blue button image, only the second button vibration effect is executed (or, the second button vibration effect is more likely to be executed and the third button vibration effect is less likely to be executed than when the button image is a blue button image).

<Initialization operation according to the transition mode when power is turned on>
In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured so that the timing of executing the initialization operation of the movable bodies (movable gimmicks and effect buttons) can differ depending on the transition mode when the power is turned on.

First, when the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the game mode (see the fourth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch 810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch 820 turned OFF, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed at approximately the same time that the display on the performance display device 70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the setting change mode (see the fourth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch 810 turned ON and the RAM clear switch 820 turned ON, the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed while the setting change mode is being executed. In other words, while the setting change mode is being executed, a setting change screen is displayed on the performance display device 70 to notify the player that a setting change is being executed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed so as not to impair the visibility of the setting change screen. Then, after the setting change mode is ended by switching the setting key switch 810 OFF, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the setting check mode (see the fourth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch 810 turned ON and the RAM clear switch 820 turned OFF, the initialization operation of the movable body is not performed while the setting check mode is being executed. In other words, while the setting check mode is being executed, a setting check screen is displayed on the performance display device 70 to notify the player that the setting check is being executed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed so as not to impair the visibility of the setting check screen. Then, after the setting key switch 810 is switched OFF and the setting check mode is ended, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the RAM clear mode (see the fourth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch 810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch 820 pressed (turned ON), the RAM clear process (the process of initializing a predetermined memory area of the RAM 103 mounted on the main control microcomputer 110) is executed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed at approximately the same time as the display of the performance display device switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen. Note that in this embodiment, even if the transition operation to the RAM clear mode is performed, if the setting key switch 810 is switched ON within a predetermined grace period (for example, within one second) from the time of power-on or the transition to the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode is transitioned to. During the execution of this setting confirmation mode, as described above, a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the performance display device 70 to prompt the user that the setting is being confirmed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed so as not to impair the visibility of the setting confirmation screen. Then, the setting key switch 810 is switched to OFF, and the setting change mode is terminated, and the initialization operation of the movable body is performed. The "predetermined grace period" is the time from when the power is turned on to when the process for checking the operation state (ON/OFF) of the setting change switch 810 is performed. For example, the period during which the recovery screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on may be set within the predetermined grace period, so that the setting change mode can be entered by turning the setting key switch 810 ON while the recovery screen is displayed. In that case, it is preferable that the setting change mode is not entered even if the setting key switch 810 is turned ON when the predetermined grace period ends, triggered by the switching from the recovery screen to the normal screen. In addition, it is preferable to set the end of the predetermined grace period before the start of the initialization operation of the movable body, and this can prevent a malfunction in which the setting change mode is entered after the initialization operation is started (a situation in which the initialization operation of the movable body is performed while the setting change mode is being executed).

[Left-handed hit notification]
Next, the left hit notification effect will be described. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a left hit game in which the player advances the game by aiming at the left area PA1, and a right hit game in which the player advances the game by aiming at the right area PA2 can be executed according to the currently executed game state. At this time, if the currently executed game state is a low base state (excluding the special game state), that is, if the game state is a game state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game (a game state in which left hitting is advantageous), the left hit notification effect can be executed. This left hit notification effect is an effect that displays a left hit notification image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left area PA1. Note that, in this embodiment, if the currently executed game state is a high base state, that is, if the game state is a game state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game (a game state in which right hitting is advantageous), the right hit notification effect can be executed. In addition, even during execution of the special game state, the right hit notification effect can be executed. This right-hit notification effect is an effect that displays a right-hit notification image that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the right-side area PA2.

Figure 111 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display of a left-hit notification image. In the illustrated example, the display screen transitions in the following order: (A) immediately before the end of the high base state (final fluctuation display of the high base state) → (B) start of the low base state (while the pattern is stopped after the end of the final fluctuation display of the high base state and before the start of the first rotation fluctuation display of the low base state) → (C) first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state. As shown in (C) in this figure, the left-hit notification image (left-hit notification display) is composed of a combination image of, for example, a text image (text display) saying "Please hit left" and a left-pointing arrow image (arrow display). During the execution of this left-hit notification performance, in addition to the display of the left-hit notification image, a left-hit notification sound (for example, a voice saying "Please hit left") may be output from the speaker to encourage the player to hit left.

In this embodiment, when the game state is a low base state (low base state during a non-jackpot), the display of the left hit notification image and the display of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern during variable display, decorative pattern during temporary stop display, decorative pattern during fixed stop display) can be overlapped during the execution of the left hit notification performance. When the display of the left hit notification image and the display of the decorative pattern are overlapped, in order to increase the effectiveness of the left hit notification for the player (to ensure the visibility of the left hit notification image), the priority (layer priority) of the display of the left hit notification image is set to a higher priority (higher priority) than the priority (layer priority) of the display of the decorative pattern. Note that "overlapping display" means that the display of one image and the display of the other image are overlapped, and when the display priority of the other image is higher than the display of the one image, at least a part of the display of the one image is invisible or the visibility is reduced due to the presence of the display of the other image, and when the display priority of the other image is lower than the display of the one image, at least a part of the display of the other image is invisible or the visibility is reduced due to the presence of the display of the one image. In addition, to ensure visibility of the decorative pattern, the left-hit notification image may be formed as a semi-transparent image.

Meanwhile, while this left-hit notification performance is being executed, the display of the left-hit notification image, the display of the small pattern, the reserved image and the changing image, and the display of the number of reserved balls in operation for each special pattern are configured not to overlap. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern is obstructed by the left-hit notification image, the visibility of the small pattern, the reserved image, the changing image, and the display of the number of reserved balls in operation for each special pattern is ensured, so the player can properly recognize the current game situation (changing display, stopped display, number of reserved balls in operation, etc.).

When the game machine is viewed from the front, the display area of the left hit notification image at least partially overlaps with the operation area (operation range) of the initialization operation of the first movable role 651, but during the execution of the initialization operation of the first movable role 651, the execution of the left hit notification effect (display of the left hit notification image) is restricted (the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized). For example, when the final variable display in the high base state ends and the remaining operation reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed, the variable display of the first rotation in the low base state begins, and the execution of the left hit notification effect (display of the left hit notification image) begins, and when the power is restored and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed, the execution of the left hit notification effect (display of the left hit notification image) is interrupted. Or, during a waiting state (non-changing state) where no change display is being performed and there are neither a first special pattern activation reserved ball nor a second special pattern activation reserved ball, a game ball enters the first starting hole 51, starting the change display of the first special pattern, and a power outage occurs while the left-hit notification effect is being executed (display of a left-hit notification image), and when the power is restored and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed, the execution of the left-hit notification effect (display of a left-hit notification image) is interrupted. However, if the execution timing of the left-hit notification effect (execution timing of the change display for the first rotation in the low base state) arrives during the execution of the initialization operation of the first movable role 651, the left-hit notification effect (display of a left-hit notification image) may be configured to be executed. For example, if a power outage occurs during the final display of fluctuations in the high base state, and while the power is restored and the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the final display of fluctuations in the high base state ends and the remaining activated reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed, starting the display of fluctuations for the first rotation in the low base state, the execution of the left-hit notification performance (display of a left-hit notification image) may be performed simultaneously with the initialization operation of the movable body.

Next, the timing of execution of the left-hand hit notification effect will be described. FIG. 112 is a time chart for explaining the timing of execution of the left-hand hit notification effect. In the following description, the case where the game state transitions from a high base state to a low base state includes the case where the game state transitions from a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) to a normal game state (low probability low base state) and the case where the game state transitions from a probability-changing game state (high probability high base state) to a normal game state (low probability low base state). In addition, the case where the game state transitions from a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) or a probability-changing game state (high probability high base state) to a normal game state (low probability low base state) is the case where the number of variable displays (the total number of variable displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern) in the time-saving game state (low probability high base state) or the probability-changing game state (high probability high base state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). That is, when the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes in the display reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) in the time-saving game state (low probability, high base state) or the guaranteed bonus game state (high probability, high base state), the game state ends and transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state).

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) is exemplified as a game state in which right-hand play is performed. However, in addition to the high base state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), other game states in which right-hand play is performed include a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) is being performed. The configuration of the left-hand hit notification performance of this embodiment can also be applied to the case where a special game state is transitioned to a normal game state. However, since this special game state belongs to a low base state, when transitioning from a special game state to a normal game state, it is different from the transition from a high base state to a low base state in that a transition is made from a low base state during a jackpot to a low base state during a non-jackpot (a transition between low base states).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, when a game state (high base state) in which the main focus of the game is the changing display of the second special pattern is transitioned to a game state (low base state) in which the main focus of the game is the changing display of the first special pattern, the left-hit notification display is configured to be able to be executed from the start of the changing display of the first spin in this low base state. The first rotation of the low base state is represented as follows: (a) if only the first special symbol activation ball remains at the end of the high base state before the transition, the first special symbol activation ball (the first special symbol activation ball) is consumed, resulting in a "first special symbol activation display"; (b) if only the second special symbol activation ball remains at the end of the high base state before the transition, the second special symbol activation ball (the first special symbol activation ball) is consumed, resulting in a "second special symbol activation display"; (c) if both the first special symbol activation ball and the second special symbol activation ball remain at the end of the high base state before the transition, the second special symbol activation ball (the first special symbol activation ball) is consumed under the special symbol 2 priority consumption. The illustrated example in FIG. 112 illustrates a case where only the first special symbol activation ball remains at the end of the high base state. On the other hand, if there are no activated reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern remaining at the end of the high base state before the transition (if the number of activated reserved balls for both is 0), the left-hit notification performance will be executed for a predetermined time from the start of the high base state (in other words, the left-hit notification performance will start in the change waiting state (non-change state) where there are 0 activated reserved balls for each special pattern).

This left-hit notification effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first rotation change display (or the start of the low base state). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 seconds, which is set to a shorter time than the change time of the non-reach type (change time of the shortened change, described below = 7 seconds, and change time of the normal change, = 12 seconds). Here, when the game state is in the low base state, in the lottery process for the change pattern of the special symbol, the change pattern with a relatively short change time of the special symbol (change pattern of the shortened change, change pattern of the normal change) is set to be more likely to be selected than the change pattern with a relatively long change time of the special symbol (change pattern of the N reach, change pattern of the SP reach) (for example, as in the first embodiment described above, the selection rate of the change pattern of the shortened change and the normal change is set to a high probability of 80%), and the left-hit notification effect is configured to be able to be executed over multiple change displays (the possibility that the left-hit notification effect will be executed over multiple change displays is extremely high).

In this embodiment, even if the first rotation of the low base state is a specific variable display, the left-hit notification effect is not executed in the second rotation and subsequent rotations of the variable display. In other words, if the first rotation of the low base state is a specific variable display, the left-hit notification effect is executed until the middle of the first rotation of the variable display (from the start of the variable display to the arrival of the above-mentioned predetermined time), but is not executed over multiple variable displays. This specific variable display is a variable display in which the variable time of the special pattern is set to a relatively long time, that is, a variable display in which the variable time of the special pattern is set to be longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and examples of such a variable display include an ultra-long variable display and an SP reach variable display. In addition, the specific variable display can also include a jackpot variable display. In other words, if the first rotation of the low base state is a jackpot variable display, the game will transition to a jackpot game after the first rotation of the variable display ends, and no variable display will occur in the second rotation and subsequent rotations that are consecutive to the first rotation in the currently executed low base state. In addition, after the jackpot variable display ends, the game transitions to a jackpot game that is mainly played by hitting to the right, and after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a high base state, and the variable display for the first spin after the jackpot game ends may also be in a situation where a right-hit is required (because there is little need to perform a left-hit notification performance in the first place).

Next, a case where a power failure occurs during the execution of the left-hand hit notification effect will be described. FIG. 113 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during the execution of the left-hand hit notification effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when the game state is in a low base state, the left-hand hit notification image can be displayed from the start of the variable display of the first rotation, but if a power failure occurs during the execution of the variable display of the first rotation, the left-hand hit notification effect is not resumed in the variable display performed after the power failure is restored (the left-hand hit notification image is not displayed). In other words, even if the variable display of the first rotation (the variable display of the first rotation interrupted by the power failure) is resumed after the power failure is restored, the left-hand hit notification effect is not resumed in the variable display of the resumed first rotation, and even if the variable display of the second rotation or later is performed, the left-hand hit notification effect is not executed. The reason for this is that after the power is restored after a power outage, it is appropriate to treat the state as being in a low base state from the beginning, without displaying any effect indicating that the state has transitioned from a high base state to a low base state (such as a ``normal mode has begun'' display) (for example, if the hall operators turn off the power at closing time and then restore the power at the opening of the next business day, there is no need to take into account the gaming state immediately before the power outage).

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during the final display of the high base state, and the display of the final display resumes after the power outage is restored, resulting in a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the left-hit notification effect can be executed from the start of the first rotation of the display of the low base state (the left-hit notification effect can be executed over multiple display cycles). This is because, if a power outage occurs during the final display of the high base state and the power outage is restored, it is certain that the high base state is still continuing, so in the final display of the resumed high base state, the display of the right-hit notification image is resumed to inform the player of information regarding the appropriate launch position, and then, by informing the player that the high base state has ended and the appropriate launch position has been switched, the game progress (change in situation) can be appropriately notified even if a power outage occurs.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the final fluctuation display in the high base state, and the final fluctuation display resumes after the power outage is restored, resulting in a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the left-hit notification display is not executed during the execution of the first rotation fluctuation display in this low base state, but the left-hit notification display may be executed at the start of the fluctuation display for a specified rotation in this low base state (e.g., the second rotation fluctuation display) or when a specific time has elapsed since the transition to this low base state. Furthermore, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the final display of the high base state, the possibility of executing the left-hit notification in the low base state or the execution timing may be changed according to the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation (the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation that has not yet been executed at the time of the power failure). For example, when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) or more, the left-hit notification effect may be executed from the first rotation of the fluctuation display in the low base state, and when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is less than the specified time, the left-hit notification effect may not be executed from the first rotation of the fluctuation display in the low base state, and the left-hit notification effect may be executed from the second rotation of the fluctuation display. Also, for example, when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) or more, the left-hit notification effect may be executed from the first rotation of the fluctuation display in the low base state, and when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is less than the specified time, the left-hit notification effect may not be executed while staying in the low base state. In addition, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the final variable display in the high base state, the left-hit notification effect may be configured not to be executed while remaining in the low base state, even if the high base state transitions to a low base state.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when the game state transitions from a high base state to a low base state, if there are still any activated reserved balls of the second special pattern stored at the end of the high base state remaining, the left-hit notification effect may be made executable on the condition that all activated reserved balls of the second special pattern have been consumed after the transition to the low base state.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when the high base state is changed to the low base state, the left hit notification effect may be executed for a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of each variable display in a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) counting from the start of this low base state. In other words, the left hit notification effect may be executed for only the first few rotations of the variable display in the low base state, for a few seconds from the start of the variable display. With this configuration, the left hit notification effect can be executed not in units of time but in units of the number of variable displays, making it possible to execute a more effective notification effect for the player.

<<Prediction after the electric support ends>>
Next, the look-ahead performance after transitioning from the high base state to the low base state will be described. FIG. 114 is a time chart for explaining the look-ahead performance after transitioning to the low base state. In the following description, the activation reserved ball that triggers the execution of the look-ahead performance is also referred to as the "target activation reserved ball", and the activation reserved ball consumed before the target activation reserved ball is also referred to as the "target activation reserved ball". In addition, the reserved image corresponding to the target activation reserved ball is also referred to as the "target reserved image", and the reserved image corresponding to the target activation reserved ball is also referred to as the "target reserved image". In addition, the changing image displayed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also referred to as the "target changing image", and the changing image displayed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also referred to as the "target changing image". In addition, the changing display executed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also referred to as the "target changing display", and the changing display executed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also referred to as the "target changing display".

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the game state in the currently executing variable display is a low base state (when the variable display of the first special pattern is the game state that is the main focus of the game), a look-ahead performance can be executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, but a look-ahead performance is not executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern. On the other hand, when the game state in the currently executing variable display is a high base state (when the variable display of the second special pattern is the game state that is the main focus of the game), a look-ahead performance can be executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern, but a look-ahead performance is not executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, when the game state transitions from the high base state to the low base state, if an activated ball of the first special pattern is stored at the start of the variable display of the first rotation in this low base state (i.e., at the start of the left-hand hit notification performance), the reserved change performance, which is at least a specific pre-reading performance, is not executed until all the activated balls of the first special pattern are consumed (referred to as the "specific period"). When an activated ball of the first special pattern is stored at the start of the variable display of the first rotation in this low base state (at the start of the left-hand hit notification performance), typically, the activated ball of the first special pattern remains at the end of the high base state before the transition. And even after the transition to the low base state, the specific pre-reading performance is not executed for the period from the high base state until all the activated balls of the first special pattern remaining are consumed (specific period). In addition, FIG. 114 shows an example in which three first special pattern activation reserved balls remain at the start of the low base state (start of the left hit notification performance), and the specific pre-reading performance will not be executed until all three first special pattern activation reserved balls are consumed (specific period). In addition, if the first special pattern activation reserved ball and the second special pattern activation reserved ball are both stored at the end of the high base state before the transition, the specific period corresponds to the period until all the second special pattern activation reserved balls are consumed under the above-mentioned special pattern 2 priority consumption, and all the first special pattern activation reserved balls are consumed. In addition, the specific period may be the period until all the first special pattern activation reserved balls remaining from the high base state are consumed and all the variable displays executed as a result of the consumption are terminated (stopped display).

On the other hand, after the specific period of the low base state ends (after all remaining activation reserved balls of the first special pattern at the start of the left-hand hit notification performance are consumed), it becomes possible to execute a specific look-ahead performance with the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern (i.e., the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern newly generated during the execution of this low base state) as the target activation reserved ball. The look-ahead judgment for determining whether or not to execute this specific look-ahead performance is performed on the performance control board 200 side based on the advance judgment result from the main control board 100 side, as described above.

The reason why a specific pre-reading effect is not executed during a specific period in a low base state is as follows. First, when the variable display of the first rotation of the low base state starts, the case where the activation pending ball of the first special symbol is stored includes, for example, (A) the case where the activation pending ball of the first special symbol that occurred during the execution of the high base state in which the player was present before the transition to the low base state was not consumed by the end of this high base state, and (B) the case where the player was present in the low base state (previous low base state) before the transition to the high base state, and the activation pending ball of the first special symbol that occurred during the execution of this low base state (previous low base state) was not consumed thereafter and transitioned to the high base state, and was not consumed by the end of this high base state.

In the former case (A), even if an activated ball of the first special pattern is generated during the execution of the high base state (a game state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game), the activated ball of the first special pattern is not subject to pre-judgment, and a pre-judgment command corresponding to the activated ball of the first special pattern is not sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. Therefore, there is no pre-judgment result for the activated ball of the first special pattern in the first place, and the pre-reading performance cannot be executed with the activated ball of the first special pattern as the target activated ball. In addition, when the high base state ends and the low base state begins, there is no pre-judgment for the activated ball of the first special pattern obtained during the execution of the high base state after the low base state begins (to prevent an increase in the processing load).

In the latter case (B), even if an activated ball with the first special pattern was obtained in the previous low base state, when the previous low base state is transitioned to a high base state, all pre-determination results for the activated ball with the first special pattern remaining from the previous low base state are cleared, so even if the current low base state is subsequently transitioned to, there will be no pre-determination results for the activated ball with the first special pattern, and the pre-reading performance cannot be executed with the activated ball with the first special pattern as the target activated ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a new first special symbol activation reserved ball is generated by a game ball entering the first starting hole 51 during a specific period immediately after the transition to the low base state, a pre-determination result is obtained for this new first special symbol activation reserved ball, but during the specific period, the execution of a specific pre-reading performance based on this pre-determination result (pre-determination result of the new first special symbol activation reserved ball) is also restricted. The reason for this is that in both the former (A) and the latter (B) cases, pre-determination is not performed for the first special symbol activation reserved ball (also referred to as "first special symbol remaining reserved") that remains when the high base state ends and the low base state begins (remains at the end of the high base state), so even if the change display executed by the first special symbol remaining reserved being consumed is a jackpot change or a change that develops into an SP reach, it cannot be notified in advance as a specific pre-reading performance. If the display is a jackpot fluctuation or a fluctuation that develops into an SP reach, even if a specific pre-reading performance is executed targeting the new activated reserved ball of the first special pattern created by the game ball entering the first starting hole 51 during the specific period immediately after the transition to the low base state, a jackpot or SP reach occurs in the fluctuation display before the activated reserved ball of the new first special pattern is consumed (the fluctuation display executed when the remaining reserved first special patterns are consumed), so it is not possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading performance (it is unclear which activated reserved ball is the target activated reserved ball). In addition, the lottery for determining whether or not an action effect (hold change suggestion effect) described below can be executed is executed on the condition that the pre-determination results of the activated pending balls in front of the target are all non-reach type (shortened change or normal change) change patterns. However, if the first special pattern remaining hold is an activated pending ball in front of the target, there are no pre-determination results of those activated pending balls, so the conditions for executing the hold change suggestion effect are not met (it is unclear whether the pre-determination results of the activated pending balls in front of the target are all non-reach type (shortened change or normal change) change patterns), and the action effect (hold change suggestion effect) cannot be executed.

As a variation of this embodiment, even during a specific period immediately after transitioning to a low base state, if a new activated reserved ball of the first special pattern is generated during this specific period, a specific look-ahead performance may be executed with the new activated reserved ball of the first special pattern as the target activated reserved ball during this specific period. Also, in this embodiment, the execution of a specific look-ahead performance (reserved change performance) among multiple types of look-ahead performances is prohibited, but this is not limited to the configuration, and the execution of all look-ahead performances may be prohibited.

Next, we will explain the content of the specific look-ahead effect mentioned above. This specific look-ahead effect includes a hold change effect (hold change look-ahead effect) that changes the display mode of the hold image or the changing image, and a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that this hold change effect (hold change look-ahead effect) will be executed.

[Hold change effect]
First, the reserved change performance of this embodiment will be described. This reserved change performance is a pre-reading performance that suggests or notifies the possibility of a jackpot occurring in the change display (target change display) when the target reserved ball is consumed by changing the display mode of the reserved image or the changing image corresponding to the operating reserved ball (target operating reserved ball) that is the subject of the pre-reading lottery to a different display mode. In this embodiment, the reserved change performance includes a reserved image change performance that changes the reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area 710, and a changing image change performance that changes the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720. In the following, the two are simply called reserved change performance without distinguishing between them, but the reserved change performance that changes the reserved image may be called reserved image change performance as described above, and the reserved change performance that changes the changing image may be called changing image change performance as described above. The pending image and the changing image are display contents that suggest that a change is scheduled or is currently occurring, so both may be collectively referred to as the "change suggestion display," the pending image may be referred to as the "change suggestion display before the change start condition is satisfied," and the changing image may be referred to as the "change suggestion display after the change start condition is satisfied." In addition, both the pending image change effect and the changing image change effect may be collectively referred to as the "change suggestion effect."

FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 of this embodiment. As described above, the reserved image display area 710 for displaying reserved images corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special pattern is provided in the lower area of the display screen of the performance display device 70. In the reserved image display area 710, a reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special pattern that is the main subject of the game in the currently executed game state among the activated reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed. That is, when the currently executed game state is a low base state (normal game state), the variable display of the first special pattern is the main subject of the game, so that the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern is displayed (the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is not displayed). On the other hand, when the currently executed game state is a high base state (time-saving game state or probability change game state), the variable display of the second special symbol is the main focus of the game, so the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed (the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the first special symbol is not displayed). However, whether in a low base state or a high base state, the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol can be displayed simultaneously in the reserved number display area 740. Note that each reserved image is displayed in order according to the occurrence order of the activated reserved balls of the special symbols (ball entry order).

The reserved image display area 710 has four individual reserved image display areas 711-714 corresponding to the maximum number of activated reserved balls for each special pattern. Individual reserved image display area 711 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 1 (first reserved ball), individual reserved image display area 712 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 2 (second reserved ball), individual reserved image display area 713 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 3 (third reserved ball), and individual reserved image display area 714 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 4 (fourth reserved ball). Each of the individual reserved image display areas 711-714 is configured as a display area of the same size, and each is capable of displaying one reserved image.

On the left side of the reserved image display area 710, a changing image display area 720 is provided for displaying a changing image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special pattern consumed in the changing display. In the changing image display area 720, a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the special pattern that is the main subject of the game in the currently executed game state out of the changing displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed. In other words, when the currently executed game state is a low base state (normal game state), the changing display of the first special pattern is the main subject of the game, so a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the first special pattern is displayed. On the other hand, when the currently executed game state is a low base state (time-saving game state or probability change game state), the changing display of the second special pattern is the main subject of the game, so a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the second special pattern is displayed. This changing image display area 720 is configured as a display area of a size larger than the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714. In other words, the image display size of the changing image is larger than that of the pending image.

In the reserved image display area 710, each time an activated reserved ball with a special pattern is stored, a reserved image is additionally displayed one by one in sequence starting from the individual reserved image display area 711 on the left. Also, each time an activated reserved ball with a special pattern is consumed, the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720 disappears, and the reserved images displayed in the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 move one by one to the image display area on the left. Here, the reserved images displayed in the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 are consumed in sequence from the left, and when the first reserved image displayed in the individual reserved image display area 711 (reserved image of reserve 1) is consumed, that reserved image moves to the changing image display area 720 and is displayed as the changing image corresponding to that changing display, and continues to be displayed until that changing display ends. However, after the development of a specific performance such as SP reach during the execution of the variable display, the reserved image and the changing image may be hidden, and in that case, the end of the specific performance is triggered (the background performance (background image) before the development of SP reach, as an example, the return to the background performance (background image) corresponding to the normal mode if the player is in normal mode), and the reserved image and the changing image are displayed again, and the display of the changing image is terminated as a result of the end of the variable display, while the reserved image continues to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. Also, as a modified example, the reserved image and the changing image may be continuously displayed even in a situation where a specific performance is occurring, such as after the development of SP reach, and in that case, the display of the changing image is terminated as a result of the end of the variable display, while the reserved image continues to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. As another variation, if a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development into an SP reach, the pending image may be hidden, while the changing image may continue to be displayed. In this case, the end of the specific effect is triggered (the background effect (background image) before the development into an SP reach; as an example, if in normal mode, the background effect (background image) corresponding to the normal mode is returned to), and the display of the changing image is terminated upon the end of the changing display, while the pending image may continue to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the changing display has ended.

<<Pending image/changing image>>
116(A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image and the changing image. The reserved image and the changing image of this embodiment are composed of a ball icon imitating a spherical shape such as a planet such as the earth or a ball for a ball game. In addition, a "normal display mode" and a "special display mode" are set as the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is white.

(Special display mode)
Special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is blue. Special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is green. Special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is red. Special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is rainbow.

In this embodiment, five display modes are set for the pending image and the changing image: normal display mode, special display mode 1, special display mode 2, special display mode 3, and special display mode 4. For ease of explanation, the normal display mode will be referred to as the "white icon," special display mode 1 as the "blue icon," special display mode 2 as the "green icon," special display mode 3 as the "red icon," and special display mode 4 as the "rainbow icon." In the drawings, the five display modes of "white," "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow" are represented by adding the names of the colors within the pending image or the changing image. That is, on the drawings, the word "white" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a white icon, the word "blue" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a blue icon, the word "green" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a green icon, the word "red" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a red icon, and the word "rainbow" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a rainbow icon.

Here, the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image is related to the expectation that the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), and is set so that the jackpot expectation increases by one step in the order of "white icon" < "blue icon" < "green icon" < "red icon" < "rainbow icon". In other words, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is a "jackpot", the reserved image or changing image with a display mode with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than if it is a "miss". Note that the "rainbow icon" means a premium display mode that guarantees a jackpot win. Therefore, if a reserved image with a "rainbow icon" appears or changes to a reserved image with a "rainbow" color, it is guaranteed that the changing display corresponding to that reserved image will result in a jackpot win. Note that the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image may be expressed not by the display color, but by, for example, the shape, size, pattern, or action (animation).

In addition, this embodiment is configured to be capable of executing an animation effect in which the pending image or the changing image is displayed as a dynamic image (also referred to as a "motion display," "animation display," or "loop display"). Note that the animation effect of the pending image and the changing image does not need to be composed entirely of dynamic images, and part of the animation effect may include static images (still images).

The image control board 300 stores video data for displaying the reserved image and the changing image in motion (animation display). The playback time of this video data is, for example, 0.5 seconds, and is composed of video data that records continuous motion from the first image to the last image. By repeatedly playing (loop playback) this 0.5-second video data, an animation performance is performed in which the reserved image or the changing image repeats a predetermined motion display (animation display). In other words, the period of the motion display (animation display) of the reserved image and the changing image is set to "0.5 seconds" corresponding to the playback time of the video data. In this embodiment, the movement of the reserved image between each image display area as the reserved image is consumed is called "shift display", and the motion (including deformation) of the reserved image or the changing image in each image display area is called "motion display", "animation display", or "loop display". However, the reserved image or the changing image may be displayed in motion beyond each image display area, and adjacent reserved images, or the reserved image and the changing image may be displayed in motion in a display mode in which at least a part of them are overlapped one on the other.

Figure 116 (B) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image. This animation display is a performance in which the dynamic display of the pending image and the changing image is repeated for one cycle from when the pending image and the changing image start to when they finish a predetermined motion (until a series of predetermined motions from the beginning to the end is completed). In this embodiment, the animation display of the pending image and the changing image is configured as a rotation display in which the pending image and the changing image rotate around a vertical axis. As described above, the period of the motion display (i.e. the playback time of the video data) is set to "0.5 seconds," and the rotation display (360-degree rotation display) is repeated for one cycle of "0.5 seconds."

The reserved image and the changing image are set with a reference motion posture (first image of the video data) as a starting point for starting the motion display (animation display). When the decorative pattern starts to change, the motion display starts with this reference motion posture as a starting point, and the motion display is repeated (looped) from the reference motion posture every time a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) is reached. On the other hand, the motion display of the reserved image and the changing image is forcibly ended with the end of the decorative pattern change. Then, with the start of the next decorative pattern change, the reserved image and the changing image are switched to the reference motion posture, and the motion display starts with this reference motion posture as a starting point (looped). When a new reserved image is displayed, the motion display starts with the reference motion posture as a starting point, regardless of the motion display of the existing reserved image and the changing image. In other words, except when the existing reserved image and the changing image are set to the reference motion posture, the motion display of the new reserved image and the motion display of the existing reserved image and the changing image are not synchronized with each other, and a deviation occurs in the motion postures of each other. However, the motion display of the new reserved image and the motion display of the existing reserved image and changing image will be synchronized with each other when the next changing display is started. In this modified example, the "synchronization" of the motion display means that the timing at which the motion display of each reserved image and changing image becomes the reference motion posture is the same. In other words, assuming that the motion cycle of each reserved image and changing image is the same, each reserved image and changing image can take the same motion posture at any timing during the motion display. In addition, in this embodiment, the motion display of the reserved image and changing image is started when the decorative pattern changing display is started, and the motion display of the reserved image and changing image is ended (forced stop) when the decorative pattern changing display is ended, but this is not limited to this configuration, and the motion display of the reserved image and changing image may be continuously executed regardless of the start and end of the decorative pattern changing display. In other words, the display of the reserved image and the image being changed may be continued without being terminated (forced to stop) when the display of the decorative pattern is terminated, so that the display of the reserved image and the image being changed is connected continuously (seamlessly) without interruption between the display of the decorative pattern changes. In that case, when a new reserved image is displayed due to a start winning, it is preferable that the display of the new reserved image be started in a form synchronized with the display of the existing reserved image and the image being changed. In addition, when the display of the reserved image and the image being changed is continued regardless of the start and end of the display of the decorative pattern changes, it is preferable to continue the display of the reserved image even when the reserved image shifts to the left as the reserved image is consumed. However, the display of the reserved image may be stopped only while the reserved image shifts to the left as the reserved image is consumed, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed after the reserved image shifts.

<<Hold change indication performance>>
Next, the hold change suggestion effect (also referred to as "change suggestion effect") will be described. In this embodiment, before the execution of the hold change effect is started, a hold change suggestion effect may be executed to suggest that the hold change effect will be executed. This hold change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the hold change effect will be executed, that is, that the display mode of the hold image will change. The hold change suggestion effect of this embodiment is configured as an action effect in which a specific character throws a ball image (pseudo hold image) that resembles a ball toward the target hold image, and the ball image hits the target hold image, suggesting that the display mode of the target hold image will change.

In this embodiment, there are cases where the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) is performed before the hold change effect is executed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes), and cases where the hold change effect is executed without the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) being performed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes). In the following, this hold change suggestion effect is also referred to as an "action effect." In addition, in this embodiment, the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) is performed before the hold change effect is executed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes) compared to cases where the hold change effect is executed without the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) being performed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes). It is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively higher in the change display (change display of the target) performed by the target's hold image being consumed.

Next, we will explain examples of the hold change effect and the hold change suggestion effect. Here, Figure 117 is a schematic diagram showing examples of the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the change display starts. In the illustrated example, the changing icon is a white icon, and the two pending icons are also white icons.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable display, a character appears holding a round ball (a ball that resembles a red icon), and an action presentation (a presentation suggesting a change in reservation) is executed in which the character throws the ball (a ball that resembles a red icon) toward the first reserved image (the earliest reserved image).

As shown in FIG. 117(C), when the ball (ball simulating a red icon) thrown by the character hits the first reserved image (the earliest reserved image), a reserved change effect is executed in which the display mode of this first reserved image changes from a white icon to a red icon. In other words, in the action effect (reserved change suggestion effect) of this embodiment, when the ball (red icon) held by the character is displayed, it is suggested that the display mode of one of the reserved images will change from a white icon (normal display mode) to a red icon (special display mode 3).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the currently executed game state is a low base state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the fluctuation time when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss) is configured to vary depending on the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol. Here, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 1 in FIG. However, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the shortened fluctuation (fluctuation pattern PH1-1) is set to "7 seconds", and the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern PH1-2) is set to "12 seconds". At this time, in this embodiment, when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is three, the selection rate of the shortened fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (7 seconds) is relatively high, and when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is two, the selection rate of the normal fluctuation pattern PH1-2 (12 seconds) is relatively high. Therefore, in the following description, when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern is three, a change display of "7 seconds" (this change display will be referred to as "change display A") is executed as the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern, and when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern is two, a change display of "12 seconds" (this change display will be referred to as "change display B") is executed as the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern. In addition, if the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is three, the normal fluctuation pattern PH1-2 (12 seconds) is not selected, and if the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is two, the shortened fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (7 seconds) is not selected.

Here, FIG. 118 is a time chart when the aforementioned change displays A and B are executed as the change display of the first special pattern. In the following explanation, for convenience, the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) and the hold change effect may be collectively referred to as the "hold-related effect". In other words, the series of effects from the start of the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) to the end of the hold change effect is also referred to as the "hold-related effect". In the following explanation, the action display of one cycle of the hold image and the changing image (action display per cycle) is also referred to as the "unit action display".

As shown in FIG. 118, when the variable display A is executed as the variable display of the first special pattern, the unit action display of the reserved image and the variable image is repeated 14 times (1 cycle x 14 times) between the start and end of the variable display A (before the next variable display is started). In other words, the number of unit action displays (loop number) of the reserved image and the variable image performed during the execution of the variable display A is 14 times. On the other hand, when the variable display B is executed as the variable display of the first special pattern, the unit action display of the reserved image and the variable image is repeated 24 times (1 cycle x 24 times) between the start and end of the variable display B (before the next variable display is started). In other words, the number of unit action displays (loop number) of the reserved image and the variable image performed during the execution of the variable display B is 24 times. Thus, in this embodiment, when the game state is a low base state, even if the variable display of the first special pattern is either variable display A or B, it is possible to execute the unit action display of the reserved image and the variable image multiple times (1 cycle x multiple times) during the execution of the variable display. In other words, even if the shortest change time (change time of change display A), "7 seconds," is selected as the change time of the first special symbol, the unit action display of the pending image and the changing image is executed multiple times while the change display is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a hold change performance is executed during the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is variable display A or variable display B, a predetermined hold related performance (hold change suggestion performance and hold change performance) can be executed in the variable display. Here, the execution time of the predetermined hold related performance (the execution time from the start of the predetermined hold change suggestion performance to the end of the hold change performance) is always set to a constant execution time TB (TB = 4 seconds) regardless of the variable time when these performances are executed. Here, a specific hold related performance different from the predetermined hold related performance can also be executed, but the execution time may be 8 seconds, and it is supplemented that the specific hold related performance is not executed in the variable display A's variable time of 7 seconds (because it cannot be executed within one variable), but is executed in the variable display B's variable time of 12 seconds. In this embodiment, the execution time of the hold change effect overlaps with a part of the execution time of the hold change suggestion effect, the start of the hold change suggestion effect is earlier than the start of the hold change effect, and the end of the hold change suggestion effect and the end of the hold change effect are set to be substantially the same time (the end of the hold change effect may be set to be later than the end of the hold change suggestion effect). In addition, the execution start timing and execution end timing of the predetermined hold related effect (hold change effect and hold change effect) are always set based on the stop of the corresponding change display, without depending on the change time during which the predetermined hold related effect is executed, the execution end timing of the predetermined hold related effect is a predetermined time TC (TC = 1 second) before the end of the corresponding change display, and the execution start timing of the predetermined hold related effect is set to the sum of the execution time TB and the predetermined time TC (TB + TC = 5 seconds) before the end of the corresponding change display. Therefore, regardless of the length of the change time of the change display, the time from the end of the predetermined hold-related performance to the end of the change display is always constant, but the time from the start of the change display to the start of the predetermined hold-related performance can vary depending on the length of the change display. In other words, the shorter the change time of the change display, the earlier the execution timing of the predetermined hold-related performance, and the longer the change time of the change display, the later the execution timing of the predetermined hold-related performance. Specifically, when the change display of the first special pattern is the change display A, the predetermined hold-related performance is executed after the first time TA1 (TA1 = 2 seconds) from the start of the change display A, and when the change display of the first special pattern is the change display B, the predetermined hold-related performance is executed after the second time TA2 (TA2 = 7 seconds) from the start of the change display B. At this time, during the execution of either the change display A or the change display B, the unit action display (one cycle of animation display) of the reserved image and the changing image is executed multiple times (one cycle x multiple times) before and after the predetermined hold-related performance (hold change suggestion performance and hold change performance). Specifically, for the change display A, within the first time TA1 (2 seconds) that is the time from the start of this change display A to the start of the predetermined hold-related performance, the unit action display of the reserved image and the changing image is executed four times (0.5 seconds x 4 times), and within the predetermined time TC (1 second) that is the time from the end of the predetermined hold-related performance to the end of the change display A, the unit action display of the reserved image and the changing image is executed twice (0.5 seconds x 2 times). In addition, with regard to the changing display B, within the second time TA2 (7 seconds), which is the time from when the changing display B starts to when a specified hold-related performance starts, the unit action display of the pending image and the changing image is performed 14 times (0.5 seconds x 14 times), and within the specified time TC (1 second), which is the time from when the specified hold-related performance ends to when the changing display B ends, the unit action display of the pending image and the changing image is performed two times (0.5 seconds x 2 times).

In this embodiment, regardless of whether change display A or B is executed, which has a different change time depending on the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, the reserve change suggestion effect and the reserve change effect can be completed reliably within that change time, and by performing one or more cycles of motion displays (animation displays) of the reserved image and the changing image before and after the reserve-related effect, the player can easily recognize the motion displays of the reserved image and the changing image, making it possible to further enhance the presentation effect of these pre-reading effects (reserve change effect, reserve change suggestion effect, animation effect).

Also, in this embodiment, the pending change suggestion performance, which is performed on the pending image of the target, can be executed when the variable display in front of the target starts, but is not executed when the activation pending ball of this target is generated. In other words, if the activation pending ball of the target is already stored when the variable display starts, the pending change suggestion performance can be executed on the pending image of the target during the execution of the variable display (variable display in front of the target). On the other hand, if a new activation pending ball (activation pending ball of the target) is generated during the execution of the variable display, the new reserved image (
The reserved image of the target) is not subjected to the reserved change suggestion performance. Therefore, for example, when the variable display B is being executed as the variable display of the first special pattern, and the remaining time of this currently executed variable display B is 7 seconds or more (that is, when the remaining time is the same as the variable display time of the variable display A that can execute a predetermined reserved related performance), even if a new first special pattern activation reserved ball (target activation reserved ball) is generated, it is possible to execute a predetermined reserved related performance on the reserved image of the target until the variable display B ends, but the reserved change suggestion performance is not executed on this newly generated reserved image of the target. That is, when a new activation pending ball (target activation pending ball) is generated during the execution of the variable display B, and a pending change performance (so-called winning pending change performance) is scheduled to be performed for this new activation pending ball (target activation pending ball) during the execution of the variable display B, even if there is a remaining time (remaining variable display time) to execute a pending change suggestion performance when this new activation pending ball occurs, the pending change suggestion performance for the target's reserved image is not executed within this remaining variable display time, and only a pending change performance (winning pending change performance) that suddenly displays the target's reserved image in a special display mode (for example, blue icon, green icon, red icon, rainbow icon, etc.) can be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the pending change suggestion performance (and pending change performance) can be executed for the target's reserved image during the execution of the next variable display, triggered by the end of the variable display B and the start of the next variable display.

<Relationship between hold change indication effect and button effect>
In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to execute the action performance (reserved change suggestion performance) is executed on the condition that all the pre-determination results of the operating reserved ball in front of the target are non-reach type (shortened change or normal change) change patterns. In addition, in the lottery for whether or not to execute the action performance (reserved change suggestion performance), if the pre-determination result of the target's operating reserved ball is a SP reach change pattern, that is, the higher the jackpot expectation of the target's operating reserved ball (target change display) is, the easier it is to determine the execution of the action performance. In addition, if the target change display is a SP reach change display, it is easier to execute the button performance (for example, a button performance performed as a notice performance at the time of winning or losing) during the change display than if the target change display is a non-reach type change display. Therefore, in this embodiment, when comparing the change display before the target and the change display of the target, the change display performed when an action effect (pending change suggestion effect) is not performed on the pending image of the target (change display before the target = non-reach type change display) is configured so that the probability of a button effect being executed during that change display is relatively higher than the change display when an action effect (pending change suggestion effect) is performed on the pending image of the target (change display before the target = non-reach type change display).

(Variation 1 of Hold-Related Performance)
In this embodiment, the time required for one period of the operation display of the reserved image and the changing image (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set to the time required for one period (blinking period) of the blinking display of the special symbol reserved lamps 73, 74 provided on the main control display device 27 (e.g., 0.2 seconds = 0.1 seconds for lighting + 0.1 seconds for turning off).
Similarly, the time required for one period of the display of the pending image and the changing image (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set to be longer than the time required for one period (blinking period) of the blinking display of the pending number auxiliary display units 803 and 804 provided on the sub-control display device 28 (e.g., 0.2 seconds = 0.1 seconds on + 0.1 seconds off).

(Variation 2 of Hold-Related Effects)
In this embodiment, the display time from when the display of the changing image begins to when it is hidden may be configured so that the display time of the changing image displayed by shifting a pending image in a special display mode is longer than the display time of the changing image displayed by shifting a pending image in a normal display mode.

(Variation 3 of Hold-Related Effects)
In this embodiment, a look-ahead stage (read-ahead only stage background) is provided that is displayed over multiple variable displays in a situation where the target activation reserved ball is stored, and when this look-ahead stage (read-ahead only stage background) is displayed, the reserved change suggestion effect (action effect) may be configured to be executed more easily than when a non-look-ahead stage (normal stage background) such as stage A or stage B is displayed. Also, when a probability change stage background is displayed when the game state is in a high probability high base state, the reserved change suggestion effect (action effect) may be configured to be executed more easily than when a normal stage background is displayed when the game state is in a low probability low base state.

(Variation 4 of Hold-Related Effects)
In this embodiment, the button vibration effect (e.g., the first button vibration effect α, the first button vibration effect β, the second button vibration effect, the third button vibration effect, etc.) may be more easily executed in the variable display in which the image during change is displayed by shifting the reserved image in the special display mode than in the variable display in which the image during change is displayed by shifting the reserved image in the normal display mode. Also, the button vibration effect may be more easily executed in the variable display in which the image during change is displayed by shifting the reserved image in the special display mode than in the variable display in which the image during change is displayed by shifting the reserved image in the normal display mode.

<Volume adjustment during initialization>
Next, the adjustment of the volume of the speaker 11 during the initialization operation will be described. In this embodiment, the volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted after the game machine is powered on (after the power is restored from a power cut), the display of the recovery screen ends, and the display of the normal screen (standby screen) that displays decorative patterns, background images, etc. begins. After the normal screen is restored, the volume can be adjusted in both the variable standby state and the variable display state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when a player performs a predetermined operation (for example, when the left and right keys of the cross key 16 are operated simultaneously), volume adjustment images showing multiple volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 on the screen. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, when the player operates the left or right key, it becomes possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as background music and sound effects output from the speaker 11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, operating the right key increases the volume level, and operating the left key decreases the volume level. Then, when the performance button 15 is operated as a volume confirmation operation, or when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the volume adjustment image was displayed without a volume adjustment operation, the display of the volume adjustment image ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the initialization operation of the movable body is started when the recovery screen switches to the normal screen after the gaming machine is powered on. Therefore, if a volume adjustment image is displayed after the normal screen is restored, the display of this volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body may be executed at the same time. Below, we will explain a case where the display of the volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are executed at the same time after the power is restored from a power outage.

Fig. 119 is a time chart when the display of the sound adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are executed at the same time after the power is restored from a power cut. Note that Fig. 119 shows a simplified screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small patterns and reserved images are omitted) due to space limitations.

First, at time t61, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a variable standby state (non-variable state). At time t62, the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power outage. At time t63, at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine is powered on, a recovery screen is displayed on the performance display device 70. At time t64, the display screen of the performance display device 70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen (standby screen). At this time t64, an initialization operation process for the movable bodies is started, and the initialization operation of the first movable role 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable role 652 are performed in that order.

Then, at time t65, the player performs a specified operation (for example, by operating the left or right key of the cross key 16), which starts the display of the volume adjustment image. As a result, the display of the volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are performed simultaneously in parallel.

At time t66, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole 51, thereby starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, a variable display start command is sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative symbol and small symbol. Even if the variable display of the special symbol, decorative symbol, and small symbol starts at this time t66, the volume adjustment image continues to be displayed across the time before and after the start of the variable display.

Next, at time t67, a predetermined time has passed since the volume adjustment image was displayed (a predetermined time without any volume adjustment operation being performed), and the display of the volume adjustment image ends.

Then, at time t68, the initialization operation of the movable bodies is completed, that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part 651, the initialization operation of the performance button 15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part 652 are all completed.

(Variation 1 regarding volume adjustment)
In this embodiment, when a volume adjustment image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 and a reel performance is executed as a button operation trigger performance, the volume adjustment image may be configured to be continuously displayed before and after the execution of the reel performance, without the display of the volume adjustment image being interrupted by the execution of the reel performance.

(Variation 2 regarding volume adjustment)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a volume adjustment image is displayed while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed when the power is turned on and the volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume of the initialization notification sound (e.g., a sound such as "Initialization completed" or "Initialization operation in progress") indicating that the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed (or indicating that the information backed up in RAM 103 has been initialized) may be configured not to change (to always be output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume)).

<Movable props and display devices>
Next, the relationship between the predetermined operation (initialization operation, performance operation) of the movable role objects 651, 652 and the display contents of the performance display device 70 will be described. In the following Figures 120 and 121, in the "decorative pattern display" column, the state in which the decorative pattern (variable display, temporary stop display, fixed stop display) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 is "displayed", and the state in which the decorative pattern (variable display, temporary stop display, fixed stop display) is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 is "hidden". Similarly, the state in which the small pattern (variable display, fixed stop display) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 is "displayed", and the state in which the small pattern (variable display, fixed stop display) is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 is "hidden". In addition, in the "reserved image display/changing image display" column, the state in which at least one of the reserved image and the changing image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 is "displayed", and the state in which both the reserved image and the changing image are not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 is "hidden". In addition, in the "Number of reserved balls display" column, a state in which the number of activated reserved balls of each special pattern (including 0) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 (number of reserved balls display area 750) is defined as "displayed," and a state in which the number of activated reserved balls of each special pattern (including 0) is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70 (number of reserved balls display area 750) is defined as "hidden."

Figure 120 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable props after power is restored and the display content of the performance display device 70.

First, at time t71, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a change standby state (non-changing state). As described above, the "change standby state" is a non-changing state in which none of the first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol, and small symbol are displaying a change, and in which there are no pending activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. At this time t71, the movable parts are not operating and are waiting in their initial positions.

At time t72, the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power outage. Then, at time t73, the display screen of the performance display device 70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen, and the normal screen begins to be displayed. This normal screen displays the initial combination of decorative symbols ("3, 3, 1"), the initial combination of small symbols ("3, 3, 1"), and the number of activated balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (both 0). At approximately the same time as the normal screen returns, an initialization operation of the movable parts (first movable part 651, second movable part 652) begins as a check of the operation of the movable bodies.

Next, at time 74, multiple game balls (three in the illustrated example) enter the first starting hole 51 in succession, starting the display of the first special symbol, and in sync with this, the display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol starts. Also, on the screen, reserved images (two reserved images) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the first special symbol are displayed, and a changing image corresponding to the changing display (changing display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Also, on the screen, "2" is displayed as the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. In other words, in the illustrated example, even during the initialization operation of the movable role objects 651, 652, multiple start winnings occur, and the display of the decorative symbol (changing display), the display of the small symbol (changing display), the display of the reserved image and the changing image, and the display of the number of activated reserved balls of each special symbol are displayed on the screen of the performance display device 70.

Next, FIG. 121 is a time chart showing the relationship between the presentation operation (part presentation) of the first movable part 651 and the display contents of the presentation display device 70. FIG. 121 illustrates an example in which the gaming state is a low base state (normal gaming state) and the variable display is a SP reach variable display (jackpot variable display).

First, at time t81, the display of the first special symbol begins. In addition, in synchronization with this, the display of the decorative symbol and the display of the small symbol begin. In addition, on the screen, reserved images (two reserved images) corresponding to the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol are displayed, and a changing image corresponding to the change display (the change display of the first special symbol) is displayed. In addition, on the screen, "2" is displayed as the number of operation reserved balls of the current first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of operation reserved balls of the current second special symbol. In addition, even between the end of the previous change display and the start of the current change display, the stop display of the decorative symbol (confirmed stop display), the stop display of the small symbol (confirmed stop display), the display of the reserved image, and the display of the reserved ball number of the special symbol are performed, so the "decorative symbol display" column, the "small symbol display" column, the "reserved image display/changing image display" column, and the "reserved ball number display" column in the figure are each set to "display".

At time t82, after a reach is established in the variable display, it develops into an SP reach. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as retreated symbols (temporarily stopped symbols) on both ends of the screen while forming what is known as a reach eye. Also, at this time t82, the pending image and the variable image are hidden as a result of the variable display developing into an SP reach. On the other hand, even after the variable display develops into an SP reach, the display of the number of pending balls for the first special symbol and the number of pending balls for the second special symbol continues.

At time t83, button effect D is executed as a win/lose branch effect (effect at the time of win/lose branch), and the operation of effect button 15 triggers the execution of a feature effect in which the first movable feature 651 falls to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position). Although not shown, the second button vibration effect is also executed at this time as an operation trigger effect. Also, at this time 53, the start of the feature effect triggers the display of the changing decorative patterns (the temporary stop display of the left and right patterns that are displayed in a evacuated state on both ends of the screen) to be hidden.

At time t84, the ending of the role-playing effect triggers the resumption of the display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are displayed as provisionally stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (in the illustrated example, "7-7-7"). Then, at time t85, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed as definitively stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (in the illustrated example, "7-7-7").

In this way, in this embodiment, auxiliary displays (such as small symbols and reserved numbers) continue to be displayed regardless of the game situation, while main displays (such as decorative symbols and reserved images) are changed in display mode over time (including non-display) according to the operating mode (initialization operation, presentation operation) of the movable parts 651, 652, making it possible to notify the player of appropriate game information (information related to the game).

<Relationship between button vibration effect and decorative pattern display/small pattern display>
In addition, in this embodiment, as the display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to execute the display of the change of the decorative pattern, the display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the display of the fixed stop of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, as the display of the small pattern, it is possible to execute the display of the change of the small pattern and the display of the fixed stop of the small pattern, but it is not possible to execute the display of the temporary stop of the small pattern.

Here, when the three decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), it is difficult for the player to recognize the combination of the decorative patterns (a combination of three decorative patterns or a combination of two of the three decorative patterns). In contrast, the state in which the player can easily recognize the combination of the decorative patterns includes a state in which the combination of three decorative patterns is displayed as a fixed stop, and a state in which the combination of three decorative patterns or a combination of two of the three decorative patterns is displayed as a temporary stop. An example of a state in which a combination of two decorative patterns is displayed as a temporary stop is, for example, a state in which the left and right patterns of the three decorative patterns match in a reach state (reach eye). At this time, when the combination of the decorative patterns is in a state in which it is easy to recognize and the combination of three decorative patterns is displayed as a fixed stop, the button vibration effect is not executed, but when the combination of three decorative patterns or a combination of two of the three decorative patterns is displayed as a temporary stop, the button vibration effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when three small symbols are displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), it is difficult for the player to recognize the combination of the small symbols (a combination of three small symbols or a combination of two of the three small symbols). In contrast, as described above, the small symbols are not displayed in a provisionally stopped state, so the only state in which the player can easily recognize the combination of the small symbols is when the combination of the three small symbols is displayed in a fixed and stopped state. Therefore, when the player can easily recognize the combination of the small symbols, that is, when the combination of the three small symbols is displayed in a fixed and stopped state, the button vibration effect is not executed.

In this embodiment, the display of the decorative patterns and the display of the small patterns have a certain correspondence, but while the button vibration effect can be executed when the combination of decorative patterns is easily recognizable (recognizable state), the button vibration effect is not executed when the combination of small patterns is easily recognizable (recognizable state).

<Freeze effect>
Next, a modified example of the button performance of the fifth embodiment will be described. In this modified example, when it is decided to execute the button performance during a specific variable display, an operation prompting performance is executed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 15 with the start of the button performance. In this operation prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 122(a), a button image 671a imitating the performance button 15 is displayed on the performance display device 70. In this modified example, when the operation prompting performance is executed, a performance pattern is selected, and the options here include the first performance and the second performance.

(An example of the first performance)
When the button effect starts, as shown in Fig. 122(a), a button image 671a is displayed and the operation prompting effect starts. In the first effect, when the player performs an operation input on the effect button 15, as shown in Fig. 122(b), the button image 671a is erased and the operation prompting effect ends, and a speech bubble image 673 is added to an image 672 of a boy character, and a line announcement (also called a "comment announcement effect") that announces a reach or the like is executed, suggesting or informing the probability of a big win (button effect B is executed).

In other words, in the first performance, when the performance button 15 is operated during the operation prompt performance, the button image 671 disappears from the screen, and the display content of the performance display device 70 switches to one that does not include the button image 671a. Here, in this modified example, this first performance is the basic normal switching performance.

Although not shown in the figures, the display modes of the decorative patterns during the first performance include a mode in which the images of all decorative patterns changing are displayed as semi-transparent images superimposed on the background, a mode in which at least one of the decorative patterns is displayed as a semi-transparent image changing, or a mode in which none of the decorative patterns are visible, for example, by being superimposed on the background as a transparent image.

(An example of the second performance)
In contrast to the first effect, the second effect is a special switching effect, and the second effect has a first period in which timing starts with the start of the operation prompting effect, a second period in which the effect mode specific to the second effect is executed, and a third period following the second period. In the following, various effect modes of the second effect will be described with examples.

In the second performance, as the operation promotion performance starts, a button image 671a is displayed as shown in FIG. 123(a). In this modified example, the button image 671a displayed here is the same as the image used in the first performance. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has passed, the first special performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 123(b), the button image is switched to a button image 671b for the second performance. During this first special performance, the performance control board 200 does not permit operation of the performance button 15, and even if the player operates the performance button 15, the operation is not reflected in the performance. Also, in the example of FIG. 123(b), even if the performance button 15 is pressed during the first performance, a performance such as a dialogue preview is not executed, and the same performance that is merely an extension of the previous performance, such as the same character setting or the same scene setting, continues, and the display of the button image 671 continues.

In other words, even though the button image 671b is displayed, the effect button 15 cannot be operated, and the button image 671b remains displayed in the center of the screen. Hereinafter, this type of first special effect may be referred to as a freeze effect. The button image 671b is drawn in a manner that fits expressions such as freeze, solidify, freeze, or freeze so that it can be distinguished from the operation button image 671a during the first effect, and in addition, in this embodiment, an image of light that expresses a shine is added. This image of light may be a video.

The probability of occurrence of such a second effect is set lower than the probability of occurrence of the first effect. Furthermore, in this modified example, various correlations are set, such as the correlation of the expectation of a hit (e.g., the expectation of a jackpot) between the first and second effects, and the correlation between the partial configuration of the second effect (e.g., the duration of the freeze effect) and the expectation of a hit. Details will be described later, but to give an example, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher for the second effect than for the first effect. Also, the longer the duration of the freeze effect in the second effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Although not shown, in this modified example, a button image showing a transition state is displayed using a method such as blurring or watermarking while changing from the normal button image 671a shown in FIG. 122(a) to the button image 671b during the freeze effect shown in FIG. 123(b). The transition state here refers to a state in which the button image 671b appears to be frozen in an instant when the button is operated to start the freeze effect, and the degree of freezing gradually increases over a period of, for example, about 0.5 seconds. In this modified example, the display state of the button image 671b that appears to have reached a steady state after the freeze effect starts does not change before and after the operation of the effect button 15, but is not limited to this, and when the effect button 15 is operated, the display state may be such that the button image 671b continues to be displayed but part of it changes.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative patterns during the freeze effect can be set to display all or some of the decorative patterns as semi-transparent images that are changing, as in the first effect, or to display none of the decorative patterns as visible. As an example, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which only images such as people or design drawings that are part of the decorative patterns change along with the numbers and letters.

In addition, a display mode in which the background image, which is an image excluding decorative patterns, is in a still frozen state during the freeze effect is adopted. Furthermore, in addition to this, it is also possible to adopt a display mode of limited animation in which only a part of the background image changes. Examples of limited animation display modes include those in which only a part of the scenery, or only image components such as people, vehicles, etc. are changed. Furthermore, during the second period, the effect button 15 may be illuminated, or text may be displayed or audio guidance may be output to encourage the operation of the effect button 15.

When a freeze effect is being performed, the fact that a freeze effect is being performed may be notified by outputting a text or audio message to that effect, or by using effects such as light decorations and sound effects. Note that in this modified example, the button image 671b is different from the button image 671b in the normal case before the freeze effect is performed, but a common image may be used as the button image.

Such freeze effects are controlled based on time, and when a predetermined period (second period) described below has elapsed, the freeze is released as the effect button 15 becomes active. Here, the same button image 671a (see, for example, FIG. 124(a)) as in the first effect is used as the unfrozen effect. Furthermore, if the player operates the effect button 15 while this button image 671a is displayed, the button image 671a disappears from the screen as in the first effect, and the subsequent effect pattern is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 124(b)).

Figure 125 shows the various periods and states set in the second performance in comparison with the first performance. In Figure 125, (a) shows the first performance, and (b) shows the second performance. First, in the first performance, as described above, the operation prompting performance starts during the variable period (timing T1), and as shown by arrow A, if the performance button 15 is operated during the operation prompting performance (T2), the performance pattern after the button operation is then executed.

In contrast, in the second performance, a first period measured by a first period timer (not shown) begins with the start of the operation prompting performance (T1) (see (b1) in the figure). This first period is defined as the control execution period from when the button image 671a is displayed on the screen until it is removed. In this modified example, when the freeze performance starts (T3) and the button image 671b is displayed, a second period is defined during which the display continues while the performance button 15 does not accept operation. This second period is shorter than the first period (see (b2) in the figure) and is measured by a second period timer (not shown).

While the second period continues, the first special effect (see (b3) in the figure), which is a freeze effect, is performed, but when the freeze effect ends, the third period (see (b2) in the figure), which follows the second period, begins. This third period is timed by a third period timer (not shown), and during the third period, operation of the effect button 15 is enabled while the button image 671a is displayed. The effect performed during the third period is the second special effect (see (b3) in the figure), and the second special effect is executed following the first special effect.

In other words, the first special effect (freeze effect) occurs at any time between the start and end of the first period, and during the first period the operation prompting effect continues without changing the button image, or changes at the start of the second or third period. Then, even if a button operation is performed as shown by arrow B between the start of the second period (T3) and the start of the third period (T4), the operation button image 671b remains displayed, and if a button operation is performed as shown by arrow C after the start of the third period when the button image 671a is switched to, the button image 671a is erased and the effect after the button operation is executed.

The time from the start of the first period to the start of the second period (herein referred to as the "delay time") can take various values, for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc. By making this delay time relatively short, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes the player urgently operate the effect button 15, and conversely, by making the delay time relatively long, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes the player have ample time to operate the effect button 15.

In addition, when determining the start time of the second period, for example, a plurality of operation promotion presentation patterns Ma to Mz that comprehensively define a series of presentation patterns from the start to the end of the first period (end of the third period) may be set, and the promotion presentation may be performed by appropriately selecting and executing the operation promotion presentation patterns Ma to Mz. In addition, the operation promotion presentation patterns may be subdivided and set, such as operation promotion presentation patterns M1a to M1z related to the first period, operation promotion presentation patterns M2a to M2z related to the second period, and operation promotion presentation patterns M3a to M3z related to the third period, and these may be set, for example, as M1a+M2b+M3c, or M1e+M2a+M
3y, etc. Furthermore, the delay time of the start of the second period with respect to the first period may be determined by lottery.

In this modified example, when the first special effect changes to the second special effect, the normal button image 671a is displayed to notify the player that the freeze has been released as a freeze release effect, but a dedicated image for the second special effect (freeze release effect) may be used. Alternatively, the display mode of the second special effect may be the same as that of the first special effect, making it difficult to distinguish between the two effect modes. In this case, it is possible to realize a game that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start of the third period. Also, the start of the first period and the second period may be made to coincide, and the freeze effect may be executed from the start of the promotion effect. In this case, it is possible to realize a game that immediately becomes a freeze effect as an operation promotion effect.

Next, the performance pattern associated with the reach in the second performance will be described. In one example of the performance pattern in the second performance, after the freeze performance occurs (see FIG. 123(b)), the left and right decorative patterns stop in a reach combination (including a display mode of a temporary stop such as swinging), and the central decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the freeze performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 126(a), the button image 671a in the unfreezed state is displayed. At this time, the third period starts, the performance button 15 becomes active, and when the performance button 15 is operated, this operation is reflected in the display mode, and as shown in FIG. 126(b), the performance is switched to a performance in which the image of the button image 671a is erased. Then, in the performance display device 70, an image with contents corresponding to the story in the performance thereafter is displayed. Note that, although this is also true in cases where the reach does not occur, in many cases a video is progressing in the background of the button image 671a. For this reason, it is extremely unlikely that the background image when the button image 671a disappears will always be the same, and the background image is usually diverse and different from time to time. Then, by operating the effect button 15, a new situation different from the previous one will be developed by various effect patterns. One example of an effect pattern that represents a new situation is an effect pattern in which a character starts speaking no lines and then speaks lines to suggest or inform the player of the probability of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 124(b).

Figures 127 and 128 show another example of a presentation pattern accompanying a reach. In this presentation example, the freeze is not released just by the occurrence of a reach during a freeze presentation, and the freeze is released when the presentation pattern develops into a super reach. That is, as shown in Figure 127(a), a freeze presentation occurs along with a reach, and as shown in Figure 127(b), when a presentation (excitement presentation) is executed to stir up the player's sense of elation with a lightning image 676 when the presentation develops into a super reach, the freeze is released and the presentation button 15 becomes active. Then, when the presentation button 15 is operated, the promotion presentation ends and the image of the button image 671b disappears, and as shown in Figure 128(a), the button image 671a after the freeze is released is displayed, and as shown in Figure 128(b), an image of the content corresponding to the story of the presentation thereafter is displayed. In addition, in order to simplify the illustration, Figures 126(a) and 127(b) show a state with no background, in which no image is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern or button images 671a, 671b, but in many cases, an effect is executed behind the decorative pattern or button images 671a, 671b to display some kind of background image.

Furthermore, for the second presentation, a correlation is established between the first or second period and the degree of expectation of various hits, and it is set so that the longer the first or second period is, the higher the degree of expectation of various hits. That is, FIG. 129 shows a schematic diagram of an operation promotion presentation pattern table relating to the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 129(a) shows a variation pattern used when the hit/miss determination result is a miss. Also, FIG. 129(b) is used when the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot (15R jackpot), and FIG. 129(c) is used when the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot (2R jackpot) or a small hit.

In addition, in each figure, as operation prompting effects, prompting effects L1 and L2 indicate operation prompting effect patterns that take a longer time to execute compared to prompting effects M and S, and further, prompting effect L2 is an operation prompting effect pattern that takes a longer time to execute compared to prompting effect L1. In addition, as for prompting effects M and S, prompting effect M takes a longer time to execute than prompting effect S. Note that the types of lengths of operation prompting effects are not limited to those exemplified here, and may be more or less.

In FIG. 129(a), promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 0 to 10, and promotion effect M is associated with pattern lottery values 11 to 40. Promotion effect S is associated with pattern lottery values 41 to 255. In FIG. 129(b), promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 0 to 10, promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 11 to 230, promotion effect M is associated with pattern lottery values 231 to 250, and promotion effect S is associated with pattern lottery values 251 to 255. Furthermore, in FIG. 12(c), promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 0 to 160, and promotion effect M is associated with pattern lottery values 161 to 255.

Although the relationship between the entire operation prompting effect and the reliability of each type of hit has been explained here, the relationship between the freeze effect (first special effect) or the freeze release effect (second special effect) and the expected hit rates of each type may be determined, and for example, the longer (or shorter) the freeze effect or the freeze release effect, the higher the expected hit rate of each type may be set. Also, for the second effect, the longer the time from the end of the display of button image 671a to the start of the effective operation period for button image 671b, the higher the expected hit rate may be. It is also possible to allocate pattern selection values so that a relationship is set in which the reliability of each type of hit increases if the freeze effect starts relatively soon after the start of the operation prompting effect.

Furthermore, the operation promotion effect may be associated with a continuous preview effect or a pre-reading effect, which is a preview effect pattern that corresponds to multiple start winnings and is performed across multiple pattern change displays. For example, when the reserved lottery results include a lottery result that is a 15R jackpot (target activation reserved ball), the promotion effect may be started during the change display (change display before the target) before the change display (target change display) that corresponds to the lottery result, and then the freeze effect may be continuously executed across multiple pattern change displays, and the freeze release effect may be started when or during the change display (target change display) that is a 15R jackpot begins. By doing this, it is possible to further diversify the operation promotion effect. In this case, the first period timer and the second period timer will execute timing across multiple change displays.

In addition, in this modified example, as described above, as the performance patterns of the predetermined button performance, there are performance pattern A (performance pattern A in which the button image 671a is erased by operating the performance button 15 while the normal button image 671a is displayed, and the special button image 671b is not displayed) and performance pattern B (performance pattern B in which the button image 671a is erased by operating the performance button 15 while the normal button image 671a is displayed, and the special button image 671b is displayed). Here, during the execution of the variable display before the target in which the specific pre-reading performance is executed, the performance pattern B is not executed, but the performance pattern A is executed. In contrast, during the execution of the variable display of the target, the performance pattern B can be executed, and the performance pattern A can also be executed. In other words, the performance pattern B is configured to be executed more easily during the execution of the variable display of the target, which is executed by consuming the operation reserved ball of the target, than during the execution of the variable display before the target, which is executed by consuming the operation reserved ball before the target. It should be noted that the performance pattern B may be configured to be executed with a relatively low probability even during the execution of the variable display before the target. In addition, it is preferable that, during execution of the variable display of the target, the probability of executing the performance pattern B is higher than the probability of executing the performance pattern A. The special button image 671b may be a red button image as described above, and the normal button image 671a may be a blue button image as described above.

Also, as a modified example of this embodiment, the button vibration effect may be more easily executed during the execution of the variable display when the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display than when the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display. Also, when the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display, the second button vibration effect (jackpot confirmation effect) is not executed in the variable display, but when the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display, the second button vibration effect (jackpot confirmation effect) can be executed during the execution of the variable display. Alternatively, the second button vibration effect (jackpot confirmation effect) may be more easily executed during the execution of the variable display when the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display than when the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display.

The main effects achieved in the fifth embodiment (including the modified examples) can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to visual effects such as image effects and lamp effects, the probability of winning or losing can be indicated by a tactile effect (button vibration effect) caused by the vibration of the effect button, and as a result of the winning or losing result (whether the fluctuation display is a jackpot fluctuation or a loss fluctuation), the tactile effect can be executed at various times during the fluctuation display, thereby realizing a game presentation that the player will not tire of, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to check in advance whether the tactile effect (button vibration effect), which is considered to be an important effect for the player because it suggests or notifies that the variable display has high expectations (super hot), is operating normally, and by preventing the overlapping execution of the checking action and the tactile effect of the effect, it is possible to clearly separate the checking action and the effect action and realize appropriate performance progression, which results in increased interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fifth embodiment, when a situation arises in which a button effect is to be executed while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed after the power is restored, the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized, but the button effect can be executed in a manner that does not impede the progress of this initialization operation (a simple manner that does not suggest or tease the appearance of a button image). This makes it possible to ensure that the presentation does not unnecessarily heighten the player's expectations, and prevents the processing of the game progress immediately after the power is restored from becoming complicated, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, when a situation arises in which a button effect is to be executed while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed after the power is restored after a power outage, the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized, but the button effect can be executed in a manner that does not impede the progress of this initialization operation (a simple manner in which an operation result effect is not generated if a button operation is not performed). This makes it possible to progress the effect without unnecessarily raising the player's expectations, and to simplify the processing of the effect progress when no button operation is performed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to the fifth embodiment, even if the actual shooting position within the game area changes as a result of a change in the game state, by suppressing the notification regarding the actual shooting position from becoming an excessive notification to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful or uncomfortable, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the fifth embodiment, by making it possible to execute a reserve change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a reserve change during any change display, regardless of the length of time that the pattern change display lasts, it is possible to further increase the player's interest and attention in reserve changes, and also to eliminate the monotony of the effects related to reserve changes, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, auxiliary displays (such as small symbols and reserved numbers) whose role is to ensure display continue to be displayed regardless of the game situation, while main displays (such as decorative symbols and reserved images) whose role is to provide a presentation effect are changed over time (including being hidden) according to the game situation, making it possible to narrow down to some extent the presentation content that the player should pay attention to depending on the game situation, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, by differentiating the notification mode of the effect button during the initialization operation from the notification mode of the effect button during the vibration operation, the player can be notified of the correct progress of the game (preventing the player from playing the game with a mistaken understanding), and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, even if pending information is stored at the start of the game state after a transition in the game state, the pre-reading performance targeting this pending information is not executed by configuring the configuration so that the processing burden of the performance control can be reduced, and a situation in which the performance loses its sharpness due to the occurrence of a pre-reading performance immediately after the transition in the game state can be prevented, thereby making the game more entertaining.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed based on the pending information of a target, the button effect is made easier to execute during the execution of the target change display, which is performed as the pending information of the target is consumed, than during the execution of the change display before the target when this look-ahead effect is executed. This makes it possible to enhance the effect over multiple change displays from the change display before the target to the change display of the target, and to give the effect more variety, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, when the game state is changed and the actual shooting position in the game area is switched, and a notification display regarding the actual shooting position is displayed to the player, even if the notification display of the actual shooting position and the display of the decorative pattern are overlapped, the notification display of the actual shooting position and the display of the small pattern, the display of the reserved image, etc., and the display of the reserved number are configured not to be overlapped. Therefore, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern is obstructed by the notification display of the actual shooting position, the visibility of the display of the small pattern, the reserved image, etc., and the reserved number is ensured, so the player can properly recognize the current game status (changing display, stopped display, number of active reserved balls, etc.), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Next, a modified version of the first to fifth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modified version basically has the same configuration as the gaming machines according to the first to fifth embodiments, and in the following, the same reference numerals will be used to designate the same components, and the description will be omitted. The differences will be mainly described.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, a normal probability change game machine is used that judges whether or not a probability change will occur based on the stopping pattern of the special pattern (the jackpot pattern) when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a V probability change game machine may be used that judges whether or not a probability change will occur based on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is a jackpot. Also, as a modified example of the game machine of the above embodiment, a game machine equipped with a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive times of the probability change game state or the potential probability game state that is given when the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a jackpot, up to a preset limit number (upper limit number), may be used. In the first embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variation game machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs, but the probability variation function of the special symbol may be configured as a probability variation game machine (a number-limited probability variation machine, ST machine) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol continues to operate for a specified ST number of times (for example, 100 times). Conversely, in the fourth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variation game machine (a number-limited probability variation machine, ST machine) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol continues to operate for a specified ST number of times, but the probability variation function of the special symbol may be configured as a probability variation game machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a machine type having only one large prize opening in the game area is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a machine type having multiple large prize openings in the game area may be applied. In addition, when adopting a machine type having multiple large prize openings, the V-variable game machine may have two or more large prize openings, that is, a first large prize opening having a specific area (probability variation function activation area, V area) that is a trigger for the activation of the probability variation function of the special pattern, and a second large prize opening having no specific area (probability variation function activation area, V area). As an example of the board arrangement, the first large prize opening and the second large prize opening may be arranged approximately vertically or horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the board area where the first large prize opening is arranged and the board area where the second large prize opening is arranged may be different areas. In this case, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) paid out when the game ball enters the first large prize opening and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) paid out when the game ball enters the second large prize opening may be the same or different. Also, of the two large prize openings, the first large prize opening (or the second large prize opening) may be configured as a large prize opening for small prize games, and the second large prize opening (or the first large prize opening) may be configured as a large prize opening for big prize games. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) of the large prize opening for small prize games may be 10, and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) of the large prize opening for big prize games may be 15, etc.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, among the multiple game states, the latent probability change game state is defined as a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol and the change time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chute support function is not activated, but this is not limited to this, and the latent probability change game state may be defined as a game state in which only the probability change function of the special symbol is activated and the change time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function are not activated. In addition, the change time shortening function of the special symbol may be functionally divided into a change time shortening function of the first special symbol and a change time shortening function of the second special symbol, and the latent probability change game state may be defined as a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol and the change time shortening function of the second special symbol are activated and the electric chute support function is not activated. In addition, the electric chute support function may be one that operates in synchronization with the change time shortening function of the special symbol (change time shortening function of the second special symbol) or one that operates independently of the change time shortening function of the special symbol (change time shortening function of the second special symbol).

Next, in order to make it easier to understand the technical significance of the above embodiment and modified examples, we will outline the issues associated with the above embodiment and modified examples.

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is known that when a gaming ball enters a large prize opening during a special game, a large prize opening winning performance (e.g., displaying the number of winning balls and outputting sound effects) is executed (see, for example, JP 2013-123602 A).

However, since there are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, further improvements to the entertainment value of the game are required to differentiate the new machine from the conventional models.

Also, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known machines that notify the player during the execution of a special game of the number of round games that have been executed in the currently executed special game, and which round the currently executed round game is (see, for example, JP 2012-125303 A).

However, since there are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, further improvements to the entertainment value of the game are required to differentiate the new machine from the conventional models.

Also, among conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known ones equipped with a performance display device that displays game performance information obtained by measuring the number of game balls discharged from the game area and the number of prize balls awarded to the player (see, for example, JP 2018-186936 A).

However, there are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, and there is room for further improvement in order to achieve an appropriate evaluation of game performance.

Also, among conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known ones that are equipped with a function (a so-called setting function) that sets the probability of winning the jackpot as a result of the win/loss judgment (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 2019-205605).

However, there are already many conventional pachinko gaming machines that use this type of configuration, and there is room for further improvement in terms of reducing the processing load on these gaming machines.

Therefore, in order to achieve further improvements, the pachinko gaming machines according to the above embodiments and modifications adopt the above configurations and achieve the above effects.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment and modifications, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the scope of the present invention also includes combinations of the components described in the above-mentioned embodiment and modifications, or deletions or conversions of some of the components described in the above-mentioned embodiment and modifications using well-known or commonly used techniques.

PM Pachinko gaming machine PA Play area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 10 Frame lamp 15 Performance button 20 Game board 27 Main control display device 28 Sub-control display device 51 First start opening 52 Second start opening 53 Operation gate 54 Large prize opening 64 General prize opening 70 Performance display device 71 First special symbol display device 72 Second special symbol display device 77 Round indicator light 100 Main control board 200 Performance control board 220 Performance supervision means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board 651 First movable role 652 Second movable role 700 Decorative symbol display area 710 Reserve image display area 720 Changing image display area 730 Small symbol display area 740 Reserve number display area 810 Setting key switch 820 RAM clear switch

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting hole provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A winning/losing determination means for executing a winning/losing determination in response to the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
A special symbol display device that displays a special symbol indicating the result of the winning or losing judgment in a variable and stationary manner;
A big prize winning hole that is provided in the game area and is opened depending on the result of the winning/ losing determination so that the game ball can enter;
a special game execution means for executing a special game involving the opening of the big prize winning port when the result of the win /loss determination is a big win;
A performance display device on which a performance display is displayed,
having an operation means operable by a player,
The performance display device can display and stop decorative patterns that show the result of the winning / losing judgment in a performance manner,
The operating means is configured to be capable of executing an operating means operation in which the operating means operates,
The operation of the operation means is executed to suggest or inform that the expectation of execution of the special game is relatively high,
When the operation of the operation means is executed, a specific performance associated with the execution of the operation of the operation means is executed,
In one variable display of the special symbols, a provisional combination of the decorative symbols can be displayed before the special symbols are fixed and stopped,
The provisional combination of the decorative patterns includes at least a first combination and a second combination,
In the variable display of the special symbols, even if the first combination or the second combination is displayed as a provisional combination of the decorative symbols, a first specific performance accompanied by the operation of the operating means can be executed at a timing before the first combination or the second combination is displayed as a provisional combination of the decorative symbols,
In the variable display of the special symbols, when the first combination is displayed as a provisional combination of the decorative symbols, a second specific performance involving operation of the operating means can be executed at a timing before the first combination is displayed as the provisional combination of the decorative symbols and at a timing after the execution timing of the first specific performance, and when the second combination is displayed as the provisional combination of the decorative symbols, the second specific performance is not executed at a timing before the second combination is displayed as the provisional combination of the decorative symbols and at a timing after the execution timing of the first specific performance,
In the case where the second combination is displayed as a provisional combination of the decorative patterns in the variable display of the special patterns, and even if the second specific performance is not executed, a third specific performance involving an operation of the operating means can be executed at a timing after the second combination is displayed as a provisional combination of the decorative patterns,
A game machine includes a valid operation period during which a player operation is valid, and includes at least a first promotion effect and a second promotion effect as promotion effects for encouraging the player operation;
a first presentation pattern for switching from the first promotion presentation to a predetermined presentation when the player performs an operation during the operation valid period when the first promotion presentation is displayed;
a second presentation pattern in which, when the second promotion presentation is displayed and the player performs an operation during the operation valid period, the second promotion presentation is switched to the predetermined presentation;
In the case of transitioning to a developing performance after the reaching is established, if there is a player operation during the effective operation period when the first promotion performance is displayed before the reaching is established, the display of the first promotion performance can be erased, and the second promotion performance can be displayed thereafter, and the effective operation period when the second promotion performance is displayed during the developing performance can be started.
The expectation of transition to the special game is relatively higher when the period from the end of the display of the first prompting effect to the start of the effective operation period when the second prompting effect is displayed is longer than when the period is shorter,
A presentation pattern in which the first prompting effect is displayed and the second prompting effect is displayed is configured to make it easier to execute the operation of the operating means than a presentation pattern in which the first prompting effect is displayed and the second prompting effect is not displayed ,
The display mode of the first promotion effect and the display mode of the second promotion effect are configured to be different from each other,
A special effect that leads to the display of the promotion effect can be executed at a timing prior to the timing of executing the display of the promotion effect,
The pachinko game machine is configured so that a specific special effect is more likely to be executed when the second promotion effect is displayed than when the first promotion effect is displayed.

Images